Professional Documents
Culture Documents
BUILDING WORKS
AND
OTHER INSTALLATIONS
(2013 EDITION)
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 2
PILING
2-1
SECTION 3
EXCAVATION
3-1
SECTION 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
4-1
SECTION 5
METAL FORMWORK
5-1
SECTION 6
SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION
6-1
SECTION 7
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
7-1
SECTION 8
HOUSEHOLD SHELTER
8-1
SECTION 9
9-1
SECTION 10
10-1
SECTION 11
NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
11-1
SECTION 12
12-1
SECTION 13
ROOFING
13-1
SECTION 14
14-1
SECTION 15
15-1
SECTION 16
IRONMONGERY
16-1
SECTION 17
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
17-1
SECTION 18
METALWORK
18-1
SECTION 19
FLOOR FINISHES
19-1
SECTION 20
WALL FINISHES
20-1
SECTION 21
21-1
SECTION 22
GLAZING
22-1
SECTION 23
23-1
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
HDB, being a ISO 14001 certified organisation, is committed to be the leader in environment management. The details of HDB's
environmental policy can be found in the Corporate Philosophy at HDB Website http://www.hdb.gov.sg
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 24
24-1
SECTION 25
25-1
SECTION 26
26-1
SECTION 27
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
27-1
SECTION 28
28-1
SECTION 29
EATING HOUSE
29-1
SECTION 30
MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)
30-1
SECTION 31
31-1
SECTION 32
RESERVED
32-1
SECTION 33
RESERVED
32-1
SECTION 34
RESERVED
32-1
SECTION 35
RESERVED
32-1
SECTION 36
36-1
SECTION 37
SANITARY INSTALLATION
37-1
SECTION 38
WATER INSTALLATION
38-1
SECTION 39
39-1
SECTION 40
40-1
SECTION 41
41-1
SECTION 42
42-1
SECTION 43
43-1
SECTION 44
44-1
SECTION 45
45-1
SECTION 46
RESERVED
46-1
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 47
RESERVED
46-1
SECTION 48
RESERVED
46-1
SECTION 49
49-1
SECTION 50
50-1
SECTION 51
51-1
SECTION 52
52-1
SECTION 53
53-1
SECTION 54
LUMINARIES
54-1
SECTION 55
EARTHING SYSTEM
55-1
SECTION 56
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
56-1
SECTION 57
PUBLIC LIGHTING
57-1
SECTION 58
58-1
SECTION 59
59-1
SECTION 60
60-1
SECTION 61
61-1
SECTION 62
TELEPHONE CABLING
62-1
SECTION 63
63-1
SECTION 64
VENTILATION SYSTEM
64-1
SECTION 65
65-1
SECTION 66
66-1
SECTION 67
RESERVED
67-1
SECTION 68
RESERVED
68-1
SECTION 69
RESERVED
69-1
SECTION 70
LISTS OF APPENDICES
70-1
The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration
in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
GENERAL
Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations
Reserved
Payment Of Employer's Bills Expenses, Etc
Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS
Diversion of Services
Stamp Duties
TOL Fee For Land Outside Contract Boundary
Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion
Provisional Sum Items
Prime Cost Sums
Overclaim Leading To Overpayment
Carriage By Sea
Existing Ground / Road Levels
Raising Or Lowering Of Existing Sewer Manholes And Other Services Manholes
Work Method And Trade Demonstration
Reserved
Site Layout Plan
Site Offices And Canteens
Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus Devices, Etc
Reserved
Provision Of Transport
Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities
Protective Roof For Temporary Site Structures
Construction Site Main Signboard and Hoarding Signage
Site Management
Employment of Contractor's Site Personnel
Contractor's Work In Connection With Subsidiary Contracts
Cables/Services Detection
Reserved
Damage To Public/Private Property
General Housekeeping
Reserved
Time Required For Contractor For Preparation Of Handing Over Inspection
Restriction On Use Of Project Information For Publicity, Etc
Provision Of Respiratory Masks
Reserved
Reserved
Research Work
Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms
And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
Handing Over Of Completed Works And Certification Of Substantial Completion
Reserved
Management Of Defects Rectification
Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic
Works Within Railway Protection Zone And Railway Safety Zone
Recovery Of Legal Costs For Court Proceedings
Novation, Assignment And Direct Submission Of Warranties And Agreements
Completion Of Site Works
Erection Of Temporary Buildings
Goods And Services Tax
Works And Materials Warranty
Cost Of Water And Electricity
1-1
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-10
1-13
1-13
1-13
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-24
1-24
1-24
1-24
1-25
1-25
1-25
1-25
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-28
1-29
1-29
1-31
1-31
1-31
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-33
1-33
1-33
The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration
in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
GENERAL (CONT'D)
Site Control And Security
Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather
Shortfall In Floor Area
Registered Trade Subcontractors And M&E Subcontractors
Insurance Policies
Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site
Provision Of Building Service Centre
Reserved
Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures
Computer Hardware And Software
Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claims And Request For Variation Works
Assignment Of Copyright Of Photographs, Etc
Provision Of Keys Envelopes During Handover
Scheduling Of PE Submission
Earth Control Measures
Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites
Material Samples Display Room
Audit of M & E Systems
Environmental Management
1-34
1-35
1-36
1-36
1-37
1-39
1-40
1-40
1-41
1-41
1-45
1-47
1-47
1-48
1-49
1-51
1-58
1-58
1-59
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13
1.2.14
MATERIALS
Metric Components
Materials And Workmanship
Credit Terms And Conditions For Employer's Materials
Reserved
Approval Of Samples And Trade Names
Sample Unit And Quality Standards
PSB Quality Certificate
Storage Facility For Cement
Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site
Ready-Mixed Concrete From Approved Suppliers
Water
Supply Of Concreting Materials
Aggregates For Non-Concreting Works
Provision Of Spare Tiles
1-60
1-60
1-60
1-60
1-61
1-62
1-65
1-65
1-65
1-65
1-65
1-66
1-67
1-68
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
LABOUR
Labour Laws
Keeping Records Of Workmen
Employment Of Illegal Immigrants (Prohibition)
Reserved
Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements
Employment Of Skilled Tilers
1-69
1-69
1-69
1-69
1-69
1-70
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Provision Of Construction Equipment
Technical Specification
Recovery For Non-Provision
Maintenance
Approved Construction Equipment
Provision And Deployment Of Equipment To Improve Site Productivity
1-70
1-70
1-72
1-73
1-75
1-76
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
SAFETY
Site Safety Measures
Safety Infringement
Reporting Of Accidents And Dangerous Occurrence
1-77
1-87
1-87
The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration
in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
1.6
1-88
1.7
1-88
1.8
1-90
1.9
The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration
in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Bldg Spec
Page 1-1
SECTION 1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1
GENERAL
1.1.1
"as approved"
"as directed"
"or other
approved"
"as required" or
"as shown" or
"as indicated" or
"as specified"
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Bldg Spec
Page 1-2
1.1.1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
PLS
PowerGrid or Grid
PSB
PTL
PUB
PVC or pvc
RC or rc
RCCB
rms
SAC
SCV
SINGLAS
SMRT
SPSL
SS
SWA
SWG
SingTel
TIA
UHF
UL
m
uPVC or UPVC
V
V
VHF
v/v
W
w/w
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
==
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
kilogram
kilonewton
kilopascal
kilovolt
kilowatt
Kilowatt hour
Licensed Electrical Worker
Miniature Circuit Breaker
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
Market Support Services Licensee
Megawatt
metre
maximum
minimum
millilitre
millimetre
millivolt
square metre
square millimetre
cubic metre
cubic millimetre
Megahertz
Ministry of Manpower
Mass Rapid Transit
mild steel
newton
National Environment Agency
number
pascal
Osterreichisches Normangsinstitut (Austrian Standard)
Public Basic Telecommunications Service Operators
Professional Engineer registered under the Professional Engineers Board,
Singapore
Product Listing Scheme
PowerGrid Ltd
TUV SUD PSB Pte Ltd
Public Telecommunication Licensees
Public Utilities Board
Polyvinylchloride
Reinforced Concrete
Residual Current Circuit Breaker
root mean square
Singapore Accreditation Council
StarHub Cable Vision Pte Ltd
Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
Singapore MRT Ltd
SP Services Ltd
Singapore Standard
Steel wire armoured
Standard Wire Gauge (British)
Singapore Telecommunications Ltd
Telecommunications Industry Association
Ultra High Frequency
Underwriters Laboratories Inc
micrometre
Unplasticised Polyvinylchloride
microvolt
Volt
Very High Frequency
measured by volume
watt
measured by weight
Bldg Spec
Page 1-3
1.1.1
or <
or >
<
>
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Words importing the singular shall also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
The clause or subclause headings in the Specifications shall not be deemed to be part thereof or be
taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
All clauses including all subclauses under them in the Specifications shall be deemed to be directed at
the Contractor unless expressly specified otherwise to the contrary and the Contractor shall perform
and/or comply with such instructions, directions, requirements and obligations specified in the
Specifications and required under the Contract.
All Acts of Parliament, statutes, regulations, bye-laws, orders, local and foreign standards and codes
of practice specified shall be deemed to refer to the latest and shall be deemed to include any
amendments, and/or modifications and/or additions and/or re-enactments thereto.
1.1.2
Reserved
1.1.3
1.1.4
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-4
1.1.5
Diversion of Services
Where in the case the SO Rep is of the opinion that it becomes essential to divert permanently any
sewer, drain, pipe, cable, or other services, the cost for the diversion shall be borne by the Employer.
Provided always that such diversion does not form part of the Works.
1.1.6
Stamp Duties
The Contractor shall have all documents required by or arising out of or in connection with this
Contract properly stamped to comply with the Stamp Duties Act. The cost and expense arising out of
this obligation, including all stamp duties required, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be
deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.
1.1.7
1.1.8
15.00
20.00
15.00
20.00
20.00
25.00
35.00
40.00
1,800.00
40.00
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-5
1.1.8
Partition Wall/Column
For partition wall/column, to measure up to the centre line of partition wall (party wall)
which separates 2 adjoining units.
(b)
1.1.9
1.1.10
1.1.11
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-6
1.1.12
Carriage By Sea
The Contractor shall ensure that the carriage by sea of all goods, materials, Plant and equipment
imported for the purposes of this Contract shall be on vessels owned and operated by shipping lines
which are approved lines at the time the contract of carriage is entered into. Other ships may be used
only if no approved line :
(a)
can deliver the goods, materials, Plant and equipment in time to meet the delivery dates
specified in the Contract; or
(b)
The Bills of Lading for the goods, materials or Plant and equipment used by an approved line(s) shall
be sufficient evidence of their carriage by an approved line(s) in compliance with this subclause.
Where the carrier is not an approved line, the Contractor shall satisfy the SO Rep that the conditions
herein stated have been satisfied. The SO Rep may require and the Contractor shall forthwith furnish
to the SO Rep a letter from at least one approved line at the time the contract of carriage with the
carrier is entered into stating that in respect of the shipment in issue they are either unable to quote or
to provide the service required.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this subclause, the Employer shall not be responsible for any
act or default of the carrier or for any loss or damage sustained by the Contractor on account of him
having to comply with this subclause.
The list of current approved lines can be obtained from the Procurement Office, Development And
Procurement Department, HDB, Basement 1, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480.
1.1.13
1.1.14
1.1.15
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-7
1.1.15
(Contd)
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the work methods proposed by the Contractor will not
ensure good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep may require the Contractor to make at his own
cost and expense such modifications to the original work methods as the SO Rep may consider
necessary or appropriate.
The Contractor shall employ only skilled workers who are capable of executing the Works in
accordance with the work methods approved by the SO Rep. When there is a change in
subcontractors, the SO Rep may instruct the Contractor to re-conduct the relevant trade
demonstration if deem necessary.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractors work methods, revised work methods or any details and
information provided under this subclause shall not in any way relieve the Contractors liabilities or
obligations under the Contract.
1.1.16
Reserved
1.1.17
1.1.18
1.1.18.1
Within 21 days from the date of taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall erect site offices
and a site canteen complying with the requirements of the MEWR and shall remove them on
Substantial Completion of the Works or at a time approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's Standard
Drawings may be used as a guide in designing the site offices and canteen. Submit proposals for the
design (inclusive of PE calculations), configuration and layout for the approval of the SO Rep taking
full consideration the site constraints and conditions. Locating the site offices and canteen at the first
storey void areas shall only be considered under special circumstances and subject to the approval of
the SO Rep. Should approval be given to set up the site offices and canteen at the first storey void
areas, ensure and make all provisions necessary to protect the structures and finishes. When such
void areas are required by the Employer for other purposes, remove and re-erect the site offices and
canteen at alternative locations all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. No claim whatsoever
shall be entertained in such event.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-8
1.1.18
1.1.18.2
Site Offices
(Contd)
The following rooms shall have at least the minimum stipulated areas and complete with basic
facilities, fittings and furniture and made available at all times for use by the SO Rep and the
Employer's officers :
Facilities, Furnitures and
Fittings
S/N
1.
2.
SO Rep
Room
24 m
No. of Items
Resident
Meeting
Technical Officer
Room
Room
Computer
Room
24 m2
34 m2
8 m2
Maximum 2
c)
d)
e)
f)
15
g)
Maximum 2
Maximum 3
Key cabinet
Telephone Installation
a) Separate telephone line
b) Telephone set
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-9
1.1.18
1.1.18.2
Site Offices
(Contd)
Facilities, Furnitures and
Fittings
S/N
10
(Contd)
SO Rep
Room
No. of Items
Resident
Meeting
Technical Officer
Room
Room
Computer
Room
Electrical Installation,
Connections and Accessories
(The illumination level in the
meeting room and the SO Rep
room shall be set at 300 to 400
lux)
a) 40W Fluorescent lighting
The doors leading to the SO Rep room, the Resident Technical Officer room and the meeting room
shall be provided with locksets and all the keys to the locksets shall be given to the SO Rep.
1.1.18.3
Site Canteen
The structure of the site canteen shall be a steel column-roof truss design, anchored to a reinforced
concrete base and footings. All structural steelwork shall comply with the requirements specified in
Section 17 Structural Steelwork including all clause and subclause under it. The Contractor shall
further submit detailed structural plans and design calculations, certified by his PE to the SO Rep not
later than three months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion or two weeks before
the actual commencement of the Works, whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall bear all
consequences for late submission. The Contractor shall erect the site canteen in strict compliance
with his Professional Engineer's plans and calculations. The Works shall be supervised by the
Contractor's PE. His PE is also to ensure that the site canteen is designed in compliance with the
Technical Guidelines for the Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Sites, including any
amendment thereto, issued by FSSD; and the Building Control (Temporary Buildings) Regulations
(2000 edition) including any latest requirements by BCD, BCA. Not later than two weeks after the
completion of the Works, the Contractor's PE shall submit a Certificate of Supervision, stating that he
has carried out such supervision work and is fully satisfied that the Works have been constructed in
accordance with his structural plans and design calculations as approved by the SO Rep.
The site canteen is to be enclosed with half-height panels. The panels are to be made of fire-rated
colour-bond galvanized steel sheet complete with 42mm thick rockwool panel (sandwich concept).
Solid block wall are to be installed only at the preparation and dapur areas where wall tiles are
provided. All solid block wall facing the external/exposed shall be plastered and painted with at least 3
coats of algae-resistant emulsion paint. No timber or other combustible material shall be used for the
site canteen.
Notwithstanding the Employers Standard Drawings being adopted as a guide, the site canteen shall
be provided with the following facilities and amenities:
S/No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Refreshment
Area
1
4
4
No. of Items
Preparation
Area
1
1
2
Dapur
Area
2
Bldg Spec
Page 1-10
1.1.18
1.1.18.3
Site Canteen
(Contd)
(Contd)
All canteen counter tops, dining tables and benches are to be wrapped with linoleum or other
approved waterproof material. The concrete base shall also be 100mm above the surrounding level to
keep the floor area dry. Adequate scupper drains graded to discharge into public sewer / septic tank
are to be provided for washing purposes. Discharge into the sites perimeter cut-off drains shall not be
allowed. All roof purlins and runners are to be concealed with false ceiling made of softboard or other
approved materials for aesthetic purposes.
The site canteen is to be sited at a well-ventilated location, away from vehicular accesses and refuse
collection areas for hygiene purposes. The location and layout of the site canteen shall be subjected
to approval of the SO Rep.
1.1.18.4
The Contractor shall allow for the maintenance of the site offices and canteen and all the facilities,
furniture and fittings therein in a clean, habitable and good working condition to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep. The Contractor shall pay all charges for the provision and use of the telephone and electricity
at the site offices and canteen.
1.1.18.5
Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned facilities, furniture and fittings after
the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and provide
the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and provision plus
charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor
or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.1.19
Facsimile Machine
The Contractor shall provide 1 number of plain paper (A4 size) facsimile machine at the site
office. Facsimile machine of the thermal paper type shall not be acceptable. Such machine
shall be kept in the Resident Technical Officer room throughout the Time for Completion and
any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The facsimile
machine shall be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or Employer's officers only. The
Contractor should provide another facsimile machine for their own use.
The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the
continuous proper, good and efficient working conditions and maintenance of such facsimile
machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the vendor to the SO Rep for checking
when requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover the whole duration of the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
(B)
(C)
Torch Lights
The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of torch lights on the Site at all times for use by
the SO Rep, Resident Technical Officer and/or representatives from other Authorities. These
torch lights shall be in good working condition and sufficiently bright enough for use.
(D)
Metal Detector
The Contractor shall provide a battery-operated portable metal detector for the purpose of
detecting metal reinforcement embedded in cement mortar joints of brickwalls. The detector
must have either a light or buzzer indicator to indicate the presence of metal.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-11
1.1.19
Moisture Meter
The Contractor shall provide a portable, battery operated, digital LCD display moisture meter
with integral electrode pins for measuring moisture content of timber doors and frames
delivered to the Site. The moisture meter shall be capable of measuring actual moisture
content of wood in the range from 8% to 44% (minimum) with a 1% indicating tolerance at 0 to
40 degrees Celsius ambient temperature. The meter shall also possess a built-in device for
performing simple calibration checks.
(F)
Safety Helmets
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Safety Boots
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
at least 24 cm in height
black/brown colour with steel toe cap
long-wearing
of great flexibility and resilience
slip proof, resistant to oil, acid and heat
nail proof
of excellent insulation
comfortable and light
comply with SS105:1987
The Contractor shall immediately replace those safety helmets and safety boots which the
SO Rep considers to be not in good working condition.
(G)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Description
Quantity (Maximum)
1.
2.
Correction Fluid
3.
Eraser (Pencil)
4.
Glue Tube
5.
a)
b)
6.
Manila File
25 no.
5 each.
5 each.
Bldg Spec
Page 1-12
1.1.19
Description
Quantity (Maximum)
Paper Clip :
a) Medium Size
b) Large Size
a)
b)
8.
Pen Knife
2 no.
9.
Pencil (2B)
10.
Perforator
2 no.
11.
Pocket Notebook
12.
13.
Scissor
2 no.
14.
15.
16.
Staples (B3)
17.
1 no.
18.
Colour Pencils
1 set
19.
1 set
20.
Scale Ruler
1 no.
21.
22.
23.
Ear Plugs
24.
Rubber Stamp
25.
26.
27.
28.
Laser Pointer
29.
2 boxes.
2 boxes.
Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned stationery after the
commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and
provide the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and
provision plus charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming
due to the Contractor or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-13
1.1.19
The photocopying machine shall be kept in the Resident Technical Officer room throughout the
Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract. The photo copying machine shall be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or
Employers officers only. The Contractor should provide another photo copying machine for
their own use.
The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the
maintenance of such photocopying machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the
vendor to the SO Rep for checking when requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover
the whole duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages
are imposed under the Contract.
1.1.20
Reserved
1.1.21
Provision Of Transport
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide suitable transport throughout the Time for
Completion and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, for the
SO Rep and other Employer's officers, from the nearest bus stop or MRT station or site or public
carpark near to the Site, to the Site, including the return journey, for the discharge of their official
duties. Such pick up point shall be decided by the SO Rep. The vehicle shall be driven by the
Contractor's own personnel.
1.1.22
1.1.22.1
1.1.22.2
Reserved
1.1.22.3
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
For re-development sites, the Contractor is strongly encouraged to use M/s PowerGrid Ltds
power supply to provide temporary electricity supply during the construction stage. For new
town development sites, all electrical generator sets shall be licensed with valid EMA licence. A
minimum capacity of 75kVA generator shall be used at each block. However when the
generator is used for the passenger cum material hoist and other general purposes, the
minimum capacity of the generator for each block shall be upgraded to 100 kVA.
Bldg Spec
Page 1-14
1.1.22
1.1.22.3
The electrical switch board which holds the ELCB shall be housed in a switch box located at
least 1.5 m from the floor level.
(c)
Socket-outlet assembly complete with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and residual current
operated circuit breakers (RCCBs) is to be provided at each storey of the building block. The
precast refuse chute shall serve as a temporary service riser. The installation shall last the
entire Time for Completion unless authorized to be removed earlier by the SO Rep or when
permanent electricity supply is secured (whichever is earlier). The temporary incoming supply
cable located within the precast refuse chute shall be supported with insulated lock bands.
Upon termination of the temporary electricity supply, all cables and lock bands installed in the
precast refuse chute shall be removed and the surface of the precast refuse chute shall be
made good to a smooth finish.
(d)
All sheaths of cables, sockets outlets and plugs are in good working condition.
(e)
All cables are properly bound and do not cause obstruction to passageways, walkways and
stairs.
(f)
All cables are properly supported with L-shaped galvanised steel brackets or insulated lock
bands and placed at a suitable height, away from any source which cause mechanical
damage.
(g)
All plugs, socket-outlets, socket-outlet assembly (SOA), cable couplers and plug adaptors are
to be of the standard industrial type and of minimum classification of latest edition CP 88.
(h)
The supply to provide artificial lighting shall be taken from the socket-outlet assembly located at
each storey. 4 feet fluorescent lighting enclosed in suitable mechanical enclosure to a minimum
classification of IP 44 shall be used to provide lighting or to achieve a minimum lighting level of
400 lux.
(i)
The Contractor shall provide sufficient temporary lighting, according to the instruction of the SO
Rep, for their workers/sub-contractors to carry out in-process construction works such as
internal plastering/skimming, wall and floor tiling, application of water-proofing membrane etc.,
within the units or common areas of the building under construction.
1.1.22.4
Reserved
1.1.22.5
1.1.22.6
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-15
1.1.22
1.1.22.6
1.1.23
(a)
The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep for the use of the lifts.
(b)
The Contractor shall arrange for a designated person to certify that the lifts are for temporary
use and seek approval from MOM before it can be used. Alternatively the lift contractor can
arrange for the inspection on behalf of the Contractor at a cost of $680.00 per lift.
(c)
The Contractor shall provide proper protection such as plywood, adhesive tapes, etc. to the lift
cages, floors, car doors, architraves, transoms and landing doors, etc. The Contractor shall
ensure that the protection for the lifts is always in a proper condition. Any physical damage to
the lifts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(d)
The Contractor shall engage a full-time lift attendant to operate each lift. Under no
circumstance shall a lift be left unattended when it is in operation.
(e)
The Contractor shall ensure that the lifts are not over loaded.
(f)
The Contractor shall take up additional insurance for the use of the lifts as temporary use lifts
and Public Liability coverage, naming the Employer and the lift contractor as the co-insured, for
the period of usage. Copies of the insurance policies shall be given to both the SO Rep and the
lift contractor before the lifts are allowed to be used. Alternately, the Contractor may pay the lift
contractor for taking up the insurance and public liability coverage on its behalf.
(g)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the daily maintenance of the lifts, such as cleaning up
the cages and sills in order to prevent unnecessary breakdown and damage to the lifts.
(h)
The lift contractor shall service the lifts once a month during normal working hours. In case of a
need for emergency service, the Contractor shall contact the lift contractor direct. The
Contractor shall pay the lift contractor a monthly maintenance fee of $630.00 per lift or prorated accordingly. The lift contractor may stop the use of the lifts if the maintenance fee is not
paid up.
(i)
(j)
At least three days prior to handing over each building block to the Employer, a joint inspection
shall be conducted between the Contractor and the lift contractor for the purpose of handing
the lift back to the lift contractor. Any damage that occur during or as a result of or arising from
the temporary usage of the lift which affect the handing over of the lift to the Employer shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor. All costs and expense for rectification and repair shall be
borne by the Contractor, subject to verification by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-16
1.1.24
1.1.24.1
The main signboard shall consist of an overall perspective of the project and is to be prominently
located for maximum exposure to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. It is a separate signboard from BCA
construction project data signboard. The design for the main signboard is :
1.1.24.2
(a)
(b)
Image printed on adhesive laminate film and mounted on 0.6mm thick aluminium sheet with
12mm thick waterproofed plywood backing. All exposed edges shall be weather protected.
The precinct name as approved by the Street and Building Names Board(SBNB) shall be
prominently displayed and integrated with the perspective.
(c)
The background colour is HDB's corporate colour Pantone 485 (100M 91Y - process colour).
The red symbolises new trends and directions in Singapore's public housing.
(d)
The fixing and securing of the main signboard shall be designed and endorsed by Professional
Engineer. The main signboard shall be fixed with stainless steel screws of AISI Grade 304,
screw driven and countersunked to form a sound fixing connection.
A pair of hoarding signage with photographs depicting HDB's Vision, shall to be located on each side
of the main signboard. The design for the hoarding signage is:
(a)
(b)
HDB Corporate image printed on adhesive laminate film and mounted on 0.6mm thick
aluminium sheet with 12mm thick waterproofed plywood backing. All exposed edges shall be
weather protected.
(c)
The background colour is HDB's corporate colour Pantone 485 (100M 91Y - process colour).
The red symbolises new trends and directions in Singapore's public housing.
(d)
The fixing and securing of hoarding signage shall be designed and endorsed by Professional
Engineer. The hoarding signage shall be fixed with stainless steel screws of AISI Grade 304,
screw driven and countersunked to form a sound fixing connection.
1.1.24.3
The Contractor shall submit a complete set of workshop drawings to be endorsed by his Professional
Engineer and approved by the SO Rep. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
remove all or part of the signboard/signage or relocate and reconstruct all or part of the
signboard/signage and reinstate all the affected grounds to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the
cost and expense of the Contractor. On satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works, the main
signboard and the hoarding signage shall be cleared away upon the approval of the SO Rep.
1.1.24.4
Where erection of signboards with more than one language is required, all translations shall be
carried out by competent translators approved by the SO Rep. All completed signboards shall be
approved by the SO Rep before they are erected. The Contractor shall bear all cost and expense
arising.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-17
1.1.25
Site Management
Within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep
for his approval the following details on site planning :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Within 30 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep
for his approval the Master Construction Programme for each building blocks and entire project.
Furnish the SO Rep with such further details and information as the SO Rep may require in regard to
the above items.
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the site planning proposed by the Contractor is not
able to ensure a smooth progress and of good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep is empowered
to require the Contractor to make, at the Contractors own cost and expense, all necessary
modifications to the plans.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's site planning details, revised site planning details and
further information provided under this subclause shall not in anyway affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
At least 14 days before the commencement of the Works by the sub-contractors or the supply of the
materials by the manufacturers / suppliers, the Contractor shall submit the names of his subcontractors for the Works and the manufacturers / suppliers of the materials to the SO Rep. Where
the Contractor changes his sub-contractors / suppliers, he shall also submit such information to the
SO Rep 14 days prior to the commencement of the Works or supply of materials.
1.1.26
1.1.26.1
S/N
Type of
Personnel
Project
Manager
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Not
Exceeding
$10 Million
Exceeding
$10 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$25 Million
Exceeding
$25 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$50 Million
Exceeding
$50 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$75 Million
Exceeding
$75 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$100 Million
Exceeding
$100 Million
One
One
One
One
One
One
Bldg Spec
Page 1-18
1.1.26
1.1.26.1
(Cont'd)
S/N
Type of
Personnel
Workplace
Safety &
Health Officer
Not
Exceeding
$10 Million
Exceeding
$10 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$25 Million
Exceeding
$25 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$50 Million
Exceeding
$50 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$75 Million
Exceeding
$75 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$100
Million
Exceeding
$100
Million
Nil
One
One
One
One
One
Workplace
Safety &
Health Coordinator
One
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
4a
Site
Supervisor for
Architectural
& Structural
Works
One
Two
Three
Three
Four
Four
$4,000 per
Site Supervisor
per month
4b
Site
Supervisor for
Mechanical &
Electrical
Works
One
One
One
One
One
One
$4,000 per
Site Supervisor
per month
Horticultural*
Supervisor
One
One
One
One
One
One
$2,000 per
Horticultural
Supervisor
per Month
Environmental
Control Officer
Security
Guard
Nil
One
One
One
One
One
$2,000 per
Environmental
Control Officer per
Month
One
One
One
One
One
One
$2,000 per
Security Guard
per month
* Note: The period and duration of employment of the Horticultural Supervisor shall be in accordance with
sub-clause 26.1.5 and sub-clause 1.1.26.2(d) Horticultural Supervisor.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-19
1.1.26
1.1.26.2
Project Manager
The Contractor's Project Manager shall be qualified, competent and possess the skill,
knowledge and ability to manage and co-ordinate the project effectively. The Project Manager
shall be the Contractor's Representative as required under the Contract.
The Project Manager shall possess the following minimum academic qualifications and
experiences:
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
For Contract Sum of $50 million and above, the candidate shall have a Degree in
Architecture, Civil / Structural / Electrical / Mechanical Engineering, Building Science or
Quantity Surveying with 4 years of relevant post-graduate working experience in the
building construction industry or 3 years of relevant post-graduate project management
experience. The degree shall be recognized either by the respective Professional
Bodies, professional institutions or Building and Construction Authority.
(ii)
For Contract Sum less than $50 million, the candidate shall have:
(a)
(b)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-20
1.1.26
1.1.26.2
Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator/Workplace Safety & Health Officer (WSHO)
The Contractor's Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator shall possess recognised and
approved certification in construction safety to take charge of all matters related to safety. The
said Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator shall spend their time fully performing the
following :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The Contractor shall employ a full-time Workplace Safety & Health Officer to comply with the
requirements under the Workplace Safety & Health Act, Workplace Safety & Health
(Workplace Safety and Health Officers) Regulations. The Workplace Safety & Health Officer
shall implement appropriate safety measures and ensure a safe work environment and safe
work procedures in accordance with the Workplace Safety & Health Act and Subsidiary
Legislation including the provisions of the Workplace Safety & Health (Construction)
Regulations 2007 and the requirements specified under the Contract.
(c)
Site Supervisors
The Contractor's Site Supervisors shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant
skills, knowledge and the ability to supervise and co-ordinate the Works; and with the following
academic qualifications and experience :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Notwithstanding the requirements as specified in (i) to (iv) (inclusive) above, where the
Contractor is required to employ the Site Supervisor for mechanical/electrical Works, the Site
Supervisor must be suitably qualified under the mechanical/electrical engineering academic
qualifications and with the relevant work experiences and also received adequate safety and
health training to ensure that the work which he oversees or supervises can be carried out
safely.
(d)
Horticultural Supervisor
The Horticultural Supervisor shall be competent and possesses the skill, knowledge and ability
to coordinate and supervise all tree planting and landscaping works. The qualified Horticultural
Supervisor shall possess the minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture with a minimum
of 2 years relevant experience. The appointment of Horticultural Supervisor has to be
submitted to SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of any tree planting or
landscaping works. The date of appointment shall take effect from the date of SO Rep
approval and shall be in full-time site-based employment by the building contractor when the
physical trees planting or/and landscaping work is progressing on site till Substantial
Completion of the Works.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-21
1.1.26
1.1.26.2
The ECO shall conduct regular site checks and take prompt corrective actions to ensure that
the workers' quarters, canteens, toilets, site offices and other facilities and general
surroundings of the Site are kept clean, tidy and hygienic at all times. In addition, the ECO
shall also ensure that the Site is kept mosquito-free at all times.
The ECO shall compile and submit environmental related data to the SO rep upon request.
This data can include:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The ECO shall also compile a record of on any checks by the authorities (eg. NEA for noise &
vectors, PUB for ECM) and the result of such checks. This record shall also be submitted to
SO rep upon request.
If the Works have been certified more than 95% completed, the contractor may write to NEAs
Regional Office to seek approval to allow the ECO to perform on a part-time basis and copied
to SO rep. There shall be no cost recovery from the contractor if NEA is agreeable to allow the
ECO to perform on a part-time basis.
(f)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Security Guards
(i)
The Contractor shall employ Security Guards from agencies that are certified/accredited
to the Association of Certified Security Agencies (ACSA) or the Security Association
Singapore (SAS). A listing of these certified/accredited security agencies may be
obtained from the Licensing Division of the Singapore Police Force. The Contractor
shall inform the SO Rep in writing on the security agency who supplied the Security
Guards, within two weeks from the commencement date of the Time for Completion.
(ii)
All Security Guards shall at all times be in proper uniform of their security agency with
their names and identification tags on. Essential security enforcement equipment such
as whistle, torchlight, walkie talkie etc shall be provided to them. They shall respond
within five to ten minutes whenever they are called either through telephone or walkie
talkie. They shall also have the necessary access to the telephone at the Contractor's
site office during and after normal working hours for emergency reporting purpose. The
Security Guards must not be armed with weapons that are disallowed by the Singapore
Police Force.
(iii)
A proper guard post with adequate security lighting and communication facilities shall
be erected at every major entrance to the Site. All temporary gates/openings along the
fencing/hoarding shall be guarded by a Security Guard during normal working hours
and locked up after normal working hours.
(iv)
The Security Guards shall be responsible for the general security of the Site and shall
ensure that unauthorized personnel and vehicles do not entered the Site. They shall
also responsible for the security of the contractor and HDB's site offices during and after
normal working hours.
Bldg Spec
Page 1-22
1.1.26
1.1.26.2
1.1.26.3
The Security Guards shall be employed to perform site security duties on a 24 hour
basis. A minimum of one (1) Security Guard shall be on duty at any one shift including
Sundays and public holidays throughout the Time for Completion and any time period
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. No Security Guard shall
leave the Site until he is properly relieved by a replacement, even if his shift has ended.
(vi)
A proper record of the Security Guards' attendance must be kept and made available to
the SO Rep upon request.
1.1.26.4
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep within 21 days from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance, the name, identity card numbers and documentary evidence of the educational
qualifications and experience of all the site personnel employed by the Contractor. The
employment of the site personnel shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
(b)
In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements and keep records and submit
these information to the SO Rep where required by him as specified below :
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(22)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
Except for the security guards and safety supervisors, all the site personnel employed
shall be on the Contractor's monthly payroll. The Contractor shall keep records
indicating the number of days the site personnel are employed for each month and the
monthly contributions to CPF. Such information may be proof of employment of the site
personnel.
(ii)
A letter from every site personnel employed by the Contractor to testify that he is
employed full-time for this Site only;
(iii)
Further to (ii) above, if any site personnel is found to be working in more than one
running site, the particular site personnel will be barred from working in all the
Employer's sites for a period of two years from the date of the breach. It shall be the
Contractor's duty to bring to the attention of the site personnel the contents of this
clause.
Bldg Spec
Page 1-23
1.1.26
1.1.26.5
1.1.26.6
(Cont'd)
(a)
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and
expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
(b)
In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site personnel, required by the
Contract or not employing such site personnel for the period or periods required by the
Contract, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be
indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates as specified for each of the respective site
personnel per month and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any
monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due
from the Contractor. These rate or rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and
accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the
Contractor for the employment of each of the respective site personnel for each month. For the
purpose of this clause, each of the site personnel shall be employed by the Contractor for at
least 20 days within a calendar month before he can be considered as being employed for that
particular month under the Contract, except where expressly specified otherwise. In the event
that the first and/or the last calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time period
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, have less than 20 days, each of
the site personnel shall be employed for the full number of days in the said first and last
calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract.
(c)
Notwithstanding other provisions in this clause, if the Contractor incurs additional costs and
expenses over and above the agreed rates specified herein in complying with the requirements
stipulated in this clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs and expenses in
full.
1.1.26.7
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(23)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-24
1.1.27
2.0 weeks
2.6 weeks
The Contractor may use the lifts temporarily for their material hoisting and other works associated with
the preparation for handing over subject to the terms and conditions in his agreement with the
relevant lift contractor.
The Contractor shall be liable for any delay of the building completion arising from the late completion
of the brickwall at the lift lobbies to enable the lift contractor in carrying out the lift assembly works
within the lift shaft at each building block.
1.1.28
Cables/Services Detection
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and have ascertained
its nature and made provision in the Contract Sum or prices for the type of ground conditions,
constraints and underground services.
The Contractor shall provide cables/services detecting devices to locate all existing cables/services
prior to the commencement of excavation or any other work such as driving of piles, piling of earth
electrode and lightning conductors or poles and columns which are liable to damage existing buried
services. The Contractor shall engage EMA licensed cables/services detection workers to carry out
all cables/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or area of other work shall be
checked for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes in a grid formation
to cover the entire area of work.
The extent of checking carried out shall be properly documented and countersigned by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be liable for all costs and charges incurred if he damages any services.
The Contractor shall seek assistance from the relevant Government Department or Statutory Board if
he has any query on the location of existing cables/services belonging to the Government Department
or Statutory Board. In the case of PowerGrid or SPSL cables/services, the Contractor may seek
assistance from the Cable Damage Prevention Unit, PowerGrid or SPSL.
In addition, the Contractor shall engage the services of EMA Registered Excavator Operator only for
all excavation Works. In the event the Contractor fails to employ EMA Registered Excavator
Operator, no excavation Works shall be allowed.
1.1.29
Reserved
1.1.30
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(24)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-25
1.1.31
General Housekeeping
(a)
Periodic Cleaning Up
All rubbish and debris shall be cleared from the Site and buildings under construction at least
weekly or from time to time as they accumulate or when so directed by the SO Rep. Particular
attention shall be directed to those areas where other tradesmen or contractors will be working
in.
Housekeeping shall be carried out in such manner and at such times so as not to cause any
inconvenience to either the adjoining owners, occupiers and the public. Debris shall be wet to
minimize the risk of dust pollution
(b)
(c)
1.1.32
Reserved
1.1.33
1.1.34
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(25)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-26
1.1.35
1.1.36
Reserved
1.1.37
Reserved
1.1.38
Research Work
The Contractor shall provide and render all necessary assistance to the SO Rep or other authorised
persons conducting research work or procuring publicity materials on any aspects of the construction
Works in progress. When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall also provide all brochures,
quotations, sub-contract agreements, invoices, etc from his subcontractors, suppliers and specialists
for goods and services provided for the Works, all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
1.1.39
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(26)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Pump Rooms
3 calendar
months
b)
Consumer Switch
Rooms
b)
5 calendar
months
c)
Lift Wells
including
Machine Rooms
c)
As specified
in the table
marked ##
hereunder
d)
MDF Room
d)
6 calendar
months
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-27
1.1.39
(Cont'd)
7 and below
8 to 12
13 to 16
17 to 20
21 to 25
26 to 30
31 to 40
* where the Contractor is required to undertake the temporary usage of tested and commissioned
lifts (installed by others engaged by the Employer) for testing, commissioning of the Works and
other building related Works prior to the certification of Substantial Completion.
This arrangement shall not be construed as giving rise to separate sections, phases or subphases of the Works. If the Contractor fails to complete any of such items of works within the
respective specified time period or if the Superintending Officer shall certify in writing that in his
opinion the Contractor despite previous warning by the SO Rep in writing fails to proceed with
any of such items of works with due expedition and without delay, the Employer may himself
complete such item or items of works or may employ any other contractors to complete such
item(s) of works.
All costs and expenses for such completion including the Employer's charges shall be
recovered by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor under the
Contract or may be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor without
prejudice to any other remedies available to the Employer. In the event of the Employer
completing any such item(s) of works, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of
the Time for Completion or to any loss or expense in connection with or in consequence of the
Employer carrying out such item(s) of works.
The Defects Liability Period in respect of any such item(s) of works (whether completed by the
Contractor or the Employer) shall not commence until the Substantial Completion of the
respective sections, phases, or sub-phases in which such item(s) of works is (are) included.
(B)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(27)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-28
1.1.40
(ii)
Successful hand over of the Works to the Employer after inspection by the SO Rep and
the Employers Inspection Team.
(b)
The Contractor shall conduct thorough inspections of the Works to ensure that all Defects are
rectified and the Works have been completed to fully meet the requirements of the Contract
and the workmanship standards as displayed in the approved Sample Units or Sample Panels
before the handing over inspection by the SO Rep and the Employers Inspection Team.
(c)
The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in advance to request for a handing over inspection and
the following functional tests:
S/N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Type Of Test
Chokage Test For Main And Secondary Stack Pipe
Leakage Test For Refuse Chute Flushing System
Water Pipe Pressure For Concealed Pipes
Gradient Test For house Drains
Gradient Test For House Sewer Lines
Water Test For Main Roof
Water Test For Scupper Drains
Watertightness Test For Window/Wall Joints
Watertightness Test For Precast Wall Joints
Water Test For Toilet And Kitchen
% of Units To Be
Tested Per Block
100 %
100%
10% of Total DU
100%
100%
100%
100%
Min 5 Windows
Min 10 Joints
25% of Total DU
Upon receipt of the Contractors request, the SO Rep shall arrange for a joint inspection date
with the Employers Inspection Team. The Employers Inspection Team shall be present to
witness the functional tests. In the event the tests fail to meet the requirements of the Contract,
the Contractor shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and without
delay and arrange for re-tests in accordance with the requirements under the Contract.
(d)
If the Works are considered to have met the requirements of the Contract including the
approved workmanship standards and there is no major Defect detected during the handing
over inspection, the Works shall then be taken over by the Employers Inspection Team.
Otherwise, the SO Rep shall give the Contractor a list of outstanding Defect for rectification.
The Contractor shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and
without delay. The Contractors liability to rectify the Defect under this subclause shall not be
limited to the list of Defect given by the SO Rep, but shall include all other Defect surfaced in
between the handing over inspections. Upon completion of the Defect rectification, the
Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in writing that all outstanding Defect found in the inspection,
as well as all apparent Defect surfaced in between the handing over inspections have been
rectified and to request for another handing over inspection. The provision of the preceding sub
clause (c) above shall apply, mutatis mutandis.
(e)
If the Contractor is unable to hand over the Works to the Employer after two handing over
inspections, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities.
(f)
The Contractor shall on Substantial Completion of the Works, remove all rubbish, Construction
Equipment and surplus materials, wash and scrub clean all floors, staircases, pavings, drains
and all parts of the buildings and leave the Works in a clean and hygienic condition fit
for habitation. The Site and periphery shall be cleared of all rubbish left from the Contractor's
work.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(28)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-29
1.1.41
Reserved
1.1.42
1.1.42.1
One
Two
The Contractor's site supervisor shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant skills,
knowledge and the ability to co-ordinate and supervise the Defect investigation and rectification
Works; and possess either one of the following academic qualifications and experience:
(a)
National Certificate in Construction Supervision (NCCS) and at least 5 years of similar capacity
relevant working experience in the building construction industry;
(b)
The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own
cost and expense if any of the site supervisor is found not carrying out their duties to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep.
In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site supervisors required by the Contract
or not employing such site supervisors for the period or periods required by the Contract, without
prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the
Employer at the rate of $133/- per day per site supervisor not employed and such indebtedness shall
be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be
recovered by the Employer as a debt from the Contractor. This rate shall be deemed to have been
fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the cost and expense allowed by
the Contractor for the employment of a site supervisor for each day.
Notwithstanding other provisions in this subclause, if the Contractor incurs additional cost and
expense over and above the agreed rate specified herein in complying with the requirements
stipulated in this subclause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional cost and expense in full.
On expiry of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor may put forth a written request to the SO Rep
for the release of the site supervisor. A written approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained with this
request.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(29)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-30
(Contd)
1.1.42
1.1.42.2
1.1.42.3
(a)
The Contractor shall also provide a stand-by plumber and a stand-by electrician for 24 hour
stand-by duties for every day, including Sundays and Public Holidays, throughout the Defects
Liability Period. The plumber and electrician need not be stationed on the Site but would be
called upon to rectify Defect causing disruption to essential supply such as water and electricity
(b)
The Contractor or his representatives shall be contactable 24 hours a day, for every day,
including Sundays and Public Holidays throughout the Defects Liability Period by means of
telephone, handphone, radio pager, facsimile or any other suitable modes of communications
(c)
The stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician shall attend to such Defect within 30 minutes
from the time a request for their services is made. They shall carry out the rectification
expeditiously and in a workmanlike manner to restore the essential services quickly to minimise
any inconveniences to the residents. In the event the stand-by plumber and/or stand-by
electrician fail to attend or fail to attend within the time frame stipulated, the SO Rep shall
exercise his right to impose charges under clause 1.6 'Nuisance and Irregularities".
1.1.42.4
(a)
Name and contact numbers of the Contractor's key management staff and the appointed site
supervisors for Defect investigation and rectification Works within the Defects Liability Period;
(b)
Name and contact numbers of the relevant manufacturers, suppliers and specialist contractors
etc.,
(c)
Name and contact numbers of the stand-by plumber and stand-by electrician.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(30)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-31
1.1.42
(Contd)
1.1.42.5
1.1.42.6
1.1.43
1.1.44
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(31)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-32
1.1.45
1.1.46
1.1.47
1.1.48
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(32)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-33
1.1.49
1.1.50
1.1.51
In every case where the Specifications require the Contractor's Specialist to co-warrant the
Works and/or materials to be executed or supplied under the Contract, such Specialist, subject
to such other requirements as may be prescribed in the Specifications, may only be employed
by the Contractor with the Employer's prior written approval, and the Employer will approve
such employment if the Specialist gives his written undertaking to execute the Deed of
Warranty prescribed in the Specifications. If such written undertaking is not given, then the
Contractor shall appoint an alternative Specialist willing to give the written undertaking. The
employment of any Specialist who refuses to give his written undertaking will not be recognised
by the Employer, and no Specialist may commence any work or supply any materials before
his written undertaking is given.
(b)
The Employer's prior written approval of such Specialist's employment shall not in any way
affect or diminish the Contractor's contractual obligations to the Employer in respect of any
Works or materials executed or supplied by such Specialist on behalf of the Contractor, and the
provisions of this subclause shall not in any way affect or diminish the Employer's entitlement
to withhold the payment of any sums due to the Contractor by reason of the Contractor's and/or
Specialist's failure to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(33)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-34
1.1.52
1.1.52.1
Identification Pass
The Contractor shall provide serially-numbered security identification pass to each of his workers and
subcontractors' workers. The identification pass shall consist of the worker's photograph, name,
identification card number or passport number and name of the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue
temporary entry pass, on a day to day basis, to workers from other contractors employed by the
Employer or other Government/Statutory Board authorities or other companies carrying out works on
the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling and issuing these security identification passes and
temporary entry passes. The Contractor shall maintain an updated list of the passes issued for
accountability and to facilitate enforcement checks. The Contractor shall ensure that all workers on
the Site wear and display their passes prominently and securely at all times while working on the Site.
1.1.52.2
0.42mm thick zincalume steel or galvanised steel for the metal hoarding laid horizontally. All
exposed metal sheet surfaces of the metal hoarding shall be finished with 25 microns
colourbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing coat, graphic pattern and safety
slogan shall be in accordance to the theme and colour of each estate. The Contractor shall
obtain the theme and colour of each estate from the SO Rep.
(b)
Timber posts and horizontal bracings of common grade timber under strength Group A of
Singapore Standard CP 7. If steel members are used instead of timber, the steel members
shall be of Grade 43 of BS 4360.
(c)
(d)
Undamaged recycled metal hoarding are allowed subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All
exposed surface of the recycled metal hoarding shall be painted with at least 3 coats of
approved paint. The finishing coat, graphic pattern and safety slogan shall be in accordance to
the theme and colour of each estate. The Contractor shall obtain the theme and colour of each
estate from the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval, the SO Rep reserve the right to instruct
replacement of installed metal hoarding that are found dented or bent.
The hoarding and gates shall be maintained at all times to ensure no deterioration of the structures
and fading of the paint works throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
'DANGER - KEEP OUT' and 'NO TRESPASSING' signs in the four official languages are to be
displayed on the exterior side of the hoarding. Such signs shall be painted in red on white
background with reflective material and approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(34)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-35
1.1.52
(Contd)
1.1.52.2
(Contd)
As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove all or part of the hoarding or
relocate and reconstruct all or part of the hoarding and reinstate all the affected grounds to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. On satisfactory Substantial
Completion of the Works, the hoarding shall be cleared away upon the approval of the SO Rep.
1.1.53
There shall first be assessed the number of wet days and equivalent wet days (as specified in
paragraph (f) below on which the Contractor has been substantially delayed in the carrying
out of the Works by rain (hereinafter called "delay days").
(b)
A wet day shall be one where the rainfall figure as calculated as described in this paragraph
exceeds 10.2 mm during the 24 hour period used by the Meteorological Service. The rainfall
figure shall be the average island-wide rainfall calculated by the Employer using rainfall
records received by the Employer monthly from the 5 Standard Stations of the Meteorological
Service.
(c)
The expected number of wet days during the Time for Completion or extended Time for
Completion as the case may be shall be derived from the following table which is deemed to
record the average number of wet days for the respective months based on the Meteorological
Service's records between 2002 and 2011 (hereinafter referred to as "expected wet days") :
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
10
(d)
For each month of the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may
be there shall be assessed whether the number of delay days in that month is more than
(positive) or equal to (zero) or less than (negative) the expected wet days in that month.
(e)
The positive, zero and negative monthly assessments made in accordance with paragraph (d)
above shall then be added together and a net total reached. If such total is a positive number
then such total shall constitute the extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather.
(f)
The period commencing from excavation works to the completion of ground beams where the
ground floor slab is not a critical activity or the completion of ground floor slab where the
ground floor slab is a critical activity is hereinafter called "sub-structure construction period"
and the works carried out during such period is hereinafter called "sub-structure works".
For the assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the
sub-structure construction period, the respective monthly average number of wet days as
specified in paragraph (b) above shall be multiplied by a factor of 2.0 if the wet days are less
than or equal to 5 or by a factor of 1.6 if the wet days exceed 5. The product so derived shall
be referred to as "equivalent wet days" and are subject to a maximum of 30 days per month.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(35)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-36
1.1.53
1.1.54
(Contd)
If the sub-structure works do not commence on the first day of the month, then the number of
equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works commence shall be prorated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of
sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month.
Similarly, if the sub-structure works are not completed on the last calendar day of the month,
then the number of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works are
completed shall be pro-rated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days
for the construction of sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in
the said month. The assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather
during the sub-structure construction period shall be based on the actual sub-structure
construction period of each building block, including multi-storey carpark / garage.
1.1.55
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(36)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-37
1.1.56
Insurance Policies
The Contractor shall warrant that the insurance policies issued in accordance with Clauses 27 and 28
of the Conditions shall include the following requirements :
(A)
(B)
The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form as produced in Appendix A11.
(ii)
The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his subcontractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".
(iii)
The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months
and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.
The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer, the Contractor and all his
sub-contractors.
(ii)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(37)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(iii)
The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months
and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.
(iv)
The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read
30 days.
Bldg Spec
Page 1-38
1.1.56
Insurance Policies
(B)
(vi)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(38)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(Contd)
(Contd)
(b)
(c)
Liability assumed by the Insured by agreement, unless such liability would have
attached to the Insured notwithstanding such agreement.
(d)
(e)
(f)
"This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's insurance obligations with regard to
personal injuries or death and injury or damage to property real or personal
(including property of the Housing & Development Board but not the Works
themselves) arising out of or in the course of or by reasons of the carrying out of
the Works stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and
the Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)"
(b)
"Each of the parties comprising the Insured shall for the purpose of this Policy be
considered as a separate and distinct unit and the words "the Insured" shall be
considered as applying to such party in the same manner as if a separate policy
had been issued to each of the parties and the insurers hereby agree to waive all
rights of subrogation action which they may have or acquire against any of the
aforesaid parties arising out of any accident in respect of which any claim is made
hereunder provided nevertheless that nothing in this clause shall be deemed to
increase the limitation on extent of Insurer's liability in respect of any one accident
or series of accidents as stated in the Schedule".
(c)
(d)
"Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the
Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor
on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the
event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do
all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject
otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".
(e)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-39
1.1.56
Insurance Policies
(C)
1.1.57
(Contd)
The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor.
(ii)
The Works insured shall read the project title given in the Employer's Letter of
Acceptance.
(iii)
(iv)
The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months
and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.
(v)
The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read
30 days.
(vi)
"This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's Works insurance obligations stated in
the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor
(name of Contractor to insert)".
(b)
"Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the
Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor
on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the
event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do
all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject
otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".
(c)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(39)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-40
1.1.58
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(40)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-41
1.1.59
Reserved
1.1.60
1.1.61
1.1.61.1
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(41)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-42
1.1.61
1.1.61.2
Computer Hardware
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall
provide the Computer Hardware during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract and till closing of Building Service Centre (BSC).
Personal Computer
The Contractor shall provide ONE Personal Computer (hereinafter referred to as "PC") for the
exclusive use of the SO Rep and two units of PC for Building Service Centre (BSC) operation. The
PC shall comply with the following minimum specifications:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
One 3-inch form factor Serial ATA hard disk of total capacity of 80 GB or more [The hard disk
must have 2 partitions eg. C and D drive];
(iv)
Minimum 256 MB Integrated Intel graphic Media Accelerator 3100 or equivalent, able to display
at least 32-bit true colour at minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels.
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
System BIOS updateable via software should be licensed flash BIOS of the latest version;
(viii)
One bi-directional 25-pin parallel port, one 16550 UART compatible asynchronous serial ports,
one mouse port, one keyboard port and at least four universal serial bus(USB) port;
(ix)
Bus architecture should consist of 64-bit process-cache memory data bus and at least three
PCI/PCI-express expansion slots;
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
One internal IDE DVD/CD-RW Combo drive; (48X Write / 32X Rewrite / 40X for CD Read and
16X for DVD Read) or higher. Must be able to read CD-ROM, Multi Read, CD Text, Audio CD,
CD-I, CD-RW, CD-R, CD-DA, Video CD, CD EXTRA, CD-ROM XA, Photo CD/Multi-session,
DVD, DVD+R, DVD+R Multi-session, DVD+RW and DVD-RW Multi-Border and also able to
write CD-R and CD-RW, Track at once, Disc at once, Fixed Packet, Variable Packet and Multisession;
(xiv)
(xv)
Casing must be secure and comes with one good quality chassis lock of unique combination.
All keys to the lock shall be given to the SO Rep.
(xvi)
Must include all the necessary features and accessories required to support the type of
broadband connection services specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
(xvii) Loaded with the software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(42)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-43
1.1.61
1.1.61.2
(ii)
Able to print at least 20 pages of A4 per minute and 11 pages of A3 per minute;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Support high speed bi-directional IEEE 1284-compliant parallel port (C-type connector);
(vi)
(vii)
Must be able to support printing in the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it;
(viii)
Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Shall provide alert on AC power failure, power restore and diagnostic tests through
management software;
(v)
(vi)
Must include all connecting cables joining the UPS output ports and equipment.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(43)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-44
1.1.61
1.1.61.2
1.1.61.3
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Shall include scanning software that can display the image file size to users at the preview
screen
(vi)
Able to support all image formats including but not limited to,
TIFF
BMP
JPEG
FPX
GIF
WMF
PDF
(vii)
Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
Computer Software
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall
provide the Computer Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the following licensed
software packages (full packs with original licences, documentation and media provided) for each PC
provided under this clause including all subclauses under it :
(i)
Microsoft Windows XP Professional, with provision for upgrade to Windows Vista or later;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Norton Internet Security Software 2008 (with firewall & anti-virus package) or later.
The Contractor shall purchase maintenance license for the VirusScan softwares to cover the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The PC
must be set to automatically scan for virus at least once a day when the PC is switched on.
1.1.61.4
1.1.61.5
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(44)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-45
1.1.61
1.1.61.6
1.1.61.7
1.1.61.8
1.1.61.9
Security
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement and provision to prevent theft/burglary of the
Computer Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall replace any stolen or missing Hardware and
Software within 3 days of such occurrence, failing which the SO Rep will make the necessary
arrangement to acquire the systems and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from
payment due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.
Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claim And Request For Variation Works
The Contractor may be required to use an online web-based electronic submission system provided
by the Employer for the submission of the Monthly Claims for Progress Payment and Claim for
Authorisation / Variation Order (collectively and hereinafter known as e-submission system).
There will be no additional charges to be imposed by Employer for the use of the e-submission
system. If the Employer decided that the e-submission system is to be used, the Contractor shall at
his own expenses arrange to use e-submission system complying with the requirement hereinafter
mentioned.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(45)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-46
1.1.62
Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claim And Request For Variation Works (Contd)
The e-submission system shall be Secured Socket Layer encrypted, password-protected with rolebased workflow security features at the document/form level and have an audit trail.
The e-submission system shall be accessible by all relevant users from the Employer, Superintending
Officer, SO Rep and Contractor concurrently and all data accessed shall be confined to the Project
and the relevant role and scope of works.
All relevant parties in the workflow shall be timely notified by email to complete their respective area of
work.
The e-submission system shall comprise the following modules:
(A)
This module shall capture the monthly detailed breakdown of the scope of works and
cost information as specified in the Contract showing both the Contractors claims and
the SO Reps corresponding assessment in terms of individual percentage of work
done for each work item.
b.
The validation rules shall apply to each item of claim and shall be based on the
following rules or such rules to be given by the SO Rep:
i.
ii.
The values submitted/certified for current month should not be less than previous
the months submission.
c.
The Contractor shall not be allowed to amend the SO Reps valuation and vice-versa.
d.
The following data shall be automatically uploaded each month into the e-submission
system and shall include but not limited to the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
(B)
Allow the SO Rep to submit an Authorisation / Variation Order for the approval of the
SO for subsequent issue to the Contractor.
b.
c.
All the differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause (including questions relating to
interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final and
binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(46)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-47
1.1.63
1.1.64
The Contractor shall propose the type of envelope to the SO Rep for approval.
The 2 external sides of the envelope may either be printed or stamped with the following information :
On the Front of the envelope To print/stamp in Arial Black Font Type of Font Size 18, the following
statement:
S/N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(47)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Location
Main Gate
Main Door
Master Bedroom
Bedroom 1
Bedroom 2
Balcony
Service Duct
Letter Box
Others
Total
No. of keys
Bldg Spec
Page 1-48
1.1.65
Schedule Of PE Submission
The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the
table below :
Category
General
Maintenance
Clause No.
Description Of Works
Date Of Submission
1.1.18 or as amended
1.1.48 or as amended
Temporary buildings
1.1.67.8 or as amended
Temporary chute
1.4.2(c) or as amended
The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the
table below :
Category
Clause No.
Description Of Works
Date Of Submission
1.5.1(b) or as amended
1.5.1(d) or as amended
1.5.1(e) or as amended
1.5.1(f) or as amended
Overhead shelters
1.5.1(m) or as amended
1.5.1(n) or as amended
1.5.1(t) or as amended
Temporary staircases
3.15 or as amended
4.18 or as amended
4.19.2 or as amended
Design of formwork
Formwork
9.5 or as amended
Metal Roofing
and Insulation
Sheet
13.3.1 or as amended
Site Safety
Measures
Excavation
Structural
Concrete
For the avoidance of doubts, requirements for PE submission for other Works which are not shown in
the table above shall be as specified in the respective clauses and/or subclauses in the
Specifications.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(48)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-49
1.1.66
.
In his tender submission, the Contractor shall submit his schematic ECM plans of the construction site
for the whole of the Time for Completion including any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract, taking into account the different phases of construction activities. He
shall also provide the name of the Qualified Erosion Control Professional (QECP) who will be
endorsing the ECM plan after the tender is awarded. These schematic ECM plans shall make the
Contractor aware of the ECM requirements and the cost to implement an effective ECM.
Notwithstanding the submission of these schematic ECM plans, the Contractor shall be deemed to
have included all costs and expenses for complying with all the ECM requirements in the Contract
Sum.
Before construction works commence on site, the Contractor shall engage a QECP to plan and design
the ECM, and he shall install the ECM according to the QECP's design. The ECM plan and design
shall be submitted 1 week after the award of the contract. During the course of the construction
works, the Contractor together with his QECP shall review the ECM proposal regularly to meet the
changing needs of the construction activities. The Contractor shall improve the ECM as advised by
his QECP. The planning and design of the ECM shall meet the latest requirements stipulated by PUB
and in accordance to the latest Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
The Contractor shall maintain the ECM for the whole duration of the Time for Completion including
any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, to ensure that it is
effective at all times. Proper records detailing the maintenance works, supported by dated
photographs, shall be kept by the Contractor for verification.
The Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the advice of his
QECP.
The Contractor shall submit the ECM proposal duly endorsed by his QECP to PUB for records. The
proposed ECM shall consist of the following four parts:
(i)
Project Particulars
The following information shall be provided under the Project Particulars:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Project description
Name and address of site occupier;
Site area and contract period;
Location map and site plan.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(49)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-50
1.1.66
1.1.66.1
1.1.66.2
(a)
sequence and schedule of the earthworks I demolition works in stages and progressively with
the subsequent construction activities and building works.
(b)
minimise site disturbance by keeping site clearance works to a minimum by retaining as much
of the existing vegetation as possible.
(c)
pave up the bare surfaces and all construction access by concrete or milled waste or other
suitable materials.
(d)
protect the bare slopes with close-turfing, concrete grouting, or erosion control blanket.
(e)
(f)
restore ground cover over disturbed areas, which are or have become bare, as soon as
possible.
(g)
cover up the active work surfaces with canvas sheet during rain or at the end of the workday.
1.1.66.3
(a)
concrete-lined cut-off drains (minimum C7 precast channel) along the perimeter of the
construction sites.
(b)
silt fence properly installed and embedded onto the ground along the perimeter cut-off drains
(between the construction site and the cut-off drain).
(c)
sedimentation basins or any other sediment filtering or settling system of adequate size and
sufficient numbers along the perimeter cut-off drain and before the discharge points into public
drain.
(d)
a storage basin / tank may be required to temporarily store the large amount of rainwater
falling on to the whole site before treatment.
(e)
a treatment system to treat silty discharge shall be provided before the discharge points into
public drain.
(f)
turbidity curtains shall be installed along all the exposed slopes / riverbanks for works in or
adjacent to water bodies, such as canals, rivers, sea or in a reclamation work. The silty
discharge trapped within the turbidity curtain shall be allowed to be settled / treated and
removed.
(b)
(c)
Continuous monitoring and recording system shall be installed at the discharge point (after
ECM) before public drain
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(50)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-51
1.1.66
1.1.66.4
1.1.67
1.1.67.1
General Requirements
The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Public Health Act (hereafter referred to as "the
Act" for the purposes of this subclause) and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental
Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999, (hereafter referred to as
"the Order" for the purposes of this subclause) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto
throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract.
1.1.67.2
Reserved
1.1.67.3
Noise Nuisance
Judicious management and control over the activities within the Site shall be exercised by the
Contractor for the abatement of noise nuisance. In this respect, the Contractor shall implement all
necessary noise control measures at his own cost and expense, to comply with the Environmental
Protection and Management Act (hereafter referred to as "the Act" for the purposes of this subclause) and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental Protection and Management
(Control of Noise at Construction Sites) Regulations, (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations" for the
purposes of this sub-clause) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto throughout the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site and its surroundings and to
have satisfied himself as to the surrounding developments and construction activities. Prior to the
commencement of Works, the Contractor shall propose a noise management plan and execute the
appropriate noise control measures at his own cost and expense.
1.1.67.4
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(51)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(a)
comparison charts between baseline noise monitoring results prior to the commencement
of works and the anticipated noise emission levels during construction ;
(b)
(c)
site utilisation plan, indicating the locations of site facilities and noise generating
equipments including, but not limited to generators, compressors and concrete pumps ;
Bldg Spec
Page 1-52
1.1.67
1.1.67.4
specification of the machinery, equipment and plant proposed to be utilised on site as well
as their indicative noise emission levels. Construction equipment and methods of work
that generates excessive noise will not be allowed to be used on Site ;
(e)
identification of noise generating activities and delineate the sequence of work and
construction methods for such activities, as well as indicate the anticipated noise levels
accompanying each type of activity ;
(f)
propose noise control measures for noise generating activities along with the estimated
reduced noise levels in the form of administrative and engineering controls or other
measures deemed effective in noise abatement. Noise control measures shall take into
consideration site planning and layout (administrative controls), adoption of engineering
controls and behavioral considerations of site personnel ;
(g)
(h)
contingency noise abatement measures for unavoidable works that have to be carried out
after 7pm with the approval of the SO Rep ;
(i)
(j)
Public relations strategies to foster close community relationships throughout the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract, such as signboards, newsletters, circulars, complaint handling procedures and
investigation, standard response time to public feedback and complaints and rapportbuilding events or activities with residents.
In formulating the noise management plan, the Contractor shall take into account the working
days and hours, as well as consider the effects of construction noise on personnel working in
or around the site as well as the neighbourhood within proximity of the Site. The Contractor
shall take into account the nature of land use in the area, duration of works and the effect of
lengthening works period or other nuisances that may affect the neighbourhood.
(ii)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(52)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(a)
all machinery and plant shall be identified to be sound-reduced prior to entering the site ;
(b)
all plant, machinery and equipment shall be pasted with a weather-proof sticker clearly
indicating its noise emission level (at source) under normal operating condition ;
(c)
all machinery in operation shall have their covers properly shut at all times ;
(d)
(e)
noisy activities shall be barricaded with portable noise barriers and panels ; and
(f)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-53
1.1.67
1.1.67.4
(iii)
(b)
Equipped with a data logger for sampling the running value of A-weighted sound level
pressure levels with adequate memory to store 5-minute equivalent continuous readings
on a 24-hour basis for up to one month ;
(c)
(d)
The sound level meter shall have a laboratory calibration certificate dated not more than
three (3) months before the commencement date of the contract. The integrating sound
level meter shall be sent to an approved accredited laboratory for calibration at every six
(6) months interval or as and when required by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall install the sound level meter at a suitable location at the nearest occupied
building. The location is to be approved by SO Rep or NEA. The Contractor shall liaise with the
relevant authorities, for example Town Council, for permission to install the sound level meter.
Where there is no suitable location outside the Site, the Contractor may install the sound level
meter within the Site, subject to approval the SO Rep or NEA. The installed sound level meter
can be sheltered, but the microphone of the sound level meter must face the construction site
and in the line of sight of the construction activities without any physical barrier or obstruction.
(iv)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(53)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-54
1.1.67
1.1.67.5
Preservation Of Trees
Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as
"Preserved Trees" for the purpose of this subclause), the Contractor shall take all necessary
precaution to avoid damage or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following
requirements :
(A)
(b)
(B)
(b)
(C)
All Preserved Trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by
suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of Preserved Trees shall be placed before
commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair
for the duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of
fencing shall be determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less
than 1.2 m from the trunk of Preserved Trees.
Individual Preserved Trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny
sacks and 50 mm x 100 mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and
spaced at no more than 50 mm apart to a height of 1.5 m above ground.
(b)
Any damage to Preserved Trees root system shall be repaired immediately by the
Contractor under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed
and/or damaged during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of
the exposed and/or damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved
sealing compound and topsoil spread over the exposed root area.
(c)
Any damage to Preserved Trees branches shall be treated in accordance with the
Drawings.
(i)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(54)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-55
1.1.67
1.1.67.5
Wound Treatment
(1)
(2)
(3)
(d)
(D)
If any Preserved Trees are severely injured by mechanical equipment, etc., the SO Rep
shall impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.6 "Nuisance
And Irregularities".
1.1.67.6
Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife.
Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends.
Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.
(b)
The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the Preserved
Trees eg. branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep.
(c)
If the growth of the Preserved Trees is stifled, the Contractor shall inter-alia bear the
cost of making good and charges in accordance with Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" shall be imposed against the Contractor.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(55)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-56
1.1.67
1.1.67.6
1.1.67.7
1.1.67.8
1.1.67.9
to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance work on the Site. In this respect, the
Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator and proof of BCA/NEA registration to
the SO Rep for approval prior to carrying out the Works. The SO Rep may disapprove the Pest
Control Operator selected by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for
compensation and extension of time arising from such decisions.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(56)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-57
1.1.67
1.1.67.9
(Contd)
Pest Control measures and surveillance programmes shall fully comply with the requirements of NEA
as well as the following :
(a)
The Contractor is required to submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme
inclusive of Source reduction regime/strategy, Water bearing receptacle removal team at the
Site to the respective NEAs regional office and the SO Rep prior to commencement of the
Works. The frequency of fogging shall be in accordance to NEAs requirement. Fogging is to be
carried out only by licensed Pest Operator using approved chemical.
(b)
The Contractor shall maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of the pest control
and surveillance work that has been carried out. The site register shall be made available and
ready for inspection by the SO Rep when required.
(c)
The Contractor shall submit monthly summarised returns of the site records required by NEA to
the respective NEAs regional office.
(d)
On the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall seal up all sanitary openings in the
dwelling units prior to the handing over of the completed Works all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
The Works required under this subclause shall include all necessary measures to prevent the Site
from becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors. The Contractor shall carry out site
checks at least once a week to detect and remove all breeding and harbouring grounds. If breeding or
harbouring of vectors is found at the Site, enforcement action may be taken against the Contractor by
NEA. The SO Rep may also exercise his right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance & Irregularities" by
imposing charges on the Contractor.
1.1.67.10 Air Pollution By Construction Equipment
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to abate the discharge of smoke, fumes or
obnoxious gases from Construction Equipment and other equipment on the Site. When notified by
the SO Rep that a particular Construction Equipment or equipment is discharging excessive smoke,
fumes or obnoxious gases, the Contractor shall stop the use of that Construction Equipment or
equipment, and replace the same with acceptable Construction Equipment or equipment. No claims
from the Contractor for extension of Time for Completion or costs and expenses shall be allowed.
1.1.67.11 Reserved
1.1.67.12 Cleaning Of Public And HDB Maintained Roads And Drains
The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles used by him, his servants or agents, or by his subcontractors or suppliers, their servants or agents (hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor's Vehicles"
for the purposes of this subclause) shall not dirty any public or HDB maintained roads and drains. In
this respect, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all such Contractor's Vehicles are
properly cleaned before they move onto these roads.
The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep if he is in doubt whether any road is a public or HDB
maintained road and the decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and
binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
In the event the Site abuts a public or HDB maintained road and the Contractor's Vehicles use the
road for site access, the Contractor shall provide a washing bay to wash and clean the Contractor's
Vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. If vehicles of other contractors
also use such public or HDB maintained road for site access, the Contractor shall provide at his own
cost and expense, similar washing, cleaning facilities and services for these other contractors'
vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. The Contractor shall also provide
at his own cost and expense, the same facilities and services for similar purposes in the event a road
abutting the Site becomes a public or HDB maintained road and is used for site access by the
Contractor's Vehicles or other contractors' vehicles.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(57)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-58
1.1.67
Architectural materials:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(b)
Structural materials : Splice sleeves, sealants for precast joints, form ties etc.
(c)
Civil Engineering Materials : Road marking paint, interlocking concrete blocks etc.
(d)
(e)
Electrical materials : Electrical conduits and fittings/CATV materials eg. sockets, switches,
door bells, splash proof guards, light fittings etc.
The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to provide and display the sample for other
building materials and components, especially newly introduced items, big ticket items and special
items, under the Contract where deemed necessary and fit all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
The approved material samples shall be provided and displayed before construction, erection or
installation. All approved materials shall be labelled with the Supplier's name and materials'
type/grade/model.
1.1.69
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(58)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-59
1.1.70
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
1.1.70.1
(b)
1.1.70.2
Electricity consumption;
Diesel consumption;
Water consumption;
Concrete wastage
(c)
The contractor shall submit data to the SO rep on a monthly basis and present it as a standing
item in the monthly meeting.
(d)
The programme shall also include measures to be taken to raise awareness and promote
environment friendly habits amongst site personnel.
The contractor shall implement a system to facilitate the use recycled water obtained through
Earth Control Measure for:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
wash bay;
dust control;
tremie piles;
washing of site access.
(b)
The contractor shall segregate metal and concrete waste from general construction waste for
recycling purpose.
(c)
The contractor shall provide recycling bins near the site office to facilitate recycling.
(d)
The contractor can use eco-green concrete, subject to Contractors PE approval where
necessary, for the base slab of:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(e)
site office;
workers quarter;
canteen;
workers toilet;
cube room
To reduce energy consumption for the site office, the contractor is encouraged to :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(f)
The contractor is encouraged to be familiar and closely follow the BCAs Green and Gracious
Builders Guide. (e.g use energy efficient air conditioning system complying with Singapore
Energy Labelling Scheme, use T5 lights combined with motion sensors to reduce energy
consumption etc).
(g)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(59)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Provide more greening on site to lower ambient temperature during construction period;
Elimination of environmentally unfriendly products and packaging
Bldg Spec
Page 1-60
1.2
MATERIALS
1.2.1
Metric Components
All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, when metric
components are not available, their equivalent in imperial units may, subject to the approval of the SO
Rep, be used and such a substitution shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.
1.2.2
shipping documents
serial numbers
warranty certificates
In the event that any documents submitted are not original copies, they shall be duly certified by the
originating parties. No information within the documents shall be tampered with, unless it is clearly
discernible that the items are not related to the materials specified in the Contract.
Where specific brand and model number are specified, or where alternative brands and model
numbers are offered by the Contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, it shall be deemed that the
finished products are entirely of original make by the registered manufacturer and fully supported by
the Manufacturer's warranty. In the event that any alteration is made to the goods by a local agent or
any other intermediary, the approval of the SO Rep shall be sought and the result of the alteration
shall be fully supported by the Manufacturer such that the Manufacturer's warranty is maintained.
All references to local or foreign standards and/or Codes of Practice shall be deemed to be inclusive
of the prevailing amendments to these standards and/or Codes of Practice.
Samples of materials shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before order is placed with the
supplier.
Such approval by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that the materials are free from any defects, damages or any other flaws.
1.2.3
1.2.4
Reserved
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(60)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-61
1.2.5
Material as required
and/or as shown
Cost Adjustment
1.
No cost recovery
2.
3.
4.
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Cost Recovery
by the
Employer from
the Contractor
For lighting luminaires, in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the
material as required and/or as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way
of contract variation regardless of whether or not the approved sample and/or the material as required
and/or as shown are shown in the HDB Materials List.
For the purposes of this subclause only, the applicable HDB Materials List shall be the prevailing HDB
Materials List applicable at the time the Contractor submits the material for approval by the SO Rep.
Where cost recovery is required, the basis of such adjustment shall be the difference between the
price of the proposed material and that of the material as required and/or as shown (where one type
of material is specified) or that of the cheapest of the materials as required and/or as shown (where
more than one type of material is specified).
The Contractor shall point out to the SO Rep all items in the approved sample which do not comply
with the Specifications and/or Drawings.
Notwithstanding approval of the sample by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall be liable for any items in
the sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings and which the Contractor
has failed to point out to the SO Rep.
Where the Contract requires the Contractor to obtain materials from the HDB Materials List or where it
is specified that materials provided are subject to the approval of the SO Rep, such requirements shall
not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that the materials used or selected by them:
(a)
are free from defects, damages or faults;
(b)
are of merchantable quality and fit for their intended purpose; and
(c)
comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(61)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-62
1.2.6
1.2.6.1
Sample Unit
The Contractor shall provide at his own costs and expenses, for the inspection, testing and approval
of sample units for each of the different dwelling unit types as instructed by the SO Rep. These
sample units shall be truly representative of the actual units to be constructed in every respect
inclusive of all architectural details, architectural and structural features, finishes, services, fittings, etc.
The Contractor shall comply with the Quality Standards specified under this clause for setting up of
sample units and sample panels. The specifications, drawings or details shall be read in conjunction
with the quality standards specified under this clause. In case of discrepancies between the
specifications, drawings or details and the quality standards specified under this clause, the
Contractor shall obtain approval from the SO Rep before proceeding with the works.
The approved sample units shall be used as reference for the standard and quality of workmanship
and materials that are acceptable to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that the completed
Works (including works that are not listed in the quality standards specified under this clause) are at
least of the same standard and quality as that in the sample units.
The Contractor shall commence to construct the sample units when the structural works of the first
building block reaches the fifth (5th) storey floor slab. The contractor shall complete the sample units
within three (3) months from the aforesaid commencement date for inspection and approval by the
SO Rep.
The Contractor shall maintain the sample units to a clean, neat and tidy condition at all times.
Adequate artificial lightings shall be provided where possible and as directed by SO Rep all at the
Contractors cost and expense.
Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep in respect of these sample units, the Contractor shall not
be released from any of his duties and obligations as required of him under the Contract.
1.2.6.2
2.
ITEMS
Column/ Wall (Plaster
or skim finish)
3.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(62)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
QUALITY STANDARDS
Walls meet at right angles (deviation not to exceed 4mm over
300mm)
Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 1.2 m
No stain marks, paints drips and any visible damage
No crack
No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
Straightness of corners and joints
Beams meet at right angles (deviation not to exceed 4mm
over 300mm)
Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 1.2 m
No crack
Straightness of corners and joints
Surface should be visually even with no waviness or patches
due to patching works
Verticality (tolerance of max 3mm)
Evenly painted, no stain or scratches
No dent, rust or mortar dropping
Inner frame align with outer frame with consistent gap
Welding at joints ground even or flushed
Consistent gap between gate and unit slab (between 45mm
to 55mm)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-63
1.2.6
1.2.6.2
ITEMS
Door
5.
Wall Tiles
Floor:
a) Unfinished floor
b) Screed Finish
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(63)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(Contd)
(Contd)
QUALITY STANDARDS
Alignment/level with walls
No visible gaps between door frame and wall
Door surface and joints properly sanded down and with
consistent varnish finish (including on top and bottom of door
leaf )
Both leaves aligned when close (offset not more than 2mm)
Consistent gap between door & frame (not more than 5mm)
Warp not more than 2mm
Ease in opening and closing
No stain marks and any visible damage
Door and frame corners maintained at right angles
No sign of corrosion and any visible damage in ironmongery
or metal frame
Consistent gap between door & finished floor (between 3mm
to 10mm)
Door gap between door frame & finished floor to comply to
FSSDs requirements for fire-rated door
Consistent gap between door and unfinished floor level
(between 45mm to 55mm)
Verticality (tolerance of max 3mm)
Gap between HS door and unfinished floor level (not less
than 60mm)
No mortar stains or paint drips
No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
Consistent colour tone
Consistent and neat pointing
Consistent joint size
Lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not more than 1mm. For
homogenous tiles, the lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not
more than 0.8mm
Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 2m
Alignment of joints with floor tiles where applicable
Surface unevenness not more than 10mm within the unit
No foot print or indentation
No mortar dropping
No faeces stains
Ponding not deeper than 3 mm
No crack
No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
Surface unevenness not more than 3mm per 1.2m
No stain marks and any visible damage
Surfaces should not be unduly rough or patchy
Consistent skirting thickness and no gap between wall &
skirting
Bldg Spec
Page 1-64
1.2.6
1.2.6.2
ITEMS
c) Floor Tile
d) Timber floor
7.
Windows
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(64)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Painting
(Contd)
(Cont'd)
QUALITY STANDARDS
Surface unevenness for dry areas (without fall) not more than
3mm over 2m
Falls in wet areas should be in the correct direction towards
floor traps or discharge points
Consistent colour tone
Consistent skirting thickness
Consistent joint size
No mortar stains or paint drips
No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
Lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not more than 1mm. For
homogenous tiles, the lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not
more than 0.8mm
Consistent drop between kitchen and unfinished living room
floor (between 45mm and to 50mm)
Alignment of joints with wall tiles where applicable
No cracks and warpage
Timber strips to rest firmly on screed with no hollow sound
when tapped
No gaps in between timber strips (joint width not more than
0.5mm at localized areas)
Edges of the floor to be properly sealed
No unevenness between timber strips
Surface unevenness (not more than 3mm per 1.2m)
Consistent skirting thickness and no gap between wall &
skirting
Uniformity in timber strip tone
Surfaces are evenly varnished with no patchiness resulted
from touch up works
No stain marks and any visible damage
Alignment /level with wall openings (offset not more than
5mm)
No visible gap between window frame and wall
No sign of rainwater leakage
Ease of opening and closing
When closed, tight fit with no gap
No mortar droppings and paint drips on frames and glazing
Window leaf and frame corners maintained at right angles
Neat joint between window and wall internally and externally
Consistent gap between window leaf and frame (not more
than 5mm)
No dents, scratches or visible damage
Accessories firmly secured and functioning
Glazing clean, evenly sealed with gasket for aluminium
windows
Glazing no chips, cracks, scratches, mortar droppings, paint
drips
No obvious brush line
Surfaces are evenly painted
Good opacity, no patchiness resulted from touch up works
Free from peeling, blistering and chalkiness
No tonal variation, discoloration and fading
Bldg Spec
Page 1-65
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
Water
Water approved by the SO Rep shall be used for building purposes except where specified in
Clause 4.3 "Water". The Contractor shall pay for all charges and temporary plumbing required.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(65)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-66
1.2.12
1.2.12.1
For the purpose of this clause, these materials to be supplied by Employer shall hereinafter be
referred to as the Protected Materials and their respective quantities indicated by the Contractor
shall hereinafter be referred as the Protected Quantity for the purpose of this clause only.
.
1.2.12.2
Quantity To Be Supplied
The Contractor shall indicate the respective quantities of the above materials to be purchased from
the Employer in Annex D Part A of the Form of Tender, subject to the Maximum Protected Quantity
specified therein. The Maximum Protected Quantity indicated in Annex D Part A of the Form of
Tender does not include the quantity of concreting materials required for precast concrete
components that are supplied by the Employer.
The Contractor shall place his orders directly with the Employer and comply strictly with the
"Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer" as stipulated in Appendix A13. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in
compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause in the Contract Sum.
The SO Rep reserves the right to allocate the monthly quantity to the Contractor as well as to
nominate the Employers supplier. The Contractor shall absorb the total quantity allocated to him. If
the Contractor's requirement is more than the Employer's capacity to supply, the SO Rep may direct
the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources. In this event, the Contractor shall
bear any additional cost and expense so incurred.
1.2.12.3
Quantity To be Protected
The quantity to be covered under the provision of this clause shall be as stipulated in the Maximum
Protected Quantity (MPQ) or Protected Quantity (PQ) whichever applicable (hereinafter referred to as
the "Protected Quantity"). The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity at the Basic
Price.
In the event that the source of any precast concrete components listed in Annex F of the Form of
Tender is obtained from the Employer or where the Contractors production of precast components
are carried out in overseas precast plants, the Protected Quantity shall be reduced according to the
quantities indicated in the same Annex F and the Contractor shall be notified within one (1) month
from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
The HDB posted prices of the Protected Materials at any time shall be deemed to be those in the
HDB's Monthly Price Lists which are also available for viewing at the Procurement Office, Basement 1
HDB Hub.
The Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price for the Protected Materials
and Protected Quantity, at the date Fourteen (14) days before the closing date of the Tender
(hereinafter referred to as the "Basic Price"), for the Protected Materials. To illustrate: if a Tender
closes on the 14th day of a particular month, the Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on
the posted price prevailing on the last day of the preceding month.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(66)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-67
1.2.12
1.2.12.3
Quantity To be Protected
(CONTD)
(Contd)
In the event of the Contractor failing to obtain the Protected Quantity in full throughout the Time for
Completion and any time during which liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, a shortfall
recovery shall be effected using the following formula:
Amount of Shortfall Recovery
where:
PB x (QP - QA)
PB
QP
=
=
QA
Basic Price;
Protected Quantity
(MPQ or PQ where applicable);
Actual quantity purchased under this clause;
In a situation where the Employer is not able to supply in full the Protected Quantity and the SO Rep
has directed the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources, such purchases shall
not be covered by the provisions under this clause. However, for the purpose of ascertaining for
shortfall quantity, the quantity purchased from the Contractor's own source shall be included in QA
when determining whether the Contractor has obtained in full the Protected Quantity.
For this purpose, the Contractor shall be required to maintain proper documentary evidence of the
delivery of each of the materials and such evidence shall be duly endorsed by the SO Rep.
1.2.12.4
1.2.13
Project Name;
Project Location;
Contact details of relevant officer of the Employer overseeing the project;
Name of Importer of the Aggregates;
Quantity of Aggregates (Tonnes) Delivered;
Date of Delivery;
Intended Non-concreting Use of Aggregates;
The Contractor shall declare that he has obtained the SO Rep's permission for the intended nonconcreting use;
Location and Quantity of Aggregates Used;
Remarks.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(67)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-68
1.2.14
:
:
:
Note:
Please contact the Building Service Centre at Tel no. _________________ or Branch Office
Service Line at Tel no. ____-______ if you wish to return the tiles
For avoidance of tonal variation of the spare tiles, the Contractor shall keep record of each batch of
tiles installed in the residential units and set aside the spares tiles from the same batch.
All spare tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage or chipping. The spare tiles shall be
placed in the household shelter just before the residential units are handed over to the Employer.*
( * This is to allow BIT to check the household shelter floor tiles for defects during the handing over
inspections without obstruction posed by the spare tiles.)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(68)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-69
1.3
LABOUR
1.3.1
Labour Laws
The Contractor shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's working hours and holidays
in accordance with current laws and regulations. He shall keep records and produce them for
inspection by the SO Rep.
1.3.2
This information shall be recorded before any workman is allowed to commence duty. Appropriate
action will be taken by the SO Rep if the Contractor fails to record any of the abovementioned
information of any worker found at the Site.
1.3.3
1.3.4
Reserved
1.3.5
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(69)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-70
1.3
LABOUR
(CONTD)
1.3.6
1.4
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.1
1.4.2
Technical Specification
(a)
Concrete Pump
The concrete pump shall be either trailer mounted or truck mounted type. The pump shall have
an output of at least 40 m per hour of compacted concrete.
The pump shall be used for casting of slabs from the second storey to the roof of all building
Blocks / MSCP.
The requirement for provision of concrete pump may be waived at the discretion of the SO Rep
if an extra crane over and above the specified requirements is used to transport fresh concrete.
(b)
Crane
The crane shall be either crawler truck mounted, rough terrain or tower crane. The age of the
crane used on the Site shall not exceed 15 years.
The lifting capacity of the crawler truck mounted or rough terrain crane shall be at least
20 metric tonnes.
The moment capacity of the tower crane shall be at least 50 metre-tonnes.
The crane shall be based on the Site during the concreting stage. The concreting stage shall
be defined as the duration of concreting work from the second storey slab to the roof of all
building blocks.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(70)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-71
1.4
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.2
Technical Specification
(c)
(CONTD)
(Contd)
(d)
(e)
Formwork System
Generally, the Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and design calculations of all
formwork system to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance.
Trial setting out of the formwork system shall be carried out on the Site two weeks after
approval of the submission. Formwork support system of beams and slabs shall consist of
rigid steel props or steel frames of adequate strength.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(71)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-72
1.4
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.3
(CONTD)
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this Clause including all
subclauses under it.
In the event of the Contractor not providing all or any of the specified Construction Equipment to the
Site as required under this Clause, including all subclauses under it, without prejudice to the
Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or
rates specified hereunder and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies
due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from the
Contractor :
Type
Concrete Pump
Crane
Passenger cum Material Hoist
Rough Terrain Forklift
Formwork System
Rate Recoverable
$100,000 per number
$200,000 per number
$40,000 per number
$60,000 per number
$150,000 per set per building block
The above rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and
Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the provision of the specified
Construction Equipment. In addition to the abovementioned recovery, the SO Rep may also exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.
In the event the SO Rep approves in writing that all or any of the specified Construction Equipment
need not be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate
or rates specified above in this subclause and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer
from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt
from the Contractor. In such event, the SO Rep may not impose any charge under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities" against the Contractor.
In the event approval in writing is given by the SO Rep for the replacement of a concrete pump with
an extra crane over and above the specified requirement for provision of cranes, there shall be no
recovery by the Employer from the Contractor. In such event, the additional costs arising out of the
replacement shall not be reimbursed by the Employer to the Contractor.
Notwithstanding other provisions in this Clause including all subclauses under it, if the Contractor
incurs additional costs and expenses over and above the agreed rate or rates specified above in
complying with the requirements stipulated in this Clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such
additional costs and expenses in full.
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause including all subclauses under it, (including
questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(72)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-73
1.4
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.4
Maintenance
(CONTD)
All Construction Equipment provided to the Site shall be kept in good working order at all times and
the Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations vis-a-vis the said Construction Equipment.
(a)
Mobile Crane
Before operating a mobile crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i)
Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the
crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;
(ii)
(iii)
The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site.
Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for
inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :
(b)
(i)
Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation.
licensed crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;
The
(ii)
Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months; and
(iii)
Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane
once in every six months.
Tower Crane
Before operating a tower crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i)
Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the
crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;
(ii)
(iii)
Record of checking the installation and functioning of safety devices by the Authorised
Examiner; and
(iv)
The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site.
Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for
inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(73)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation.
licensed crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;
The
(ii)
Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months;
(iii)
Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the installation and functioning of the safety
devices once in every six months; and
Bldg Spec
Page 1-74
1.4
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.4
Maintenance (Cont'd)
(b)
(CONTD)
Tower Crane
(iv)
Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane
once in every six months.
For every extension of height made on the tower mast and before operating the crane with the
new height, the Contractor shall engage the Authorised Examiner to conduct test and thorough
visual examination on the crane.
(c)
Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the
hoist shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site;
(ii)
(iii)
The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site.
Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for
inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall:
(d)
(i)
Require an authorised hoist operator to check and operate the hoist daily before
operation;
(ii)
Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three
months;
(iii)
(iv)
Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist
once in every three months.
(v)
The swing gates are to be maintained, checked and certified to be in good working
condition by the Authorised Examiner every month.
(vi)
Interlocking gates shall be provided at every lift landing level and they shall comply with
the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation including any
amendment or re-enactment thereto.
Authorised Examiner
For the purposes of this Clause including all subclause under it, the Authorised Examiner is
any person who is approved by the Commissioner for Workplace Safety and Health of the
Ministry of Manpower by a Certificate in writing for the purpose of carrying out examinations
and tests on lifting equipment in accordance with the Workplace Safety & Health (General
Provisions) Regulations.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(74)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-75
1.4
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.5
(CONTD)
All Construction Equipment used at the Site as specified hereunder shall be obtained from Approved
Suppliers registered with HDB. Such Construction Equipment are :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
mobile crane;
tower crane;
gondola;
mast climbing platform; and
metal scaffold.
The HDB Materials List can be inspected at HDB website ; www.hdb.gov.sg and http://ml.eptc.sg.
For Construction Equipment obtained from other sources, such Construction Equipment shall firstly be
registered with the HDB before the Contractor can use such Construction Equipment at the Site.
Where, such Construction Equipment is used at the Site for a duration of less than a week, the
SO Rep may at his sole discretion, waive the aforementioned requirement. Under such a case, there
shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(75)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-76
1.4
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.6
(CONTD)
Equipment
Concreting
For concreting.
Boom lift
Scissors lift
Telescopic handler
Automatic wheel
washer
Rate Recoverable
Boom lift
Scissors lift
Telescopic handler
In addition to the abovementioned recovery, the SO Rep may also exercise his rights under
Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities to impose a charge against the Contractor for his
failure to provide and deploy the specified construction equipment.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(76)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-77
1.5
SAFETY
1.5.1
General Requirement
The Contractor shall allow for the compliance with the Workplace Safety & Health Act
(hereafter referred to as "the Act" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under
it) and its Subsidiary Legislation including the provisions of the Workplace Safety and Health
(Construction) Regulations (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations" for the purposes of this
clause including all subclauses under it) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. The
subsidiary legislations are:(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Precedent to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of
Registration, under the Act and its subsidiary legislation, The Workplace Safety And Health
(Registration Of Factories) Regulations.
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Act and its
Subsidiary Legislation, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related
to any work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall
not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles
of safe and sound practice.
The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. All safety provisions
shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the
SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by
his workmen when safety provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety
provisions, to be used unless he has satisfied himself that the provisions are safe. The
Contractor shall submit a safety management system to the SO Rep within 14 days from the
date of the Letter of Acceptance for approval prior to the commencement of the Works.
The submission of the safety management system shall comply with and be kept in the site
office and made available for reference at all times.
The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, site canteen, exit/entry points of
buildings and passenger cum material hoist area.
The Contractor shall submit drawings, detailings and calculation for all temporary structures as
required, certified by his Professional Engineer, for approval at least one week before the
commencement of the Works unless otherwise specified. The approval of the SO Rep shall not
relieve the Contractor and his Professional Engineer of the need to ensure the adequacy and
sufficiency of the safety provisions.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all cost and expense for the
safety provisions and for all additional costs that may arise from amendments to the Act and its
Subsidiary Legislation or changes in the requirements of MOM and the HDB.
The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Regulations and the requirements
specified hereunder are strictly complied with at all times.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(77)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-78
1.5
SAFETY
1.5.1
(CONTD)
(Contd)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(78)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-79
1.5
SAFETY
1.5.1
(CONTD)
(Contd)
(Contd)
The overlying screening net shall be installed on the entire external face of the access scaffold
and its installation shall follow the erection of the metal access scaffold closely. The SO Rep
shall have the right to decide on the colour of the net all at the Contractors cost and expense.
The metal access scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tiebacks. All tie-backs shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
(c)
: 15mm square
: Minimum 350D
: Single or English knot
The vertical supports of mesh barricade shall be effectively anchored to the building structure.
All vertical supports shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
The mesh barricade shall be erected according to a pre-determined safe work procedure
established by the Contractor, or substantially dismantled, by trained erectors, under the
immediate supervision of a competent supervisor. The mesh barricade and its components
shall only be erected and dismantled by workers using life-line and safety belts or other
equivalent, if not better, means of preventing a fall.
The Contractor shall under no circumstance, use the prefabricated mesh barricade and vertical
supports for other purposes.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(79)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-80
1.5
SAFETY
1.5.1
(CONTD)
(Contd)
(e)
(f)
Working Platforms For Lift Shafts, Central Refuse Chute And Voids
The Contractor shall provide working platforms, according to the design of his Professional
Engineer, for the erection of lift shafts and void walls except for central refuse chute. The lift
shaft and central refuse chute platforms shall effectively cover the voids at alternate storeys.
The lift shaft, central refuse chute and void wall platforms shall be left in place until approval is
given by the SO Rep to remove them.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(80)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-81
1.5
SAFETY
1.5.1
(CONTD)
(Contd)
(h)
(i)
Barricades To Lift Openings, Voids, The Open Sides Of Buildings And Excavations
The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids and the open sides of buildings
and excavations where a person is liable to fall. The barricade shall be at least 1.1m high with
90mm high toeboard and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a lateral point
load of 50 kg. All services opening shall be fully covered and secured to prevent unauthorised
removal.
(j)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(81)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-82
1.5
SAFETY
1.5.1
(CONTD)
(Contd)
(l)
Enhanced Hoarding
Where the buildings under construction are more than 6 stories and less than 30m away from
the Site contract boundary within or next to build-up areas, the Contractor shall provide a 6m
hoarding with an overhead shelter. The design and position of the enhanced hoarding shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The design and material requirements shall be in
accordance with subclause 1.1.52.2 (or as amended) Erection And Removal Of Temporary
Metal Hoarding. The hoarding shall be cleared away upon the instruction of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall also barricade all unauthorized entries/exits at first storey open sides by
using at least 1m high orange PVC netting with steel cables going through the top and midheight of the netting. The steel cables shall act as supports for the barricade.
(m)
Safety Training
(i)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(82)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-83
1.5.1
Safety Training
(ii)
(Cont'd)
(Cont'd)
Applicable To
Safety Coordinator
Supervisors
Refresher programme
Familiarisation programme
Crane Operators
Erectors
Slingers/Riggers Course
Familiarisation Programme
Crane Operators
Supervisors
The safety training shall be applicable to all levels of employees/staff stipulated in this
subclause including top management at the work Site.
Particular attention shall be given to the needs of young employees/staff.
training shall be required where :
(1)
(2)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(83)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Further
Bldg Spec
Page 1-84
1.5.1
(Cont'd)
(o)
Access For The Use Of Mobile Crane And Piling Machines Next To Built-Up Area
Where the Contractor uses mobile cranes and piling machines on the Site which is next to
existing buildings or public roads or MRT lines, the access for the mobile cranes and piling
machines shall be of steel plates or reinforced concrete or bituminous pavement as approved
by the SO Rep. All such access shall be provided over adequate compacted hardcore base.
The Contractor shall provide full access for the movement of the cranes and piling machines
and for their lifting or pile driving operations. The access shall be able to distribute the load so
as not to exceed the bearing capacity of the underlying materials.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the access. The drawings and calculations
endorsed by the PE shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the construction of
the access. The access shall be constructed according to the approved Drawings and
maintained in a good condition at all times throughout the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The access shall be
inspected by the Contractor's PE prior to its use.
(p)
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(84)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-85
1.5.1
(Cont'd)
Mobile Crane
The Contractor shall submit layout and details of the crane access to the SO Rep for approval
prior to the use of the crane on the access. The Contractor shall ensure and check that the
crane access is properly constructed. The Contractor shall keep all records of inspections of
the crane access at the Site and produce them for examination when requested by the
SO Rep. The boom of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside
the contract boundary without the written approval of the SO Rep. All the hoisting area must
be effectively barricaded.
The Contractor shall ensure the installation of barriers to warn the crane operator of
depressions, excavated areas and other obstructions.
Moment limiters shall be installed for all cranes. The Safety Factor for mobile crane shall have
a minimum of 1.3, which includes the built-in factor of safety for the mobile crane. The lifting
load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader beam and the lifting device. The
tip-load shall have the capacity to hoist the heaviest component including all necessary lifting
appliances. A Permit-To-Hoist must be obtained before any hoisting operation is carried out.
The Contractor shall station a lifting supervisor on the Site to oversee and guide the crane
operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. The cranes shall be tested by an "Authorised
Examiner" before its use on the Site irrespective of any valid test certificate. The Contractor
shall ensure daily checks are carried out by the crane operator and maintenance checks
conducted once every three months. The crane must have overhaul checks before it is used
on the Site. Test certificate, overhaul certificates, maintenance certificates, inspection records
by the crane operator, data on the Authorised Examiners and the Contractor's site engineer
shall be properly documented, kept on the Site and produced for inspection by the SO Rep.
(r)
(ii)
The contractor shall carry out risk analysis based on the positions of the cranes to decide
which cranes would be suitable for deploying such crane operators. Generally, this
means that such operators should operate tower cranes that are at least 50m away from
any existing buildings and facilities, and the collapse zone of the crane does not overlap
with existing buildings.
(iii)
Riggers and signalmen shall also be appointed for all lifting operations and they must have
completed an approved training course.
The crane operator, lifting supervisor, rigger and signalman shall carry out their duties strictly
according to the abovementioned Regulations and other duties as the SO Rep deems
necessary from time to time.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(85)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-86
1.5.1
(Cont'd)
(s)
Temporary Staircases
The Contractor shall provide and maintain 0.8m minimum wide temporary metal staircases
from one working floor to another. The staircases shall be placed against the adjacent
staircase walls or formwork of the staircase walls that are under construction. The outer sides
of the staircases shall be provided with metal handrails 1.1m above the outer staircase strings.
The bottom of the staircases shall be covered fully with metal plate.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the staircases. The Professional Engineer's
drawings, detailings and calculation shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the
construction of the staircases.
(t)
(u)
(v)
Others
The Contractor shall provide and maintain guards or fences or barriers around excavations, lift
pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. The guards, fences and
barriers shall be of sound material, good construction and possess adequate strength.
At the site entrance gate, the Contractor shall provide a gantry fitted with a height control
device and a siren to control the height limit of construction vehicle/machinery when they leave
the Site. This limit shall comply with the requirements of LTA.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain storey number indicators of size 400mm x 400mm at
every staircase area and 900mm x 900mm at the metal scaffold enclosing passenger cum
material hoist. The indicators shall be displayed at alternate storeys starting from the second
storey.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(86)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-87
1.5.2
Safety Infringement
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for complying with the
safety requirements.
The SO Rep will conduct periodic inspections on the provision of safety measures with the
Contractor's site safety supervisor or the Contractor's Representative. The Contractor shall rectify
immediately any contravention of or non-compliance with the Workplace Safety and Health Act and its
Subsidiary Legislation, Workplace Safety and Health (Construction) Regulations or safety measures
specified. All Works or part of the Works may be stopped when the SO Rep considers the working
environment or procedure is unsafe for Works to continue. In such event, the SO Rep shall exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor
and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of Time for
Completion.
If the contravention is not rectified by the subsequent inspection, the SO Rep may exercise his right
under clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a further charge against the Contractor.
Upon any accident or dangerous occurrence, occurring on the Site, the SO Rep, HDB or any
Competent Authority may order a total or partial stoppage of the Works, depending on the nature and
extent of the accident/dangerous occurrence, to allow for investigations and/or to carry out remedial
measures. Under such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or
extension of Time for Completion.
The SO Rep shall, at its absolute discretion, also exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for the following type of incidents occurring in
the course of or arising out of or in consequence of the Works :
1.5.3
(i)
Fatal accident, if the SO Rep or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the accident is the
result of the defaults, acts, omissions or negligence, in part or in whole, of the Contractor.
(ii)
Other accident which the SO Rep, HDB or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the
accident is the result of failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety
measures stipulated in the Contract or the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary
Legislation, the Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations.
(iii)
Dangerous occurrence as classified in the Subsidiary Legislation, Workplace Safety and Health
(Incident Reporting) Regulations, Part II if the SO Rep, HDB or the Competent Authority is of
the opinion that the dangerous occurrence is the result of failure of the Contractor to provide
necessary and sufficient safety measures stipulated in the Contract or the Workplace Safety &
Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, the Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting)
Regulations.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(87)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-88
1.6
Omitting building materials or labour, reducing the sizes of the materials, using inferior
materials; or materials constructed not according to the Specifications or Drawings;
(ii)
Creating nuisance at the Site thereby causing inconvenience to the SO Rep or the public or
committing similar acts (such as not complying with site safety requirements, etc.) which are
likely to bring the Employer into disrepute;
(iii)
the SO Rep reserves the right to impose on the Contractor, and the Contractor hereby fully accepts
and agrees to pay without dispute or question, a charge based on prevailing guidelines set by the
Employer but not exceeding $100,000/-, and for contract with a Contract Sum of less than $300,000/-,
a charge not exceeding 30% of the Contract Sum per occasion as agreed compensation to the
Employer for the inconvenience caused, investigation and administrative expenses incurred by the
Employer and for damage to the Employer's reputation and standing generally. Furthermore, the
Contractor may be barred from tendering for a specified period.
In addition to the above charges, the SO Rep or HDB is empowered either :
(a)
to order any irregular work to be removed and made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep or
HDB at the Contractor's own costs and expenses;
or
(b)
in lieu of correcting work not done in accordance with the Contract, the SO Rep or HDB may
allow such work to remain and shall recover any cost differences between the specified
requirements and the non-compliance.
For nuisance committed on the Site, the Contractor shall take immediate action to cease the nuisance
committed upon instruction given by the SO Rep or HDB.
1.7
1.7.1
the technical requirements and standards in the conduct of the surveys as specified in the
latest version of the land surveyors board directive on engineering and hydrographic survey
practices;
(b)
the technical requirements and standards in the conduct of the surveys as specified in the
latest Singapore Land Authority (SLA) directive on cadastral survey practices;
(c)
circulars that are issued from time to time by the Chief Surveyor, Singapore, SLA.
(d)
all field works and office works are executed by the registered surveyor or qualified staff under
the registered surveyor direct supervision and direction;
(e)
all documents and survey works pertaining to the survey are certified and dated by the
registered surveyor supervising the survey.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(88)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-89
1.7
1.7.2
(CONTD)
All forms of land survey services required for the purpose to facilitate the construction works or survey
works requested by HDB in relation to the construction of the projects are to be performed by the
contractors registered surveyor. Such surveys shall include the setting out of parcel boundaries,
grids, piles position, building blocks, minor sewer and service roads alignments, etc. piles eccentricity
checks survey, topographical survey of surrounding services and roads, as-built survey of services
and preparation of setting out plans, cross-sectional and longitudinal plans and surveys to monitor
ground settlement, where applicable.
The Registered Surveyor engaged by the Contractor to prepare the pre-computation plan shall ensure
the approved pre-computation plan tallies with the Consultants drawings. The Contractor receiving
the approved pre-computation plan shall also check that it tallies with the Consultants drawings. Prior
to the setting out of the piles position, the Contractor shall ensure that the distance between the piles
position and the parcel boundary, the distance between the piles position and the building block, and
the distance between the piles position and the gridlines are according to the Consultants drawings.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(89)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-90
1.8
The nature of sites and soils both above and below ground with respect to various stages of
construction in particular the possible existence of boulders/granite underground and other
buried materials which have to be removed from site.
(b)
The provision of temporary access for traffic diversion while work is in progress to ensure
undisrupted movement of traffic at all times.
(c)
(d)
The availability, supply of and conditions affecting labour within the Time for Completion.
(e)
The effect of other contractors or persons approved by the SO Rep, working within the contract
area.
(f)
The probable adverse effect of the weather on the execution of the Contract.
(g)
The effect of execution of works due to the presence of hard soil strata, existing services, etc.
(h)
The means of access to facilitate the transportation and movement of construction equipment.
(i)
(j)
The provision of earth drains; silt traps and the requirements to deal with drain diversion.
(k)
All aspects of local conditions, physical or otherwise, at the site that pertains to or affects in any
way the construction works required at the site concerned.
(l)
The effect of encountering various existing cables, pipes, sewers, etc. which may require
diversion.
(m)
(n)
The necessary re-instatement of all affected turfing areas and works affected by this contract.
The Contractor must also ascertain for himself the most convenient and expeditious method of
carrying out the work. The working conditions and the space to be made available as a work site
should be inspected and no claims will be allowed on the ground of lack of knowledge of the
conditions under which the work will be executed.
The Contractor shall note that all information regarding existing levels given in the drawings only
serve as a guide and he shall obtain his own information whenever he is doubtful.
No claim by the Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any
misunderstanding or misinterpretation in respect of any such matter nor shall the Contractor be
released from any risks or obligations imposed on or undertaken by him under the Contract on any
such ground or on the ground that he did not or could not foresee any matter which might affect or
have affected the execution of the Works.
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(90)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-91
1.9
Turfing of 5m width around the building edge or up to drain edge or road kerb, whichever is the
lesser, including all abutting footpaths have been completed.
(c)
The supporting civil engineering Works, such as the minor sewer lines, the access road or
service road and road side drains leading to and around the building block have been
completed and ready to serve the building block, for cases where such civil engineering Works
are incorporated in the Works.
(d)
The multi-storey carpark (MSCP) to serve the building block has been completed.
The Contractor shall comply with the preceding additional requirements and procedures in full before
the Superintending Officer issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have included in the Contract Sum, for all costs and expenses for complying with the
requirements stipulated in this clause.
The driveways and service road, together with the MSCP phase, shall be completed at least 1 month
ahead of the first residential block. Minor sewers shall be completed at least 2 months ahead of the
first residential block. The last phase (site works) shall be completed not later than 2 months after the
last residential block phase.
The Liquidated Damages as stipulated in the Appendix to Public Sector Standard Conditions Of
Contract (PSSCOC) of this contract shall still apply to the phases with shortened time for completion.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum, for all costs and expenses for
complying with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
Section 2/.....
BLDG13/S01.DOCX(91)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Bldg Spec
Page 2-1
SECTION 2
PILING
2.1
Where the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender provides for the rates of the specified piling
system to be indicated by the Contractor, the Contractor shall fill in all such tender rates clearly. Where the
Tender Cost Breakdown does not provide such rates to be filled in by the Contractor even though the item
of work involves piling, such piling work is deemed to be included in the Contract Sum for the said item of
work.
2.2
PILING EQUIPMENT/MACHINERY
The type of piling machine adopted shall be able to install piles taking into account the headroom
constraint and proximity of the piles to the existing building.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient piling machines and accessory equipment at any one time
throughout the contract period. The use of diesel piling machines is strictly disallowed in the contract.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary piling equipment/machinery to overcome obstructions such as
hard soil layers, concrete or rocks, etc. such that when these obstructions are encountered the piles can
be installed to the required depth for their sound performance.
2.3
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-2
2.4
WORK SCHEDULES
The Contractor shall submit a progress schedule showing the number of piling rigs, the rate of progress
and the time required for piling and follow up works to the SO Rep as soon as that site is handed to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the approved schedule otherwise he shall be liable for
Liquidated Damages.
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing the dates of arrival and departure of each piling rig at
every site. No piling rig shall leave a site without prior approval of the SO Rep.
2.5
2.6
PLATFORM LEVEL
The Contractor shall check and ensure that the platform level as indicated in the piling plans tallies with
the corresponding architectural plans and structural plans. The Contractor shall highlight to the SO Rep if
there is difference of platform levels indicated in different sets of plans before commencement of works.
2.7
2.8
CABLES/SERVICES DETECTION
The Contractor shall visit and examine the site carefully and ascertain its nature and make provision in the
Tender Price for the type of ground conditions, constraints and presence of any underground services.
The Contractor is to provide cables/services detecting devices to locate all existing cables/services prior to
the commencement of excavation or piling work. He shall engage PUB licensed cables/services detecting
companies to carry out all cable/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or piling work
shall be checked for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes in a grid
formation to cover the entire area of work.
The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep where mains, pipe or conduit are encountered during excavation
and where any excavation is carried out adjacent to or under any existing cable, pipe, structure; or any
other such work that may be affected by subsidence, regardless of whether such work is shown on the
Drawings or not. If it becomes essential, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the SO Rep may direct and the
Contractor shall be paid for this additional work unless in the opinion of the SO Rep such additional work
has been necessitated by the Contractor's negligence, lack of foresight or faulty workmanship.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-3
2.8
CABLES/SERVICES DETECTION
(CONTD)
In the event that damages have been caused to the public services due to the Contractor's work or
otherwise, all expenditure for such necessary repairs etc incurred by the relevant public Authorities shall
be borne by the Contractor regardless of whether such repairs are due to accident or otherwise. The costs
for such repairs shall be deducted from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or by direct
payment by the Contractor to the Authorities.
If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, it is essential to permanently divert any cable, pipe or other services, the
cost of diversion shall be paid for by the Employer.
2.9
2.10
The PE shall submit a vibration monitoring layout plan. The allowable vibration level must be
explicitly stated in the submission.
(b)
The PE shall submit his design drawing on retaining works and instrumentation monitoring
programme. The allowable ground movements for excavation work must be explicitly stated in the
submission.
(c)
The Contractor and his PE shall carry out a pre-construction survey on all the neighbouring
properties. A Registered Surveyor has to be engaged in the process if necessary. The Contractor
and his PE shall extend a copy of the survey report to the owners of all the neighbouring
properties.
(d)
The Contractor and his PE shall carry out crack monitoring to measure movement across cracks in
vertical and horizontal directions.
(e)
Four sets of the comprehensive reports shall be submitted within two weeks after the completion of the
monitoring works.
The Contractor and his PE shall be fully responsible on the adequacy of the above designs and
submissions. The PE shall be aware of his responsibility as spelt out by BCAs circulars and
announcements in making the above submissions. All of the above requirements are to be complied with
before commencement of works.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-4
2.11
2.12
2.13
TESTING OF MATERIALS
The SO Rep may appoint independent persons to carry out test on materials to be used in the works. The
cost of conducting any test shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise specified.
The SO Rep may cause a sample to be taken from each consignment of materials to be tested and the
results of such testing shall be accepted as final. Any material test that fails shall be considered not to
have fulfilled the requirements. In that event, the SO Rep may, without prejudice to other rights under the
Contract, order such further test(s) as he deems necessary, all at the cost and expense of the Contractor.
In addition, the whole consignment may be liable to be rejected and shall be removed from site at the
Contractor's own expense when directed by the SO Rep.
The costs of the failed tests together with all administrative expenses incurred shall be borne by the
Contractor. All the tests as and when directed by the SO Rep. must be carried out at HDBs Engineering
Materials Laboratory or Accredited Laboratories
2.14
RESERVED
2.15
REMOVAL OF OBSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall allow for at his own cost, excavation in any material to remove obstructions which
prevent driving / drilling or which interfere with the proper alignment of the piles, timbering, backfilling,
restoration of ground surrounding the piles and any other works necessary to complete the operation to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep. No claims for standing time for rigs will be allowed in consequence of any
kind.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-5
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-6
2.20
LOAD TESTS
(a)
(b)
2.21
(ii)
any portion of the pile has failed, crumbled or distorted from its original position; or
(iii)
In the event of failure of this ultimate load test on the test pile, instrumented or non-instrumented as the
case may be, ONE (1) further test (including the installation of the test piles) shall be carried out at the
Contractor's expense. In addition, for bored pile system, the compensating ultimate load test shall be
carried out as an instrumented bored pile at the Contractor's expense. If the subsequent test fails again,
the ultimate load test results may be used to assess the suitability of the pile type, pile design and layout
proposed, or more further tests (including the installation of the test piles) may be ordered by the SO's
Rep if deemed necessary all at the Contractors cost and expense.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-7
2.22
The test load may be applied to the pile by jacking against kentledge or anchor pile. The clear
distance between a test pile and any anchor pile shall not be less than 3 metres. Where piles are in
groups, the use of other working piles as anchor piles may be allowed subject to the approval of
the SO Rep. Notwithstanding such approval the Contractor shall be solely responsible for making
good as the SO Rep considers necessary any damage to such anchor piles which are used as
permanent piles.
(b)
Pile top levels of test piles shall be recorded immediately after selection and in any case before the
erection of kentledge platform. This shall be done by reading levels on two diagonally opposite
corners of the pile top.
(c)
All test equipment such as surveying level, oil pumps and hydraulic jacks shall be accurate and in
sound condition. Prior to commencement of test, Certificates shall be submitted to the SO Rep to
show the date of last checking for accuracy. The last calibration date of all test equipment must not
be more than three months or as directed by the SO Rep.
(d)
The hydraulic pump for the jack shall, when required, be encased in a steel or wooden box under
lock and key. The area surrounding the test pile shall be cordoned off by protective fencing.
(e)
In the preparation of all test piles the Contractor shall ensure the rigidity of the supports at all
corners of the platform. If piles are required to support the platform they shall be installed at
Contractor's own expense.
(f)
If any test is discontinued or fails to reach the specified load due to (a) faulty jack or gauge, (b)
unstable support of kentledge, (c) cracking in or damage to the pile, (d) the datums not being set
out properly, (e) unstable benchmark or scales, (f) pre-jacking or pre-loading or any other cause,
then the test shall be abandoned and the results disregarded. A further test shall be carried out at
Contractor's own expense.
(g)
The settlement shall be measured to an accuracy of not less than half mm from a datum which
must be on an immovable structure or be on a pile and it shall not be affected by any movement of
the ground due to the test loading, driving of piles or any other causes.
(h)
For Standard Load Test, the test load shall be imposed by equal increments at approved intervals
of load equivalent to 25% of the working load of the pile with each load increment being maintained
for at least 15 minutes until the full test load is reached. This test load at the nominal working load
shall be maintained for 24 hours before the operation to load the pile to its full test load (2 times the
nominal working load) is continued. The full test load shall remain for a period of no less than 3
(three) days or as directed by the SO Rep. The results shall be plotted to produce a loadsettlement curve.
(i)
For Ultimate Load Test, the test load shall be imposed by equal increments at approved intervals of
load equivalent to 25% of the working load of the pile with each load increment being maintained
for at least 15 minutes until the full test load is reached. This test load at the nominal working load
and at two times nominal working load shall be maintained for 24 hours before the operation to
load the pile to its full test load (3 times the nominal working load) is continued. The full test load
shall remain for a period of no less than 3 (three) days or as directed by the SO Rep. The result
shall be plotted to produce a load-settlement curve.
(j)
All pile load test shall be carried out in compliance with CP4: 2003. Amongst other requirements, a
calibrated load gauge and a calibrated pressure gauge shall be used to measure the force exerted
on the pile under test.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-8
2.23
2.24
SOUNDNESS OF WORK
The Contractor shall be aware that load tests on piles are conducted for the purpose of studying the
behaviour of piles and in particular settlement under load. As not every pile can be tested, the Contractor
shall ensure that all piles are installed such that the total settlement or differential settlement shall be
limited to a maximum angle of 1:500 so that the building to be supported will not be damaged due to
settlement. For bored piles in buildings of ten(10) storeys or taller, the Contractor shall monitor and submit
the settlement records at various selected columns to the SO's Rep.
The acceptance of a few piles which pass the load tests does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility for the soundness of the whole of the pile foundation. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for ensuring that all the piles are installed to such a depth that the required resistance is
obtained.
2.25
2.26
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-9
2.27
2.28
2.29
All preliminary works on site including the setting up of site office, test cube shed, water supply, washing bay,
etc.
(b)
The provision and mobilisation of piling rig to install any size of piles including hammer or auger and all
necessary accessories, equipment, tools and appliances brought to the site, erection, movement of piling rig
from pile to pile and from building block to other building block within the piling site, dismantling and removal on
completion of the work on site.
(c)
The installation of piles to any level below ground level including rocks and to a resistance as specified,
including the supply, use and removal of drilling mud or steel casings to support the borehole prior to
concreting or cement grouting.
(d)
The setting out of all pile positions in accordance with the drawings.
(e)
To excavate in any material and cut back piles to cut-off level as specified.
(f)
(g)
The removal of all spoil, cement slurry and water from site or pile pits as directed by the SO Rep.
(h)
(i)
(j)
The observance of all other directions, instructions and clauses contained in all documents forming this tender
and the carrying out of the complete work to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and in accordance with the
Specifications.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-10
2.30
(a)
For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre) for the respective pile size is shown in
the Form Of Tender
The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total actual pay
length and the Basic Rate per metre.
The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the specified cut-off level of the pile to
the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the accuracy of the nearest 10mm.
The Basic Rate for the respective pile size shall be derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (metre) for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender*
The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate as derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*
The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate as derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of Tender.
(b)
For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre tonne) for the respective pile size is
shown in the Form Of Tender
The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total metretonne and the Basic Rate per metre tonne.
The metre-tonne of each pile shall be the product of the actual pay length of the pile and the
nominal working load of the pile. The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the
specified cut-off level of the pile to the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the
accuracy of the nearest 10mm.
The Basic Rate for the respective pile type shall be derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Type in the Form of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (metre tonne) for Respective Pile Type in the Form of Tender*
The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate as derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*
The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate as derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of Tender.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-11
2.31
2.32
2.32.1
2.32.2
2.32.3
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-12
2.32
2.32.4
(CONTD)
The length of new steel pile sections delivered to piling site shall be 12 m long. If the Contractor intends to
use steel pile sections of other lengths, the approval of the SO Rep must first be obtained prior to their
delivery to the stockyard or piling site.
2.32.5
2.32.6
(a)
Jointed steel sections shall not be used in pile groups of less than 4 piles.
(b)
For pile groups of four or more piles, the number of jointed section piles shall be not more than one
out of every four piles.
(c)
The length of each jointed section shall not be longer than 12 metres nor should be shorter than 9
metres, comprising not more than three short sections shop-welded together, each short section
being not less than 3 metres. All joints shall have splice plates at both flanges.
(d)
All jointed sections piles shall be straight, free from dents and corrosion pits. They shall be
measured and properly recorded before installation.
(e)
All jointed section piles shall be fabricated from sections obtained from the same site. Jointed
section piles built up from sections imported from another site shall be strictly prohibited.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-13
2.32
2.32.7
set
temporary compression
full length and serial numbers of steel sections
reduced level at top of pile
reduced cut-off level
pay length
time of completion
inclination of the pile
The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before driving commences.
The method of measuring the set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The
above record must show a series of sets and temporary compressions measured during the process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile has commenced, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
Immediately after a pile reaches its final set, the reduced level of the top of the pile section shall be
certified so that the exact pay length of the pile may be recorded.
2.32.8
2.32.9
2.32.10
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-14
2.32
2.32.10
(Contd)
Three sets of test reports, endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer, shall be submitted to the
SO Rep one week after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain such detailed information
such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis of the test results, etc.
The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form.
2.32.11
2.32.12
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-15
2.33
2.33.1
System of Piling
The system and equipment offered by the Contractor for installation of large diameter bored piles:
(a)
shall be capable of sinking bored holes with a range of diameters between 600 mm and 1800 mm
and to a depth ranging from 10 m to 60 m depending on the nature of the ground.
(b)
may include, Flight Auger type system as the principal method for the work in general.
(c)
shall be capable of being modified to deal with whatever strata encountered, by the addition of
further cutting or extraction or protective devices as may be required to deal with all ground
conditions including:
1. Water bearing ground
2. Soft ground which caves in unless supported
3. Medium stiff or stiff clays
4. Sands or sandstone
5. Coarse gravels
6. Very stiff clays
7. Boulders and granite bedrocks
8. Thinly bedded shales
9. Tree roots or buried trunks
(d)
shall generate the minimum degree of vibration when operating alongside weak structures or until
such depth is reached where vibrations may be dissipated without damage to existing foundations.
(e)
shall be capable of sinking and removing casings for the support of the boreholes to whatever
depth that may be required (to the full depth of the borehole where necessary) and without
disturbance to the ground surrounding the pile.
(f)
Cement
All cement used in the works shall be from approved local manufacturers except otherwise permitted by
the SO Rep. Where cement is specified it shall comply with SS26 and BS12. The SO Rep may make test
of the quality specified at the Contractor's own expense. With each delivery, the Contractor may be
required to send to the SO Rep a memorandum of the quantity delivered and the manufacturer's test
certificate. Unless otherwise specified, the compressive strength test shall be used to determine the
strength of cement.
2.33.3
Aggregates
The materials used as aggregates shall be strong, hard, durable and free from clay lumps and organic
and other impurities. All materials and grading of aggregates shall comply with SS 31. Notwithstanding the
above, fine aggregates for concrete shall be clean well graded sand, free from clay, loam or organic
matter. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep prior to their use as
fine aggregates.
Coarse aggregates for concrete shall be clean crushed granite, well graded between the limits of 5 mm
and 20 mm. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep prior to their
use as coarse aggregates.
2.33.4
Steel
Steel reinforcement shall be obtained from local manufacturer or other manufacturers as may be
approved in writing by the SO Rep and shall comply with SS2, SS 18, SS 32, BS 4449, BS 4461, BS 4482
and BS 4483 wherever applicable. All reinforcement shall be free from scale and all loose rust. It shall not
be coated with any grease, oil, paint or adhering earth that may impair the bond between the concrete and
reinforcement.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-16
2.33
2.33.5
2.33.6
Concrete Strength
The compressive strength of the concrete shall not be less than the strength in the following :
Class (Grade) of
Concrete
Grade 35
2.33.7
28 days
28
38
Ready-Mix Concrete
The Contractor must obtain prior approval from the SO Rep who will, inter alia, require to be satisfied that
the propose supplier will adhere to this Specification and that the quality and control of the mix are
satisfactory and comply with SS 119 and BS 1926. The SO Rep shall have access to the concrete
batching plant of the Contractor's ready-mix concrete supplier during all working hours of the plant. The
ready-mix concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete as outlined in
this Specification, and the Contractor shall arrange and pay for the making of all requisite tests.
Ready-mix concrete shall only be transported in continuous mixing trucks and comply with the
manufacturer's operating standard. Appropriate retarder when used shall be subjected to the approval of
the SO Rep. No additional water shall be added to the ready-mix concrete.
2.33.8
Concrete Mixes
The Contractor shall submit, for the SO Rep's approval, a chart showing the design mix he proposes to
use in the ready-mix concrete. The SO Rep shall at his own discretion, instruct the Contractor to carry out
trial mix.
For concrete mix used, the Contractor shall inter alia state the weights of cement, granite and fine
aggregates, the type and amount of admixture and the water-cement ratio to be used in the mix.
Grade 35 concrete shall be used for concreting in the dry and for tremie concreting under water or any
other approved water-sealing fluid. In all conditions, the free water-cement ratio shall not be more than 0.5
for Grade 35 concrete.
Notwithstanding the above, the slump for concrete measured by the standard slump cone shall be
between 100 mm and 150 mm and the cement content in any mix shall not be less than 360 kg/m3.
Where concrete is to be placed under water or where pile will be exposed to sea water, the cement
content shall not be less than 400 kg/m3. For tremie concreting, the slump for the concrete shall be
between 170 mm and 225 mm. The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to modify, alter
and improve the concrete mix, if necessary.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-17
2.33
2.33.9
2.33.10
2.33.11
2.33.12
Trial Bore
The Contractor shall carry out trial bores by boring outside the pile location at his own expense to
determine the required depth or suitability of bored piles as directed by the SO Rep. Sufficient safety
measures must be provided to ensure protection against falling or tripping into the bored holes. The bored
holes must be covered up immediately after it has been inspected.
2.33.13
Boring shall be carried down to such soil strata determined from results of trial boring and soil
tests carried out previously as agreed by the SO Rep.
(b)
The sides of all boring shall be kept intact and no loose material shall be permitted to fall to the
bottom of the bored holes. The Contractor's equipment shall be capable of sinking a steel casing to
support and keep the side of the bored hole intact when directed by the SO Rep.
(c)
In cases where soil conditions are sufficiently stiff to hard to dense, and steel casings are not
necessary, temporary casings of at least 5 m long shall be placed in the bored holes before
inspection of bored holes by the SO Rep. These temporary casings must project at least 1 m
above ground to prevent fall of loose materials or persons into the bored holes. All bored holes
waiting for concreting shall be set up with the temporary casings at all times.
(d)
All bored holes shall be inspected by the SO Rep on site prior to placing of concrete. All loose
material likely to affect the strength of the pile shall be removed forthwith by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(e)
The Contractor must provide all facilities to enable the SO Rep to carry out his inspection safely.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-18
2.33
2.33.13
2.33.14
(Contd)
(f)
Holes reamed out at the base shall likewise be clean and firm before placing of concrete.
(g)
If ground water is found in the borehole and it affects the excavation and removal of soil from the
borehole, or if it causes the collapse of the sides of the borehole, or if the side collapses
irrespective of the presence of water, then steel casing of appropriate length and size shall be
installed in the bored hole.
(h)
All concrete placed in boreholes shall be lowered by hoppers with exceptional care so as to prevent
segregation. Tremie pipes extending to the full depth of the pile shall be used for concreting under
water.
(i)
The top of the pile shall be brought up at least 500 mm above the cut -off level of the pile to permit
all laitance and weak concrete to be removed and to ensure that it can be properly keyed into the
pile cap. Any defective concrete in the head of the completed pile should be cut way and made
good with new concrete well bonded into the old concrete
(j)
All boreholes shall be protected from the possibility of ground surface water entering the hole from
the time the boring is completed and ready to be concreted until the pile is complete. No concreting
shall commence until the hole has been inspected and the above precautions made.
(k)
Reinforcement cages shall be supported centrally and firmly within the hole so that no movement
will occur during the concreting operation
The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before piling commences.
The Contractor shall also be required to provide log-book for use by the SO Rep for recording of the
above information on site.
2.33.15
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-19
2.33
(CONTD)
2.33.16
2.33.17
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-20
2.33
(CONTD)
2.33.17
2.33.18
Weldable type vibrating wire strain gauges, or equivalent, which measure strain in the cast-in-situ
concrete bored pile during the load test, shall be used. Each vibrating wire strain gauge shall have,
at least, a maximum strain range of + 1500 microstrain, and a thermal coefficient of expansion of
10 x 10 6 per oC . The pick-up sensor used shall be mounted on top of the vibrating wire strain
gauge and shall be of a constant oscillation type, or equivalent.
(b)
8 mm diameter stainless steel telltale rod extensometers to measure the axial compression
between the pile and the pile top.
(c)
Heavy-duty signal cables shall be used to connect the pick-up sensors to a terminal box at ground
level.
(d)
The vibrating wire strain gauge shall be welded directly onto a single reinforcement bar positioned
at the center and extended to the base of the pile. The central bar must be held in position
vertically by means of horizontal ties connected to the reinforcement cage and shall be of the same
diameter as the main reinforcement bars of the steel cage. The position and number of strain
gauges that will be installed in the pile shall be as directed by SOs Rep.
(e)
The reinforcement bar must be grounded to provide a flat surface before the strain gauges are
welded on. The pick-up sensors must be firmly secured on top of the strain gauges by means of
suitable clamps. Every strain gauge/pick-up sensor assembly shall be adequately rustproofed and
waterproofed.
(f)
The 8mm diameter stainless steel telltale rod extensometers shall be installed vertically in the pile.
12mm internal diameter steel pipe shall be used for the protection of the telltale rod extensometer.
An anchor plate must be provided at the toe of the telltale rod. All joints are to be properly welded
to avoid grout ingress. A reference head and a depth micrometer must be provided for measuring
the relative axial compression of the pile.
(g)
Proper protection must be provided for the strain gauges, pick-up sensors, cables, and telltale rods
during all stages in the casting of the pile. The contractor shall carry out function test for the strain
gauges and sensors :
(i)
after installation onto the steel reinforcement
(ii)
after hoisting and lowering of the steel reinforcement into the bore hole
(iii)
after concreting the pile
(h)
A Linear Vertical Displacement Transducer (LVDT) shall be placed on a magnetic stand fixed to
the pile top and the probe of the LVDT shall be seated on top of a brass reference head at the top
of each stainless steel rod. A readout unit shall be used to monitor the movement of the tell-tale
extensometers.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-21
2.33
(CONTD)
2.33.18
(Contd)
(i)
Equipment, tools, heavy-duty cables, readout unit and other accessories must be in good working
condition and calibrated.
(j)
Test load increments and pile settlement measurement must be carried out in accordance with the
testing procedures detailed in Clause 2.20.
(k)
The installation data for every instrument and test results shall be captured and recorded by the
contractors instrumentation specialist.
(l)
Two sets of the comprehensive reports incorporating relevant soil logs and interpretation of results,
to be verified and certified by the contractors Professional Engineer involved in the installation of
the instruments, shall be submitted to the SOs Rep within two weeks after the completion of work.
(m)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of all the instruments installed.
(n)
The Contractor will carry out at his own cost, another instrumented pile load test as instructed by
the SOs Rep if the test produces erroneous results due to damaged or malfunctioned instruments.
2.34
2.34.1
2.34.2
The quality of materials such as Grade 460 steel bar, cement grout, grout additive, splice material,
etc must be approved by the SO Rep. Equipment, tools and other accessories must be in good
working condition.
(b)
All site safety precautions must be observed and safety measures provided and maintained
throughout the installation work.
(c)
Grout shall be mixed from ordinary Portland cement complying to current British or Singapore
Standards and clean water supplied from the public mains. Whenever necessary, "Intrusion Aid"
grout additive shall be added to the manufacturer's recommendation to improve workability and
reduce shrinkage. The grouting shall be executed within such time as may be directed or approved
by the SO Rep. The strength of grout shall not be less than Grade 30.
(d)
The installation of every micro pile and the test results of any one piling site shall be captured and
recorded and a comprehensive report, to be verified and certified by the Contractor's Professional
Engineer involved in the micro pile installation, shall be submitted to the SO Rep within two weeks
after the completion of the work at each piling site.
(e)
Any other conditions that may be imposed by the SO Rep to ensure the safety and soundness of
each micro pile.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-22
2.34
2.34.3
2.34.4
2.34.5
2.34.6
Grout Mix
The proportion of grout according to minimum cube strength shall comply with the following requirements:
28 days
24 N/mm2
33 N/mm2
The quantities of cement in the mix shall be measured by weight. Grout shall be mixed on site and shall
be pumped into its final position not later than half an hour after mixing. Grout shall be free from
segregation, slumping and bleeding.
2.34.7
Grouting
Grouting shall be placed using tremie method where grout mix is pumped into the bored hole by grouting
pump under low pressure and delivered using PVC hose or galvanised iron pipe in one continuous
operation until "good grout" appears at the top of the borehole.
2.34.8
Grout Test
4 test cubes shall be taken from the grout mix of every 3 m3 or a portion thereof for testing purpose for
each day when there is grouting works, unless further tests are required due to failure in complying with
the specified strength. 2 test cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at
28 days at HDBs Engineering Materials Laboratory at the Contractors expense. The SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose a charge against the
Contractor for every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 28 days age as specified;
in addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install compensating
piles that will ensure the safety of the building to be supported by the piles. The compensating piles shall
be installed all at the Contractor's cost and expense, and as directed by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(22)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-23
2.34
2.34.9
2.34.10
2.35
2.35.1
System of Piling
The jack-in piling system consists essentially of H-section steel piles or Reinforced Concrete piles forced
into the ground using a non-impact jacking system. The pile sections used shall comply with the relevant
Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the equivalent British Standards. The Contractor shall ensure
that when concrete piles are used, they would not be damaged during handling and transportation.
2.35.2
2.35.3
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(23)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-24
2.35
2.35.4
Installation
(CONTD)
During pile installation, the hydraulic pressure of jack corresponding to depth of pile penetration shall be
recorded at every 0.5 metre depth intervals.
Except for pile joining, each pile shall be jacked in continuously until the required penetration of required
resistance as shown on the pressure gauge of the jack is achieved.
A maximum jacking pressure of 2.5 times the nominal working load shall be maintained for at least 2
minutes. The final set recorded shall not exceed 10 mm.
2.35.5
2.36
2.36.1
2.36.2
2.36.3
2.36.4
2.36.5
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(24)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-25
2.36
2.36.6
2.36.7
Casting Yard
At least one month before the commencement of piling Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep
for approval of the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.36.8
Warranty
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the
Specifications and the pile layout Drawings. Any damage to the super-structure resulting from defective
execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep. The warranty period shall be one year after the completion of the superstructure.
2.36.9
Driving Of Piles
No pile shall be driven before concrete reaches its 28-day working cube strength. Notwithstanding the
earlier achievement of the specified 28-day strength, no pile shall be driven until a period of at least 14
days has elapsed after casting of the pile. Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct
locations true to line both laterally and longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings. Piles shall be guided at
the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain their correct position by
means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been wrongly aligned may be
forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the SO Rep.
A dolly shall not be used as an aid to driving a pile to its final penetration unless approval has been
obtained from the SO Rep. Where a dolly is used, the allowable set for the final blows of a pile shall be
reduced to account for higher energy loss in the dolly-pile head system. The magnitude of the reduction
shall be determined by site observation and shall not be less than 25 percent.
The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than
75mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear the cost of amendment of pile caps, ground beams and
other structural work designed to counter pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance, as
directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the Contractor's own costs
and expenses.
2.36.10
Raking Pile
For raking piles, the piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the specified inclination. The maximum
permissible deviation of the installed pile from the specified inclination shall be 1 in 40.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(25)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-26
2.36
2.36.11
Piling Record
Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO Rep
on site and a copy to be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following items :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Set
temporary compression
penetration from ground level
length of pile and size of section
ground level
cut-off level to the top of pile
time of starting and time of completion
inclination of the pile
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above
record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile commences, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is reached.
2.36.12
2.36.13
Compensating Piles
All piles driven into ground and rejected shall be replaced with compensating pile or piles at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. The position and number of compensating pile(s) as decided by the
SO Rep shall be such that the concentricity of the pile group is not altered. The Employer will only pay the
cost for the original number and size of pile(s) in the pile group as shown in the Drawings. In the
computation for payment, the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the pay length of the
compensating pile shall be taken. If two or more compensating piles are used to replace the rejected pile,
the computation shall be based on the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the shortest
pay length of the compensating pile (which compensate the particular rejected pile, as decided by the SO
Rep). If there are two or more rejected piles in the same pile group and there is no indication which
compensating piles are for which rejected piles (as decided by the SO Rep), the computation for payment
shall be based on the sizes of the original piles as shown in the Drawings and the two or more shortest
pay length of the compensating piles.
2.36.14
Cutting Of Piles
Excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout Drawings or otherwise directed
by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately. Precast concrete
pile shall be stripped to the cut-off level to expose the longitudinal reinforcement bars leaving the dressed
head of the pile projecting 75mm into the pilecap. The longitudinal steel shall be left projecting 600mm
above the dressed head level and cast into the pilecap.
In the cutting of piles, the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to be responsible for the
measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels, including those for compensating piles, and to check
and endorse the pile eccentricity drawings for submission to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make
available all facilities and equipment for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(26)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-27
2.36
2.36.15
2.37
TIMBER PILING
2.37.1
2.37.2
2.37.3
Timber Piles
Timber piles specified shall be from the HDB Materials List and of approved brands/trademarks. Timber
piles shall be 100mm x 100mm, 125mm x 125mm, 150mm x 150mm or 175mm x 175mm square sawn
timber foundation piles with an allowable tolerance of 5mm, produced from the species Kempas or
Keruing. The safe working load shall be 8.5 N per mm2 in direct compressive stress and with an ultimate
resistance of all piles of not less than 3 times the nominal working load.
The centre line of pile shall not deviate from the straight line joining the mid points of the butt and toe by
more than 25mm for any pile up to 6m in length, or 38mm for pile over 6m in length.
Use only timber piles produced under the ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing
Scheme) Certification Scheme Suppliers.
Each batch of piles delivered to the Site shall be subjected to random sampling, for testing by an SAC
accredited laboratory, in accordance with the following frequency :
(i)
(ii)
All piles shall be pressure-treated with copper-chrome-arsenic wood preservative under a pressure of not
less than 14.0 kg per cm2, with minimum depth of penetration of preservative of 25mm and with a net dry
salt retention in the outermost 25mm of pile of not less than 16kg per m3. All methods of chemical
treatment and testing shall be in accordance with SS 72 : 1988 or BS 4072. The SO Rep shall exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for
each test that fails to comply with the above requirement. In the event that any test by SAC accredited
laboratory resulted in failure, remove the batch of piles from which the random sampling is obtained
completely from the Site. Should the Contractor negligently or wilfully transport the same batch that had
failed previously to the Site again, this act shall be deemed to be an infringement and Clause 1.6
"Nuisance & Irregularities" shall apply.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(27)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-28
2.37
TIMBER PILING
2.37.4
(CONTD)
Join two piles by using a mild steel welded box joint 450mm long made from 4.5mm thick plate and coat
with bituminous paint and approved by the SO Rep before use.
2.37.5
2.37.6
Warranty
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the
Specifications and the pile layout Drawings. Any damage or Defect to the inspection chambers and main
drain lines resulting from defective execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the Contractor at
his own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
2.37.7
Driving Of Piles
Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct locations true to line both laterally and
longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings.
Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain
their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been
wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the
SO Rep.
The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than
75mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear all additional costs of the amendment in pile caps, ground
beams, etc designed as a countermeasure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance,
as directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses.
During driving, protect the heads of all piles with the helmet of mild steel fitting closely around the pile. A
25mm thick plywood covering the head of the pile shall be contained within the helmet to separate the
helmet from the head of the pile.
Rigidly & securely join all piles with metal box joints. The joints shall be driven to a tight fit with the pile
hammer and spiked to the section of both piles.
2.37.8
Piling Record
Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO Rep
and a copy shall be kept by the Contractor on the site. The record shall include the following items:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Set
Temporary compression
Penetration from ground level
Length of pile and size of section
Ground level
Cut-off level to the top of pile
No. of joints used
Time of starting and time of completion
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above
record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(28)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-29
2.37
TIMBER PILING
(CONTD)
2.37.9
2.38
2.39
Section 3/.....
BLDG13/S02.DOCX(29)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-1
SECTION 3
EXCAVATION
3.1
3.2
RESERVED
3.3
Submitting all proposals for temporary drains and silt control measures to the Head, Drainage
Department for approval before commencement of the Works;
(b)
Providing adequate silt-control facilities including lined temporary drains at the Site boundary
surrounding the Site comprising of composite channel drains of adequate capacity (minimum Type
C7) to capture the surface run off with proper sump outlets subjected to the prior approval of PUB
and the SO Rep, close turfing on both sides of the perimeter drains, silt-trapping devices, turfing,
wash-bays incorporating proper discharge outlets, etc. to control silt and mud from the Site to enter
the drains;
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-2
3.3
(CONT'D)
(c)
Maintaining regularly all such silt-control facilities to ensure their effectiveness and in a clean,
hygienic, pest free and good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, and desilting all
affected drains until Substantial Completion of the Works;
(d)
Ensuring that the execution of the Works shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland
flow, existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains;
(e)
Ensuring that runoff within, upstream of and adjacent to the Site can be effectively drained away
without causing flooding within the Site or in areas outside the Site;
(f)
(g)
Implementing adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the work
areas and existing drains, to ensure that construction materials are not discharged or washed into
the drains.
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and implementing at his own cost and expense, any
additional or more stringent measures as may be necessary to achieve satisfactory site control standards
as required by the Drainage Department, PUB on surface water drainage.
3.4
(b)
(c)
Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be provided to ensure that earth,
silt, mud, etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities shall be
duly designed and endorsed by a PE engaged by the Contractor. These facilities shall be
constructed before the commencement of the Works.
(ii)
Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be desilted and maintained at
least once a week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt from
the Site.
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-3
3.4
(e)
Excavated Material
(i)
All surplus excavated materials shall be carted away to the disposal ground immediately.
The surplus excavated material shall not be stockpiled on the Site.
(ii)
Earth materials stockpiled on the Site for construction work shall be within properly
contained areas and covered to prevent the earth from being washed into drains or canals.
The locations for stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.
Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not
washed into drains or canals.
(iii)
The Contractor shall only carry out trench excavation work provided the rate of construction
keeps pace with the rate of excavation.
3.5
SURFACE EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall grub up and clear all shrubs, vegetable matter, bushes, roots and other obstructions
encountered on the Site. No tree shall be removed without written permission from the SO Rep.
Any top soil which covers the Site shall be carefully scraped and piled up at a suitable location, with the
use of mechanical or manual labour, for subsequent use in turfing or tree planting. The Contractor shall
salvage whatever existing top soil there is on the Site, failing which he shall be liable to reimburse the
Employer for the loss. No top soil shall be removed from the Site without the permission of the SO Rep.
3.6
3.7
EXCAVATION GENERALLY
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and to have ascertained
the nature thereof and the kinds of materials to be excavated, and to have made provision in the Contract
Sum to cover for the type of materials to be excavated.
Prior to the commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall carry out a pre-construction survey of the
neighbouring properties and comply with the requirements of BCA and any other requirements as required
by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall set out the lines and
structures for the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Original ground levels shall also be taken and
submitted to the SO Rep for record.
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-4
3.7
3.8
EXCAVATION IN ROCK
Any rock or boulders encountered in excavation to the required depths shall be removed by wedging,
blasting or other means as the SO Rep may direct, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
When blasting is required, the Contractor shall obtain prior written permission from the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall comply with the Local Laws and Regulations and any requirements imposed by the
relevant Authorities with regard to blasting operations.
The SO Rep shall be fully informed by the Contractor as to the steps and precautionary measures taken
to safeguard the surrounding properties. The Contractor shall be liable for any accident, damage or injury
to any person, property or thing, resulting from the use of explosives. Prior to the start of blasting
operations, the Contractor, in the presence of the SO Rep, shall conduct a survey of all structures within
120m of the site where blasting is proposed, and any other structures which the SO Rep considers may
be affected, in order to determine the existing or pre-blast condition of these structures. Prior to
commencing blasting operations, a written report, supported by photographs where necessary, listing any
existing defects in the structures, shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
When blasting operations are being carried out, any road affected shall be closed to traffic and the
appropriate signs erected.
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-5
3.9
ERRORS IN EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall excavate to such depths only as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the SO
Rep. Any excavation done to a greater depth than is necessary shall be filled with concrete of such
proportions or with such compacted material to the required formation levels as directed by the SO Rep.
The cost of such filling shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.10
3.11
TEMPORARY COVERS
Prior to excavation for footing foundations, the Contractor may erect temporary covers over the area to be
excavated to prevent rainwater from getting into the excavations. However, when such temporary covers
are instructed to be erected by the SO Rep specifically, they will be paid for as a variation.
3.12
3.13
BACKFILLING
The Contractor shall backfill with selected excavated material around foundation excavations, etc up to the
required level in layers not exceeding 300mm thick or in such layers as directed and carefully ram and
consolidate. Upon approval by the SO Rep, backfilling shall commence as soon as practical and
completed expeditiously and without delay.
3.14
3.15
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-6
3.16
3.16.1
3.16.2
Scope Of Work
Chemically pre-treat the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites. The treatment
shall be for residential building blocks and mixed development with commercial building blocks. The
ground below multi-storey carparks, linkways, link buildings, precinct pavilions shall not be treated. Other
low rise buildings not for residences or storage of merchandise shall not be treated. The areas to be
chemically treated shall include:
(a)
The entire ground floor slab area prior to the laying of the concrete floor slab. The area below the
basement, lift pits and drop-off porch shall be excluded; and.
(b)
All round the building perimeter prior to concreting the apron area. The width of the treatment shall
follow the perimeter defined by the apron slab but shall not exceed 2.0 m in width.
The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the National Environment Agency (NEA)
pertaining to such soil treatment work and such compliance shall form part of the Scope of Work. The
Contractor shall also comply with the requirements specified in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS),
product labels and instructional materials supplied by the chemical and equipment manufacturers or their
licensed representatives.
In addition, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Work Method statement, stipulating the strategic work
processes control and personnel responsible etc., to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of
such Works.
3.16.3
Chemical To Be Used
The non-repellent active ingredients (AI) and products to be used for the pre-treatment of the soil for
works which are within or/and outside Water Catchment areas, shall be those approved by the National
Environment Agency (NEA) The Contractor may propose either one of the following active ingredients
listed in the table below.
Active Ingredient (AI)
Fipronil
Imidacloprid
Thiamethoxam
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-7
3.16
3.16.3
Chemical To Be Used
(Cont'd)
Any other non-repellent active ingredients approved by NEA but not listed above shall be submitted to the
SO Rep for approval for use prior application on site
(refer to the NEA website: http://app2.nea.gov.sg/soil_Termiticide.aspx for approved list).
Prior to the start of each treatment, the Contractor shall propose to the SO Rep the size and the location
to be treated. The Contractor shall conduct all the calculations required to ensure accurate application and
dilution rates for the termiticide and submit, to the SO Rep prior to the application on the Site. The SO Rep
shall be informed for all dilution and mixing procedure by the Contractor.
The Contractor is only to mix/dilute the exact amount to be used on the Site. No premixing will be
permitted. No mixing offsite prior to its use on the Site will be allowed. All chemicals mixed on the Site
MUST be completely used on the Site. No chemical mixed for use on the Site shall be permitted to be
removed or disposed off without the approval of the SO Rep.
The diluted chemical shall be applied uniformly over the area to be treated. The total volume of flow of
diluted chemical used will be measured /metered using a Flow Meter. Other methods for measuring the
flow of diluted chemicals will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall submit the report to the SO Rep on the Application rate and Dilution rate of the
chemicals at the end of each site treatment and/or as directed by the SO Rep.
The Report shall contain the following information:
Date of Application
Amount of Area Treated
Amount of Concentrate Termiticide used
Amount of Diluted Chemical used
Amount of Diluted Chemical unused after the treatment
DD/MM/YYYY
XX.XX m2
XX.XX Litres
XX.XX Litres
XX.XX Litres
This report must be verified and signed by the SO Rep at the end of each treatment.
3.16.4
Chemical Preparation
Preparation of chemicals shall be conducted in strict accordance with the Product Labels. All emergency
measures shall compile with the recommendation of the Material Safety Data Sheet that will come with
each chemical. All necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) required for the chemical preparation
and the PPE required for the site will be used at all times.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the instructions on handling of the chemicals for the following
procedures are in accordance with the published safety information. A declaration document on these
safety procedures on handling of chemicals shall also be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of such works.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Washing of hands
Washing of equipment used
Calibration of equipment used on site
Pre-application Checklist
Mixing Procedure
Dilution Procedure
Amounts of diluents used
Type of diluents used
All PPE required for the works to be carried out
No work shall commence without these procedures and safety documentations submitted to the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-8
3.16
3.16.5
3.16.6
Application Procedure
Immediately after the soil treatment is completed, the treated soil shall be securely covered with black
polythene sheet. A layer of lean concreting shall be cast on top of the polythene sheet.
When it rains during the course of soil treatment, all treated soil shall be covered immediately with black
polythene sheet. The coverage shall extend one (1) metre into the untreated areas. The polythene sheet,
especially their overlapping parts, shall be properly secured by heavy objects to ensure that all rain water
runs into the surrounding temporary drains.
3.16.7
Application Equipment
All equipment used in soil treatment shall be in good order and in serviceable condition. A list of all
equipment to be used on the Site shall be provided to the SO Rep. Also all these equipment must be
accompanied with last service date records prior to their use on the Site.
3.16.8
3.16.9
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-9
3.16
3.16.10
3.16.11
3.16.12
Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the
Deed of Warranty for Pre-Treatment of Soil for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-terranean Termites as
produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of
Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole
discretion decide.
In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such
Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in
Appendix A1(TC) to such Town Councils. The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately
upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep
considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the
Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time
specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor
in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of
Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of
the duly executed Deed of Warranty
3.16.13
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-10
3.16
3.16.14
Safety Precaution
Provide and exercise safety precautions during all treatment processes.
Personnel engaged in the soil treatment shall wear protective clothing eg. goggles, long sleeved shirt and
long legged trousers or an overall type garment, impervious footwear and gloves as specified in the
foregoing requirements.
Spray drifts beyond the area to be treated shall be avoided. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent
accidental spillage of the chemical. Spillage shall be mopped up with soil or other absorbent materials.
The affected soil shall be added to the treated area or kept in plastic bags for disposal at the National
Environment Agency (NEA)'s dumping grounds.
Signs in the areas of application shall be posted to warn workers and the public that the area has been
treated with poisonous chemicals.
Unwanted chemicals and containers shall be disposed off safely at the National Environment Agency
(NEA)'s dumping grounds.
3.17
3.18
SERVICES ROUTES
The Contractor shall clear all obstructions from proposed sewer, electrical, water, gas, telephone and
Rediffusion services routes and either fill or excavate ground to within 70mm of proposed final platform
level as directed by the SO Rep at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
Such instructions may be given separately for each of the services at different times and each instruction
shall be carried out within seven days.
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-11
3.19
3.20
3.21
DRAIN CASCADES
The Contractor shall excavate and lay cascade drains where surface drains flow down steep slopes or
banks.
Cascades shall not exceed 600mm in length and 300mm in each drop with top of sides finished straight
and parallel to slope of ground.
3.22
Section 4/.....
BLDG13/S03.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-1
SECTION 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
4.1
CEMENT
4.1.1
General Requirements
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, cement shall be of an approved brand and
manufacture and comply with the following standards :
Type
Ordinary Portland Cement
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement
Relevant Standard
SS EN 197
SS EN 197
High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work.
When requested by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall produce a certificate showing the date and place of
manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall, in the presence of
SO Rep, be required to take samples for testing. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDBs
Engineering Materials Laboratory. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the relevant
standard shall be rejected.
The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed
bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised
boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be
stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks.
Cement of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in the
same mix.
Concrete of different brand of cement shall not be mixed during casting. The SO Rep shall be informed in
writing of any change in the source of supply.
Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall not
be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately.
4.1.2
Certificate Of Compliance
The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications
and Approved Standard. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance inform and seek the SO Reps prior approval in writing of his source of supply together
with the following documents:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Test Reports showing that the Contractors supply is tested according to and in compliance
with SS EN 197.
If the Contractors supply is obtained from a local mill, a copy of the ISO 9000 certification
on the mill.
If the Contractors supply is imported, a letter of supply declaration from the overseas
manufacturer.
All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited
laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date
of the test reports to the SO Rep.
Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required to seek
the SO Reps prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the
documents laid down hereinabove.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-2
4.1
CEMENT (CONTD)
4.1.2
(Contd)
Test Requirements
The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from
his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract for testing at the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. :
The Cement shall be tested in accordance with the Approved Standard for Physical and Chemical
Test. The test for Elemental Analysis is not required. The number of tests to be conducted during
the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract shall be as follows:
Supply Source
Local mill with ISO 9000
Local mill without ISO 9000/Imported cement
Number of Test
Minimum one test six-monthly
Minimum one test quarterly
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources i.e. a local mill and imported cement will
have both sources subjected to the test requirements.
All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to
the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne
by the Contractor.
4.2
AGGREGATES
4.2.1
General Requirements
Fine aggregates shall be uncrushed sand or crushed granite fines complying with SS EN 12620. Where
crushed granite fines are used, its percentage of the total amount of fine aggregates shall not exceed
30%.
Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with SS
EN 12620.
Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 40mm in size for lean and mass concrete and 20mm for reinforced
concrete, unless otherwise specified.
All-in aggregates as specified in SS EN 12620 and aggregates derived from limestone or other materials
inferior to granite shall not be used.
Aggregates shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling of
different materials and contamination. Aggregates used for concrete batching plant on site shall be
covered with a light roof cover. Fine aggregates shall be tested for moisture content constantly to facilitate
moisture compensation during concrete production. The testing shall be carried out based on the Speedy
method or other approved equivalent method approved by the SO Rep.
The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have
them tested for compliance with Approved Standards of SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097, ASTM
C295 and ASTM C289. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDBs Engineering Materials
Laboratory. Aggregates failing to comply with the Approved Standards shall be rejected.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-3
4.2
AGGREGATES (CONTD)
4.2.2
Certificate Of Compliance
The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications
and Approved Standards. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance inform and seek the SO Reps prior approval in writing of his source of supply together
with test reports from SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories for each source of his supply on the
following properties:
(i)
20mm Aggregate
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(ii)
Concreting Sand
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
shape;
surface texture;
particle size distribution - sieving method;
flakiness index;
shape index;
aggregate impact value;
aggregate resistance to abrasion;
bulk density;
particle density and water absorption;
clay, silt and dust content;
shell content;
acid soluble sulphate content;
sulphate content;
organic impurities;
chloride ion content;
potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method);
petrographic examination and
other properties as specified by the SO Rep.
Bldg Spec
Page 4-4
4.2
AGGREGATES (CONTD)
4.2.2
Certificate Of Compliance
(Contd)
(Contd)
All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited
laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date
of the test reports to the SO Rep.
Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required seek the
SO Reps prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the
documents laid down hereinabove.
(b)
Test Requirements
The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from
his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract for testing at the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory.
The quality of the aggregates to be supplied shall comply in every respect with the Specifications
and Approved Standards, and the conditions, analysis and test requirements laid down in the SS
EN, BS EN, ASTM (especially SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097) classification for concreting
purposes. The number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows:
(i)
20mm Aggregate
Properties
Frequency of Test
Flakiness index
Shape index
Aggregate impact value
Aggregate resistance to abrasion
Bulk density
Particle density and water absorption
Clay, silt and dust content
Shell content
Acid soluble sulphate content
Sulphate content
Organic impurities
Chloride Ion Content
Potential alkali-silica reactivity
(chemical method)
Petrographic examination
The Contractor shall be required to send their 20 mm aggregate supply for the Mortar-Bar
test under ASTM Standard C227 if the need arises.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-5
4.2
AGGREGATES (CONTD)
4.2.2
Test Requirements
(ii)
(Contd)
(Contd)
Concreting Sand
Properties
Number of Test
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources will have both sources subjected to the
test requirements.
All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to
the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne
by the Contractor.
4.3
WATER
Potable water supplied by the Public Utilities Board shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout.
For cleaning of formwork, reinforcement and curing of concrete, water other than potable water may be
used if approved by the SO Rep. The use of seawater shall be prohibited.
4.4
ADMIXTURES
When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, furnish information concerning the admixture,
admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in SS EN 934 for approval by the SO
Rep prior to the use of the admixture.
Admixture used shall comply with SS EN 934 or the relevant British European Standards. Requests for
permission to use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered
when accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture to be used shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s).
The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep, for admixture
uniformity tests in accordance with SS EN 934 or the relevant British Standards.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-6
4.5
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
4.5.1
Description
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reinforcement for concrete shall consist of plain mild steel and
high yield reinforcement bars complying with SS 2 and welded steel fabric complying with SS 32.
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any
other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.
Where reinforcement is to be welded, it shall comply with CP 65. The Contractor shall obtain the approval
of the SO Rep in writing prior to any welding of reinforcement.
4.5.2
Testing
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling before any cutting,
bending or other fabrication is undertaken. If deemed necessary, the SO Rep may cause samples to be
taken from reinforcement already fixed in position.
Samples for the tests shall be sent for testing at the HDBs Engineering Materials Laboratory. For each
sample, 3 bars shall be taken for testing. Reinforcement not complying with the appropriate Specifications
shall be removed and replaced.
4.5.3
Galvanised Steel
Galvanized steel reinforcement as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
BS EN ISO 1461. The Contractor shall obtain galvanizing service or galvanized steel reinforcement only
from those in the Approved List.
The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table D1 of BS EN ISO 1461. For steel with diameter of
2
6mm and above, the mean coating (minimum) mass shall be 610 g per m and the local coating
2
(minimum) shall be 505 g per m . The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If
the coating appearance of any galvanized reinforcement be found otherwise, such reinforcement shall not
be used as a galvanized reinforcement. Store all galvanized reinforcement in a dry and well ventilated
place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas of galvanized coating damaged by
welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two
coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of
the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanized
reinforcement to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating weight
shall be determined using the gravimetric method in accordance with BS EN ISO 1460 and the nominal
3
density of the coating (7.2g/cm ). Certificates of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
verification.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-7
4.6
FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT
4.6.1
On Site Fabrication
All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings.
Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even
bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening and
rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep.
Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wires. The projecting ends of the steel wires shall be
directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover.
Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified
concrete cover. Plastic spacers shall be used for all bottom slab reinforcement. Steel bar chairs bent
according to the Drawings or proprietary-type chairs shall be used for top slab reinforcement. The part of
the chair that need to rest on formwork shall be coated with plastic for isolation and protection.
Other than for slabs, both plastic and concrete or mortar spacer blocks may be used. Concrete or mortar
spacer blocks shall be provided with tying wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength and
durability characteristics than the surrounding concrete. All spacers shall be obtained from sources
approved by the SO Rep.
Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation characteristics
have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and approved by the SO Rep.
Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the Works shall be approved by the SO Rep
before any concrete can be placed thereon.
Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from Works being
concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected
from accidental deformation and damage.
4.6.2
Prefabrication At Factory
All column link cages and rectangular column cage reinforcement with T16 main reinforcement bars
(except for open links) and all beam cages with beam cage code prefixed with "J" provided to apartment
blocks shall be prefabricated in a factory approved by the SO Rep.
The rectangular column cage reinforcement shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T16 main
reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the column links and bent into column cage
reinforcement. The "J" series beam cage shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T13 or T16 main
reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the stirrup links and bent into beam cage reinforcement.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-8
4.7
CONCRETE MIXES
4.7.1
Designed Mix
For designed mixes, the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the SO
Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements :
Concrete Grade
30
35
40
45
50
275
300
325
350
400
550
550
550
550
550
50
50
50
50
50
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.40
For concrete with maximum aggregate size of 14mm and 10mm, the minimum cement content shall be
increased by 20 kg per m3 and 40 kg per m3 respectively.
In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 10 N per mm2. If a current margin other than that
recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his
consideration and approval. Mix adjustment shall be allowed only when sufficient results are available;
however, such mix shall comply with the Specifications.
In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable,
workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified or as shown.
4.7.2
Trial Mixes
The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified
by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability as
well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be considered
suitable if :
(a)
the designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with SS 78 or BS 1881 : Part 105 if
a flow test is specified; and
(b)
the average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic
strength by at least 10 N per mm2 or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be
exceeded by this amount.
Trial mixes may not be required if concrete is supplied by prequalified ready-mix concrete suppliers
approved by the SO Rep.
4.7.3
Mix Adjustment
Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the mix
without prior approval of the SO Rep.
An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg per m3 and above, or the percentage of fine
aggregate by 5% and above, or any change in the type or dosage of admixture or consistency is
considered a change in mix design. This does not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design
used in relation to the specified requirements.
If the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix, the SO Rep shall exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-9
4.8
BATCHING
Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight separately. Water shall be measured by volume and due
allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting this
amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures shall be
measured by weight, while liquid or paste admixtures may be measured by weight or volume.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within 3% of the quantity of cement, water or total
aggregate being measured, and with 5% of the quantity of admixture added before commencement of
work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be calibrated
with known weights and volume measures.
4.9
MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each
batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and
continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete is
uniform in colour and consistency.
The mixing time shall be as follows :
(i)
(ii)
Pan mixer
Truck mixer or drum mixer
minimum 30 seconds
minimum 1.5 minutes for 1 m3 of concrete
plus 0.25 minute for each additional 1 m3.
The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion
of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time.
The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry
mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer.
The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for more
than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall be free
from hardened concrete. Worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced.
4.10
READY-MIX CONCRETE
All concrete used in site casting for the Works shall be obtained from pre-approved Ready-Mixed
Concrete suppliers.
Ready-mix concrete shall comply with SS EN 206. The cement content shall comply with Clause 4.7
"Concrete Mixes" including all subclauses under it.
No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the
concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being
discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final
position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement is added to the mix.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-10
4.11
4.12
PLACING OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible before
it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where retarders are
used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method of transit shall be
such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients.
In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with :
(a)
Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which may be displaced by the pulsating
movement of the pipe.
(b)
Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement
mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be
concreted.
(c)
When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe shall be thoroughly wetted inside
but no free water shall remain in the pipe.
(d)
Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat by
covering with damp sacking or other approved material during pumping.
Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and
rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well
wetted and inspection openings shall be closed.
Raised gangways for workmen placing and vibrating concrete shall be provided wherever possible and
shall be so constructed as to avoid damaging and displacing the reinforcement.
Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved equipment and shall not be
dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set
concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent
position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position.
For beams and similar members, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full depth. In walls,
columns and similar members, the concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers each not exceeding 1m
deep. Placing of concrete shall be continuous and temporary interruption shall not normally exceed 30
minutes. At the completion of a specified part, a construction joint shall be made subject to the approval
of the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-11
4.12
PLACING OF CONCRETE
(CONTD)
No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other
measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction and subject to the approval of the
SO Rep.
All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval for
night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the concreting.
4.13
COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using
approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition
shall be used on the Site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of two
standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns.
The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel
reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of any kind.
Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.
4.14
4.15
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Where joints are necessary during concreting, their positions shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall
be constructed using expanded mesh as indicated in the Drawings. Before concreting resumes, such
joints shall be properly chipped, cleaned and scum and loose aggregates removed therefrom. Immediately
before placing new concrete, the joints shall be thoroughly wetted and coated with rich cement grout.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-12
4.16
4.16.1
General Requirements
(a)
The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests on 100mm cubes. The
quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in accordance
with BS EN 12390. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test, compressive strength
test, core test and any other concrete test as and when required by the SO Rep.
(b)
Sampling
On each concreting day and for each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, samples shall be taken
according to the following rates :
(i)
(ii)
A sample shall be a quantity of concrete, consisting of standard scoopfuls, taken from a batch of
concrete whose properties are to be determined. The sample shall be taken at the point of
discharge from the mixer, agitating truck or mixer truck. These concrete cubes shall be cast to
achieve full compaction by using an approved vibrating table. The minimum period required before
demoulding these concrete cubes shall be 16 hours.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-13
4.16
4.16.1
(CONT'D)
Sampling (Cont'd)
At least 4 cubes shall be cast from each sample. 2 cubes shall be tested at an early age. The
remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance purpose. All concrete cubes shall be
tested at the HDBs Engineering Materials Laboratory or other approved accredited testing
laboratory with equivalent or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized monitoring
system with analysis capabilities. The Contractor shall submit the information pertaining to the
proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval. All contract information and test results shall be
uploaded to EPTC e-cube website. The Employer shall recover all testing fees charged by the
HDBs Engineering Materials Laboratory for testing of cubes including those sampled from readymixed concrete plants and precast plant from the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate sizes to store all test cubes for the
specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative
humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a
person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes to be tested at HDBs Engineering Materials
Laboratory shall be collected by the SO Rep from the designated site at regular interval. The SO
Rep shall inform the Contractor of the designated collection site and the Contractor shall deliver
cubes to the designated collection site on the day of collection. The Contractor shall provide all
necessary assistance to hand over the cubes to the HDBs appointed contractor for the collection of
cubes.
(c)
Cube Identification
The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or
similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification
(RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cubes from a minimum distance of
at least 40 mm. The reader must be able to read all 125kHz RFID tags, including tags starting with
hex codes of '2800' and 2868. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to
a web-based controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag
IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of the cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the
same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the
cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface.
The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or
loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's
purchase price
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the
Contractor to the Employer.
(d)
Cover Measurement
The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment for the measurement of concrete cover to
reinforcement and the in-situ strength of concrete. The Contractor shall carry out measurements for
all major structural elements as determined by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall analyse
statistically all measurements for each of the major type of structural element. The concrete cover
shall comply with the requirements of CP 65. The in-situ strength of the concrete shall be assessed
in accordance with BS 6089 where applicable. The strength shall comply with the specified grade,
taking into account the variability with in-situ strength.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-14
4.16
4.16.2
(CONT'D)
The 28 day strength shall be required for compliance with the strength specified hereunder. The early
strength tests shall be required for quality control purposes.
For precast concrete, the 3 day strength shall be obtained solely for quality control purpose. Early
strength requirements to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery shall be specified by
the approved manufacturer of the precast components and approved by the SO Rep. Such strength shall
be determined from the additional cubes. The SO Rep shall have the absolute right to reject any precast
component should its early strength fails to meet the design strength requirements.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the age of
28 days. Compliance may be assumed if the following conditions are satisfied:
(a)
The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples or the average of the first
four samples of the production is greater than or equal to the specified characteristic strength plus
half a fixed current margin of 6 N per mm. Thus, the minimum average strength shall be :
Grade
Minimum Average
Strength at 28 days (N
per mm)
(b)
25
30
35
40
45
50
23.0
28.0
33.0
38.0
43.0
48.0
53.0
(c)
20
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
17.0
22.0
27.0
32.0
37.0
42.0
47.0
The characteristics strength shall meet the requirement of the specified concrete grade.
If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be
sought to lower the strength level as specified in subclause (a) above.
For samples taken on the Site, if the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the
requirements specified above, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
All test cubes taken shall be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are tested
at their respective age. Test cube that are lost shall be deemed to have failed and the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor.
Payment of charges to the Employer shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract.
In addition to the payment of charges, the affected concrete Works may be stopped and not be continued
until so directed by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion shall be allowed for such
stoppage of the concrete Works.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-15
4.17
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
below 14.5
below 18.5
below 23.0
below 27.0
below 31.5
below 35.5
below 40.0
Test on Structure
after 28 days
)
)
)
) Non-destructive method and/or core test
)
)
)
)
)
)
) Non-destructive method and core test
) and/or load test
)
)
The tests shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory in accordance with CP 65 and assessed in
accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the establishment of noncompliance provided that the latter are based on valid cube test results.
4.18
qualified acceptance in less severe cases with action taken against the Contractor under Clause
1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities". The Contractor shall provide protective coating against
carbonation and other aggressive environment if the affected concrete can be certified to be
structurally sound by a PE engaged by the Contractor; or
If the average of three core tests falls below the strength level specified in sub-clause 4.16.2(b), or
in the event of failure of a load test.
(b)
the Contractor shall carry out at his own costs and expenses any necessary approved remedial
measures to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Remedial measures shall be designed, supervised
and certified by a PE engaged by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses; or
(c)
the Contractor shall remove the affected concrete, and the costs and expenses in removing all
poor quality concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All defective concrete Works such as badly constructed concrete members with poor alignment and
plumb, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces shall be removed or otherwise rectified according to the
instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-16
4.19
FORMWORK
4.19.1
General Requirements
(a)
Material
The Contractor shall use metalforms or other types of system formwork, for the construction of
cast-in-situ reinforced concrete structures. The use of such alternative material shall be subject to
the approval of the SO Rep and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be effected under such
case.
Unless specified otherwise, all formwork shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 23. It shall be
true to the shape and dimensions as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate metal formwork system or other types of system formwork
that produces high quality off-form finish and concrete lines and surfaces complying with
requirements of SS CP23. For cases of non-compliance with the foregoing requirements, the SO
Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out rectification Works. The form face in
contact with concrete shall be free from dirt, adhering grout, projecting nails, splits and other
Defect.
Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish.
Such oil shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become
flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of
concrete shall not be used. The same type of approved form oil shall be used for all Works. The
application of the form oil shall be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall be
no accumulation of the oil on the formwork.
Formwork to curved surfaces shall be of steel or other material approved by the SO Rep to give a
good surface finish.
(b)
(c)
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-17
4.19
FORMWORK
4.19.1
General Requirements
(c)
(CONTD)
(Contd)
Technical Requirements
The proposed metal formwork system shall comply with Singapore Standard CP23 and shall
be in every respect rigidly constructed to the shapes and dimensions as shown in the
Drawings.
(ii)
Technical Information
The Contractor shall submit, within two weeks from the commencement Date of the Time for
Completion, the following technical information of his proposed metalforms namely; the
grade of steel, steel strength such as tensile strength, yield stress and elongation (including
a recent reduced section tensile test certificate), the steel plate thickness, the manufacturing
process (including a recent photo of the manufacturing machine) and the name and address
of the metalform manufacturer and/or supplier, for the approval of the SO Rep.
(iii)
Testing Of Metalforms
For Contractor self-owned metalforms, the Contractor shall submit, within two weeks from
the commencement Date of the Time for Completion, samples of basic types of the
metalforms for testing at SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory or other approved laboratory
or as directed for the reduced section tensile test. Five samples shall be selected by the SO
Rep for testing. Reduced section tensile test shall be carried out in accordance with JIS
Z2241. The samples shall comply with the minimum tensile strength of 400 N per mm2,
minimum yield stress of 245 N per mm2 and minimum elongation of 25%. The minimum
steel thickness shall be 2.65 mm. As and when required, the Contractor shall at his own
cost and expense, provide a thickness gauge for verification of the steel plate thickness by
the SO Rep.
The metalforms shall only be approved by the SO Rep upon receiving all satisfactory test
results from the laboratory. The SO Rep shall retain the original copy of the test results.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-18
4.19
FORMWORK
4.19.1
General Requirements
(c)
(CONTD)
(Contd)
Dimension Test
For Contractor's own metalforms or metalforms from suppliers approved by the SO Rep,
the SO Rep shall sample metalforms for dimension test. The Contractor shall be
required to send samples taken for testing at SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory or
other approved laboratory or as directed by the SO Rep.
The frequency of the dimension test is as follows:
The metalforms shall be subjected to one re-test. If the result of the re-test does not
comply with the requirements, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In addition to the payment of charges, the affected set of metalform shall be restricted
from use at all HDB worksites and the Contractor shall use another set of metalform for
the next cycle of form work erection. No extension of the Time for Completion shall be
allowed for such replacement of metalforms
(iv)
Method Of Manufacture
All metalforms shall be manufactured so that the surface plate and side ribs are formed from
the same sheet of metal to a 90 degree bend without any cutting and/or welding. The folding
of the 90 degree cold-formed bend shall be completed in one single continuous operation
using a continuous series of steel rollers of a roll-forming machine. Only the two end ribs
and all the internal ribs shall be welded.
(v)
(vi)
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-19
4.19
FORMWORK (CONTD)
4.19.1
Irregularities Committed
If the Contractor uses sub-standard metalforms which do not comply fully with those
reference samples approved by the SO Rep as specified in subclause 4.19.1(c) (iii) "Testing
Of Metalforms", the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
(viii)
Metalforms Usage
The Contractor shall use form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep for each casting of
concrete.
The Contractor shall be fully liable and responsible for any conseque ntial loss or damage
due to or arising from the usage of his metalforms.
(d)
4.19.2
Design
Formwork shall be designed to Singapore Standard CP 23 and shall cater for the appropriate method of
placing and compacting the concrete. Adequate number of braces, ties and struts shall be provided so
that the formwork shall be able to withstand the pressures resulting from whatever method of placing and
compacting concrete adopted, and maintain the required position, slope and profile.
Metal props shall be used to support formwork, except at irregular places where timber props may be
more suitable or practical. Use of timber props shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.
Where the floor to ceiling height exceeds 9.14 m, or where the formwork deck is supported by shores
constructed in two or more tiers, or where the dead, live and impact loads on the formwork exceed 732.3
kg per m, the Contractor shall engage a PE to design the formwork structure. The Contractor shall
submit the details of the design of the formwork and the supports for approval by the SO Rep.
Notwithstanding the approval by the SO Rep, the strength and adequacy of the formwork and supports
shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor and his PE.
4.19.3
Construction
Formwork shall be constructed sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout from the concrete at all
stages of placing and compacting.
The arrangement of the formwork shall be such that it can be dismantled and removed readily from the
cast concrete without causing shock, disturbance or damage. For beams and slabs, the arrangement
shall be such that the formwork and supports for the slab soffits and beam sides can be removed without
disturbing the formwork and supports of the beam soffits.
Where steel props are used, such steel props shall be prezinc galvanised or galvanised by other methods.
Obtain approval from the SO Rep before using such galvanised steel props.
Supports to an upper floor shall rest on the lower floor only if the lower floor has developed adequate
strength to bear the load. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the lower floor does not have the required
strength to carry the supports to the upper floors, then the method adopted to support the formwork of the
upper floor shall have to be approved by the SO Rep. All props to a floor which itself supports the
formwork of an upper floor shall only be removed 3 days (minimum) after such upper floor is cast.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-20
4.19
FORMWORK (CONTD)
4.19.3
Construction (Contd)
Connections in formwork shall be either nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped or otherwise secured. Ties that
are anchored against the timber shall pass through a plate washer of at least 50 mm in size and of
sufficient thickness so that the load is transferred to the timber without any visible deflection or penetration
into the timber. Only cast-in steel spreader ties shall be used to separate and restrain the formwork faces.
The voids formed by the removal of the plastic cones after the dismantling of formwork shall be patched
up using non-shrink grout. Concrete separators shall not be permitted.
The Contractor shall be required to make allowances for any settlement or deflection of formwork which is
likely to arise during construction. The soffits of beams and slabs shall be given a camber to allow for
deflection after striking of formwork. The magnitude of the camber shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Formwork across structure joints shall be erected such that it overlaps adjoining finished concrete by at
least 200mm and holds tightly against it. Formwork shall be provided and run continuously at construction
joints.
Bolts to be permanently installed in concrete, fixing, boxouts, cores and other devices used for forming
openings, holes, pockets, recesses and other cavities shall be as rigid as the formwork itself to prevent
the leakage of any grout. No holes shall be cut in cast concrete except with the approval of the SO Rep.
4.20
STRIKING OF FORMWORK
The minimum period before striking of the formwork for ordinary Portland Cement concrete shall be in
accordance with the following table :
Type of Formwork
Minimum Period
Before Striking
12 hours
3 days
14 days
21 days
Remarks
)
) The period shall commence from
) the time of last pour of concrete
)
) After striking of formwork, props
) shall be immediately put up to
) support the structure
)
For residential building blocks where metal formwork (HDB Modular Formwork Design System or similar)
and Grade 40 concrete and above are specified, the provision of props and re-props shall be as stipulated
in the Drawings.
Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock or vibration and in the manner and order approved by
the SO Rep.
After striking of formwork, any honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising
from improper work procedures shall be immediately made good as directed by the SO Rep and at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Any remedial measures carried out without the knowledge and
approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution.
All holes formed by tie bolts shall be filled with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or
higher grade than the surrounding concrete as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar And Grout"
including all subclauses under it.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-21
4.21
4.22
BUILDING ACCURACY
After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the SO Rep to check
the deviation of the reinforced concrete Works from specified dimensions shown in the Drawings. All
measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep. Works complying with Singapore
Standard CP 23 Grade II shall be deemed acceptable.
4.23
4.23.1
General
Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be provided in the positions
and constructed and sealed with waterproofing materials as detailed in the Drawings.
All exposed vertical sides of columns and walls and undersides of beams at expansion joints shall be
covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with masonry nails at 300mm centres or otherwise
as shown in the Drawings.
The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all joint waterproofing
materials shall comply with the Drawings and the manufacturers' recommendation. Alternative joint
waterproofing materials may be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Submit supporting technical
information, test reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing materials.
All waterproofing materials provided at public access areas shall be protected with non-shrink grout.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-22
4.23
4.23.2
Waterstops
(CONTD)
Waterstops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be installed and butt jointed according to
BS 8007 and the Manufacturer's recommendations. Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the
formwork to prevent displacement during concreting.
4.23.3
4.23.4
4.23.5
it shall only be used in horizontal joint and be subject to compression throughout its length;
Good adhesion;
Water resistant;
Non-staining
4.23.6
Bituminous Sheeting
Bituminous sheeting with fibre shall comply with the following requirements :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two weeks immersion);
Maximum water absorption of 10% of dry weight;
Minimum tensile strength of 50 kg per cm;
Ozone and ultra-violet resistance.
The strip shall be applied to the joints by burning and affixing on each side of joint to a width not less than
70mm leaving the middle part free to take any movement at the joint without damage.
4.23.7
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(22)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-23
4.24
APPARATUS
The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use for all Works on the Site :
4.25
(a)
Concrete slump test apparatus complying with SS 78 or flow test apparatus complying with
BS 1881 : Part 105. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location;
(b)
Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with SS 78 for casting 100mm concrete
test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall be provided such that
no stripping of the cube is required prior to the 24 hours setting and hardening period;
(c)
Three measuring cylinders of 250ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for
determination of silt content (field settling method);
(d)
(e)
One digital concrete rebound hammer equipped with an electronic transducer which converts the
rebound of the hammer into an electric signal and displays it in the selected stress units;
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
4.26
4.26.1
General
For structural purposes, cement mortar shall compose of one part cement to one part sand, mixed with
water so that water-cement ratio does not exceed 0.4 by weight and cement grout shall compose of
cement and water-cement ratio between 0.4 and 0.6, or such other proportions as shall be directed by the
SO Rep.
4.26.2
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(23)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-24
4.26
4.26.3
(CONTD)
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with
appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. They shall be
waterproof.
Load bearing joints and connection shall be grouted, mortar packed or concreted and these shall be
carried out by trained workers. In the case where a joint need not be grouted, mortar packed or concreted
immediately, such work shall be completed not later than 28 days after erection. The respective mix
design shall be free of lime and chloride. They shall be durable, waterproof, non-shrink and possess
strength equal or higher than that of precast concrete. Curing for at least 3 days shall be provided.
Designed mixes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
4.26.4
Testing Method And Compliance For Load Bearing Grout And Mortar
The method of sampling and testing prescribed in BS 4551 shall be adopted. The compressive strength
shall be determined by crushing test on 50mm cubes. For each casting day and for each grade of grout
or mortar, three samples shall be taken from three separate batches. One cube shall be cast from each
sample for testing at 28 days.
The compliance of the 28 day strength shall be judged, based on the average compressive strength of 3
cubes from 3 samples taken on the same day, in accordance with the strength requirement specified in
the Drawings. In the event of non-compliance, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
If the average compressive strength of the 3 cubes is less than the design strength, the quality of the substandard concrete shall be estimated by carrying out appropriate tests on hardened concrete in the
structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test.
4.27
FOUNDATIONS
All reinforced concrete footings and pile caps shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and to
the exact depths required. Provide, maintain and remove any necessary planking and strutting, sheetpiling or cofferdams, and by pumping or other approved means keep the excavations free from water.
In the case of loose or disturbed ground, the bottom of excavation for pile caps shall be well rammed and
those for footings shall be excavated further to a sound layer. The whole work shall be approved by the
SO Rep before it is covered with a blinding layer not less than 40mm thick. The required cover of
concrete under the reinforcement shall be entirely above the blinding layer.
Excavation for all foundation work shall be carried out in accordance with Section 3 - "Excavation"
including all clauses and subclauses under it.
4.28
PILE CAPS
Before commencing to construct pile caps, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to check
and verify the eccentricities and the cut-off levels of all piling work in the ground against pile eccentricity
Drawings provided and pile cap details in the Drawings, and shall notify the SO Rep in the event of any
discrepancy.
Straighten the steel reinforcement projecting above the piles for anchoring pile caps, carry out
excavations, erect formwork and temporary timbering for the construction of pile caps.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(24)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-25
4.29
LIFT PITS
For lift pits below ground level, the concreting to the bottom and walls shall be carried out in one operation
without construction joints and bolt holes up to the underside of ground beams and slabs. Forms ties used
to connect opposite faces of formwork shall be cast-in steel spreader ties. Concrete separators shall not
be permitted. Where in the case water reducing admixture is used in the concrete mix, furnish information
concerning the water reducing admixture for approval by the SO Rep prior to its use. Water reducing
admixture shall be mixed with the concrete in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
All external wall surfaces of lift pits shall be waterproof by coating with three coats of bitumen solution
complying with BS 3416 or other cold applied bituminous coating as approved by the SO Rep. The
concrete surface shall be clean and dry before application of the first coat, and ample time for each coat to
dry shall be allowed. The total dry thickness of the coating shall be 0.6mm minimum.
4.30
4.31
FLOORS
After initial set, the upper surface of cast-in-situ reinforce concrete floors shall be trowelled smooth with a
steel float to true level and even surface. No screeding of any kind shall be applied to the floor slabs
except where specified otherwise. Care shall be taken to ensure that the steel reinforcement is not
displaced or lowered during trowelling.
For areas which are to receive rendering or other finishes, the fresh concrete shall be struck off to a level
or fall as required using a long timber trowel. The surface shall be densified by a jitterbug tamper or
trowelling after the bleeding has stopped in order to eliminate settlement and plastic shrinkage cracks.
Before it hardens, it shall be brushed with a stiff broom in one direction to give a rough and tidy surface.
4.32
ROOFS
4.32.1
General
Reinforced concrete roofs shall be constructed to fall as shown in the Drawings and finished with power
trowelling, leaving the surface smooth and free from mortar droppings. The finished roof slab shall be
cured immediately with an approved curing compound.
Roof access openings, 900mm x 900mm clear with 200mm upstanding kerbs, shall be constructed at the
positions as shown in the Drawings.
100mm x 100mm mortar angle fillet shall be neatly provided around all upstands, pipe supports,
RC stumps, walls and ventilating stacks.
The finished concrete roof shall be protected against mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects
during subsequent work on the roof.
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(25)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-26
4.32
ROOFS
(CONTD)
4.32.2
4.33
DRIPS
Drips shall be formed along edges of soffit to concrete roof slabs, hoods, underside of balconies,
cantilevered beams and slabs and other parts of the building where rainwater is likely to adhere in drops.
4.34
4.35
4.36
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(26)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-27
Section 5/......
BLDG13/S04.DOCX(27)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 5-1
SECTION 5
METAL FORMWORK
5.1
5.2
DEFINITIONS
"Metalforms" -
shall mean the set of metalforms rented from the Employer including U-clips but
excluding the supporting system.
"Workshops" -
5.3
5.4
HIRING PERIOD
The hiring period shall commence on the date of the drawing of Metalforms from the Employer's
Metalform Warehouses. The hiring period shall end when the Metalforms are returned to the Employer's
Metalform Warehouses.
Where during the hiring period, there is delay in the Contractor's construction activities due to the supply
of Metalforms which in the opinion of the SO Rep, are deemed to be unavoidable, the hiring charges may
be adjusted accordingly and at the sole discretion of the SO Rep.
The Contractor must inform the Employer's Metalform Unit of any delay within 2 weeks from the first day
of such delay. The details of notice including the number of days delayed and area of metalform affected
shall be submitted to the Metalform Unit within 2 weeks from the date of resumption of work. The SO Rep
shall endorse on this notice before submitting to the Metalform Unit.
If the Contractor does not submit the notice within the above deadline, the SO Rep reserves the right not
to consider the Contractor's request for adjustment of the hiring charges.
BLDG13/S05.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 5-2
5.5
IRREGULARITIES COMMITTED
Should the Contractor be found to have committed any of the following irregularities :
(a)
Subletting or lending the Metalforms or any part thereof to any third party or removing the
Metalforms from the site to which it is delivered or consigned, without first receiving written
permission from the SO Rep regardless of whether the Contractor has any knowledge of it; or
abuse in Metalforms usage or storage, regardless of whether the Contractor has any knowledge of
it;
(b)
Using sub-standard metalforms or accessories purchased elsewhere other than from the Employer
to replace lost and damaged ones upon returning;
(c)
Using sub-standard metalforms or accessories purchased elsewhere other than from the Employer
for use in the Site;
the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges
against the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall be liable to pay the Employer charges equal to the
replacement cost of Metalforms based on the latest Employer's purchase prices. The SO Rep also
reserves the right to destroy these sub-standard metalforms found on the Site at no compensation
whatsoever to the Contractor if the Contractor does not immediately remove such sub-standard
metalforms from the Site.
5.6
5.7
DELIVERY OF FORMWORK
The Contractor shall bear all the cost of transportation of the Metalforms from the Metalform Unit's
Warehouse or the Workshops to the Site and return the Metalforms to the Metalform Unit's Warehouse or
the Workshops at the end of the hiring period, together with a list of the Metalform items hired. Any
missing items shall be listed separately.
During the delivery of the Metalforms to the Site, the Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the cost
of loading, unloading, on-site handling and transportation, arranging, stacking and storing of the
Metalforms.
Unless notification in writing to the contrary is received by the SO Rep from the Contractor within one
week of the Metalforms being delivered to the Site, the Metalforms shall be deemed to be in good order in
accordance with the Terms of Contract and to the Contractor's satisfaction.
BLDG13/S05.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 5-3
5.8
USE OF METALFORMS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe-keeping of the Metalforms and use in a workmanlike
manner and return on completion of the hiring period according to the returning schedule. The Metalforms
shall not be abused ie. not used in its intended manner, for eg. as bracing or propping of formwork, as
walking or working platform. The decision of the SO Rep in this respect shall be final and binding on and
conclusive against the Contractor. The Contractor shall be charged for the damage of the Metalforms
arising from such abuse, based on the latest Employer's purchase prices.
The Metalforms shall be used only at the site as stated in the Delivery Orders. No Metalform shall be
allowed to be transferred to another worksite unless prior written approval is obtained from the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall remove damaged metalforms and substitute with good ones from the Metalform Unit
as and when directed by the SO Rep during construction.
The Contractor shall use, for each casting of concrete, form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of timber, form ties, form tie holders, plastic cones, hooks, bolts, nuts,
washers, anchor bolts & form bracing and propping or any other tools and accessories he may use in
conjunction with the use of the Metalforms. The use of such accessories shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
The Employer accepts no liability or responsibility for any consequential loss or damage due to or arising
from the usage of the Metalforms or through non-arrival arising from accident during loading and
unloading or transporting of the Metalforms.
The Contractor shall fully and completely indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims by any person
whatsoever from injury to person or property caused by or in connection with or arising out of the use of
Metalforms and in respect of all costs and charges in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the cost of building a raised timber platform and tarpaulin
covers or equivalent for the safe-keeping and storage of the Metalforms at the Site.
5.9
Submit returning schedule and quantities to the Employer's Metalform Unit on a per building block
basis within 3 weeks from the last date of casting of main roof.
(b)
The Metalforms and accessories for the block (excluding the formwork for water-tank, roof-fascia,
pitched roof etc. which are to be cast after the main roof) shall be fully returned within 1.5 months
from the last date of casting of main roof; failing which, the SO Rep may treat part or whole of the
relevant unreturned metalforms as lost. The decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
(c)
The remaining Metalforms and accessories for the block shall then be returned within 1 month from
the last date of casting for the building block; failing which the SO Rep may take the action as
specified in (b) above.
(d)
All Metalforms shall be lowered down carefully by mechanical means and no dumping or rough
handling is allowed.
(e)
Metalforms returned to the Employer's Workshops shall be packed and strapped in neat bundles of
similar sizes and placed on pallets at the Contractor's own expense for easy unloading using
forklift. The Contractor shall mark the Metalform with a strip of paint of 100mm width. The colour
code to be used can be obtained from the Metalform Unit. Sizes of the pallets shall be in
accordance with the instructions of the SO Rep.
(f)
At the receiving Workshops, the Employer's representative shall fill up the metalforms delivery form
in triplicate.
BLDG13/S05.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 5-4
5.9
5.10
Any amendment or alteration on the delivery form shall be countersigned by the Contractor and the
Employer's representative at the receiving ends.
(h)
Metalforms returned to the Workshops which are found to be irreparable will be considered as
damaged. An actual counting of such metalforms at the Workshops shall be witnessed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure that he or his representative is present at the time and
place so directed by the SO Rep, otherwise, the SO Rep reserves the right to destroy or write-off
these damaged Metalforms at no compensation whatsoever to the Contractor.
Rate
(1)
Flat Forms
$ 6.40 per m
(2)
$ 6.40 per m
(3)
L, S-shaped Forms
$ 7.70 per m
}
} Based on surface area in contact
} with concrete
}
}
(4)
$ 7.20 per m
The Contractor shall not pay any monies directly to any of the Workshops. The costs for cleaning,
servicing and repair shall be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor.
Metalforms shall be considered as damaged beyond repair, for example; if they are twisted, severely bent
or crushed. The decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and binding on and
conclusive against the Contractor.
The Contractor shall also be charged according to the provisions as specified under Clause 5.3 "Hire
Rates, Charges & Payment" for such Metalforms. The SO Rep reserves the right to destroy or write-off
these damaged Metalforms at no compensation to the Contractor.
Section 6/.....
BLDG13/S05.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-1
SECTION 6
SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION
6.1
6.1.1
Area Of Usage
Precast concrete components shall be used in areas as shown in the Drawings.
6.1.2
Surface Finishes
External surface treatments or finishes of the precast concrete components shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
6.1.3
Suppliers
The precast concrete components shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of
approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: ml.eptc.com.sg
The Contractor shall submit the names of his suppliers, the written contractual agreements between
themselves and the suppliers and the quantities to be supplied by each supplier for the precast concrete
components within four weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The written contractual
agreement submitted shall include the detailed breakdown of precast component prices. The Contractor
shall not be permitted to change his suppliers without the written consent of the SO Rep.
6.1.4
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-2
6.1.4
(Contd)
Loading on Trailer
The Contractor shall specify in Safety Manual to avoid over-loading of precast components on
trailer. The overall height from ground to the highest point on trailer shall be checked to ensure
compliance with the prevailing traffic regulations. In addition, for trailer with steel frame, load
balancing of precast components at two sides of trailer shall be checked before leaving the precast
factory. For non-compliance found, the driver shall be informed and remedial actions shall be taken
before leaving the precast factory.
(c)
Transportation
The Contractor shall specify in the Safety Manual that the driver should observe the speed limit
and prevailing regulations during the precast transportation. The driving experience of drivers
employed for precast transportation shall be specified where necessary to exclude inexperience
driver from precast transportation. Continuing road safety education and appropriate disciplinary
actions for non-compliances shall also be included in the manual to prevent speeding during
transportation.
The Contractor shall ensure the transportation fleet like prime-movers and trailers are wellmaintained. The routine maintenance shall include periodic regulatory inspection by the authorities,
daily checks by driver on brakes, signal, lighting, tyres. The timber platform shall be in safe
condition for the loading workers and the trailer shall be free from loose debris for precast
transportation.
6.2
6.2.1
Design
Structural precast concrete components shall be designed in accordance with CP 65. The Contractor may
propose alternative design subject to the written approval of the SO Rep.
Joints, connections and sealants shall be designed for protection against water, weather, corrosion and
fire so as to provide continued water and weather tightness and structural integrity of the buildings.
The positions and capacities of all lifting and erection inserts of precast concrete components shall be
carefully considered for all loads induced by manufacturing, lifting, handling, storage, transportation and
erection. A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be used to design the lifting and erection inserts, lifting hooks
and erection devices. Submit precasting and erection techniques for precast concrete components
including structural calculations and details for the lifting and erection devices.
Should the load bearing joints and connections be grouted, mortar-packed or concreted, submit respective
mix design for approval by the SO Rep and carry out tests in the mix design in accordance with
appropriate code or proprietary requirements. Method of installations adopted shall ensure that the joints
and connections can be fully grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with
appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod.
The SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to apply special coatings or epoxy
bonding compounds to connections and joints of precast concrete components, be it welded, bolted,
dowelled, grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-3
6.2
6.2.2
Drawings
(CONTD)
Submit the following drawings for the approval of the SO Rep within one month from the date of the Letter
of Acceptance, unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep :
(A)
Shop Drawings
(a)
(b)
(i)
That the details for such precast concrete components are adequate and suitable for
the Works and that there is no discrepancy. The Contractor shall be responsible and
bear all costs and expenses for all rejections, reinstatements and reproductions of
such precast concrete components directly and/or indirectly resulting from and/or out
of any inadequacy, unsuitability and discrepancy in the Drawings;
(ii)
That the handling techniques for precasting, demoulding, storage and transportation
adopted shall not over-stress such precast concrete components. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to provide at his own cost and expense, any
additional steel reinforcement bars required for his handling techniques to ensure
that such precast concrete components are not damaged or over-stressed during
handling;
(iii)
Ensure the adequacy and suitability of the size, position and details of lifting and
erection inserts and any additional reinforcement bars required for handling and
erection purposes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
commencement of the production work;
(iv)
That the minimum concrete strength of precast concrete components required for
handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection are checked and
submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the production
work.
(B)
(i)
The size, position and details of lifting and erection inserts and
reinforcement details;
(ii)
(iii)
Mould Drawings
Mould drawings showing :
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-4
6.2
6.2.2
Drawings (Cont'd)
(C)
(CONTD)
Erection Drawings
Erection drawings showing :
(D)
(i)
(ii)
Calculation and position and sizes of backers/shims, temporary props, bracings and their
installation method clearly shown.
(iii)
6.3
MANUFACTURING
6.3.1
6.3.2
Shop Drawings
Precast concrete components shall be produced in accordance with approved structural Drawings. Shop
drawings shall be based upon the structural Drawings and shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval
as per sub-clause 6.2.2 "Drawings".
6.3.3
Moulds
Check and ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of
the precast concrete components to be produced. The moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to produce the
casting tolerances and finishes specified.
Rubber seal or equivalent shall be used in all horizontal and vertical mould joints to prevent leakage of
mortar or cement paste. Moulds shall be designed to prevent damage to concrete from :
(a)
(b)
the stripping operation when the precast components are lifted from the mould; or
(c)
High quality rubber mat shall be used for carrying the tiles of precast components with tile finish.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-5
6.3
MANUFACTURING
(CONTD)
6.3.4
Manufacturing Requirements
Submit proposals for marking identification and date of casting of each precast concrete component for
the approval of the SO Rep prior to the commencement of manufacturing.
Surface finish requirements shall be consistent with the standard achieved by the use of high quality
concrete and properly designed forms or moulds having rigid and smooth surfaces. Such surface finishes
including surface airholes shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Where tile finish is specified, check
and ensure uniform width and depth of the groove between the tiles which shall be on the same plane.
Prior to mass production of precast concrete components, produce at least one sample of each type of
precast concrete component for approval by the SO Rep. The approved sample panel shall be displayed
at the precasting yard. The approved sample panel shall be used as the yardstick for the minimum
standard and quality to be achieved for all precast panels. The SO Rep may at his absolute discretion
require more sample panels to be produced for his approval. Check and ensure that the approved sample
panels are not damaged on display.
The Contractor shall provide remedial work at his own costs and expenses to precast concrete
components that are not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross variation from the
specified finish may cause rejection of the precast concrete components and the Contractor shall replace
the precast concrete components.
Allow for the incorporation of all requirements of all trades whose work requires blockouts, recesses,
notches, embedded metal work or any other items affecting the precast concrete components involved. All
reinforcements shall be positioned in the moulds with the prescribed concrete covers as shown on the
Structural Drawings. Approval shall be sought from the SO Rep if such work cannot be incorporated into
the precast concrete components.
Aluminium window frames, may either be installed on site or cast-in together with the precast concrete
components.
In all cases the aluminium window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious material
by wrapping with self adhesive protective tape. There shall be adequate lapping over the joints of two
protective tapes. The protective tapes shall completely adhere to the frame and provide protection to it.
In the case of aluminium window frame being installed on site, check and ensure:
6.3.5
(i)
the safety and integrity of the aluminium window frame and that no part of the precast concrete is
hacked;
(ii)
the watertightness between the aluminium window frame and precast concrete component.
Manufacturing Tolerances
Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast components shall be as follows unless otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep :
(a)
Position tolerances for cast-in items measured from datum line locations as shown on approved
Drawings:
Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves etc
Flashing relets, at edge of panel
Reglets for glazing gaskets
Groove width for glazing gaskets
Electrical outlets
(b)
:
:
:
:
:
10mm
6mm
3mm
2mm
13mm
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-6
6.3
MANUFACTURING
6.3.5
(CONTD)
For casting tolerances, the overall height and width measured at the face adjacent to the mould
when cast shall be as follows :
3m or under
3mm
> 3m to 6m
:
:
+3mm
-5mm
> 6m to 9m
:
:
+3mm
-6mm
Each additional 3m
Thickness
:
:
+6mm
-3mm
+6mm
2mm per 3m
The casting tolerances specified above shall be compatible with the installation requirements of
precast concrete components, which may have attachment of sash, door frames, window frames,
louvres sunshades and other materials.
(d)
6.3.6
For after casting tolerances, the bowing and warpage shall be as follows:
Without intermediate support dimension
1 panel
240
1 panel
360
Inspection Of Manufacturing
The SO Rep shall have the discretion to inspect the manufacturing plant and the precast concrete
components at all times. If the inspection is not conducted at the plant, this shall not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibility in manufacturing an acceptable product, and the SO Rep shall at his
liberty reject any precast concrete components on the Site not complying with the design requirements
even though no plant inspection has been conducted.
6.4
HANDLING
The precast concrete components shall be handled and transported in a way consistent with their shapes
and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damages. Precast concrete components shall be lifted
only at appropriate points shown on the production and erection Drawings.
Check and allow for :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Allow for developing handling techniques to ensure that all precast concrete components are successfully
fabricated, delivered and installed without causing structural damage, detrimental cracking, architectural
impairment, or permanent distortion.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-7
6.5
STORAGE
As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall store all precast components at the area to be
occupied by the multi-storey carpark/garage. After the construction of the foundations and ground beams
of the multi-storey carpark/garage, the area shall be backfilled for the temporary storage of precast
components. However, construction for Works to the electrical substation (if applicable) can proceed.
The Contractor shall ensure that the storage of the precast components shall not cause any damage to
the constructed pile caps, column stumps and ground beams. Before recommencing construction Works
to the multi-storey carpark/garage, the Contractor shall verify the position and alignment of the column
stumps. Any rectification work shall be done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
Notwithstanding the preceding requirements, the multi-storey carpark/garage and electrical substation (if
applicable) shall be Substantially Completed within the Time for Completion. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in
compliance with the requirements specified in this clause.
The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for handling of the stored precast
components. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to permit well-organised storage,
and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking, discolouration, staining or soiling of the precast
components. No precast component shall be placed on the ground. They shall be stored with due
protection from staining or physical damage.
6.6
ERECTION
6.6.1
6.6.2
Quality Control
Only competent workers who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete components
should be employed.
Methods of erection shall be such as to avoid soiling, cracking, chipping and damage to built-in items.
Only minor chipping and spalling may be repaired by patching up at the Site after installation, provided this
is done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Check and ensure the accuracy of location of all bearing surfaces and all anchorages for precast concrete
components. Any deviations from the Structural Drawings noted shall be corrected prior to the start of
erection. Bearing surfaces, notches, bolts, connection angles or plates shall be checked as to level, line
and grade.
Whenever inserts or lifting hooks are used for erection purposes, their location shall be checked for
compliance with the location as specified in the Structural or Approved Workshop Drawings. Anchorage
length and exposed length of lifting hooks shall be checked for compliance with that specified in the
design. The inserts or lifting hooks shall be properly secured before casting. If slings are used, the precast
concrete components shall be marked so that the slings are placed at the proper locations.
Field conditions shall be determined by actual measurement so that precast concrete components and
joint sealants installed satisfy design or specification requirements and are within the specified erection
tolerances. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the precast concrete components shall be cleaned
and repaired after installation.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-8
6.6
ERECTION
6.6.2
(CONT'D)
Ensure that good construction practice is adhered to while the precast concrete components are on the
Site and bracing or props shall be provided to maintain the required position, stability and alignment of
precast concrete components prior to permanent jointing or connection.
Each precast concrete component shall be individually adjusted and accurately positioned within the
erection tolerances. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be kept correctly aligned and positioned, and
uniform joint width shall be maintained as erection progresses. Adjustments or changes in connections,
which could induce additional stresses shall be reviewed and approved by the SO Rep.
Only qualified welders shall be employed for welded connections.
.
6.6.3
6.6.4
Erection Tolerance
For correct performance and appearance of the structures, check and ensure that the precast
components are located in the centre of their theoretical location on the building and adjusted to
accommodate adjacent components, proper joint width, and alignment with adjacent precast or in-situ
members. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, the permissible erection tolerances shall be as
follows :
(a)
(b)
5mm
2mm
:
:
:
mm
2mm
9mm
(c)
Panel Alignment
Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints :
Jog in alignment of matching edges :
3mm
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
3mm
Bldg Spec
Page 6-9
6.6
ERECTION
6.6.4
(CONT'D)
Location Of Openings
In precast concrete components
(e)
6mm
:
:
:
40mm
20mm
10mm
Verticality Of Wall
Entire height of building
1st to 4th floor
Each storey height
(f)
:
:
:
:
5mm
25mm
Coping level :
Any interval less than 6m
Any 50m length
(g)
Verticality Of Column
Verticality tolerance for columns shall be similar to that for walls.
(h)
6.7
10mm
30mm
(b)
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
Length
: +3mm
(ii)
Cross-sectional dimensions
(width or depth)
: 1mm
(iii)
Flange thickness
: 1mm
(iv)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-10
6.7
(c)
(d)
(CONT'D)
(vi)
Position of strands
: 2mm
(vii)
End squareness
: 3mm
(viii)
Blockouts
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
: 20mm
(ii)
Standard top side can have minor chips and spalls but no major imperfections, honeycomb
or Defect shall be allowed. The top surface shall be such that it is suitable for composite
action with cast-in-situ structural topping.
(iii)
(iv)
Major openings or holes shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings. These and any
other smaller openings made in the field shall be to the approval of the SO Rep.
(v)
Patching-up will be acceptable provided the structural adequacy of the product and the final
appearance are not impaired. Prior to any patching-up work, submit proposal for the
execution of such work for approval by the SO Rep. In any event, all patching up work shall
be carried out to the approval of the SO Rep.
(vi)
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
Precast prestressed concrete plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing,
stockpiling, transporting and erection operation only at the lifting or supporting points, or
both, as shown in the Drawings or shop Drawings and with approved lifting devices which
shall have a minimum safety factor of 3.
(ii)
All transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed with acceptable equipment
and methods and by experienced personnel.
(iii)
(iv)
All precast prestressed units shall be so placed that identification marks can be read.
(v)
Precast prestressed members shall be so stacked that lifting devices are accessible and
undamaged.
(vi)
The use of upper member of a stacked tier as storage area for shorter length of precast
members or heavy equipment is strictly prohibited.
Bldg Spec
Page 6-11
6.7
(CONT'D)
Erection
Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, their erection shall comply
with the following :
6.8
(i)
Precast members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided for
such purposes. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided and they shall have a
minimum load factor of 2.0 times the dead load plus construction loads.
(ii)
Members shall be properly aligned and levelled as required by the approved shop drawings.
Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably levelled out by jacking, loading
or any other feasible methods acceptable to the SO Rep.
(iii)
Field welding shall be carried out by qualified welders using equipment and materials
compatible to the base materials.
(iv)
Precast prestressed concrete members may be drilled or 'shot', provided no contact is made
with the prestressing strands. Any spalling resulting therefrom shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(v)
Final inspection and acceptance of erected precast prestressed concrete members shall be
made by the SO Rep to verify conformity with plans and the Specifications.
Manufacturing Tolerance
Position of void - Vertical
Horizontal
(b)
6.9
:
:
3mm
3mm
Erection
(i)
(ii)
All ends of hollow core slabs shall be seated with approved concreting materials to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
6.10
6.11
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-12
6.12
6.12.1
General Requirements
Batch testing of sealant compounds delivered to the Site shall be carried out as directed by the SO
Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
The SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any type of sealants if their performance is
deemed to be unsatisfactory.
The use of membranes and admixtures for grout, mortar or concrete for improving water and
weather tightness may be approved by the SO Rep. All sealant materials used at public accessible
areas such as access balcony, stair-cases, stair-landings etc shall be protected with non-shrink
mortar or grout.
Liquid membranes, if used, shall have specified minimum thickness and width for water and
weather tightness.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Type of Sealant
Maximum
Joint Width
(mm)
Maximum Movement in
Tension or Compression
(%)
Butyl;
Acrylic;
One Part Polyurethane;
Two Parts Polyurethane;
One Part Polysulphide;
Two Parts Polysulphide;
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
15 to 25
20
25
25
25
The normal design joint widths shall be 10, 14 or 15 as shown in the Structural Drawings.
For joints up to 13mm wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. For joints over
13mm wide, the depth shall be equal to one-half the width, but not less than 13mm. Sealants
installed shall not be less than 6mm wide or 6mm deep.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-13
6.12
6.12.1
(CONTD)
(Contd)
(vi)
Joint Preparation
Before sealing the joints, concrete surfaces shall be smooth, clean and free of all mortar dust or
other contaminants that may affect adhesion. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer, and the primer shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used.
6.12.2
Structural Roof, Access Balcony Roof And Lift Motor Room Roof
Water tightness test shall be carried out on all roofs with precast joints in accordance with
Clause 4.32.2 "Watertightness And Water Stagnation Test".
(b)
External Walls
For external walls, a continuous jet of water shall be sprayed on the joint corresponding to
600 litres per hour from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m per second and a cone
scatter of approximately 60 degrees held at a distance of 1.2m from the wall surface under
test. The duration of the test shall not be less than 1 hours. The hose shall be placed with
the nozzle in line with the vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone
will cover a vertical and two horizontal joints as shown in the Drawings.
For external walls, the following tests shall be conducted for each building block:
Building Height
Up to 20 stories
Up to 30 stories
Up to 40 stories
Up to 50 stories
Frequency of tests
20 tests for vertical joints,
20 tests for horizontal joints
30 tests for vertical joints,
30 tests for horizontal joints
40 tests for vertical joints,
40 tests for horizontal joints
50 tests for vertical joints,
50 tests for horizontal joints
These tests shall be carried out at any location as instructed by the SO Rep.
The joint shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at
the joint or internal side of any part of the building, during spraying and after the completion
of the spraying. In the event that any joint fails the watertightness test, the Contractor shall
investigate the causes of failure and seek the approval of the SO Rep on the rectification
method.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-14
6.12
6.12.2
(i)
(CONTD)
(c)
(d)
Refuse Chute
All refuse chutes shall be tested by spraying water from the top of refuse chutes. The water
shall spray vertically downwards on all internal walls for a duration of 1 hour. No seepage of
water from the joints shall be permitted during the test.
(e)
(f)
Kitchen/Bathroom/Toilet Areas
(1)
Carry out water test to the following items prior to any tiling work in accordance with
the procedure described below :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(2)
All joints between the floor slab and floor traps in the bathroom and kitchen;
All joints between the branching off for water closet and floor slab;
All floor joints between the precast slabs and walls in bathroom and kitchen;
All floor joints between the precast slabs in bathroom and kitchen.
The gratings to floor traps in the bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked
temporarily with polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded
with about 25mm depth of water at the highest level of the slab. The amount of
water shall be maintained for four hours, replenishing when necessary during which
the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks.
Towards the end of this test, the water will be allowed to drain off. During this
process there shall be no sign of chokage in the system.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-15
6.12
6.12.2
(ii)
(CONTD)
6.13
6.13.1
6.13.2
6.13.3
Quality Assurance
Check and ensure that the quality of clinker tiles shall comply with SS 301. Provide all means to protect the clinker tile
materials before, during and after installation :
(a)
(b)
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-16
6.13
6.13.3
Quality Assurance
(c)
(CONTD)
(Cont'd)
Technical Specification
Unless otherwise specified, all tests shall be conducted by PSB, SAC-SINGLAS or other approved
laboratory in accordance with SS 301.
The total number of test specimens required for testing items (i) to (iv) specified below shall be 10.
(i)
Dimensional Tolerances
Dimensions and their tolerances shall be as follows :
(ii)
Length
Width
Thickness
Straightness Of Sides
The maximum deviation from straightness, referred to the length of the side, shall not
exceed 0.5%.
(iii)
Rectangularity
The maximum deviation from rectangularity of each specimen shall not exceed 1.8% of the
nominal dimension.
(iv)
Flatness Of Surface
Centre curvature and warpage of the surface shall not exceed 0.5% of the length of the
corresponding diagonal. The maximum edge curvature of each specimen shall not exceed
0.5% of the nominal dimension.
(v)
(vi)
Water Absorption
The water absorption capacity on average shall not exceed 3% by weight.
Number of test specimens shall be 10.
(vii)
Modulus Of Rupture
The average value for modulus of rupture shall be at least 20 N per mm and minimum
single value shall be 17 N per mm.
Number of test specimens shall be 7.
(viii)
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-17
6.13
6.13.3
Quality Assurance
(c)
(CONTD)
(Cont'd)
(x)
6.13.4
Dimensional Tolerances
Straightness of Sides
Rectangularity
Flatness of Surface
Surface Condition of Clinker Tiles
Water Absorption
Modulus of Rupture
Colourfastness and Lightfastness
Acid Resistance and Alkali Resistance
Test for Adhesion Bond Strength Between Clinker Tiles and Concrete.
The test certificates shall be submitted to the SO Rep prior to bulk ordering. In addition, the Contractor
shall send the clinker tiles for testing as and when required by the SO Rep.
At the time of receiving clinker tiles from the supplier, the Contractor shall check and satisfy himself that
the clinker tiles comply with this Specifications, and, if so requested by the SO Rep, shall submit a
certificate issued by the manufacturer that the clinker tiles as supplied in the shipment are of the best
quality of its kind.
6.14
6.14.1
General
Unless otherwise specified, the requirements specified in Clauses 6.1 to 6.6 (inclusive), 6.9 to 6.11
(inclusive) and 6.13 including all sub-clauses under them shall be applicable to this Clause including all
sub-clauses under it.
6.14.2
Scope
Provide and install precast ferrocement sunbreakers complete with fixing accessories to the locations as
shown in the Drawings.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-18
6.14
6.14.3
Shop Drawings
(CONTD)
All structural and architectural drawings on this provision shall only serve as a guide. Prepare and submit
workshop drawings on all relevant details including :
6.14.4
(a)
(b)
(c)
Necessary steel bolts, hooks or other approved materials required for handling and erection
purposes. The size and location of these materials shall be clearly indicated in the details.
Cement
Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement"
(b)
Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".
(c)
Water
Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".
(d)
Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all
subclauses under it. In addition, all welded mesh and steel bar used shall be galvanised in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. 1.5mm diameter at 25mm spacing wire mesh shall be
galvanised with zinc coating of 325 g per m and 250 g per m2 minimum for average coating and
local coating shall have minimum proof stress of 300 N per mm.
(e)
Admixtures
Admixtures shall be as specified in Clause 4.4 "Admixtures".
6.14.5
Source Of Material
The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources approved by the SO Rep.
6.14.6
Technical Specifications
(a)
Mix Design
The ferrocement sunbreaker panels shall be cast from a mix design which satisfy the following
requirements :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2,200 kg per m.
(iv)
28 days average cube strength from three test cubes shall be not less than
40 N per mm.
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instruction.
Before commencing the manufacture of precast ferrocement sunbreaker, submit a proposed mix
design to the SO Rep for approval.
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-19
6.14
6.14.6
Technical Specifications
(b)
(Contd)
Other Properties
(i)
Initial Surface Absorption Test (ISAT) shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. The
hardened panel shall have ISAT value less than that stipulated below :
Time (min)
ISAT Value (ml/m/s)
(c)
(CONTD)
10
30
60
0.100
0.055
0.035
(ii)
(iii)
Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall have a cover
measurement of less than 5mm, but not less than 3mm.
Finishes
The panel shall be cast on a steel base mould with the finish surface cast-face down. The finish
surface is the external surface of the sunbreaker elevation where the tile and motifs are located.
(d)
Dimensional Tolerances
All tolerances shall be as specified in sub-clauses 6.3.5 "Manufacturing Tolerances" and 6.6.4
"Erection Tolerance".
6.14.7
Manufacturing Process
The panel shall be cast flat on a steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators and the
top surface shall be steel trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be galvanised and adequately
supported with approved spacers.
After setting and demoulding, the panels shall be marked and neatly stored with easy access and visibility
to every piece.
All panels must be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the curing method,
duration and facilities prior to actual production. The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist
curing.
Prior to commencement of the production, at least one sample of the panels shall be produced, erected
and installed at site for the approval of the SO Rep. Make adjustments to the manufacturing process or
equipment if so directed by the SO Rep.
Maintain a record of daily work progress on a proper drawing showing where panels of a particular date of
manufacture have been installed.
6.14.8
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-20
6.15
6.15.1
6.15.2
6.15.3
6.15.3.1
6.15.3.2
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-21
6.15
6.15.3.3
(CONTD)
The Contractor shall ensure cast-in window frames are handled with care during the production process.
At least an experienced engineer, supervisor and a team of skilled workers shall be assigned for the
production of precast facades with cast-in window frame, repair and delivery.
Any part of cast-in window frames which is in direct contact with the dummy frames, bracings and
stoppers of the mould system, additional protective material shall be provided to prevent any premature
damage to the cast-in window frames. Additional protection may be needed to prevent grout leakage at
the corners. To avoid excessive staining due to dropping of fresh concrete, protective measure shall be
taken to cover the window frames during the casting process. For the transportation from precast plant to
site, the Contractor shall ensure adequate measures are provided at the critical contact points between
the precast facades and the steel frames on the trailers to prevent damage to the cast-in window frame.
Before casting, the Contractor shall exercise due diligence and care in the precast production to ensure
that the orientation of cast-in window frame is checked when it is placed on the mould. The position of the
cast-in window frame shall also be measured and checked against the approved precast shop drawings
before casting. Upon the demoulding of precast facades, the orientation, position of cast-in window frame
and the clearance between the aluminum members shall be measured to detect any possible sagging or
bulging occurred during the casting.
6.15.3.4
Water-Tightness Test
The Contractor shall provide the equipment, labour and material to conduct water-tightness test at the
precast plant to ensure there is no water seepage at the interface joint between the cast-in window frame
and adjacent concrete.
The water-tightness test shall be carried out using a continuous jet of water sprayed on the joint/interface
with a nozzle and water hose. For each window, four points shall be selected for testing and each point
shall be sprayed for 20 minutes. The location of test shall be selected by the SO Rep. The velocity of the
water at each nozzle shall be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered from each nozzle shall
be 600 litres per hour. The nozzle shall be held at a distance 1m away from the joint/interface and pointed
towards the joint/interface horizontally.
10% of the precast facades with cast-in window frame shall be tested for the water-tightness at the
interface joint. The Contractor shall carry out the water-tightness test as soon as the precast production is
commenced to ascertain the initial casting workmanship, as well as the performance of the cast-in window
frames. The SO Rep shall decide on the window type or window configuration and the location on window
frame to be tested. The SO Rep reserves the right to adjust the percentage of testing depending on the
quality and performance cast-in window and the test results.
6.15.3.5
Functional Test
For quality assurance, the Contractor shall check the functionality and the performance of cast-in window
frames randomly at the early stage of the project. This is to ensure that any inadequacy of the bracing
system can be detected early. For sliding windows, the inner frames shall be installed for repeated sliding
operations to check for smoothness, alignment and safety in operation. For casement and top-hung
windows, the inner frames shall be tested by repeated opening and closing to check for smoothness,
alignment and safety.
6.15.4
Inspection And Protection Of Precast Faade With Cast-In Window Frame At Site
6.15.4.1
6.15.4.2
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-22
6.15
6.15.5
Submission Of Window Shop Drawings And Delivery Of Cast-In Window Frames To Precast Plant
(CONTD)
The Contractor shall submit the window shop drawings timely to SO Rep for approval within a reasonable
timeframe from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The timeframe for window shop drawing submission
shall tie in with the approved master construction programme for the initial delivery schedule of precast
components to prevent any delay in the precast supply.
The Contractor shall deliver mock-up cast-in window frames to precast plant to facilitate the mould
fabrication at the window opening. The timeframe for the delivery of mock up window frames shall be
carefully planned to tie in with the initial delivery schedule of precast components to site and tie in with the
approved master construction programme.
The Contractor is obliged at no extra cost to HDB to provide the mock up frames, make improvements in
the protective wrapping including increasing the number of layer if required to enhance grout tightness,
and on window frame construction where necessary.
The Contractor shall ensure sufficient lead time in the delivery of the cast-in window frames meant for
mass precast production, and for building up of the initial component stocks at precast plant to meet the
delivery subsequently. The Contractor shall plan the schedule diligently and take note of the expected
initial precast components delivery schedule for each block in the project, and tie in with the approved
master construction programme.
6.15.6
6.15.7
6.15.8
Section 7/.....
BLDG13/S06.DOCX(22)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-1
SECTION 7
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
7.1
GENERAL
The following specifications on Prestressed Concrete shall be treated as additional clauses to those
required under Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
7.2
CONCRETE MIX
Only specially designed concrete mixes complying with the requirements specified in the Drawings shall
be used for prestressed concrete work. Submit, for the approval of the SO Rep, details of the concrete
mix proposals at least 6 weeks in advance of concreting work so as to allow strength tests from trial mixes
to be made. Trial mixes shall be repeated until a satisfactory mix as regard to the cube strength and
workability has been achieved. Once the SO Rep has approved the mix, it shall be used for that work and
no departure shall be made from it either in properties of materials or in their relative proportions unless
authorised by the SO Rep who may require further trial mixes to be made.
All sampling and testing of constituent materials, fresh and hardened concrete, shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Singapore or British Standard. If the strength of cube
test results representing the prestressed concrete work fails to achieve the required strength, the
Contractor shall be subject to charges and shall carry out further tests and/or rectifications to ascertain the
in-situ strength of concrete as specified under Clause 4.16, 4.17 and 4.18 including all subclauses under
them.
Notwithstanding that all tests have been complied with, member which cracks during or after prestressing
operations to an extent which in the opinion of the SO Rep renders it unfit for its purpose in the work shall
be removed from the work and replaced.
7.3
PRESTRESSING STEEL
The prestressing steel, wire or strand used in prestressing tendons shall comply with the requirements of
BS 2691, BS 3617, BS 4486, BS 4757 and BS 5896. High tensile steel wires or high tensile steel strands
shall be supplied in coils of a sufficiently large diameter so that it shall retain its physical properties and
shall be reasonably straight when unwound from the coils.
A copy of the Manufacturer's test certificates covering each coil of prestressing steels to be used shall be
provided to the SO Rep. If test certificates relating to the material is not available, the Contractor shall
arrange for testing of samples. The SO Rep may require the Contractor to carry out further test on the
steel of each batch. All such testings shall be carried out by an approved testing authority.
All wires or strands shall be cut from certified coils. Keep proper records so as to enable identification of
the wires with the coil from which they are cut. The manufacture and assembly of tendons shall be done
in accordance with the best quality of workmanship appropriate to the prestressing system being used.
Tendons shall be made to the required length plus an allowance, where applicable, at each end for
stressing operation. Splicing of strands or wires forming a tendon shall not be permitted. Flame cutting of
wire or strand within 80mm of where tendon will be gripped by the anchorage or jacks shall not be
permitted. Care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not apply on the anchorage or on the
tendon, within 25mm of the anchorage.
A durable metal label on which shall be stamped the length of the tendon and the coil number of the wire
or strand used, shall be tied to each tendon. Care shall be taken that tendons of any type are not
damaged, kinked or bent. Tendons shall be kept free from loose or thick rust, oil, grease, tar, paint, mud,
or any other deleterious substances but a thin film of rust will be permitted.
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-2
7.4
ANCHORAGE DEVICES
Anchorage devices shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Each anchorage device shall be
capable of transmitting a force not less than the ultimate tensile strength of the tendon without
overstressing the concrete. Spiral or other reinforcement specified by the manufacturer as being required
for this purpose shall be considered part of the anchorage devices and shall be of the size and
dimensions recommended by the Manufacturer for the prestressing system being used. Certificates of
origin shall be provided for all anchorage devices.
No damaged or defective anchorage devices shall be used. All steel parts shall be protected from
corrosion and all threaded parts and fittings shall be protected by wrappings or plugs until used. The
anchorage devices shall be kept free from mortar, loose rust, grease, tar, paint, oil, mud or any other
coatings.
7.5
SHEATHING
All Sheathing shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be of the type suitable for
the prestressing system to be used and shall be strong enough for withstanding the placing and
compaction of the concrete without suffering damages or deformation. Internal and external diameters of
sheathing shall be within the limits specified in the design or approved by the SO Rep. The sheathing and
all splices shall be mortar tight. Steel sheathing shall be galvanised or lead coated. The Manufacturer's
value for the friction coefficients of the proposed sheathing shall be stated by the Contractor. Enlarged
portions of the sheathing at couplings or anchorages shall be of sufficient length to provide for the
extension of tendons.
Grout holes shall be provided at both ends of the sheathing and shall be at least 10mm diameter. Each of
the grouting holes shall be equipped with a plug valve or similar device capable of withstanding a pressure
of 1 N per mm without loss of water, grout or air. Additional vents, with plug valves, shall be provided at
suitable points in the sheathing, including high and low points, for the purpose of bleeding air and water to
ensure the complete filling of the duct with grout. The number and location of these additional vents shall
be as specified in the design.
Sheathing for prevention tendons shall consist of plastic tubing or other approved material of a quality,
diameter and thickness approved by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall continue through end forms for at least
25mm.
7.6
PLACEMENT OF TENDONS
(a)
Post-tensioned Tendons
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, tendons shall be sheathed
and placed in position prior to concreting. Where permanent tendons cannot be placed, temporary
tendons or other methods approved by the SO Rep shall be used to stiffen the sheathing.
Tendons shall be handled with care and shall be pulled through the sheathing in such a manner as
to avoid damage or contamination to either the tendon or the sheathing.
Sheathing shall be securely fixed at points sufficiently close together to maintain a smooth tendon
profile throughout the length of the tendon within a tolerance of 3mm of the position shown. If in
the opinion of the SO Rep, the sheathing is liable to be damaged or deformed during concreting
work, the Contractor shall take additional precautions to maintain the position and shape of the
sheathing.
Any temporary opening in the sheathing shall be plugged and all joints between sheathing and any
other part of the prestressing system shall be effectively sealed to prevent the entry of mortar, dust,
water or other deleterious matter. Sheathing shall be neatly fitted at joints without projection or
reduction of diameter, and the joints shall be mortar tight.
Immediately after the whole of the concrete has been placed, all tendons therein shall be pulled
back and forth for about 300mm to ensure that they are perfectly free inside the sheaths. Ducts
stiffened by temporary tendons shall be checked by passing through a tendon identical with the
permanent tendon.
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-3
7.6
(b)
Pretensioned Tendons
Tendons shall be located as shown on the Drawings and suitable devices shall be provided to
ensure that the correct positioning of the tendons is maintained during casting.
When tendons are being placed, particular care shall be taken so that the tendons shall not come
into contact with the oiled surface of the forms or be otherwise soiled. Any oil, etc which might
collect on the tendons shall be removed by cleaning the affected tendons with a petrol-soaked rag
or by other approved methods.
The anchorages shall be such as to prevent any slip during the casting or curing operations.
Unless as shown otherwise in the Drawings, the concrete cover to the surface of any tendon shall
not be less than twice the tendon diameter or 25mm whichever is the greater. Such minimum
cover shall be increased by 15mm for members situated in earth or water or over salt water.
7.7
CONCRETING
Concrete in one precast unit shall be placed in one operation continuously without interruption. The
Contractor shall provide such protective cover as and when required to avoid stoppage due to sudden
rain. No unit shall be removed from the mould or erected until sufficiently matured to ensure that no
damage shall be done to the unit. For post-tensioned construction, where necessary, temporary openings
shall be provided in the formwork to enable placing and adequate compaction of concrete, especially
around and underneath sheathing and anchorages.
Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the sheathing. Vibrators shall not come into contact with the
sheathing and if the sheathing is damaged during concreting, the whole or a portion of the concrete cast
may be rejected by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be cleaned out within half an hour of completion of each
concreting operation by blowing oil-free compressed air through the length of the sheathing. The concrete
shall be moist cured until the prestress is applied.
7.8
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-4
7.9
TENSIONING EQUIPMENT
All tensioning equipment shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. Hydraulic pumps shall be power
driven and the power unit shall be so adjusted that the rate of extension of the tendon is within the limits
recommended or as directed by the SO Rep. Dynamometers, and each set of equipment comprising
pump, jack and pressure gauge shall be calibrated as directed by the SO Rep and the true force
determined from the calibration. Dynamometers, pressure gauges and scales shall permit force and
elongation to be determined within an accuracy of 2%.
Pressure gauges shall only be used as a substitute for dynamometers and shall be concentric scale
gauges complying with the requirements of BS 1780 which requires gauges to be accurate to within 1% of
their full capacity. They shall be selected so as to be used between the 50% and 90% of their full capacity
and shall not be less than 200mm in diameter. Where pressure gauges are used, a suitable device shall
be fitted so as to protect the gauge against sudden release of pressure. Provision shall also be made by
such means as a "tee" connection, for the attachment of a second gauge which shall be attached and
used as a check whenever so requested by the SO Rep.
7.10
TENSIONING PRECAUTIONS
All tensioning operations shall be carried out in the presence of the SO Rep in accordance with the best
practice applicable to the particular prestressed method proposed. The tensioning operation shall be
performed only by personnel trained and experienced in this type of work.
Care shall be taken during tensioning to ensure the safety of all personnel engaged on the work and of
other persons in the vicinity. Jacks shall be secured in such a manner that they will be restrained should
they loose their grip on the tendons. No person shall be permitted to stand behind the jacks or close to
the line of the tendons while tensioning is in progress. The operation of jacks, the measurements of
elongation and associated operations shall be carried out in such a manner and from such positions that
the safety of all concerned is ensured. During actual stressing operations warning signs shall be
prominently displayed. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, there is danger to the general public or to
property, special precautions in the form of substantial barrier shall be required.
7.11
TENSIONING FORCE
Unless otherwise specified, the tensioning forces required shall be that shown in the Drawings. The
tensioning force applied to any tendon shall be determined by direct measurement of the force and
checked by measurement of the elongation of the tendon. The secant modulus determined from test
samples or shown on test certificates shall be used when interpreting the measurement of elongation.
Allowance shall be made for any anticipated draw-in at the anchorage devices on release of the jack, for
elastic shortening of the member and for anticipated losses due to stressing of subsequent tendons. The
final forces in each tendon, as measured by the dynamometer, shall be within an accuracy of plus or
minus 3% of the values stipulated.
If, on completion of tensioning each tendon to the required force, the check measurement of elongation
differs from its required value by more than 5%, the SO Rep may direct that some or all of the following
steps be taken :
(a)
Recalibration of equipment;
(b)
(c)
(d)
Lubrication of tendons to reduce friction losses. Only water soluble oils shall be used
in ducted systems and these shall be washed out before grouting;
(e)
Where only 1 jack is used previously, the tendon shall be tensioned from both ends
using 2 jacks;
(f)
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-5
7.12
PRETENSIONING
The abutments and casting beds for pretensioning of tendons shall be strong enough to withstand the
required total prestressing force with adequate safety. The abutments shall be so constructed as to
provide protection at all times against injury or damage caused by slipping occurring in anchorages during
or after tensioning. Provisions shall be made for free and adequate movement of the member at points of
support in the direction of the expected shortening due to prestress without impairing the rigidity of the
forms during casting operations. Where necessary, provision shall be made in the design of the casting
bed for the use of external vibrators.
In the case where tendons are to be deflected, submit details of the proposed layout for each line of
tendons together with values for the portion of the force to be provided by the initial tensioning and for the
portion which will be provided by the elongation resulting from subsequent deflection of the tendons.
Tensioning shall not commence until the SO Rep has approved the values submitted.
Special care shall be taken to apply tensioning force smoothly at an even rate and to determine its value
with considerable accuracy. Tendons shall be marked for measurement of elongation and shall also be
marked at both the jacking and dead ends of the stressing bed so that any slip may be observed. Should
a slip of any of the tendons in a group of tendons tensioned together occur, the tensioning of the whole
group shall be released, tendons reset, and the whole group tensioned again. Alternatively, the tensioning
of the group of tendons can be completed without the slipped tendon(s) which can be subsequently
tensioned.
The prestressing force shall be transferred from the jack to the abutment of the stressing bed immediately
the required force (or elongation) has been reached and the pressure in the jack shall be relaxed before
any other operation commences. Tendons shall be deflected, where shown in the Drawings and the
required force maintained, by use of approved fixing devices strong enough to hold the tendons firmly in
their proper positions especially during concreting and curing, until the concrete has attained the required
strength.
In order that the required force is maintained after the tensioned steel has been anchored, an allowance
shall be made in assessing the value of the applied force for loss of stress due to yield in the anchorages
and for slip when the steel is wedged after tensioning. In long line beds, due consideration shall be given
to the friction caused by the varying shape and number of diaphgrams.
Prior to concreting, a check shall be made of the accuracy of alignment of forms and of the distance
centre to centre bearings, overall length, width, positioning of end blocks, tendons, sheathing and
anchorages and their connections, reinforcement, bearings, dowels and any other fittings shown in the
Drawings. Concreting of a member shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been
obtained.
Prior to transfer of the prestressing force from the abutments of the casting bed to the members, all
tendons shall be tested for tightness and any loose tendon found shall be reported to the SO Rep who will
decide whether the members are acceptable. All tendons shall be marked at each end of every member
so as to check the draw-in and any slip of the tendons. The procedure of release shall be continuous and
shall be performed in the shortest possible time without interruption. The prestress shall be transferred to
the members in such a manner that the tendons are released gradually and, preferably, simultaneously.
The method of transferring the prestress and the equipment proposed shall be approved by the SO Rep
prior to use. The SO Rep shall be present at every occasion of releasing tendons. After prestress has
been transferred to the members, the tendons between the members shall be severed working along the
line from the point or points of release. Every effort shall be made to avoid injury to the concrete.
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-6
7.13
POST-TENSIONING
The process of prestressing each member shall be continuous, the tendons being stressed in the order
indicated in the Drawings, and the operation completed without interruption in as short a time as possible.
No member shall be left partially prestressed without the permission of the SO Rep unless the Drawings
require the member to be prestressed in stages. In general, tensioning shall proceed symmetrically to
avoid lateral distortion and development of tension on one side. At no time shall the permissible stresses
in concrete and steel be exceeded.
Tendon ducts shall be cleaned out by blowing compressed air through them and anchorages shall be
thoroughly cleaned prior to commencement of tensioning. The protruding ends of tendons shall be
cleaned of any coating, such as rust, mortar, oil or mud which would lessen the grip of wedges of
anchorage devices. Tendons shall be checked before tensioning to see that they are free to move inside
the duct.
Special care shall be taken to set the jacks accurately in the line of the tendon. The force which is applied
initially to take up the slack of the tendon shall be sufficient to seat the jack firmly but shall not exceed the
amount normally associated with the particular method of post-tensioning. After taking up the slack, the
tendon shall, where possible, be accurately marked at both ends and elongations or draw-in measured
from these markings. When requested by the SO Rep readings of force and elongation shall be taken at
stages during the tensioning of a tendon and plotted to determine the zero error in measuring elongation.
Where tendons consist of a number of individual components, each component shall be marked so that
any slip may be observed.
In the case of slipping of one or more components or tendons of a group tensioned together, the SO Rep
may permit a compensating increase in the elongation of the remaining tendons of the group provided that
the jacking force does not exceed 80% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the remaining tendons.
In the case of a tendon breaking or slipping after tensioning, the tendon shall be released, replaced if
necessary, and restressed. Under no circumstances shall the maximum jacking force exceeds the rated
capacity of the jacking equipment used, or 80% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the tendon
whichever is less.
7.14
TENSIONING RECORDS
All tensioning data shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep for checking and retention :
(a)
Pretensioned Tendons
The following data relating to the prestressing operation shall be recorded :
(b)
(i)
(ii)
Force applied if dynamometer is used; alternatively, pump or jack pressure and area
of piston;
(iii)
Post-Tensioned Tendons
The following data, where applicable, shall be recorded :
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Initial forces (or pressures) when tendons are marked for measurement of elongation;
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-7
7.15
GROUTING
After post-tensioned tendons have been tensioned and anchored they shall be pressure-grouted as soon
as practicable. The grout mix and the method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved by the
SO Rep before grouting is commenced. The pressure at which the grout is to be pumped into the duct
shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall not normally exceed 0.7 N per mm.
The grout shall preferably be either a neat cement grout with a water to cement ratio not exceeding 0.4 or
cement mortar (1:1 3/4 by weight). An approved expanding plasticising admixture shall be used. Grout
shall be mixed in a high speed mechanical mixer, for at least 2 minutes, until a uniform colloidal
consistency is produced. Mixing by hand shall not be permitted. Pumps shall be capable of continuous
operation with little pressure variation and shall have a system for recirculating the grout whilst actual
grouting is not in progress. Pumps shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and shall be capable of delivery
at pressures up to 1.0 N per mm. All equipment, especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed with clean
water after each series of operations and more frequently if necessary.
Grouting shall not be carried out while the shade temperature exceeds 38C. All ducts and holes shall be
thoroughly flushed out with clean water followed by compressed air. Grout shall be injected into each duct
at a speed between 300mm and 600mm per second. A continuously steady flow of grout shall be
maintained until the duct is completely filled and pure grout issues from all vents and from the far end and
until all entrapped air has been expelled. The vents shall be progressively closed as required to ensure
the complete filling of the duct. The grout pressure shall then be held at the required value for at least 1
minute after which the grouting end shall be plugged. All vents and ends shall be kept closed until final
setting of the grout has taken place. When directed by the SO Rep, duct openings shall be inspected 2 or
3 days after grouting and topped up if necessary.
If serious leaks occur, the grouting shall be stopped, the duct flushed clean with water and the leakage
plugged before continuing with grouting. If a blockage occurs, pumping may be quickly transferred to the
far end of the duct if there are sufficient vents to ensure that the duct will be filled with grout. Alternatively,
ducts may be flushed with clean water to clear the blockage. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
complete filling of the ducts with grout. If several blockages occur the grout mix may be rejected and a
new mix designed.
On completion of grouting and after the grout has hardened sufficiently, any vents or grouting tubes which
extend to the surfaces of the concrete shall be cut off 25mm below the concrete surface and the recess
plugged with concrete. Tendons shall be cut back to give, when recesses are concreted, a minimum of
25mm cover. Wire stubs (if any) may be bent into the recesses. Recesses shall be concreted, or, when
shown in the Drawings, shall be filled monolithically when other cast-in-place concrete is placed.
Complete records shall be kept on all grouting of ducts and a copy of the records submitted to the SO
Rep.
7.16
PRESTRESSED MEMBERS
Workmanship displayed in the construction of prestressed members shall be of the highest order and
every endeavour shall be made to obtain accuracy of dimensions. The dimensions and shape stated in
the Drawings shall be taken to apply to the structure at the time of its completion when under self weight
alone. Except where stated otherwise in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, the dimensions and
profile of the formwork shall compensate for deformations due to prestress, etc so that the dimensions
and profile of the completed structure will conform to the Drawings. Submit details of the magnitude of
these deformations and the proposed method to allow for them. Construction of formwork shall not
commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been obtained.
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-8
7.16
Section 8/.....
BLDG13/S07.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-1
SECTION 8
HOUSEHOLD SHELTER
8.1
Approved Supplier
The precast panels of household shelters hall be obtained from a supplier approved by the
SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted on the Internet (www.eptc.sg) under HDBs
Materials List (ML).
The Contractor shall submit the written contractual agreement between himself and his supplier
within two weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
(b)
(c)
BLDG13/S08.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-2
8.1
(e)
Installation
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment such as cranes, temporary staging,
etc for the efficient installation of the precast panels. The installation procedure shall be submitted
to the SO Rep for approval and shall be strictly adhered to thereafter.
The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the
household shelter is constructed properly according to the Drawings and/or Specifications.
No hacking of the concrete of precast panels shall be allowed.
8.2
The requirements specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses
under it shall apply for all cast-in-situ Works.
(b)
The Contractor shall ensure the correct alignment and positioning of the ventilation sleeve and
plate units and openings for electrical services where required.
(c)
The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the
household shelter is constructed properly in accordance with the Drawings and/or Specifications.
No hacking of the concrete of household shelters shall be allowed. Concrete unevenness, if
required to be made good, shall be ground smooth by using grinders only.
Where honeycombs or segregation occur in the concrete, these shall be made good only by
pressure grouting with the approval of the SO Rep.
No plastering shall be allowed on the internal surfaces of the household shelter.
8.3
BLAST DOOR
(a)
Approved Supplier
The household shelter blast doors shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep. The
list of approved suppliers is posted on the Internet (www.eptc.sg) under HDBs Materials List (ML).
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, the approved blast door shop drawings and the written
contractual agreement between himself and his supplier within two weeks from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance.
BLDG13/S08.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-3
8.3
(c)
(d)
Steel Sections
For components such as blast door frame, blast door leaf cladding panels and internal frame of the
door leaf, uncoated mild steel sheets to ASTM A366 or BS 1449 or other approved standards
subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall be used. Such components shall be treated with
approved Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primer and tested to the requirements stipulated in
subclause 18.29.1.
For other mild steel sections (such as for small movable parts in the locking mechanism, if any),
grade 43A to BS 4360 or other approved standards subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall be
used. Such other mild steel sections shall be protected from corrosion by a method approved by
the SO Rep.
Small areas of corrosion protection coating damaged by welding, cutting or bending shall be made
good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85%
zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint, or other method
approved by the SO Rep.
(e)
(f)
Gasket
The material for the gasket shall be Neoprene or EPDM rubber and shall meet the requirements of
Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber, either grade 2A3 or higher; or grade 2B3 or higher as
specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved
(g)
BLDG13/S08.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-4
8.3
(h)
Performance /
Properties
BLDG13/S08.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Test Method
Requirement
Adhesion
ASTM D3359
5B
Scratch Resistance
SS 5 : Part F2
Pencil Hardness
ASTM 3363
SS 5:Part B1
20 microns 5 microns
Resistance to Salt
Water Spray
SS 5:Part G1
1000 hrs:
<0.1% rusting
Blister size no 6 few to no 10 on
surface
Resistance to
Humidity
SS 5:Part G6
1000 hrs:
<0.03% rusting
Blister size no 8 few to no 10 on
surface
Bldg Spec
Page 8-5
8.4
(b)
(c)
Gasket
The material for the gasket shall be Neoprene or EPDM rubber and shall meet the requirements of
Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber, either grade 2A3 or higher; or grade 2B3 or higher as
specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved
8.5
Section 9/.....
BLDG13/S08.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-1
SECTION 9
REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK
9.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The concrete water tank Works shall include all structural, architectural and other work above reinforced
concrete main roof slab level and lift motor room floor slab level and low level concrete suction tanks as
shown in the Drawings. These include the following works :
(a)
(b)
(c)
lift motor room irrespective of whether it is connected to or far away from the concrete
water tanks;
(d)
(e)
all roofs for the concrete water tanks, lift motor room, roof top pump room and other
roof structures including roof over void decks; and
(f)
The concrete water tank Works shall include the construction, completion and maintenance of the Works
and the provision of labour, materials, Construction Equipment and other items, whether of a temporary or
permanent nature, required in and for such construction, completion and maintenance in so far as these
are specified in or can be reasonably inferred from the Works.
Where in the case precast watertanks are shown in the Drawings, or proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall also comply with all other relevant clauses, subclause and sections of the Specifications.
9.2
WATER-PROOFING MEASURES
The construction of the concrete water tanks shall be in accordance with the latest BS 8007. Provide and
construct the concrete water tanks adopting closely the following waterproofing measures to ensure the
water-tightness of concrete water tanks :
(a)
Grade 40 concrete with low water/cement ratio and high workability shall be used. The concrete
shall be designed with chloride-free retarding superplasticiser. The finished concrete shall be
dense, impermeable and durable.
(b)
No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The water tanks
shall be cast in one operation to above the specified highest water level as shown in the Drawings.
The rest of the water tanks including the roof shall be cast in a second operation.
(c)
The concrete tanks shall be tested in accordance with BS 8007 for water tightness 28 days after
casting.
(d)
After passing the water test, the internal surface of the concrete tanks shall be coated with
approved type cementitious waterproofing membrane in accordance with the instructions of the SO
Rep.
BLDG13/S09.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-2
9.3
PUB APPROVAL
All materials used in the construction and repair of concrete water tanks shall be approved by PUB.
Provide samples of the materials and their technical specifications to the PUB for approval well in advance
of construction work. Certified copy of the PUB approval letter of the particular type of materials together
with other relevant documents, such as PSB test reports, etc shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval prior to its incorporation in the work.
9.4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
The concrete used for the reinforced concrete water tanks shall be all as shown in the Drawings. The
Contractor shall comply with all relevant clauses and subclauses of Section 4 "Structural Concrete".
9.5
9.6
CONCRETING
All construction joints and concreting procedures for the Reinforced Concrete Water Tank Works shall be
approved by the SO Rep.
Inform the SO Rep the area of concreting and the location of construction joints and obtain his approval
prior to the concreting of concrete tanks.
No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The entire concrete tanks
up to the soffit of the tank roof slab shall be cast in one operation. The tank roof shall be cast in the
second operation. All pipes shall be cast in-situ with the concrete tank in the positions as shown in the
Drawings.
The following sequence of concreting the concrete water tank within the same day may be accepted by
the SO Rep if the Contractor could demonstrate that these will result in a monolithic and watertight
structure :
(a)
Cast the lowest 500mm of the tank walls with concrete flowing into the tank floor slab;
(b)
(c)
Immediately after initial setting, the rest of the tank walls shall be cast and topped up to the soffit of
the tank roof slab.
The initial setting time varies with the workability of the concrete mix and shall be approved by the SO
Rep. As soon as the concrete starts to set, the walls shall be immediately topped up to the level required.
Any delay in the topping up operation may result in rejection of the concreting Works by the SO Rep.
No concreting Works shall be allowed without the presence of the Resident Technical Officer.
The concrete shall be highly workable and shall be compacted sufficiently to produce a dense
homogeneous mass and filling all voids. The concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance after
being placed in position and shall be continuously cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting.
BLDG13/S09.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-3
9.7
WATERTIGHTNESS TEST
The Contractor shall test the concrete water tanks for watertightness in accordance with BS 8007. Cast insitu water tanks shall be tested 28 days after casting and precast water tanks shall be tested 7 days after
casting, or on attaining the 28 day concrete strength, whichever is earlier. The tank shall be filled
gradually with PUB water up to the overflow level. Starting from full tank, the period of test shall be at least
24 hours, during which the exposed surfaces shall show no sign of leakage and no damp patch.
If the tank leaks or shows any sign of dampness, it shall be repaired with approved type of epoxy resin
grout or other methods and the tank retested. If the tank fails the second test, the SO Rep reserves the
right to instruct the Contractor to remove and recast the tank.
9.8
9.9
TILING
The concrete water tanks shall be tiled internally with approved types of heavy duty ceramic tiles.
All ceramic tiles shall be provided and laid to all the requirements as specified in Clause 19.4 "Ceramic
Floor Tiles For Non-Residential Units And Common Areas Outside Dwelling Units" including all
subclauses under it. Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the maximum water absorption
of the ceramic tiles for concrete water tanks shall not exceed 1% and the scratch hardness of such tiles
shall not be less than 5 on the Moh scale.
The surface and texture of all the ceramic tiles shall be glazed. The surface appearance shall be free
from crack, crazing, hairline cracks and bubbles. Tile used shall be 100mm x 200mm x 8mm for
rectangular reinforced concrete water tanks; and 50mm x 100mm x 8mm for circular reinforced concrete
water tanks; level and regular in size with perfect corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any
manner.
The Contractor shall submit an approval letter from PUB and a certified true copy of the test report from
PSB or accredited laboratory under SINGLAS for the approval of the SO Rep.
9.10
BLDG13/S09.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-4
9.10
9.11
BLDG13/S09.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-5
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
ELECTRODE ACCESS
Provide access opening to every roof water tank for the mounting of three sets of electrodes as shown in
the Drawings. One access opening shall also be provided for one set of electrode to every pump room
suction tank.
Access openings for electrodes shall have 3mm thick stainless steel Grade 316 plate for mounting
electrodes. Electrodes for the roof water tank shall be protected from weather by an aluminium box.
Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.
9.16
AIR VENT
Air vents shall be provided near the top of the wall adjacent to the water tank room where booster pumps
are installed. Provide at least two 100mm diameter stainless steel air vents to every tank. All air vents
shall be fitted with elbow end and suitably covered by mosquito netting. The mesh size of the netting shall
not exceed 0.65mm. All the air vents shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings.
BLDG13/S09.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-6
9.17
CAT LADDER
Provide and fix external aluminium cat ladder in accordance with the Drawings.
One UPVC internal cat ladder shall be provided for each tank at the designated manhole and effectively
hooked to the stainless steel (AISI Grade 316) hook cast-in-situ to the tank, in accordance with the
Drawings.
9.18
EXTERNAL FINISHES
Provide external finishes to the external face of the concrete water tank.
The finishing materials, their colour, texture, quality and methods of application shall be in accordance
with the Drawings and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Any Defect to the external finishes shall be rectified immediately by the Contractor within the Defects
Liability Period.
9.19
Section 10/.....
BLDG13/S09.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 10-1
SECTION 10
PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITION
10.1
GENERAL
Precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be used on all typical storeys at locations as shown in the
Architectural Drawings.
The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The
list of approved suppliers is posted at the following website: www.eptc.sg under HDBs Materials List (ML).
Details of the precast lightweight concrete partition shall comply with the Drawings. Standard fixing and
connection details (including those for frames) and guidelines on panelling and layout of partitions as
shown in the Standard Structural and Architectural Drawings shall be used.
The precast lightweight partition shall be manufactured using lightweight foam concrete.
10.2
MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS
The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be manufactured to satisfy the requirements as specified
hereunder.
10.2.1
Technical Specifications
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10.2.2
Materials
Materials used in the manufacturing of precast lightweight partition shall comply with Section 4 "Structural
Concrete".
The foaming agent used for lightweight foam concrete partitions shall comply with the performance
requirement of SS EN 934. No foaming agent shall be used unless prior approval has been given by the
SO Rep. The test report shall be submitted to the SO Rep as and when requested.
10.2.3
Manufacturing
Precast lightweight partition shall be cast using steel moulds in horizontal position, or using steel battery
mould in vertical position to conform to the shapes, lines and dimensions of the partitions to be produced.
The mould shall be sufficiently rigid to achieve the casting tolerances, shapes and surface finishes as
specified:
(a)
Casting Tolerance :
Height
Width
Thickness
Bowing/Warpage
(b)
:
:
:
:
5mm;
3mm;
3mm;
3mm in 2m along the height;
1mm in 600mm along the width.
Shape
The shape and location of the tongues and grooves of the partitions after casting shall be correct
and accurate such that the offset between two adjacent panels after installation is within 2mm on
both faces of the partitions.
BLDG13/S10.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 10-2
10.2.3
Manufacturing (Cont'd)
(c)
Surface Finishes
The geometry and arrangement of the steel moulds shall be such that the off-form surfaces of two
adjacent panels after installation are in the same plane with compatible interlocking tongues and
grooves.
The precast lightweight partitions shall be provided with openings for services where required.
10.3
(b)
The surface finish of lightweight partition shall be smooth, free from Defect, excessive voids, visible
cracks, chipping-off and unevenness.
A smooth surface shall be defined as one with no voids or bug holes greater than 7mm in diameter
within a 50mm border around the edges of the panels. For the remaining centre portion, the
number of air voids greater than 1.5mm and smaller than 3mm in diameter shall not exceed 20 in
any 100mm x100mm square. No void greater than 3mm in diameter shall be allowed.
Where the surface finish of the partitions do not comply with the foregoing requirements, the
Contractor shall provide touching up or other remedial work to smoothen the surface to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, lightweight partition need
not be skim-coated in the factory before delivery.
10.4
(c)
The accuracy of the shapes and locations of tongues and grooves of the partitions after casting are
verified by two special steel templates. This is to ensure that the offset between any two panels
after installation is within 2mm on both faces of partitions.
(d)
No partition is delivered prematurely to the Site before sufficient strength has been gained to
withstand stresses due to transportation, handling or erection.
(e)
Provision of adequate supports for partitions to prevent chipping off of panel edges during
transportation and handling.
BLDG13/S10.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 10-3
10.4
10.5
10.6
Names of Suppliers.
(b)
Details of factories including addresses, size of workshops, equipment used and number of trained
personnel.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Test report by PSB or SAC accredited laboratories, on compliance with the technical property
requirements specified in subclause 10.2.1 "Technical Specifications" (a) to (d) (inclusive).
(f)
Test reports on compliance with the drying shrinkage and total water absorption requirements in
accordance with SS 271. The test reports shall be dated within the validity period of six months
prior to the date of submission of such reports to the SO Rep.
(g)
Mix proportions of cement mortar used. Admixture used to prevent shrinkage, efflorescence and
cracking of cement mortar.
(h)
(i)
BLDG13/S10.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 10-4
10.7
10.7.1
Provision Of Access
Provide and maintain reasonable access into and within the Site to allow the transportation and delivery of
partitions by the Contractor's suppliers. The suitability of such access shall be decided by the SO Rep.
10.7.2
10.7.3
Erection
(a)
Ensure that the workers have been properly trained in the handling and erection of the lightweight
partition. Only qualified welders shall be employed for all welding required.
(b)
Before starting erection, check with the SO Rep whether skimming or plastering to the adjourning
RC structures is required. If so, erection and alignment of the panels shall allow for this, so that in
general, unless otherwise shown or noted in the architectural Drawings, the finished surfaces of the
panels shall flush with that of reinforced concrete structures.
(c)
The accurate location of the tongue and groove of each panel shall be such that the offset between
adjacent panel is within 2mm on both faces and the width of the resultant joint between any two
adjoining panels is 4mm 2mm.
(d)
In general, the permanent connections shall be made as soon as the partitions are erected and
aligned. Ensure that the panels are securely braced during erection.
(e)
All vertical joints of the lightweight partition wall shall be sealed with one layer of approved types of
Polymer Modified Flexible Cementitious (PMFC) membrane or equivalent approved type of
self-adhesive Fibre Mesh Fabric (FMF). The sealing of the vertical joints shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's procedures and instructions. The method of application shall be approved
by the SO Rep. The PMFC/FMF membrane shall be applied to the vertical joints prior to skim
coating of the lightweight partition wall. The sealed joint shall be skimmed over with the skim
coating material.
(f)
Where in the case, the partition wall layout does not permit the use of 300mm wide precast
lightweight concrete partitions and the SO Rep approves the Contractor's proposal to replace them
with solid blocks, notwithstanding the details or notes as shown in the Drawings, there shall be no
cost adjustment to the Contract Sum.
10.8
Section 11/.....
BLDG13/S10.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 11-1
SECTION 11
NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
11.1
CEMENT
Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".
11.2
AGGREGATES
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".
11.3
WATER
Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".
11.4
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all subclauses
under it.
11.5
CONCRETE MIX
Unless otherwise specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it or in the Drawings,
the grade of concrete in accordance with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and
subclauses under it, shall be used for casting all non-structural concrete items in this Section including all
clauses and subclauses under it. It shall be mixed, placed into position, compacted, cured and protected
as specified for structural concrete.
Precast concrete item shall be finished smooth and even, and shall not be installed into position in the
Works until 14 days have elapsed from the date of casting.
11.6
HARDCORE
Hardcore shall be hard, clean and dry stones, bricks, concrete or other approved material broken to
pieces varying from 50mm to 75mm in size. It shall be laid to the required thickness, blinded with sand or
quarry waste, well watered and consolidated with a power rammer or roller to an even surface, to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
11.7
BLDG13/S11.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 11-2
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
11.12
11.13
11.14
HEELSTONES
All door frames shall be fixed in accordance with the Drawings.
Heelstones shall be built up with 1:2 cement mortar mix in two or more operations to a height of
100/150mm as shown. It shall be carried out to the same section as the door frames and bonded into
walls and bedded in strong cement mortar on floor with surface hacked rough.
11.15
CONCRETE COPING
Cast-in-situ concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished in
plastering as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Precast concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished smooth and
even.
BLDG13/S11.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 11-3
11.16
CONCRETE LINTELS
Concrete lintels shall be of the sizes and with the reinforcement as shown in the Drawings. Lintels shall
have exposed surfaces finished smooth and in line with the surfaces of adjacent walls.
11.17
11.18
11.19
11.20
Section 12/.....
BLDG13/S11.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-1
SECTION 12
BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
12.1
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
Plastering
The solid concrete blocks shall be plastered as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all
clauses and subclauses under it.
12.3
CLAY BRICKS
All the clay bricks shall be of modular sizes. They shall be 200mm x 100mm x 100mm and/or 300mm x
100mm x 100mm.
Average Work Size
Designation
200mm x 100mm x 100mm
300mm x 100mm x 100mm
BLDG13/S12.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Length
Width
Depth
187.5mm
287.5mm
88.5mm
88.5mm
88.5mm
88.5mm
Bldg Spec
Page 12-2
12.3
12.3.1
12.3.2
Standard
88.5mm 3.5mm
Minimum 25 N per mm
(e) Efflorescence
Slight (Not more than 10% of the brick surface area shall have
salt deposit)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with SS 103:1974. Test reports showing compliance with
the requirements stipulated in the above table shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the common bricks
are delivered to the Site. Tests shall be carried out on common bricks delivered to the Site to ensure
compliance.
12.3.3
12.4
BLDG13/S12.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-3
12.4
)
)
)
(ii)
Lipped frame
(iii)
Minimum coating mass on individual point shall be 395g per m or the equivalent thickness
of 55 microns in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461.
The hot-dipped galvanised coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the
coating appearance of any galvanised wall tie system is found otherwise, such wall tie system shall
not be used. All galvanised wall tie system shall be stored in a dry and well ventilated place to
prevent the formation of white deposit on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by
cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two
coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 94% of zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by
weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least 2 samples of the galvanised
wall tie or bonding bar system to be tested by an accredited laboratory to determine the coating
weight. The coating weight shall be determined using the gravimetric method in accordance with
BS EN ISO 1460. Original certificate of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification.
As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall within 24 hours make available one
elcometer on the Site for measuring the thickness of zinc coating.
(b)
BLDG13/S12.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-4
12.5
(b)
12.6
POLYURETHANE SEALANT
Where external solid concrete block walls or brickwalls flush with reinforced concrete columns and beams,
polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the Manufacturer's recommendations shall be applied at the joints
between the walls and the columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The depth of sealant shall be
13mm minimum.
12.7
12.8
DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE
Provide and lay damp-proof course (hereinafter known as "dpc" for the purposes of this clause) to all walls
complying with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m laid to break joint on a layer of
cement and sand mortar laid immediately under the lowest course of blocks at ground floor level or at a
level 150mm to 220mm above ground level in brickwalls.
Except for bath/wc and kitchen, all other areas including living rooms, bedrooms and household shelters
of the first storey residential units shall be provided with damp-proof membrane. The damp-proof
membrane shall be laid to the underside of RC ground floor slab. The damp-proof membrane shall
comply with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m. The substrate shall be float finished
to receive the damp proof membrane. The damp-proof membrane shall be strip bonded onto the
substrate with rubberised bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's recommendations. All laps shall be
100mm wide and sealed with bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's instructions. Such damp-proof
membrane shall be applied also to the base of shoplets' counter at the first storey as shown in the
Drawings.
The damp-proof course and damp-proof membrane shall conform to the following :
(a)
BLDG13/S12.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Base Material
(i)
The minimum mass per unit area of the base material shall not be less than 0.34 kg per m.
(ii)
The fibre base shall consist of one or more absorbent sheet of felt made from a mixture of
animal and vegetable fibres.
Bldg Spec
Page 12-5
12.8
12.9
The minimum mass per unit area of bitumen shall not be less than (1.6 + excess mass of
dpc material) in kg per m.
(ii)
The saturating material shall consist of bitumen having penetration within the range of 60 to
230 (inclusive) at 25C when tested as described in BS 4691.
(iii)
The coating material shall be oxidised bitumen stabilised by mineral filler and finished with a
surfacing material. The mass per unit area of mineral filler and surfacing shall be within (0.9
+ excess mass of dpc material) in kg per m to (1.5 + of the excess mass of dpc
material) in kg per m.
(iv)
When measured as described in BS 4692, the softening point of the finished coating
material shall not exceed the softening point of the oxidised bitumen by more than 20C.
(v)
The mineral filler shall consist of mineral granules or other materials. Not less than 90% by
mass of the filler shall pass a 425 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS 410 and not
less than 50% of the mass shall pass a 212 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS
410.
(vi)
The surfacing material shall consist of natural sand, mineral granules or other material
which will prevent adhesion between layers of the finished damp-proof materials in the roll.
12.10
12.11
SCAFFOLDING
Provide adequate scaffolding as specified in Section 1 "General Specifications" including all clauses and
subclauses under it to enable masons to work from the external side of external walls to achieve a high
standard of walling and pointing.
12.12
12.13
BLDG13/S12.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-6
12.14
General
The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external full height facing brick walls to test the
water tightness of external wall construction. The external full height facing brick walls shall include
full height facing brick walls directly facing the exterior but exclude walls along access balcony and
balcony parapet walls.
(b)
Source of Water
The water used for filling up of reinforced concrete water tank before the sterilisation shall be used
for the water tightness test to the external full height facing brick walls. The Contractor shall only
be allowed to sterilise the water tank after completion of the water tightness test to the external full
height facing brick walls. PUB potable water shall not be used for the water tightness test except
for re-test cases.
(c)
Method of Testing
10% of the units per building block with external full height facing brick walls sampled by the
SO Rep shall be tested for water tightness.
Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying out
the water test :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The nozzle of the water jet shall be fixed at a distance of 1800mm to 2000mm away from the
surface of the external wall and incline at 30 degrees to the external wall as shown in the Drawings.
The capacity of water delivered shall be 300 litres per hour and the duration of testing shall be 2
hours as shown in the Drawings.
The nozzle shall be placed in such a way that it covers the entire wall panel. Ensure that the
drawing of water from the water tank for testing shall not contaminate the water tank.
The wall panel shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at
the internal surface of the wall panels or the adjacent areas during the spraying and within half an
hour after the completion of the spraying.
(d)
Section 13/.....
BLDG13/S12.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-1
SECTION 13
ROOFING
13.1
OVER-RIDING CLAUSE
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this Section including all clauses and
subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance
Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the
Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
13.2
13.3
13.3.1
BLDG13/S13.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-2
13.3.2
(b)
Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :
Side 1 (average)
:
Side 2 (average)
:
(c)
90% minimum
90% minimum
Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :
(d)
BS 476 Part 7
Class 1
BS 476 Part 6
- Index of Performance
- Sub-index
:
:
12 maximum
6 maximum
Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :
Machine Direction
: 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction
: 4000g minimum
The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at intervals of not more than one metre. The
markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
BLDG13/S13.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-3
13.4
13.4.1
Performance Tests
The roofing tiles shall be tested for permeability in accordance with SS 70:1990. The tiles shall be
considered as satisfying the test if no water has dripped from the underside of the tile after the 6hour test.
The transverse breaking strength determined in the manner described in SS 70:1990 shall not be
less than the following :
Average
Individual
- 900 Newtons
- 675 Newtons
The test method for average water absorption percentage of tiles shall be in the manner as
described in SS 70:1990. The average and individual water absorption percentage of tiles shall not
be more than 8.0 percent and 10.0 percent respectively.
(B)
(C)
Sealing Of Gaps
Gaps which occur through cutting of tiles at valleys shall be filled with bedding mortar. Any other
gaps shall be sealed by approved means to effectively seal off the gaps.
(D)
Tile Accessories
Provide and lay ridge connecting tiles, lip tiles, ridge tiles, verge tiles, socket tiles, eave tiles,
flashing, eave comb, rafter grating, complete set of tile accessories for vent pipes (socket tiles, pipe
and cap/lantern) and other tile accessories to roof to form a complete roof system. Lead flashing
shall be 14.9 kg per m2 minimum and shall form a watertight joint to the profile of the roofing tile.
13.4.2
BLDG13/S13.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-4
13.4.2
(b)
Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :
Side 1 (average) - 90% minimum
Side 2 (average) - 90% minimum
(c)
Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :
BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1
BS 476 Part 6
Index of Performance
Sub-index
(d)
- 12 maximum
- 6 maximum
Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :
Machine Direction
- 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction - 4000g minimum
The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at interval at not more than one metre. The
markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
13.5
Section 14/.....
BLDG13/S13.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-1
SECTION 14
CONCRETE FLAT ROOF
14.1
GENERAL
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all roofing Works required under the Contract
comprising either one or both of the following systems :
(a)
(b)
Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacturer
and shall comply with SS26.
(ii)
Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed stone sand complying with SS31.
Alternatively, Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) fines of sizes not more than
7mm can be used to replace the natural sand for up to a maximum quantity of 30%
by weight. The RCA fines shall comply to SS EN 12620.
(iii)
Water
Water used for mixing concrete, washing formwork and curing of concrete shall be
potable water supplied by the PUB.
(iv)
Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be welded steel fabric complying with SS32.
(v)
Admixtures
Admixtures shall comply with SS320 or BS5075.
(vi)
(b)
BLDG13/S14.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Source Of Material
(i)
The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources
approved by the SO Rep.
(ii)
The RCA shall be obtained from recycling plants listed in the NEA website
Bldg Spec
Page 14-2
14.2
Design Specifications
(i)
Slab Dimension
Details of the precast ferrocement slab shall comply with the Drawings. The precast
ferrocement slab shall be 900mm 3mm long x 600mm 3mm wide x 30mm 2mm
thick. The difference in diagonal lengths of each panel shall not be more than 3mm.
Half size panel (450 3mm long x 600 3mm wide or 900 3mm long x 300 3mm
wide) shall be used where necessary so as to minimise the cutting of panels.
(ii)
Mix Design
The precast concrete slab shall be cast from a mix design which complies with the
following requirements :
(1) minimum cement to sand ratio by weight of 1:2
(2) maximum water to cement ratio by weight of 0.45
(3) air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2200 kg
per m
(4) 28 days average cube strength of three cubes not less than 35 N per mm
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction.
Before commencing the manufacture of precast slabs, submit a proposed mix design
to the SO Rep for approval and carry out trial mix if deemed necessary.
.
(iii)
Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall consist of a layer of square wire mesh 3.25mm (minimum) at
75mm spacing sandwiched between two layers of square wire mesh 1.5mm
(minimum) at 25mm spacing. The wires shall be galvanized with a zinc coating
weight of 65 g per m minimum. The wires shall have a minimum proof stress of
300 N per mm.
(iv)
Finishes
The slab shall be cast on a steel base plate and the top surface shall be trowelled
finish.
(v)
Other Properties
(1)
(vi)
For the initial Surface Absorption Test Value (BS1881), the hardened panel
shall have ISAT values less than that stipulated below:
Time (min)
10
30
60
0.20
0.15
0.1
(2)
(3)
Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall
have a cover measurement of less than 3mm.
BLDG13/S14.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-3
14.2
Manufacturing Process
The slab shall be cast using steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators
and the top surface shall be trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be adequately
supported with approved spacers.
After setting and demoulding, the slabs shall be neatly stored with easy access and visibility
to every piece. During the first 7 days after casting, the slabs shall be placed on their edge
during transportation.
All panels shall be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the
curing method, duration and facilities prior to the commencement of actual production. The
curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist curing.
Samples of the panels shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of full production, and the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense,
make adjustment to the manufacturing process or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep.
(e)
(f)
(g)
BLDG13/S14.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-4
14.2
(2)
Samples of ferrocement roof slab panels shall be taken at the factory and subject to
batch testing at a testing authority approved by the SO Rep, covering the following
aspects:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(ii)
Sampling Rate
Reinforcement shall be sampled once per contract, 3 bars of each size shall be
taken per sampling as one sample. Ferrocement roof slab panels shall be sampled
at least once per contract, 3 pieces shall be taken per sampling as one sample.
(iii)
Passing Criteria
Tests shall be conducted on one specimen out of the three sampled. If the
specimen satisfies all requirements, the batch shall be deemed to satisfy the quality
requirements.
If the specimen fails any of the quality requirements, tests shall be conducted on the
remaining two specimens.
If two or more specimens within a sample fail to meet a specific requirement, the
material/product shall be deemed to have failed that specific requirement.
If the average result of the three specimens deviates from the required level by 15%
or more, the batch of materials/products is deemed to have failed the specified
requirements.
(B)
BLDG13/S14.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-5
14.2
14.3
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all
subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer,
subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
(B)
(C)
BLDG13/S14.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-6
14.3
Waterproofing Membrane
(a)
Preparation Of Surface
Before applying the waterproofing membrane system, the entire screeded surfaces shall be
thoroughly clean, free from dust, etc and in visibly dry condition.
(b)
(c)
Roof Details
Detailing at eaves shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The waterproofing treatment shall
be carried up at abutments to walls, pipes, parapets, skirtings, concrete curbs, etc as shown
in the Drawings.
(d)
Bituminous Stains
In the event the external painted walls of the building blocks are affected by bituminous
stains, the Contractor shall remove such stains, make good and re-paint the affected
surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
(E)
Insulation Materials
The insulation materials shall be 50mm thick insulation boards. The board shall be multicellular
board of extruded expanded polystyrene containing a flame retardant additive. It shall have natural
skins on both surfaces and shall have the following properties :
Density
Thermal conductivity
Compressive Strength at 10% deflection
Water absorption:
Capillarity
Maximum operating temperature
:
:
:
:
:
:
35 kg per m3;
0.029 - 0.032 W/mk;
300 kPa;
less than 1% by volume;
none;
74C;
The board dimensions shall be 50mm thick 2.0mm, 600mm wide 3.0mm and 1250mm long
6.0mm. The boards shall be laid loose on top of the waterproofing membrane in a staggered
pattern. All joints between the boards shall be tightly fitted. Boards that are less than half () the
width of the length shall not be placed at the edge but to be placed at least one row away from the
edge.
The whole Works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's/supplier's
instructions.
BLDG13/S14.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-7
14.3
(G)
(a)
Lay an overall 38mm thick in-situ waterproof cement and sand (1:3) panel over final layer of
waterproofing membrane in alternate bay size 900mm x 900mm each. The cement and
sand screed shall be mixed with "Sika No. 1"; or "Fextile 1"; or "Smartguard"; or other
approved waterproofing compound. Waterproofing compound shall be mixed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed instructions and subject to approval
by the SO Rep. Cement and sand panels shall be laid in parallel strips of 900mm x 900mm.
Panel surfaces shall be smoothened with steel trowel without adding dry cement and truly
levelled to falls indicated as a finished floor surface. Joints between panels shall be "V"
shaped 10 mm wide at the top and tapering to 6mm at the bottom. Wood strips shall be
used and the completed depth of the joints shall be 16mm leaving the panel 22mm thick
below the joint.
(b)
Immediately after setting, the panels shall be covered with hessian bags which shall be kept
wet for not less than 3 days to cure thoroughly. Any defective panels shall be replaced by
the Contractor.
(c)
After the removal of hessian bags and when the cement panels are cured, the joints shall be
filled and grouted with bitumen compound. The bitumen applied shall be a hot-poured
rubber-bitumen sealant to BS 2499 Type A1 or Type A2. The finished level shall be clean
and the top-most joint shall be levelled with the panel surface to prevent water stagnation.
(d)
Extreme care shall be taken at the building expansion joint and to construct roofing strictly
to the details shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep.
Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as
stipulated in the Deed Of Warranty For Complete System Of Waterproofing Treatment And Panel
Roofing as produced in Appendix A4. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit
such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO
Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or
for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Councils, the Contractor and his Specialist
shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A4(TC) to such Town Council(s). The
duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no
such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been
substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his
Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO
Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation
to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty.
However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the
duly executed Deed of Warranty.
Section 15/.....
BLDG13/S14.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-1
SECTION 15
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
15.1
TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified, all timber delivered to site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content not
exceeding 20%. Timber shall be sawn straight, square, free from sap, shakes, waney edges, large loose
or dead knots, large bores or termite holes and other objectionable Defect.
Timber delivered to site shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation round all faces
and minimum warping.
Any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not approve to be used shall be removed from
the site immediately and replaced with new members/components.
Any portion of the timber work that warps, develops shakes or other Defect within the Defects Liability
Period shall be removed. The defective work shall be replaced and rectified.
15.1.1
15.1.2
Joinery
Unless otherwise specified, all timber for joinery work shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark
Red or Meranti Yellow or other approved.
Timber frames to flush doors, built-in or free standing furniture, walls, partitions, ceilings and others shall
be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark Red or Meranti Yellow or other approved.
All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrot by planning and sand-papering to an approved finish.
Wrot timber shall be worked to the correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber
members indicated in the Drawings are nominal and a maximum allowance of 1.5mm shall be permitted
for each wrot face.
Take all measurements for joinery work at the building and verify it with the dimensions shown in the
Drawings. Where discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken
on the Site, the Contractor shall obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the Works.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-2
15.2
15.3
FRAMING TOGETHER
All frames shall be put together with well proportioned and tight fitting mortice and tenon joints, wedged up
tight and fixed with 10mm diameter hardwood pins. Leave pins projecting until immediately before fixing in
position.
Any member that warp, twist, split or develop any other Defect shall be replaced with new ones before
wedging up.
15.4
JOINERY WORK
All joinery work shall be made in strict accordance with detailed Drawings. Joints shall be formed in a
proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all exposed surfaces of joinery
work. No nailing shall be permitted in joints for joinery.
Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproof.
15.5
PRIME FRAMES
All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before fixing. The backs of all door and
window frames, and other frames in contact with masonry work shall be coated with two coats of
"Solignum", "Presotim" or other approved wood preservative. The preservative shall be allowed to be
thoroughly dried before fixing the frames. All sawcuts shall be similarly treated.
15.6
15.7
15.8
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-3
15.9
TIMBER DOORS
Unless otherwise specified, all doors shall be constructed in accordance with the details as shown in the
Drawings. Sizes are nominal. The types of timber veneer and decorative inlays for main entrance door,
bedroom door and bathroom door shall be approved by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, plywood
panels shall be Grade 2 and of moisture resistant quality. The framing for flush door core shall be
connected with corrugated metal fasteners or other approved joints for connections.
(a)
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b)
Moisture Content
At the time of delivery, the moisture content of timber for all timber components shall not be less
than 10 percent and not more than 15 percent. However, any difference in the moisture content of
timber shall not exceed 3 percentage units.
(c)
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS
2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
15.10
15.10.1
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
15.10.2
General
Where in the case of half-hour solid timber veneered doors with decorative inlay to entrances of flats are
shown in the Drawings, provide and install such half-hour fire-rated solid timber veneered doors, mild steel
door frames and ironmongery as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system
shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and FSSD approval.
The dimensions and profiles of the mild steel door frames and door frame fixing shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 45mm to fit into the rebate of the door
frame profile. The type and colour of timber veneers and decorative inlays shall to the design pattern and
shall be approved by the SO Rep.
15.10.3
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-4
15.10.4
Ironmongery For Half-Hour Fire Rated Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlay To
Flats
Where specified, provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with
the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 :
2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as
a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
(a)
Schedule
The ironmongery items shall be :
(i)
4 nos.
102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and
ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.
(ii)
1 no.
"YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB; or "Posse" M4L10AB; or BLIYN27-FIR-US5; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin
single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside)
and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be
antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear
the metal gate lockset.
(iii)
1 no.
(iv)
2 no.
(v)
1 no.
(vi)
(b)
1 no.
Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
bronze colour.
(c)
15.10.5
Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated
solid timber veneered door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.10.6
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.10.7
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".
15.10.8
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS 2754.1 :
1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and applied in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-5
15.10.9
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b)
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS
2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Requirements
Density
Moisture Content
7-9%
Bending Strength
2.2-2.7kg/cm2
Minimum 65N/mm
Re-cycled wood door shall have infill of hard wood fibers, manufactured through high pressure and high
temperature steaming process. The re-cycled wood shall be LHT Technical Wood or equivalent, and
shall have acquired the Singapore Environment Councils Green label.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-6
15.11
15.11.1
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
15.11.2
General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switch rooms, PUB switch rooms, store rooms, pump rooms,
refuse rooms, bulky refuse areas and staircase accesses to main roof are shown in the Drawings, provide
and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with timber door frames
and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames
and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. and shall have
PSB test certificates and PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.
15.11.3
Shop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates
and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
15.11.4
Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall
be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the
respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour firerated and approved by the FSSD.
(A)
Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
4 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii)
2 no.
Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.
(iii)
1 no.
"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel
cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing
screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv)
1 no.
"Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock under
master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved.
(v)
1 no.
"Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.
(vi)
1 no.
"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.
(vii)
2 no.
Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
silver finish.
(viii)
1 no.
Bldg Spec
Page 15-7
15.11.4
Ironmongery (Cont'd)
(B)
Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(C)
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
2 no.
(iii)
1 no.
(iv)
1 no.
(v)
1 no.
Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
silver finish.
(D)
15.11.5
Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber
surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least
half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.11.6
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.11.7
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-8
15.12
15.12.1
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
15.12.2
General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall
provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts
complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying
with SS 332 : 2007.. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and FSSD
approval.
15.12.3
15.12.4
Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall
be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the
respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
(A)
Single Leaf
For single leaf doors:
(B)
(i)
(ii)
4 no.
1 no.
(iii)
1 no.
Double Leaf
For double leaf doors:
(C)
(i)
(ii)
4 no.
1 no.
(iii)
(iv)
1 no.
1 no.
(v)
1 no.
(vi)
2 no.
(vii)
1 no.
102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
"Accord" CH-382; or Forte H6LR76ES or BLIY 70 or "YTL" 85; or other
approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides.
Brass rebated parts.
200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box
type).
300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box
type).
Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
bronze colour.
Approved stainless steel door selector.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-9
15.12.5
Certificates
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.12.6
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.12.7
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".
15.13
15.13.1
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all subclauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the
event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under
it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary
upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such
approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
15.13.2
General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to MDF Rooms and Telecoms Equipment Rooms are shown in the
Drawings, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with
timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors,
timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 :
2007. and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme
Class 1A or Class 1B.
15.13.3
Shop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates
and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-10
15.13
15.13.4
Ironmongery For Half Hour Fire Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors
To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a
guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall comply with SS
332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire rated and approved by FSSD.
(a)
Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :
(b)
(i)
4 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii)
1 no.
"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and
thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with
construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn
deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable
of being operated by PBTS master key.
(iii)
2 no.
"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel
cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing
screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv)
1 no.
"Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.
(v)
1no.
"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.
(vi)
1 no.
Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.
(vii)
1 no.
Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(c)
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
1 no.
"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and
thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with
construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn
deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable
of being operated by PBTS master key.
(iii)
2 no.
"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel
cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing
screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv)
1 no.
Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.
15.13.5
Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber
surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least
half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-11
15.13
15.13.6
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.13.7
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".
15.13.8
15.14
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it
has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the
approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or
obligations arising under the Contract.
(B)
General
Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door
frames and ironmongery to protected staircase. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying
with SS 332 : 2007. and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and be listed in PSB PLS
Class 1A or Class 1B.
Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings
shall serve as a guide.
(C)
(D)
Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the
following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 :
2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall
serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-12
15.14
Ironmongery
(Contd)
Schedule Of Ironmongery
(E)
(a)
(b)
1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim
line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver finish.
(c)
1 no. "Tiki" PH-20/BB/225 SS; or other approved stainless steel pull handles. The
diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm.
(d)
1 no. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm
minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate.
(e)
1 no. "Alsecure" ASI/BC002/SS Ball Catch; or Tiki ACCORD RC/002 SS Roller Catch; or
YTL BC002 SS Ball Catch or other approved stainless steel Ball Catch or Roller
Catch.
Certificates
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, certificates as documentary proof that the complete
system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery
installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.15
15.16
NON FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS
TO FLATS, TIMBER VENEERED WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS BEDROOM DOORS, TIMBER
FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES
TO SERVICE DUCTS
15.16.1
The non fire-rated solid timber veneered entrance doors with decorative inlays to flats, timber veneered
with decorative inlays bedroom doors, timber door with laminate finish to bedroom and bath / wc, timber
flush doors to service ducts and timber flush doors with fixed timber louvres to service ducts shall be
approved by the SO Rep
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-13
15.16
NON FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS
TO FLATS, TIMBER VENEERED WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS BEDROOM DOORS, TIMBER
FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES
TO SERVICE DUCTS
(CONTD)
15.16.2
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b)
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS
2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Requirements
Density
Moisture Content
7-9%
Bending Strength
2.2-2.7kg/cm2
Minimum 65N/mm
Re-cycled wood door shall have infill of hard wood fibers, manufactured through high pressure and high
temperature steaming process. The re-cycled wood shall be LHT Technical Wood or equivalent, and
shall have acquired the Singapore Environment Councils Green label.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-14
15.17
15.17.1
General Requirements
All bedroom doors to be provided to residential units shall be semi-solid timber doors with 0.8mm thick
high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames,
door frame fixing and ironmongery.
The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame
profile. The Contractor shall provide wood grain laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom
door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed.
The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates
shall be Wilsonart, Nevamar, Pionite or other approved.
15.17.2
Installation
The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as
recommended by the supplier.
All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.
15.17.3
15.17.4
Surfaces
The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks,
manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.
15.17.5
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 Timber
Doors.
15.17.6
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS 2754.1 :
1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and applied in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
15.17.7
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b)
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS
2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-15
15.17
TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BEDROOM (CONTD)
15.17.7
Requirements
Density
Moisture Content
7-9%
Bending Strength
2.2-2.7kg/cm2
Minimum 65N/mm
Re-cycled wood door shall have infill of hard wood fibers, manufactured through high pressure and high
temperature steaming process. The re-cycled wood shall be LHT Technical Wood or equivalent, and
shall have acquired the Singapore Environment Councils Green label.
15.18
TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC (FOR 3ROOM, 4-ROOM AND 5-ROOM FLATS)
15.18.1
General Requirements
All doors to bath/wc of 3-Room, 4-Room and 5-Room residential units shall be semi-solid timber doors
with 0.8mm thick high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild
steel door frames, door frame fixing and ironmongery.
The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame
profile. The Contractor shall provide wood grain laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom
door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed.
The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates
shall be Wilsonart, Nevamar, Pionite or other approved.
15.18.2
Installation
The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as
recommended by the supplier.
All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.
15.18.3
15.18.4
Surfaces
The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks,
manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.
15.18.5
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 Timber
Doors.
15.18.6
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS 2754.1 :
1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and applied in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-16
15.18
TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC (FOR 3-ROOM, 4ROOM AND 5-ROOM FLATS) (CONTD)
15.18.7
15.18.8
(a)
3 nos.
102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball
bearing complete with matching finish screws;
(b)
1 no.
Rubber Stopper
Provide and fix 25mm diameter by 30 mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every
bath/wc against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall
tiles. Fix the rubber stopper with stainless steel screw and raw plug.
15.18.9
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b)
Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS
2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Requirements
Density
Moisture Content
7-9%
Bending Strength
2.2-2.7kg/cm2
Minimum 65N/mm
Re-cycled wood door shall have infill of hard wood fibers, manufactured through high pressure and high
temperature steaming process. The re-cycled wood shall be LHT Technical Wood or equivalent, and
shall have acquired the Singapore Environment Councils Green label.
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-17
15.19
15.20
15.21
CEILING
Where shown ceiling material to dwelling units shall be of approved 1200mm x 2400mm x 12mm thick
non-combustible gypsum board. Boards shall be fixed to ceiling joists and noggings with 38mm
galvanised steel clout nails at maximum 150mm centre at all edges and intermediate fixing (along the
centre of the board) of galvanised steel clout nails shall be of maximum 300mm centres. Joints between
boards shall be covered with 38mm x 15mm nominal, moulded wood fillets at edge of wall and open joint
at intermediate joint.
15.22
PLYWOOD WITH LAMINATE PANEL DOOR AND TIMBER DOOR FRAME FOR SERVICE CLOSET
Provide and fix plywood with laminate panel door and door frames to service closet as shown in the
Drawings. The door panel shall be 17mm thick plywood with light colour laminate finish on both sides. For
each door panel, provide and fix approved nickel plated concealed clip with hydraulic hinges (self closing).
15.23
15.24
STORAGE OF DOORS
The Contractor shall also be required to provide one storage area per floor for the proper storage of the
main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath / wc doors. The storage areas shall be kept in a dry
condition. The doors shall not be installed earlier than one month before the handing over inspection,
unless instructed otherwise by the SO Rep. They shall be brought to the various units just prior to their
installations.
Section 16/.....
BLDG13/S15.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-1
SECTION 16
IRONMONGERY
16.1
GENERAL
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the
requirements specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it, subject to the
approval of the SO Rep. The brand names specified in the Schedule shall serve as a guide to the
respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
16.2
FIXING
All ironmongery shall be fixed with stainless steel screws, screw driven and countersunked to form a
sound connection. Screws shall not be hammered into position. If screws are found to be hammered in,
the whole fixture shall be taken down, and refixed in accordance with the Specifications.
16.3
16.4
(B)
Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlays To Flats
(For Non Fire-Rated Doors)
Unless specified otherwise, the ironmongery items for non fire-rated entrance door shall be :
(i)
4 no.
102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball
bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.
(ii)
1 no.
"YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or BLIYN27-FIR-US5 or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin
single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside)
and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be antique
brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal
gate lockset.
(iii)
1 no.
(iv)
1 no.
(v)
1 no.
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that the door viewer shall not be
obstructed by the entrance grille gate.
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-2
16.4
1 no.
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably
be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder
shall be in antique brass finish.
(C)
3 no.
102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball
bearing complete with matching finish screws
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
1 no.
"YTL" DH-027; or
"Accord" DH-027AB; or
"Nikon" DH-027AB; or
Forte H6DH75ES or
other approved
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably be
closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be in
antique brass finish.
(D)
3 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges
(ii)
1 no.
For each door leaf of PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops and eating houses
shown without door frame :
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
2 no.
2.64mm thick (0.14mm) 5052 aluminium alloy hinge and cotter pin 0.8mm thick x
25mm long nylon bush.
(ii)
1 no.
Bldg Spec
Page 16-3
16.4
(F)
(i)
2 no.
122mm x 96mm x 3mm thick or 3 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm thick stainless steel
butt hinges in black or bronze colour finish. Tolerance for thickness of stainless
steel hinges shall be 0.2mm.
(ii)
1 no.
(G)
(H)
3 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges
(ii)
1 no.
(I)
(iii)
1 no.
(iv)
1 no.
(v)
1 no.
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-4
16.4
Double Leaf
For double leaf :
(b)
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
2 no.
Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.
(iii)
1 no.
(iv)
1 no.
(v)
1 no.
"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(vi)
1 no.
"Nikon 150mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
Single Leaf
For single leaf :
(K)
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
2 no.
Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.
(iii)
1 no.
(iv)
1 no.
Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
2 no.
240mm x 27mm width AISI grade 304 stainless steel high barrel shoot bolt.
(iii)
1 no.
Bldg Spec
Page 16-5
16.4
(a)
Double Leaf(Cont'd)
(iv)
(b)
2 no.
Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
2 no.
The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for
the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.
(L)
(M)
Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(b)
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
1 no.
Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
1 no.
(iv)
1 no.
200 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).
(v)
1 no.
300 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).
Bldg Spec
Page 16-6
16.4
(O)
(i)
3 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
1 no.
(P)
(i)
1 no.
(ii)
1 no.
(Q)
(R)
(i)
3 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
1 no.
25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the wall surface against which
the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the
wall tile.
4 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii)
1 no.
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-7
16.4
(b)
4 no.
(ii)
1 no.
(iii)
(T)
2 no.
(U)
(i)
1 no.
(ii)
1 no.
(V)
(i)
3 no.
100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel AISI grade 304 butt hinges,
thickness 1.7mm 0.2mm
(ii)
1 no.
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
4 no.
102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel AISI grade 304 butt hinges.
(ii)
1 no.
"Accord 376"; or other approved single panic bolt. The panic bolt shall be of
aluminium die cast body with extruded aluminium guides, steel tube shoots and
cross bars and shall be in silver colour finish.
Bldg Spec
Page 16-8
16.4
16.5
(i)
4 no.
(ii)
1no.
(iii)
1no.
16.6
16.7
16.8
(a)
"Abloy"
MK911047; or
(b)
"Union"
G1HBG; or
(c)
"Yale"
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-9
16.9
The Lockset for the flats shall comply with the following performance requirements when subjected to the
specified laboratory testing.
Door Type
Main entrance /
Bedroom /
Bathroom
Properties / Tests
ASTM B117
ASTM D2247
Cross-cut adhesion
(coating)
ASTM D3359
5B
Chemical resistance
for 12 hours (coating)
Brand name
Main Entrance
Door
Bathroom Door
Requirements
Standard / Test
Method
Deadbolt endurance
test
100,000 cycles
Section 17/.....
BLDG13/S16.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-1
SECTION 17
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
17.1
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Steel of minimum grade S275 steel to BS EN 10025 and BS EN 10210 shall be used for all structural
members unless otherwise stated. The dimensions, form, thickness, weight and tolerance of all rolled
shape, the quality and strength of all members, joint connections, bolts, nuts, washers, studs, welds and
electrodes used and their design, installation and applications shall conform to the requirements of the
latest BS 5950 or other relevant British and/or Singapore Standards. Unless indicated otherwise in the
Drawings, hot finished structural steel sections shall be used.
All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Defective, substandard or undersized members shall be rejected.
17.2
QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Only qualified welders shall be allowed to perform welding work for structural steelworks. Provide the SO
Rep with the names of the welders to be employed on the steelwork, together with certification that each
of these welders has passed qualification tests conducted by competent authorities using Welder
Procedures covered in BS 4871 or their equivalent. Welders shall have passed the qualification test
within the preceding 12-month period.
If required by the SO Rep, submit test samples made by the welders to be employed. Arrange for
any welder to re-take the test at the Contractor's own costs and expenses when, in the opinion
of the SO Rep, the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. Recertification of the welder shall be made to the SO Rep only after the welder has taken and passed the
required test.
The SO Rep may require welded joints to be tested with radiographic or other suitable methods at the
Contractor's costs and expenses. Joints with defective welds shall be rejected.
Should any two weld positions from the work of any welder show defective welds, such welder shall be
permanently removed from the work.
17.3
FABRICATION
Check all dimensions in the Drawings before fabrication and any discrepancy shall be reported to the SO
Rep. Steelwork shall be fabricated to the required details as shown in the Drawings with sound
workmanship acceptable by the SO Rep. All steel members shall be cut to exact lengths and with ends
finished true and square so as to provide a good bed or joint.
Structural steelwork shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible and
shall be performed by qualified mechanics or welders skilled in the type of work required.
Shearing, chipping, punching and welding of members shall be done carefully and accurately in
accordance with the Drawings. All burrs and shavings produced by the drilling or reaming operation shall
be removed.
Stiffeners shall be fitted neatly and tightly against flanges with ends milled or ground to secure an even
and full bearing against the flange angles. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with
the flanges.
Bearing surface shall be planed to true bed and abutting surfaces be closely fitted to ensure full bearing
and close contact between assembled members.
Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed finished surfaces shall be straight and smooth. Exposed welds
shall be ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates, precisely cut, drilled or punched at right angles to
the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be cleaned of burrs or
rough edges. Holes for bolts shall not exceed the external diameter of bolts by more than 1.5mm and
shall be well aligned to permit bolts to be freely placed in position. Oversized or misaligned bolt holes
shall be rejected.
BLDG13/S17.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-2
17.4
17.5
ERECTION PROCEDURE
The method and sequence of erection of structural steelwork shall be duly approved by the SO Rep.
The presence of any temporary materials, falsework, braces, etc, required to ensure stability and safety of
structures shall be included in the proposed erection and shall be subsequently provided during erection.
17.6
FIELD INSTALLATION
Field installation shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Shop fabricated members subjected to
possible damage shall be braced and carefully handled to prevent distortions or other damages. After
assembly, the various members forming part of a complete frame or structure shall be aligned and
adjusted accurately before being fastened.
Splicing of members shall be permitted only where indicated in the Drawings. Fastening of splices of
compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into close
contact.
Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are
assembled and re-primed where exposed.
Drift pins may be used only to bring together the structural parts and shall not be used in such a manner
as to distort or damage the metal.
Member installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion by pressure of
concrete. Bracing shall be checked and maintained during concreting operation.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors shall be strictly prohibited under
any circumstance.
17.7
ERECTION
Provide for all tools, machinery, cranage, equipment, falsework, temporary braces and everything
necessary for the proper erection of the steelwork. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for the
work and the workers.
Assembled frames or structures shall be neatly and carefully hoisted into position, securely and sufficiently
bolted or tack-welded and temporarily braced as required so as to make adequate provision for all
erection stresses and conditions including those due to erection equipment and its operation.
Bracing members, either temporary or permanent, shall be provided as required as soon as practicable
and left in place as long as they are required for safety and stability.
No member of the structure shall be finally bolted, welded or permanently connected until the whole or a
major section of the steelwork is erected, checked for alignment, level, plumb and correctness and
approved by the SO Rep.
Permanent connection shall be carried out and completed strictly in accordance with the Drawings as
soon as practicable after the approval of the SO Rep, with due care being taken not to interfere with the
existing steelwork in any way.
BLDG13/S17.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-3
17.7
ERECTION (CONTD)
Safe working platform and accesses shall be provided for erection, welding, bolting and inspection
purposes. The HDB's Safety Unit shall be consulted on the safety features of the platform.
Care shall be taken to remove any temporary braces, erection clips, etc to avoid any unsightliness upon
removal. All tack welds shall be ground smooth and holes shall be filled with weld metal and smoothened
by grinding. All tubular members shall be sealed with cover plate to prevent access of moisture to the
inside of the members.
Immediately upon erection, all abraded surfaces previously shop-primed shall be touched up with
approved priming paint.
Erection of roofing materials, if any, can only be proceeded when all steelwork for a block is completed
and sag rod, if any, is effectively installed in purlins and rigidly tied back to the apex of the roof.
17.8
STANCHION BASES
Stanchion bases and bearing plates as provided under columns, beams and girders or resting walls or
footing shall be fabricated, installed and set accurately to the required level alignment with full bearing
contact on support in accordance with the Drawings.
Hold down bolts shall be cast together with reinforced concrete support. They shall be correctly placed
and firmly held in position by template and accurately checked for level, alignment and centering before
concreting. The bolts shall be protected to ensure that they are not subsequently bent, distorted or
tampered with.
Base plates and bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on levelling screws, steel wedges or shims
to correct elevations. After the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned and the
anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing area under the plates shall be set accurately using approved
type of high-strength non-shrink grout in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
Surface to receive grout shall be cleaned and moistened thoroughly immediately before grout is placed.
Exposed surfaces of grout shall be moist cured for 7 days. Wedges and shims shall be cut-off, flush with
edge of column base and bearing plates and shall be left in place.
17.9
BOLTING
All structural bolts as shown in the Drawings prefixed with the letter 'M' for metric series shall conform with
the following British Standards :
Type of Bolt
Black Bolt
High Strength Bolt
High Strength Friction Grip Bolt
Abbreviation
Black
HS
HSFG
Standards
BS 4190
BS 3692
BS 4604
Nuts and washers of the quality and strength compatible to the type of bolts specified shall be used.
All joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, dust,
grease, paint and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the members.
All HSFG Bolts shall be installed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
All bolts shall be well screwed tight with at least one clear thread projecting beyond the nut when tightened
up. Care shall be taken in getting the nut as tight as possible without stripping the thread. If after
tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer shall be discarded.
Where another face of the bolted parts has a slope, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to
compensate for lack of parallelism.
Bolts and nuts in a group of bolts shall be tightened in a staggered sequence from center outwards.
Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any
interposed compressible material.
BLDG13/S17.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-4
17.10
WELDING
Welding shall be done by an electric arc process complying with BS 5135 and by qualified welders to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise shown or specified.
Electrodes shall be of approved type complying with BS 639 and shall be kept in a dry store in unbroken
packets.
Surface and edge of metal to be welded shall be accurately prepared in accordance with BS 5135 and
shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material that would prevent
proper welding or produce objectional fumes while welding is being done.
All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the welding term and symbols shown in the Drawings
and conform with BS 499. For unspecified welding, butt weld shall be full penetration weld with size equal
to the thickness of the members to be butt joined and fillet weld shall be 6mm fillet weld all around the
member.
Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable. The effective throat thickness
of fillet weld shall not be less than those specified in the Drawings and all weld terminating at the ends or
sides of members shall be returned continuously around the corners for a distance of not less than twice
the size of the weld.
Butt weld shall have correct weld preparation for the particular type of weld. The finished butt weld shall
be proud of the surface of the parent material by an amount not exceeding 10% of the throat thickness of
the weld and subsequently dressed off by grinding.
Fillet and butt welds shall be made with such a number of passes as may be necessary to ensure sound
thoroughly fused joints and with each deposit not exceeding 3mm of weld for each pass. Preceding layers
shall be thoroughly cleaned, wire-brushed to remove scale, slag before succeeding layers are placed.
Welds exposed in finished work shall be ground, dressed smooth and flush with adjacent surface.
Welding work shall be carried out on a flat position whenever practicable. In assembling and jointing parts
of a structure, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as to minimize shrinkage stresses
and needless distortion.
17.11
BLDG13/S17.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-5
17.12
610
505
505
395
395
325
Under 3mm
325
250
Thickness Of Steel
The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating on the galvanised steel
member does not comply with the requirements as specified, the galvanised steel member shall be
rejected.
Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment. Store all galvanised members and
components in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas
of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good
by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85% zinc dust,
expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised steel
member or component to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating
weight shall be determined by the stripping test in accordance with BS EN ISO1461. Certificates of such
tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
All structural steelworks and materials are subjected to inspection and testing by the SO Rep in shop and
field. The number and frequency of tests shall be determined by the SO Rep and at least 10% of the
welded joints shall be tested. However, such test and inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for furnishing satisfactory materials and work. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject steel
materials and/or workmanship which do not conform with the Specifications. The acceptance of the
SO Rep of any materials and work shall not prevent their rejection later if Defect are discovered.
The Contractor shall provide adequate facilities and bear all costs and expenses of everything necessary
for the SO Rep to inspect and test any part of the steelwork and measurement of stresses and deflection,
if required.
Any work shown to be defective shall be removed or rectified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Notwithstanding the acceptance by the SO Rep of the rectified
work, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the soundness of the structure arising out of poor
workmanship and defective work.
The testing and inspection of welding shall conform to the following British Standards :
Type of Test
Magnetic particle flaw detection test
Penetrant flaw detection test
Ultrasonic examinations
Radiographic examinations
Standard
BS 6072
BS 6443
BS 3923
BS 2600, BS2910
All required tests of structural steelworks and material shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory
under the Singapore laboratory Accredited Scheme of Singapore Accreditation Council.
BLDG13/S17.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-6
17.13
17.13.1
Plan Submission
The contractor shall ensure his PE comply with the following :
17.13.2
(a)
submit a complete design calculations and structural plans of his PE to HDB, Technical
Management (C&S) Unit for clearance.
(b)
apply the permit to carry out Works prior to commencement of the affected Works.
(c)
Upon completion of the building work, submit a set of as-built tracing and digital in pdf or other
approved format.
Technical Requirements
Should any external claddings/features inclusive of those at and above roof level be supported by the
main building structures, the submission shall be accompanied with a letter from the relevant Qualified
Person (QP) of the main building structures that certify adequacy of the the building structures to support
external claddings/features designed by the contractor's PE.
In addition to comply with the required building code and standard, the design for all steel works shall
meet the following minimum requirements :
(a)
(b)
the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 4mm for steel structures at lower than 4 -storey.
(c)
the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 6mm or greater for steel structures at 4-strorey and
higher.
(d)
Hold down bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dipped galvanised, electroplated or of
stainless steel grade 316 satisfying acceptable standard and code of practice.
(e)
Use open steel section, wherever possible, to facilitate direct connection of cladding, roofing sheet
and other architectural panels onto this steel section.
(f)
Should the steel hollow section be used, there shall be no drilling through it for connection of
cladding, roofing sheet and other architectural panels. Necessary steel connecting plates or cleat
angles shall be used and welded up to steel hollow sections for securing the cladding, roofing
sheet and other metal panels.
Section 18/.....
BLDG13/S17.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-1
SECTION 18
METALWORK
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.3.1
General
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the
relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and
others as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all
aspects with SS 212:2007 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).
18.3.2
Performance
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop
drawings to ensure compliance with SS 212:2007.
18.3.3
Material
(a)
Aluminium Alloy
All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy
6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS 212:2007.
(b)
Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of
the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 minimum complying with BS EN 10088. All screws
(except screws used to fix stainless steel hinges), bolts and other accessories which are exposed
shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel friction hinges shall be
approved stainless steel screws precoated with epoxy coating as shown in the Drawings.
(c)
(d)
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-2
18.3
18.3.3
Material (Cont'd)
(e)
Safety Device
Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from
jumping track and shall be in black or bronze colour or other approved matching colour.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out
from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of safety
lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material (2
no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function. The
dimension tolerance for gap between the safety device and sliding panel shall comply with SS
212:2007. The sliding window shall pass the Jumping Track Test specified in SS 212:2007.
(f)
Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene
monomer (EPDM).
(g)
Hardware
For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or
316, aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung
windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. Friction hinges shall be of
stainless steel type 304 (minimum). All crescent locks and handles shall be finished in black or
other approved matching colour.
(i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(a)
Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35 N was removed. Requirement: pull-in
shall not be reduced to less than 0.2 mm.
(b)
Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement: The
operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 Nm.
Bldg Spec
Page 18-3
18.3
18.3.3
Material (Cont'd)
(g)
Hardware (Cont'd)
(iii)
Resistant to
obstructed stay
track
Strength of
maximum
opening stop
Resistance to
accidental
loading
Endurance of
Fastener
18.3.4
Test
300N for 5 second
Requirements
No visible damage to window
Destruction Test
Destruction Test
Destruction Test
50,000 cycles
(sash > 600mm
width or > 0.45 m2)
100,000 cycles
(sash 600mm
width or 0.45 m2)
Finishes
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a)
(b)
Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except that the minimum thickness of the coating
shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.3.5
18.3.6
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-4
18.3
18.3.7
Installation
(a)
(b)
Detailing
All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturers instructions.
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out
from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of a safety
lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material (2
no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function.
Window frames shall be fabricated to tolerances as shown below :
1
2
3
4
5
(c)
Length
Straightness
Angles
Sides
Squareness
(Diagonals D1-D2)
+/- 1.5 mm
+/- 1.5 mm
+/- 2o
+/- 1 mm
+/- 4 mm
(d)
Application of Sealant
Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as
shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush
joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides
and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works
endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence
work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant
applicators.
Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-5
18.3
18.3.8
Glazing
(a)
Glass
All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window shall be fixed to the inner aluminium frames in the
factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glazing panel of casement and top
hung can be fixed to the aluminium frames at the Site. All glass supplied shall comply with BS 952.
All glass shall be relatively distortion-free.
Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm 0.2mm green tinted float glass with a
shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing panel to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be
6 mm 0.2mm clear float glass.
Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm 0.2mm.
All glazing panel shall meet dimensional tolerances as shown below :
1
2
3
(b)
Height
Width
Straightness of edge
+/- 2 mm
+/- 2 mm
+/- 1 mm
Glazing Accessories
All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
(c)
Protection
Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after
installation.
(d)
Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the SO Rep.
(e)
Fixing
Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly
anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the
edges.
(f)
Cleaning Up
Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and
replace all damaged glass.
(g)
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-6
18.3
18.3.9
Test Method
ASTM C510
Extrusion Rate
ASTM C1183
>10 ml/min
Rheological Properties
ASTM C639
Indentation Hardness
ASTM C661
15 to 50
Tack-Free time
ASTM C679
ASTM C719
ASTM1246
Loss in weight<10%
No cracking and chalking
Effects of Accelerated
Weathering
ASTM 793
Adhesion-in-Peel
ASTM C794
Peel strength>22.2N
Bond loss<25%
(for aluminium and mortar/concrete
substrates)
Material Identification
ASTM E1252
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-7
18.4
18.4.1
General
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed adjustable louvre window and glazing
complete with polypropylene glass holders/blade clips and all the relevant components to the locations as
shown in the Drawings.
18.4.2
Performance
Adjustable louvre window shall meet the following performance requirements :
(a)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
(d)
18.4.3
Material
(a)
Aluminium Alloy
All aluminium structural members shall be made of aluminium alloy 6063TF, 6063TE or 6063T5
complying with BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020
(b)
Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the
fabrication of the windows shall be made from aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel, mild steel
treated to give corrosion resistant properties complying with SS212:1988. All screws, bolts and
other accessories which are exposed shall be of approved matching colour.
(c)
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-8
18.4
18.4.3
Material (Cont'd)
(d)
Mullion
The mullion shall contain an enclosed slot to accept the control handle.
(e)
Control Mechanism
Control mechanism shall be produced from stainless steel AISI grade 304 or aluminium.
The control mechanism shall be designed such as to provide a positive snap lock and that all
components shall be easily replaced in case of failure.
(f)
(g)
Fixing
Fixing screws shall be concealed when the louvre blade clips are in the fully closed position.
(h)
(i)
Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or plasticized PVC.
18.4.4
Finishes
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a)
(b)
Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9
microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.4.5
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-9
18.4
18.4.6
18.4.7
Installation
(a)
(b)
Detailing
All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturers instructions.
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
(c)
(d)
Application of Sealant
Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as
shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush
joint with the window frame. The application of approved sealant shall comply with the
manufacturer's guides and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works
endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence
work They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant
applicators.
Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion.
18.4.8
Glazing
(a)
Glass
Unless otherwise specified, glazing panel of adjustable louvre windows shall be 6mm 0.3mm
green gray/gray tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing panel to adjustable louvre windows between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall
be 6mm 0.3mm clear float glass.
(b)
Glazing Accessories
All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-10
18.4
18.4.8
Glazing
(c)
Protection
Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after
installation.
(d)
Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the SO Rep.
(e)
Fixing
Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly
anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the
edges.
(f)
Cleaning Up
Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and
replace all damaged glass.
18.4.9
Test Method
ASTM C510
Extrusion Rate
ASTM C1183
>10 ml/min
Rheological Properties
ASTM C639
Indentation Hardness
ASTM C661
15 to 50
Tack-Free time
ASTM C679
ASTM C719
ASTM1246
Loss in weight<10%
No cracking and chalking
Effects of Accelerated
Weathering
ASTM 793
Adhesion-in-Peel
ASTM C794
Peel strength>22.2N
Bond loss<25%
(for aluminium and mortar/concrete
substrates)
Material Identification
ASTM E1252
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-11
18.5
18.5.1
Main Material
All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.
18.5.2
Surface Finish
The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated to comply with BS 3987 to provide an anodic
coating of 25 microns.
18.5.3
18.5.4
Hardware
Hardware such as locksets, guide, roller etc including its fixing shall be in accordance with SS 268:1983.
The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against
atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall
be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without
removing the outer frame from the structure. Locksets and guide shall be in black colour or bronze colour
or other approved matching colour.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent the door panels from jumping track and the colour shall be
black or bronze or other approved matching colour.
Unless specified otherwise, the lockset shall be openable by key from the outside and lockable by an
open and shut control from the inside. The lockset shall be incorporated into the thickness of the door
jamb of the slider and secured by means of stainless steel screws.
For sliding door to private balcony not link to the main entrance door, the lockset shall be lockable by an
open and shut control from the inside.
Lockset shall be finished in black or bronze in colour or other approved matching colour.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-12
18.5
18.5.5
18.5.6
Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any
shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the
door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.
18.5.7
Glazing
All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before
delivery to the Site. The glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall be 6mm 0.3mm thick
green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75.
Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber
member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials.
18.5.8
Performance Tests
When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall arrange for performance tests as required in
SS 268:1983 and the following tests shall be carried out by PSB testing laboratory accredited under
SINGLAS :
(a)
(b)
18.5.9
)
)
) under copper accelerated acetic acid salt
) spray (CASS) test for 8 hours to achieve
) a rating of 8.
)
)
Workshop Drawings
Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant
details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-13
18.5
18.5.10
18.5.11
18.5.12
18.6
18.6.1
Main Material
All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.
18.6.2
Surface Finish
The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated and finished by one of the following :
18.6.3
(a)
(b)
Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except the minimum thickness of coatings shall be 9
microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
18.6.4
Hardware
The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against
atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall
be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without
removing the outer frame from the structure.
18.6.5
18.6.6
Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any
shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the
door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-14
18.6
18.6.7
Glazing
(CONT'D)
All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before
delivery to the Site. Unless otherwise specified, the glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall
be 6mm 0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75.
The glazing panel to swing door between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm 0.3mm
thick clear float glass.
Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber
member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials.
18.6.8
Workshop Drawings
Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant
details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.
18.6.9
18.6.10
18.6.11
18.7
18.7.1
Where polyester powder coating on aluminium are required, the polyester powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating "Oxyplast APR" or "Tiger Drylac U Series 58" or other approved. The
powder coating shall comply with all the requirements as specified in these clause and subclauses.
Unless otherwise specified, all test procedures shall be in accordance with AAMA 2604-98 "Voluntary
Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings
on Aluminium Extrusions And Panels". The powder coating shall be applied by approved applicator.
(a)
General Requirements
(i)
Surfaces
Coatings shall be visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters or other surface imperfections
in the dry film state on the exposed surfaces when observed at a distance of ten (10) feet
(120 inches) from the metal surface and inspected at an angle of 90 degrees to the surface.
(ii)
Thickness
The total dry film thickness on each significant surface of the coating on each piece shall be
60m - 100m.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-15
18.7
18.7.1
(a)
(b)
Test Specimens
Test specimens shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of the production
coated aluminium. A sufficient number of specimens on which to conduct instrument
measurements with flat coated surfaces of at least 6" long and 3" wide, shall be submitted to the
test laboratory.
(c)
(d)
Colour Uniformity
Colour uniformity shall be consistent with the colour range as established between the approved
source and the applicator.
(e)
Specular Gloss
Gloss values shall be within 5 units of the manufacturer's specification.
The Standard gloss range reference values are :
Gloss Colours
High
Medium
Low
(f)
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-16
18.7
18.7.1
(g)
Film Adhesion
(i)
Dry Adhesion
No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering
anywhere on the test specimen
(ii)
Wet Adhesion
No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering
anywhere on the wet test specimen.
(iii)
(h)
Impact Resistance
No removal of film to substrate.
(i)
Abrasion Resistance
Using the falling sand test method ASTM D 968, the Abrasion Coefficient Value of the coating shall
be 20 minimum.
(j)
Chemical Resistance
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Detergent Resistance
No loss of adhesion of the film to the metal. No blistering and no significant visual change in
appearance when examined by the unaided eye.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-17
18.7
18.7.1
(k)
Corrosion Resistance
(i)
(ii)
(l)
Weathering
The coating shall maintain its film integrity and as a minimum meet the colour retention, chalk
resistance, gloss retention and erosion resistance properties specified hereunder. The SO Rep
shall request data relative to the long term durability of the colour/colours selected.
(i)
(ii)
Colour Retention
Maximum of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) Colour change as calculated in accordance with
ASTM D 2244-85, Section 6.3 after the exposure test as per foregoing subclause "Test Site
and Duration".
(iii)
Chalk Resistance
Chalking shall be no more than that represented by a No. 8 rating based on ASTM D 659
after test site exposure.
(iv)
Gloss Retention
Gloss retention shall be a minimum of 50% after the exposure test.
(v)
Resistance To Erosion
Less than 10 percent film loss after the exposure test expressed as a percent loss of total
film.
(m)
QUV A340 (ASTM G53, 3000 Hours - 8 Hours UV, 4 Hours Condensation)
(i)
Gloss Retention
70 - 100%
(ii)
Colour Retention
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-18
18.7
18.7.1
(n)
Gloss Retention
80 - 100 %
(ii)
Colour Retention
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
18.7.2
Appearance
The powder coating on the significant surface shall not have any scratches through to the base metal. It
shall be of even colour and gloss with good coverage. It shall not have Defect such as excessive
roughness, flow lines, bubbles, inclusions, craters, blisters, dull spots, pin holes, scratches or any other
unacceptable flaws.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.7.3
Colour
The finishing colour of the powder coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek
approval from the SO Rep on the colour selection prior to the application of the powder coating.
18.7.4
18.7.5
18.8
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-19
18.9
Incorporation of aluminium rails to the outer frame of the window to allow the friction stay to clip
onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners. The friction stays shall have features that
allowed them to be detach from the outer frame to facilitate the replacement of window leaves.
(b)
Incorporation of aluminium rails to the inner frame of the window (window leaf) for the arm of the
friction stay to slot in between. The friction stay shall hold onto the rails in the event of failure of the
fasteners.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the aluminium casement and top hung windows
incorporating details of the safety features for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall fabricate
samples of the casement and top hung windows and demonstrate the function of the safety features to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the windows.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their window manufacturer is licensed to use the patented design.
A copy of the licensing agreement between the window manufacturer and the patent owner shall be
submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings.
18.10
18.11
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-20
18.12
18.13
18.14
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-21
18.15
18.16
General
The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external joint/interface between the external
aluminium window and the adjacent structural member or in-full non-structural wall. The external
joints/interfaces shall refer to those directly facing the exterior. However, those along the access
balcony shall be excluded.
The Contractor shall, in his own cost and expense, document and carry out their own water and
weathertightness during construction stage to ensure compliance. All water tests (specified or not
specified) shall be witnessed by the SO Rep.
(b)
25%
The watertightness test shall be carried out using a continuous jet of water sprayed on the
joint/interface with a nozzle and water hose. For each window, four points shall be selected for
testing and each point shall be sprayed for 20 minutes. The velocity of the water at the nozzle shall
be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered shall be 600 litres per hour. The duration of
the testing for each window shall be 80 minutes.
The nozzle shall be held at a distance of 1m away from the joint/interface and pointed towards the
joint/interface horizontally.
Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying out
the watertightness test:
(i) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test
(ii) Procedure of the water test;
(iii) Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate and velocity at the nozzle;
(iv) The method to suspend the nozzle
In the case where sunbreakers come into the way, the nozzle outlet shall be brought in between
the sunbreakers and the external window and pointed towards the joint/interface.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-22
18.16
(c)
18.17
RESERVED
18.18
18.18.1
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(22)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-23
18.18
18.18.2
Rack
(Wall mounted)
Rack
(Ceiling mounted)
Pole
Bracket
Link
Fastener
Other fixing
devices
Stainless
washers.
Endurance
steel
wing
nuts,
nylon
18.20
RESERVED
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(23)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-24
18.21
18.22
18.22.1
General
Provide and install stainless steel eyes with nylon anchors to parapets of access balconies, private
balconies and living rooms of residential building blocks as shown below or to any other locations as
directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Stainless steel eyes shall be of AISI
grade 304 stainless steel.
Description
18.22.2
Eye-Anchors
Location To Be Installed
Quality Of Materials
The nylon anchors shall be "Fisher S6-8", "Hilti HUD6-8", "Ramset DNP6-8", "Rawlplug M6-8"; or other
approved.
18.22.3
Dimensional Requirements
Eye-anchors shall conform with the following requirements :
Thickness of stainless steel
Internal diameter of eye
Length of screw
Length of screw shank
=
=
=
=
Size of drill bead and depth of drilling for the anchors shall comply strictly with the
Manufacturer's/Suppliers written recommendations.
18.22.4
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(24)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-25
18.22
18.22.5
Installation
(CONTD)
Extreme care shall be exercised during installation to ensure that the parapets, copings, cills, etc. are not
damaged or cracked which may cause water seepage or other Defect. The Contractor shall make good,
repair or replace the damaged items at his own cost and expense to the full satisfaction of the SO Rep.
All over-drillings, wrong drillings and defective work shall be rectified by an approved method.
Notwithstanding the approval granted for the method of rectification, the Contractor shall be liable for
making good the defective Works.
After drilling, all cleaning of holes and preparation of surfaces for the insertion of nylon anchors shall
strictly comply with the Manufacturers'/Suppliers' written recommendations.
All fixing shall be accurately plumbed and aligned vertically and horizontally. The eye-screws together
with the nylon anchors shall be applied with approved epoxy resin before screwing into positions. Ensure
that all eye-anchors are fixed securely into the substrate to ensure a strong and firm grip. The completed
fixture shall be clean and free of stains and rusts or other undesirable materials.
The approved epoxy resin shall be one of the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
18.23
18.24
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(25)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-26
18.24
(CONTD)
Preparation
All welded joints shall be made smooth. Remove rust mechanically from the surface of wrought iron.
Clean the surface to remove oil, grease and dirt.
Painting
The Contractor shall seek the SO Rep approval on the painting system for the wrought iron steel gate.
The Contractor shall submit a range of colours for the SO Rep approval. The colour and finishing of the
gate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The painting system shall be:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
No
Performance
Standard
Test
Requirements
1.
Reduced section
tensile test
2.
Chemical composition of
steel
Spark Emission
Spectrometry
Phosphorus, P
- 0.050% max.
Sulphur, S
- 0.050% max.
3.
Adhesion
ASTM D 3359
5B
Scratch Resistance
SS 5 : Part F2
Pencil Hardness
ASTM 3363
SS 5 : Part B1 :
Method No. 5
20 microns + 5 microns
Resistance to Continuous
Salt Spray
SS 5 : Part G1
1000 hours :
Less than 0.1% rusting;
-Blister size no. 6 few to no.10 on
surface.
Resistance to Humidity
under Condensation
Conditions (Cyclic
Condensation)
SS 5 : Part G6
1000 hours :
- Less than 0.03% rusting;
- Blister size no.8 few to no.10 on
surface.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(26)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-27
18.25
FAN HOOKS
Cast fan hooks into positions as shown; bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceilings of shops,
eating houses or other premises as shown in the Drawings.
18.26
18.27
18.28
18.29
18.29.1
Material Requirements
Where shown, the mild steel door frame shall be 1.6mm thick and the overall dimension shall have a
tolerance of 1.0mm to the profile as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to brick/block walls shall be secured
by mild steel fishtailed holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel fishtailed holdfast to the number and
dimension as shown in the Drawings to each side of the frame. Fixing frame to RC shall be by mild steel
bracket with CED primer or galvanised steel bracket with masonry drive pin on both sides all as shown in
the Drawings. Fixing to lightweight concrete partition shall be secured by 3 no. of mild steel holdfast with
CED primer or galvanised steel holdfast to each side of the frame. The holdfast shall be welded to the
partition reinforcement bar.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(27)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-28
18.29
18.29.1
Material Requirements
(CONTD)
(Contd)
Approved Cathodic Electrodeposition Primer to mild steel door frames shall be applied in the mill/
plant/factory and shall comply with the requirements shown below :
Test
18.29.2
Results
Adhesion Test
ASTM D 3359-02a
5B
20 microns 5 microns
Installation Requirements
The Contractor shall install the metal door frames to good verticality within a tolerance of 3mm.
Measurement of the verticality for all the metal door frames shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the
installation of door leaf. Door frames installed without good alignment and verticality shall be rejected.
The grouting of the joints between the door frame and the adjacent structure shall be carried out under
one separate operation. Before grouting, the door frame shall be checked for its verticality and proper
bracing. It is preferred that the door frame be installed after the block work.
18.29.3
Temporary PVC Clip Protection System For Mild Steel Door Frame
Prior to spray painting of ceiling and walls in the flat, mild steel door frame in the flat shall be protected
with PVC trunking protection system. The trunking shall fit the size of door frame. The whole length of mild
steel door frame shall be protected to minimise staining of door frame during spray painting of wall and
ceiling. The trunking shall be removed after the satisfactory completion of spray painting.
18.30
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(28)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-29
18.31
610
505
3mm to 6mm
505
395
1.5mm to 3mm
395
325
Under 1.5mm
325
250
Thickness Of Steel
Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows:
18.32
(a)
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a
charge against the Contractor for any grating where the zinc coating mass is less than the average
coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value as specified.
(b)
The batch of galvanised gratings from which any one of the representative samples fails to achieve
the minimum permissible value as specified shall be rejected. In addition, the SO Rep shall
exercise his right under clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the
Contractor for each such failure. The rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and may be
accepted if tests show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.
18.33
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(29)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-30
18.34
18.35
18.36
18.36.1
Scope
Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts,
bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to
centralised refuse chamber.
18.36.2
Material
The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.5mm thick (minimum) zincalume steel curtain permanently lockseamed to form a continuous curtain or 0.8mm thick (minimum) galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural
anodised aluminium curtain interlocking slats with end clips to secure laterally. The guide rails of the roller
shutter shall be made of aluminium.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around
the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material as the curtain to house the entire drum
assembly and integral chainwheel complete with chain for manual operation.
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the top one-third of
the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to prevent metal to metal
contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
18.36.3
Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Galvanised steel and zincalume
steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colourbond silicone modified polyester coating.
The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep.
18.36.4
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(30)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-31
18.36
18.36.4
(CONTD)
(Contd)
A second lever override control shall be provided within the centralised refuse chamber. When activated,
all lever override controls shall enable the roller shutter to be lifted up (minimum 1.5m height) manually
from the outside as well as from the inside. The outside control shall enable entry to the refuse chamber
in case of electrical breakdown or other emergency. The operator shall then be able to roll up the shutter
using the chain provided within the chamber.
18.36.5
Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide.
Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans, relevant details and accessories to
the SO Rep for approval prior to ordering the system.
18.37
CONTRACT SIGNBOARD
Provide, erect and maintain a contract signboard. The size of the contract signboard shall not be smaller
than the dimensions shown in the Drawings. However, the other details shown in the Drawings shall
serve as a guide. Before erecting the contract signboard, submit details and drawings of the proposed
contract signboard for the approval of the SO Rep. The position and location of the contract signboard at
the Site shall be approved by the SO Rep. The contract signboard shall be erected within one month from
the commencement of the Works and shall not be taken down without prior approval of the SO Rep.
18.38
18.39
HOUSE NUMBER
(a)
For Flat
Provide and fix wrought iron house number to each and every unit of flats. The house number
shall be fixed on to wrought iron steel plate by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes
or other concealed method. The wrought iron steel plate shall be painted in a colour matching the
wrought iron steel gate. The painting of wrought iron house number shall similar to the wrought
iron steel gates. The colour of the house number shall be approved by the SO Rep and the house
number shall be clearly visible. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(b)
18.40
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(31)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-32
18.41
18.42
18.43
LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE AND NOTICE BOARD AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY
Provide and fix lift notice signage and notice board to the wall at the first storey lift lobby. The position
shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder
coated aluminium sheet. The thickness of the aluminium frame and aluminium sheet shall be as shown in
the Drawings. The block number indication shall be of 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. It shall
be attached with a notice board with an openable door panel. The hinges for the doors shall be
concealed. The sign face of the notice board shall be polycarbonate panel with reverse silkscreen
graphics and letterings.
Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for
the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number
of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. Hardwood frame with
softboard covered with fine felt of approved colour shall be fitted in the notice board. The notice board
shall be provided with light tube for illumination. The signages shall have additional housing using
extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings. The entire sign shall be
mounted onto the walls as shown in the Drawings.
The details shown shall serve as a guide. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the
lift notice plate, notice board and casing. Provide shop drawings to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
installation of the plate.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice signages and notice boards.
Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause 18.7
"Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(32)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-33
18.44
18.45
18.46
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(33)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-34
18.47
18.48
18.49
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(34)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-35
18.50
18.51
18.51.1
General
Provide and fix natural anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the
relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and
others as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all
aspects with SS 212:2007 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).
18.51.2
Performance
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop
drawings to ensure compliance with SS212:2007.
18.51.3
Material
(a) Aluminium Alloy
All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy
6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS212:2007.
(b) Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of
the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 minimum complying with BS EN 10088. All screws
(except screws used to fix stainless steel hinges), bolts and other accessories which are exposed
shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel friction hinges shall be
approved stainless steel screws precoated with epoxy coating as shown in the Drawings.
(c) Rollers, Guides And Stoppers
Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides and
stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and the colour of exposed parts shall be approved
matching colour.
(d) Joints & Gaskets
All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of
gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212:2007. Gaskets
shall be neoprene or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).
(e) Safety Device
Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from
jumping track and shall be in approved matching colour.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(35)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-36
18.51
18.51.3
Material
(CONTD)
(Contd)
Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene
monomer (EPDM).
(g) Hardware
For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or 316,
aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung windows,
the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. Friction hinges shall be of stainless steel
type 304 (minimum). All crescent locks and handles shall be finished in approved matching colour.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)
Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35 N was removed. Requirement: pull-in
shall not be reduced to less than 0.2 mm.
(b)
Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement: The
operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 Nm.
Resistant to
obstructed stay
track
Strength of
maximum
opening stop
Test
300N for 5 second
Passed
Destruction Test
Passed
Destruction Test
Endurance of
Fastener
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(36)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Destruction Test
Requirements
Passed
Stay track bent at 130 kg (1275N)
minimum
Sash remains intact 150 kg (1472N)
minimum
50,000 cycles
100,000 cycles
Bldg Spec
Page 18-37
18.51
18.51.4
Finishes
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a)
(b)
Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except that the minimum thickness of the coating
shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.51.5
18.51.6
18.51.7
Installation
(a)
(b)
Detailing
All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturers instructions.
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
Window Frame Fabrication tolerances :
1
2
3
4
5
(c)
Length
Straightness
Accuracy of angles
Accuracy of sides
Squareness
(Diagonals D1-D2)
+/- 1.5 mm
+/- 1.5 mm
+/- 2o
+/- 1 mm
+/- 4 mm
Application of Sealant
Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as
shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush
joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides
and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works
endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence
work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant
applicators.
Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion.
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(37)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-38
18.51
18.51.8
Glazing
(a)
(CONTD)
Glass
All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window shall be fixed to the inner aluminium frames in the
factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glazing of casement and top hung can
be fixed to the aluminium frames at the Site. All glass shall be relatively distortion-free. All glass
except laminated glass supplied shall comply with BS 952.
Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm 0.2mm green gray/gray tinted float
glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6 mm
0.2 mm clear float glass.
Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm 0.2mm.
Glass panel tolerances :
1
2
3
(b)
Height
Width
Straightness of edge
+/- 2 mm
+/- 2 mm
+/- 1 mm
Laminated Glass
Laminated glass supplied shall comply with SS 341 : 2001. The PVB interlayer for laminated glass
shall be from Solutia (Saflex RA41 or Saflex RB41) or Dupont (Butacite B52) or other approved.
The manufacturers logo shall be printed on the laminated glass.
(c)
Glazing Accessories
All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
(d)
Protection
Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after installation.
(e)
Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the SO Rep.
(f)
Fixing
Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly
anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the
edges.
(g)
Cleaning Up
Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and
replace all damaged glass.
Section 19/.....
BLDG13/S18.DOCX(38)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-1
SECTION 19
FLOOR FINISHES
19.1
19.1.1
Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".
19.1.2
Aggregate
Aggregate shall comply with SS 31:1984. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 10mm.
19.1.3
Preparation Of Surfaces
All surfaces to be screeded shall be clean and damp but not wet before commencement of screeding
work.
19.1.4
Locations
Non-structural concrete screed shall be of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum size aggregate. It
shall be laid to floor surfaces in locations specified in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering" and
also to other locations as shown in the Drawings.
The screed shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains and to finish to a surface directed
by the SO Rep.
19.1.5
Thickness
The minimum thickness of screed shall be 15mm for staircase half-landings and 25mm elsewhere or as
shown in the Drawings.
19.1.6
19.1.7
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-2
19.2
19.2.1
Type of Evaluation
Testing Method
Requirement
25 N per mm
40 N per mm2
5mm at 28 days
Shrinkage
Coutinho Ring
No crack
Flow
80% -120%
Water absorption
< 5%
Flexural strength
Water Retentivity
Stiffening time
a) 1.0 N/ mm2
b) 2.0 N/ mm2
BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988
> 90%
BS EN 1015 9 : 1999
(Method A)
a) 360 mins
b) 420 mins
Volume change
Shrinkage value
of not more than
1%
Type of Evaluation
Testing Method
Requirement
Shrinkage
Coutinho Ring
25 N per mm
40 N per mm2
No crack
Flow
80% -120%
Water absorption
< 5%
Flexural strength
Water Retentivity
Stiffening time
a) 1.0 N/ mm2
b) 2.0 N/ mm2
BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988
> 90%
BS EN 1015 9 : 1999
(Method A)
a) 360 mins
b) 420 mins
Volume change
Shrinkage value of
not more than 1%
7
8
For screeding of large areas, ready-mix screed may be proposed, subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Contractor shall submit the mix design to obtain the SO Reps approval. Trial mix shall be conducted to
verify the mix in meeting the performance requirements.
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-3
19.2
19.2.2
Preparation Of Surfaces
Before screeding, prepare the concrete surfaces by cleaning and damping slightly. Freshly laid screed,
where exposed to direct sunlight shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and
cracking.
19.2.3
19.2.4
Stage Of Work
All units
All units
In the event that any seepage or leakage occurs, the Contractor shall be required to rectify the defective
Works as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. After the rectification, the
same water test procedure shall be repeated.
19.2.5
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-4
19.2
19.2.6
Schedule Of Screed/Rendering
Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in the Schedule
below and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings :
Accommodation
3-Room and/or
4-Room and/or
5-Room
Location
Kitchen
Bath/WC
Service Yard
*
*
Bedroom
Prepacked
Screed
Grade 25
Concrete
Screed
Household
Shelter
*
Concrete screed
shall be used where
no floor tiling is
specified
Lift Lobby
Utility
Pump Room,
Switch Room &
MDF Room
Public Staircase
Landing
Concrete screed
shall be used where
no floor tiling is
specified
No rendering is
required for precast
staircase
*
*
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the shop is at the
2nd storey & above
Shop
Bath/WC
Service Yard
*Denotes the specified screed/rendering.
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Remarks
Living /Dining
All Residential
Block Common
Areas
Prepacked
Waterproof
Screed
Bldg Spec
Page 19-5
19.2
19.2.6
Accommodation
Market produce
Lock-Up Shop
Wet Market
Eating House
Restaurant
Location
Prepacked
Waterproof
Screed
Prepacked
Screed
Display Area
Preparation Area
Toilet
Toilet
Bin Area
Switch Room
Refreshment
Area
Stall
(Preparation &
Serving Area)
Toilet/Bath/WC
Grade 25
Concrete
Screed
Remarks
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the shop is at the
2nd storey & above
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the wet market is at
the 2nd storey &
above
*
*
*
*
Wash Area
Bin Area
Service Area
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the eating house is
at the 2nd storey &
above
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the restaurant is at
the 2nd storey &
above
19.3
19.3.1
Scope Of Work
The Contractor shall provide and lay a liquid-applied flexible non-cementitious (water-based) waterproof
membrane or other approved flexible water-based waterproofing membrane to bathroom/toilet, kitchen
and service yard. The waterproof membrane shall be applied over the entire floor of the bathroom/toilet
with an upturn onto the pipes, door kerb and walls. The upturn shall be of minimum 50mm onto the pipes
and minimum 200mm onto the walls. The upturn onto kerb shall be as shown in the Drawings.
In the kitchen and service yard, the waterproofing membrane shall be applied around the floor water
outlets. Application shall be limited to a radius of 400mm from the centre of the outlet unless otherwise
specified.
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-6
19.3
19.3.2
2) Volatile content
Testing Method
FTIR, DTA and TGA
TGA
Specifications
Polymer which undergoes
hydrolysis should not be used
< 50%
ASTM D4541:93
0.2 N/mm2
1.2 N/mm2
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
150%
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Value 120 %
and -ve change 20%
no limit for +ve change
Bldg Spec
Page 19-7
19.3
19.3.2
Testing Method
Specifications
7) Crack Bridging
ASTM C836 : 95
a)
b)
ASTM D2240 : 95
30
ASTM D1640 : 89
Notes:
1.
The concrete test block for the application of membrane under ASTM 412 (98a) and
2
ASTM C836 (95) shall have a compressive strength of 40 5N per mm .
2.
The thickness of the membrane applied for the testing shall be equal to or less than the
recommended thickness. It shall not deviate more than 0.2mm from the recommended
thickness.
Where the waterproofing membrane span across any joint which is likely to crack, the waterproofing
membrane shall be reinforced. To ensure compatibility with the waterproofing membrane, the
reinforcement shall form an integral part of the proprietary system for the flexible water-based
waterproofing membrane.
19.3.3
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-8
19.4
19.4.1
General
(a)
(b)
Inconsistent Sizes
In the event that the ceramic floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall within
the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all subclauses under it, the tiles shall
be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Tiles of
one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size groups.
19.4.2
19.4.3
Testing Requirements
(a)
(b)
19.4.4
Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with Table A unless otherwise stated :
Table A : Requirements Compliance
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Type of tile
SS 483 : 2000
(a)
Structure/Texture Tile
Annex G
(b)
Glazed Tile
Annex J
(c)
Unglazed Tile
Annex H
Bldg Spec
Page 19-9
19.4
19.4.4
(CONTD)
Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows :
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Nominal Thickness
Structure/Texture Tile
300mm
300mm
9mm
Glazed Tile
200mm
200mm
8mm
Unglazed Tile
200mm
200mm
8mm
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Structure/
Texture Tile
Glazed Tile
Length
The deviation, in %, of the
average length of each tile from
the average length of 10 test
specimens.
Not more
than 0.75%
Width
The deviation, in %, of the
average width of each tile from
the average width of 10 test
specimens.
Not more
than 0.75%
Thickness
The deviation, in %, of the
average thickness of each tile
from the average thickness of
10 test specimens.
Not more
than 5%
Unglazed Tile
Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly
formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c)
Physical Properties
Water Absorption
Percent by mass
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Structure/Texture Tile
Glazed Tile
Unglazed Tile
Max of 0.5%
Max of 6 %
Max of 1%
Bldg Spec
Page 19-10
19.4
19.4.4
(CONTD)
Chemical Properties
(i)
Staining Test
(ii)
Slip Resistance
(iii)
Reverse Staining
Test (for Glazed Tile
only)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.
(iv)
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
In-Situ Slip
Resistance Test
The contractor shall carry out two in-situ slip resistance tests on
floor tiles that have been laid at the common areas. The test
shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum
friction test method, in accordance with SS 485: 2001. Each test
cover measurements over five different points. The locations
chosen for the two tests shall be at high pedestrian traffic area,
selected by SO Rep.
Bldg Spec
Page 19-11
19.4
(e)
(CONTD)
Slip Resistance Requirements For Outdoor Areas And Pedestrian Ramp Floor Finishes
(i)
(ii)
19.4.5
Location
Structured /
Textured tiles
Wash Area
Access Balcony
Void Deck
Eating House
Shoplet,
Lock-Up Shop
Market Produce
Shop,
Market Produce,
Lock-Up Shop
Mini-Market
Restaurant
Stall
(Preparation And Serving Area)
Refreshment Area
Toilet/Bath/W.C
Bin Area
Preparation Slab
Wash Area
Toilet/Bath/W.C
Display Area
Bin Area
Preparation Area
Toilet
Toilet
Bin Area
Floor
Toilet
*
*Denotes the specified tile
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Glazed
tiles
Common
Areas
Unglazed
tiles
Bldg Spec
Page 19-12
19.4
19.4.6
(CONTD)
The lift lobby, wash area, void deck and access balcony including the scupper drains shall be tiled. The
structured/textured ceramic floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards water outlets. Movement joints
shall be provided at appropriate locations and approved by the SO Rep. Movement joints shall be
provided at not more than 6m centres. UPVC expansion/movement joints shall be used and its colour
shall match the floor tiles and approved by the SO Rep.
Provide complete set of workshop drawings showing the laying pattern of floor tiles and/or wall tiles of void
deck, lift lobbies and access balconies, wash areas and other locations where tiling work is indicated. The
workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed section and other relevant details required by
the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles
and/or wall tiles.
19.5
CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (KITCHEN, HOUSEHOLD SHELTER, SERVICE YARD, BATH/WC AND WC)
19.5.1
General
(a)
(b)
Inconsistent Sizes
The tiles shall be sorted out at the factory into two size groups with each size group having the size
range of 1 mm. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to
other size group. There shall be clear indication of the size group in the tile boxes. This is required
even if the sizes are within the dimensional tolerance allowed for the production variations spelt out
in the subclause Technical Specifications specified hereunder.
19.5.2
19.5.3
Testing Requirements
(a)
(b)
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-13
19.5
19.5.4
(Contd)
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :
(a)
Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows :
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
:
:
:
300mm
300mm
8-9mm
and/or
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
: 200mm
: 200mm
: 7-8mm
(b)
(i) Length
Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1mm from
the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Width
Average width of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1mm from
the average width of 10 test specimens.
(iii) Thickness
Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed
corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c)
(d)
Physical Properties
(i) Water Absorption
Shall be a maximum of 6%
Chemical Properties
(i) Staining Test
Potassium Permanganate
Class 2
Class 2
Bldg Spec
Page 19-14
19.5
19.5.4
Technical Specifications
(d)
(Contd)
Minimum GB
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on
the top or glazed surfaces.
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-15
19.5
19.5.5
19.5.5.1
Provide and lay glazed ceramic floor tiles to locations as shown in the Schedule below and including any
other locations not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation
SA and/or
2-Room
3-Room and/or
4-Room and/or
5-Room
19.5.5.2
Location
Structured /
Textured
Tiles
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
19.6
19.6.1
General
(a)
(b)
19.6.2
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-16
19.6
19.6.3
Testing Requirements
(a)
(b)
19.6.4
Technical Specifications
The polished porcelain tile shall be rectified with the edges trimmed to achieve precise dimension for its
length and width. The polished porcelain tiles shall not be made of red clay (also known as RED
BISCUIT). Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be in
accordance with the following:
(a)
Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows :
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
:
:
:
600 mm
600 mm
10 mm
(b)
(i) Length
(ii) Width
(iii) Thickness
(v) Rectangularity
Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly
formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-17
19.6
19.6.4
(d)
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Physical properties
(i)
Water Absorption
(ii)
Modulus Of Rupture
(iii)
Breaking Strength
(iv)
Colour Tone
Chemical properties
(i)
Staining Test
(ii)
Resistance to
Household Chemicals
Minimum GB
(iii)
Slip Resistance
Bldg Spec
Page 19-18
19.6
19.6.5
19.6.6
Timber Skirting
Supply and lay 1200mm long x 95mm x 12mm thick timber skirting to living, dining areas and to any other
locations where glazed porcelain ceramic floor tiles are laid. The timber skirting shall be Teak or
Nyatoh or other approved hardwood. A sample of the timber skirting shall be submitted for the SO Rep
approval. Skirting shall be sanded smooth and varnished with 2 coats before being delivered to the Site
for installation. Nail holes shall be properly patched up prior to the application of final varnishing coat.
Timber skirting need not be provided for floor finishes to internal of household shelters.
19.6.7
Schedule Of Polished Porcelain Floor Tiles To Living Room, Bedroom and Household Shelter with
Door Facing Living/Dining Room
Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as shown in the Schedule below and including any other
locations not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation
2-Room and/or
3-Room and/or
4-Room and/or
5-Room
Location
Bedrooms/
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-19
19.7
19.7.1
Workshop Drawings
Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall
tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work is
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant
details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
the laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall
be laid with its joints to coincide with the joints of wall tiles.
Provide complete sets of unit floor plans showing the laying sequence of living floor tiles to ensure that
freshly laid tiles are not step upon before the tile adhesive is fully set. These drawings shall be submitted
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles.
19.7.2
19.7.3
Workmanship
Lay ceramic floor tiles with tile joints coinciding with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO
Rep.
The tiles shall be laid to form an even and flat finished surface, with consistent joint width. Where there is
a water outlet, the floor tiles shall be laid evenly towards the water outlet.
Tile spacers shall be used for laying of floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile spacers shall be
fully inserted into the bedding to ensure that there is no abut joints between the floor tiles, and to achieve
the following joint width :
S/No
Floor Tile
Joint Width
1.5mm to 2mm
Kitchen
2mm to 3mm
Contaminants from the tile back shall be removed prior to the application of tile adhesive. Due care shall
be taken by Contractor to ensure that the floor tiles are not step upon before the tile adhesive is fully set.
Each tile shall be fully bonded to the floor rendering without hollow sound upon tapping.
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-20
19.7
19.7.4
(CONTD)
All tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage and chipping. They shall be stored in their original
packaging in a clean, dry area to avoid damage and contamination.
The Contractor shall provide temporary polyethylene sheet or other protective material approved by SO
Rep to cover the whole finished floor to protect it against damage or staining by cement and plaster
splashing or dropping and all other subsequent trades.
The protective material shall be sufficiently thick, impermeable to water and non-staining in wet and dry
conditions. It shall also be tough so that it cannot be torn or punctured easily at site.
The protective material shall be provided immediately during and after laying of tiles. Prior to laying of the
protective material, the Contractor shall carefully inspect the finished floor and ensure that the tiling is
completed with the workmanship to the SO Rep satisfaction. All tiled areas shall be thoroughly cleaned
before laying of the protective material.
The Contractor shall be required to carry out regular maintenance to ensure that the protection is firmly in
place and in serviceable condition at all times. The protective material shall not be removed until such
time that all other works have been completed and the building is ready for handover.
19.7.5
Inspection
Prior to the commencement of tiling Works, carefully inspect the installed Works of all other trades and
verify that all such Works are complete up to the point that tiling can properly commence.
19.7.6
Mortar Bed
(i)
(ii)
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-21
19.7
19.7.7
Tile Adhesive
(CONTD)
The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works.
The tile adhesive delivered to site shall have the batch number, manufacturer and expiry date clearly
indicated in the packing. The Contractor shall submit documentation to show that all the tilers involved in
the project are properly trained in the mixing, handling and application of tile adhesive.
The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of floor tile screed then notch-trowelled to a finishes
thickness not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed
1m2 in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile, taking
care to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position within
the specified open time and be tapped firmly into position to ensure that each tile is made fully contact
over the whole area.
The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The normal
set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements :
S/N
1
19.7.8
Characteristics
Tensile
Adhesion
Bond
Strength
Tensile
Adhesion
Bond
Strength
(After
Water
Immersion)
Test Method
EN 1348 : 2007
EN 1348 : 2007
Tensile
Adhesion
Bond
Strength (After Heat Aging)
EN 1348 : 2007
Open Time
EN 1346 : 2007
(using tile as specified
in EN 1346)
Deformity
EN 12002 : 2002
Performance Criteria
7 days => 0.3 N/mm2
28 days => 1.0 N/mm2
28 days => 1.0 N/mm2
At 28 days => 1.0 N/mm2
Circulating oven : 70 + - 2
degree C for 14 days
=> 0.5 N/mm2 after not
less than 30 mins
After 28 days storage
under standard conditions
2.5mm (minimum)
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-22
19.7
19.7.8.1
Material
(CONTD)
The proprietary grouts shall be modified by the inclusion of various polymer additives. They shall be easy
to prepare, apply and clean up at the Site.
A sample for each type of grouts shall be taken at the Site and tested at an accredited laboratory
according to the following requirements :
Tile grout for joint width up to 4mm
S/N
Characteristics
Test Method
Performance Criteria
Shrinkage
EN 12808-4
2 mm/m
Water absorption
EN 12808-5
2g (after 30 min)
5g (after 240 min)
Compressive strength
(After dry storage)
EN 12808-3
Abrasion resistance
EN 12808-2
Flexural strength
(After dry storage)
EN 12808-3
15 N per mm minimum
35 N per mm maximum
2000 mm3
3.5N per mm
Characteristics
Test Method
Performance Criteria
Shrinkage
EN 12808-4
2 mm/m
Water absorption
EN 12808-5
2g (after 30 min)
5g (after 240 min)
Compressive strength
(After dry storage)
EN 12808-3
15 N per mm minimum
35 N per mm maximum
Abrasion resistance
EN 12808-2
1000 mm3
Flexural strength
(After dry storage)
EN 12808-3
3.5N per mm
The grouts shall be light-fast and colour-fast. Their colours shall not fade or show inconsistent tones for
the whole tiling Works.
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(22)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-23
19.7
19.7.8
19.7.8.2
Application
(CONTD)
(Contd)
The proprietary grouts shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
The potential risk of staining shall be verified by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial area.
Coloured grouts shall be cleaned off promptly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions as it may
be difficult to remove them from matt glazed tiles, tiles with textured surfaces and some unglazed tiles.
The grouting shall be provided in accordance with the following :
(i)
The grouting shall commence within 7 days upon completion of tile fixing;
(ii)
Ensure that all building dust and debris are removed from the open joints;
(iii)
(iv)
Spread the grout with a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel, working back and forth over the area
until the joints are completely filled;
(v)
Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel and a
damp, but not wet, cloth;
(vi)
Tool the joints with a piece of wood or other material of suitable size and shape;
(vii)
After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry
cloth.
All grout joints shall be uniformly finished. Cushion edge tiles shall be finished evenly to the depth of the
cushion.
19.7.9
Other Materials
Any other material not specifically described but required for a complete and proper laying of the ceramic
floor tiles shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense, but subject to the approval of
the SO Rep.
19.7.10
Cleaning Up
Upon completion of grouting, thoroughly clean all the exposed surfaces of the ceramic tiles.
The tiles shall thoroughly be cleaned before the handing over. The Contractor shall use tile-cleaning
agents to clean all finished surfaces. The tile cleaner shall be an effective blend of penetrants which could
instantly penetrate deep into mortar and scale on tiles surface and remove the mortar completely. The tile
cleaner shall be safe to use and does not harm or burn the skin. The tile cleaner shall be prepared and
used according to the manufacturer's instructions.
19.7.11
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(23)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-24
19.7
19.7.12
(CONTD)
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on floor tiles according to the Schedule Of Material
Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles
within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The
test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles.
The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm. In
addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm. The first
test for each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of floor tiling Works. The remaining tests
shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
19.8
19.8.1
Dividing Strips
To provide and fix minimum 10X3mm thick stainless steel or brass strips insert to joints where there is a
change in materials, change in pattern, interfaced joint between living room tiles and kitchen tiles, and
wherever it is indicated on the drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. The stainless steel strips insert is
to be embedded in cement mortar and finished flush with finished floor level.
Section 20/.....
BLDG13/S19.DOCX(24)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-1
SECTION 20
WALL FINISHES
20.1
20.1.1
Type of Evaluation
Testing Method
Tensile Adhesion
Strength
Shear Adhesion
Strength
Average Shrinkage
Compressive Strength
28 days
Consistence
Retentivity
Water Retentivity
Setting
Time
Requirement
Average strength
2
> 0.75 N per mm
Individual strength
2
> 0.60 N per mm
Average strength
2
> 1.00 N/mm
Individual strength
2
> 0.70 N/mm
< 0.10%
12 - 20 N/mm
> 65%
> 95%
Polymer Content
Product Identification
Analysis
Initial set
Final set
HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the prepacked mortar for testing to determine
the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be conducted by an accredited
laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.64%, i.e. 80% of the specified
content for production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into
consideration that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the
tolerance for test accuracy. Prepacked mortar with pure polymer content less than 0.64% shall be
removed from HDB's Materials List. The Contractor shall remove all unused prepacked mortar with
deficiency in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is
required to use only those prepacked mortar listed in HDBs Materials List and subject to the approval of
the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the prepacked
mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content.
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-2
20.1
20.1.2
Skimming Materials
(CONTD)
The Contractor shall use prepacked external skim coat listed in HDBs Materials List for skimming works on external
RC surface. The skimming works on other areas shall use prepacked internal skim coat listed in HDBs Materials List.
The prepacked skimming materials shall be mechanically mixed with the amount of water as specified by the
manufacturer.
The prepacked internal skimmed coat shall be formulated with at least 1.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall comply
with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory
testing :
Prepacked Internal Skim Coat
S/No
Type of Evaluation
Testing Method
Requirement
Individual strength
2
> 0.60 N per mm
Average strength
2
> 0.80 N per mm
Average Shrinkage
< 0.10%
7 - 12 N/mm
Water Retentivity
> 95%
Setting
Time
i)
Initial set
Polymer Content
The prepacked external skim coat shall be formulated with at least 2.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall comply with
the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :
Prepacked External Skim Coat
S/No
Type of Evaluation
Average Shrinkage
Testing Method
Tensile adhesion strength test according
to HDB method on a sample cured for 14
days under shaded ambient condition.
Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be
tested.
Tensile adhesion strength tests after
accelerated weathering for 100 cycles* of
alternate heating and cooling. Twelve
spots on the sample slab shall be tested.
* Each cycle consist of 4 hours of
heating by UVA 340 lamps at 60C and
then 10 minutes of intermittent water
spray to produce a thermal shock.
ASTM C 531 2000
Requirement
Average strength
2
> 0.80 N per mm
Individual strength
2
> 0.60 N per mm
< 0.10%
7 - 12 N/mm
Water Retentivity
Setting
Time
i)
> 95%
Initial set
BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998
Polymer Content
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-3
20.1
20.1.2
Skimming Materials
(CONTD)
(Contd)
HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the prepacked internal and external skim coat
for testing to determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be
conducted by an accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.80%
for prepacked internal skim coat and 1.60% for external skim coat, i.e. 80% of the specified content for
production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into consideration
that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the tolerance for
test accuracy. Prepacked internal skim coat with pure polymer content less than 0.80% or external skim
coat with pure polymer content less than 1.60% shall be removed from HDB's Materials List. The
Contractor shall remove all unused prepacked internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in
pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is required to use
only those prepacked internal or external skim coat listed in HDB's Materials List and subject to the
approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the
prepacked internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in pure polymer content.
20.2
20.3
PLASTERING TO RC SURFACE
The RC surface shall be cleaned, using high-pressure water jet, such that the surface are free of dust,
residue form oil and organic growth prior to the application of the plaster. The Contractor shall allow the
Resident Technical Officer to check the background preparation before plastering. The prepacked mortar
mix can be applied to the RC surface without spatterdash. The first coat of the plaster to the RC surface
shall be of a thickness between 5 to 8mm and shall be pressed hard onto the surface during application.
For better bonding of the second coat, the first coat shall be lightly scratched and allowed to cure for at
least 12 hours before the application of the second coat.
20.4
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-4
20.5
20.5.1
Workmanship Of RC Works
The verticality of the peripheral RC members and internal RC members shall comply with the following
tolerance, in accordance to Grade II tolerance of SS CP 23.
Allowable variation From The Plumb
Type Of RC Members/Surfaces
Within Each Floor
10mm
20mm
10mm
40mm
10mm
NA
The maximum allowable variation from the plumb for the entire building height shall be 40mm.
The horizontality, alignment and evenness of the ceiling, slab and beam shall comply with the following
tolerance :
Type Of RC
Members/Surfaces
Beam
10mm
NA
Ceiling
NA
Slab
NA
regularly check and maintain their formwork to be in a good and acceptable condition;
b)
c)
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-5
20.5
20.5.2
Measurement Of RC Works
At least fourteen(14) days before commencement of Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
his approval the measurement plan and survey methods.
The areas of the Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey methods
shall, inter alia, include the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
Verticality of walls
(d)
The Contractor shall engage a competent person to carry out measurements of the plumb and alignment
of all external & internal columns, external and internal walls and external corners of the building blocks.
This measurement shall be carried out for every storey, including the first storey.
The Contractor shall be required to use a precision laser plummet capable of shooting a vertical laser
beam for up to 100mm in range and at an accuracy of at least 5 seconds; and a precision multidirectional laser marker capable of beaming right angle lines for up to 30m in range and has an accuracy
of at least 3mm at 10m horizontal and vertical distances.
Proper records of the RC verticality measurements shall be submitted to the SO Rep within one month
after casting of the RC members or any other period as instructed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
highlight in their report all deviations that exceed the tolerance. Upon completion of the finishing work, the
Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building block.
Proper records of all measurements made on the various areas of Works shall be kept by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall when directed by the SO Rep submit the records of measurements made in respect
of every building block before seeking his approval to proceed with the next stage of the Works
20.5.3
(b)
(c)
(d)
For serious structural Defect or misalignment, the Contractor shall be required to submit a PE proposal for
the rectification work subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.5.4
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-6
20.5
20.5.5
20.6
CONTROL OF PLASTERERS
The Contractor shall employ workers that are capable of producing good workmanship for plastering and
skimming Works. They shall possess Skills Evaluation Certificate on plastering works from local
institutions. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval
before they are allowed to commence work. These workers are also required to wear identification pass
upon approval by the SO Rep. The pass shall be easily distinguishable from other pass used at the Site,
by their colour, size or pattern.
20.7
20.8
MAKING GOOD
All making good of defective plaster shall be carried out in rectangular areas, the edges undercut to form
dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster. Cut out and make good all cracks,
blisters and other Defect and clean the whole of the work on completion.
20.9
20.10
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-7
20.11
20.11.1
Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect the bonding of
rendering. The background shall be washed using water jet.
(b)
Apply rendering to the background to a finished thickness not exceeding 10mm to achieve a flat
and even surface. The background shall be first dampened to prevent excessive absorption of
water from the rendering before its placing. The rendering shall be increased to a finished
thickness not exceeding 18mm to allow for concealment of water piping.
(c)
(d)
Apply a layer of bedding mortar onto the rendered substrate and spread another layer as thin as
possible on the full back of the tiles before placing tiles in position. The keys, frogs or depressions
at the back of the tile shall be completely filled with mortar before fixing.
(e)
Place each tile and tap it firmly into position to ensure that each tile makes contact over its whole
area. Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile
spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to the commencement of the tiling
works.
(f)
20.11.2
20.11.3
Tile Adhesive
The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling works.
The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of rendered wall and then notch-trowelled to a finishes
thickness not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed
1m2. in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile to fill
deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position and be tapped
firmly to ensure its full contact with the adhesive.
The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The normal
set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements specified in Clause 19.7.7 Tile Adhesive.
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-8
20.11
20.11.4
(CONTD)
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles according to the Schedule Of Material
Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles
within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The
test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles.
The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm. In
addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm.
The first test for each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of wall tiling Works. The
remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
20.12
20.12.1
General
Provide and lay colour glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause Schedule Of
Colour Glazed Wall Tiles hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
20.12.2
20.12.3
Testing Requirements
(a)
(b)
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-9
20.12
20.12.4
Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with SS 483 : 2000 (Annex L) unless otherwise stated :
(a)
Dimensions
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
:
:
:
200mm
200mm
7mm
:
:
:
250mm
200mm
7mm
:
:
:
300mm
200mm
7mm
:
:
:
300mm
300mm
7mm
:
:
:
600mm }
300mm } Kitchen Wall Tiles
7mm }
:
:
:
400mm }
200mm } Toilet Wall Tiles
7mm }
or
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
or
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
or
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
or
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
or
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
(b)
(i)
Length
Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii)
Width
Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(iii)
Thickness
Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 0.5mm
from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed
corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c)
Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 18%.
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-10
20.12
20.12.4
Chemical Properties
(i)
Staining Test
The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :
Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue solution, 10g/L and Potassium
permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an
approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread it to
an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface with
running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution
of the standard cleaning agent.
Performance Criteria
The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by cleaning solution.
(ii)
Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to ensure that there are no
Defect or damages. The tiles shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.
(b)
(c)
With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond the biscuit (ie. back of the
tile) with potable water over a circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height
of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the naked eye or prescription
glasses if usually worn and under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or
glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding duration of 30
minutes.
(d)
Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of tiles but using methylene
blue solution diluted at 2g of methylene blue per litre.
Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the top or glazed surfaces.
20.12.5
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Location
)
)
)
)
Kitchen
Kitchen/Dining
Bath/WC
WC
Bldg Spec
Page 20-11
20.13
20.14
20.14.1
General
Provide and lay first quality, first choice wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause Schedule Of
Ceramic Wall Tiles hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
20.14.2
Testing Requirements
(a)
(b)
20.14.3
Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :(a)
Dimensions
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness
: 200mm
: 200mm
:
8mm
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
Length
Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii)
Width
Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(iii)
Thickness
Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 5% from
the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
Bldg Spec
Page 20-12
20.14
20.14.3
(CONTD)
Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed
corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c)
Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 6%
(d)
Chemical Properties
(i)
(ii)
Reserve Staining
Test
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.
20.14.4
20.14.5
Accessories
Provide and lay all accessories in matching size and colour to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-13
20.14
20.14.6
(CONTD)
Provide and lay glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not
specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation
Eating House
Mini-Market
Restaurant (Family)
Market Produce Shop
20.14.7
Location
Walls at upper floor lift lobbies
Walls at centralised Refuse chute hopper
Wash areas at void deck
Refuse Chute Chambers
Walls in toilet adjoining Utility Room at ground floor lift lobby
Refreshment Areas
Stalls
Toilets/Bath/WC
Bin Areas
Wash Areas
Bath/WC
Display Areas
Preparation Areas
Bin Areas
Walls and Columns
Toilets
Bin Areas
Toilets
Display Area
WC
Tile Spacers
Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles and floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width.
The tile spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep before commencement of the
tiling works.
20.15
Location
Walls of ground floor lift lobbies.
Wall enclosures at letter box including low walls
defining the ground floor lift lobby.
Provide full range of colours and texture of polished homogeneous wall tiles for the SO Rep to make a
selection. The SO Rep shall have absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract
Sum shall be made for differences in colour and texture.
20.16
WORKSHOP DRAWINGS
Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall
tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work are
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant
details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be
laid with tile joints that coincide with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep.
Section 21/.....
BLDG13/S20.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 21-1
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLING INSTALLATIONS
21.1
21.2
Reserved
21.3
21.4
1.6mm
1.4mm
Construct metal trunking to the details as shown in the Drawings. All metal trunkings shall have
removable covers extending over the entire lengths as shown in the Drawings. The covers shall be fixed
to the trunking by means of brass screws or stainless steel or steel screws protected with a finish of zinc
coating against corrosion.
All welded parts shall be smoothened. All surfaces of the metal trunkings shall be painted with two coats
of approved anti-rust undercoat and two finishing coats giving an overall coating thickness of not less than
45 microns. Alternatively, oven-bake powder coating will also be accepted. The colour of the finishing
coats shall be Off White to BS 10B15.
Each metal trunking shall be protected during delivery and during installation from scratches to the painted
surfaces. Submit samples of metal trunkings to the SO Rep for approval before commencing installation.
The samples shall be checked to conform to dimensions, material quality, colour and finishing
requirements. Approved samples shall be retained as basis of delivery and shall be considered as part of
delivery.
Unless specified otherwise, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with
and necessary for the complete installation, together with all the work involved shall be provided.
BLDG13/S21.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 21-2
21.5
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF) ROOM, TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM (TER) FOR
OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE INSTALLATION AND TELECOMMUNICATION RISERS
All UPVC (SS 272) lead-in pipes to MDF room, Telecom Equipment Room and Telecommunication risers
shall be encased in concrete as shown in the Drawings. All bent pipes, straight pipes and trunkings shall
comply with the COPIF requirements.
All bent pipes, straight pipes and trunkings shall be installed as shown in the Drawings.
The number of lead-in pipes to MDF room, TER and Telecommunication riser ducts shall comply with
COPIF requirements and/or as shown in the drawings.
All pipes terminating inside the Telecommunication riser shall flushed against the wall and rise up to a
minimum height of 1.0m.
21.6
AUTHORITIES REQUIRMENTS
All provision and installation for telecommunication and broadband coaxial cabling systems shall comply
with all statutory rules, regulations and Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building
(COPIF) issued by Info-Communication Development Authority of Singapore (IDA).
21.7
Section 22/.....
BLDG13/S21.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 22-1
SECTION 22
GLAZING
22.1
22.2
CLEANING GLASS
On completion, clean all glass inside and outside, replace all cracked, broken or defective glass and leave
the whole Works in good condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Section 23/.....
BLDG13/S22.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-1
SECTION 23
PAINTING AND DECORATING
23.1
GENERAL
23.1.1
Paint
The paints used shall be manufactured by an approved Specialist and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
All paint shall be delivered to the Site in their original containers and the containers shall not have been
opened before.
Unless otherwise specified, all paint shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards shown below and
their latest amendments :
Standard
SS7:1998
SS34:1998
SS37:1998
SS38:1998
SS150:1998
SS345:1990
SS494:2001
Type of Paint
"Gloss Enamel Finishing"
"Undercoat for Gloss Enamel"
"Aluminium Paint"
"Aluminium Wood Primer (Leafing and Non-Leafing)"
"Emulsion Paint"
"Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint for Decorative Purposes"
"Lead and Chromate-free Primer"
Before the commencement of any painting work, provide and submit colour charts of approved paint to the
SO Rep for the selection of colour scheme.
All water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall comply with SS 345:1990. All enamel paint shall be
synthetic enamel paint unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
23.1.2
Mixing Of Paint
During the progress of work, the SO Rep may at his discretion obtain samples of paint being used on site
for testing. Should paint used in this Contract be found to be adulterated or over-diluted, the SO Rep shall
exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. In addition, all such paint shall be removed from the Site and replace the same with paints
that meet the prescribed standards. All work executed with paint which fails to meet the prescribed
standards shall be burnt off or otherwise removed and the work shall be re-executed at the Contractor's
own cost and expense to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
23.1.3
Workmanship
Unless otherwise specified, all paints shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
All paints for priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats used for the work shall be of the same brand
and from the same manufacturer. Where available, undercoats shall be of different shades to correspond
with the shade of the finishing coat. Provide sample panels of paintwork showing the shade of the
respective coats.
All external paintwork shall be executed under dry condition and the surface to be painted shall be dry
before the paint is applied. The whole of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building including the
ceilings and soffits shall be cleaned down thoroughly and all cracks and blemishes made good prior to the
commencement of the painting work.
After the completion of each coat of painting work, the SO Rep shall be notified before the application of
the next coat.
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-2
23.2
EXTERNAL PAINTING
23.2.1
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all
necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but
such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising
under the Contract.
23.2.2
(b)
(c)
Touch-Up Coat
Painted surfaces which have to be overcoated by touch-up work should not be confined to the
affected spots only. The whole panel of the wall or area affected by touch-up shall be repainted to
match the colour tone of the finished coat.
(d)
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-3
23.2
23.2.2
Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as
stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A5. In this
respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to
such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the
event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such
Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as
produced in Appendix A5(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be
submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such
time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with
the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the
Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the
payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to
the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be
released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
23.2.3
Test Method
Properties/
Performance
Requirement
Colour
Non-volatile matter
SS 5 :Part B2
Through-dry time
ISO 9117
7510m wet film thickness
SS 5:Part E2
Min 70%
Lead content
SS 5:Part C6
Coating adhesion
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-4
23.2
23.2.3
23.3
Properties/
Performance
Alkaline resistance
Test Method
Requirement
SS 5: Part G2
0.1 M NaOH solution for 1 hour
Water permeability, 14
days
SS 500 Appendix B
7510m wet film thickness
Water immersion
resistance, 500 hours
ISO 2812-2
One coat of sealer of 7510m wet
film thickness and two coats of SS
345 paint at 7510m wet film
thickness per coat on cement panel.
Remaining surface coated with
epoxy paint.
(b)
(c)
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-5
23.4
PAINTING OF WOODWORK
23.4.1
Preparation
All joinery and finished woodwork shall be properly cleaned down, knotted, stopped, sand-papered smooth
and primed. Two coats of wood preservative shall be applied to the back of doors frames and window
frames and other woodwork abutting masonry work. The wood preservative shall be "Solignum",
"Creosote" or other approved.
23.4.2
Painting
Unless otherwise specified, surfaces of all woodwork shall be prepared and painted with one priming coat,
one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.
23.4.3
23.4.4
Performance
Accelerated Weathering :SS5: Part G4
Requirements
Max 35% Gloss Loss
(400 hours)
Surface Preparation
All pin holes and recesses on the main entrance door and bedroom door surfaces shall be filled and
stopped with putty. The door surfaces shall be properly sanded smooth by mechanical means and
cleaned prior to the application of wood varnish.
23.4.5
Wood Varnish
The main entrance door and bedroom door surfaces shall be finished off-site under a factory environment
with a minimum of three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other approved finish. The varnish
shall be approved by the SO Rep. The varnish shall comply with the requirements as specified hereunder
:
Substrate
Application
Method/Film
Thickness
SS 5 Part B4:1987
NA
NA
b) Keeping
qualities
SS 5 Part B6:1987
NA
NA
c) Fineness of
grind
SS 5 Part B13:1987
NA
NA
d) Dry film
thickness
SS 5 Part B1:1985
(Method 5)
Test
Varnish Only
a) Condition in
container
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Test Method
Burnished
tinplate
3 coats by
brush
Requirements
No coagulation,
precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles ;
No coagulation,
precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles ;
Maximum 30
microns ;
Minimum 50
microns ;
Bldg Spec
Page 23-6
23.4.5
Test
Test Method
Substrate
Application
Method/Film
Thickness
Requirements
Varnish Only
(Contd)
e) Surface
drying time
SS 5 Part D2:1985
Burnished
tinplate
Metered bar/
wft 50 microns
2 hrs maximum;
f)
ISO 9117:1990
Burnished
tinplate
Metered bar/
wft 50 microns
6 hrs maximum;
g) Gloss at 60
deg.
SS 5 Part E1:1985
Glass plate
Metered bar/
wft 50 microns
25 - 50 gloss
units;
h) Flash point
SS Part B15:1987
i)
Washability
SS 5 Part F5:1992
Burnished
Glass
Metered bar/
wft 80 microns
j)
Scratch
Resistance
SS 5 Part F2:1988
Burnished
tinplate
Metered bar/
dft 25 microns
Minimum 1000g
k) Accelerated
weathering
(500 hrs dry
cycle)
SS 5 Part G4:1992
Burnished
tinplate
Metered bar/
dft 25 microns
Maximum gloss
loss 30%
l)
SS 150 Appendix C
NA
NA
No growth
Through dry
time
Mildew
resistance
23.4.6
Reserved
23.4.7
Reserved
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
NA
NA
23C minimum
Bldg Spec
Page 23-7
23.5
23.5.1
Preparation Of Surface
Remove all dust, rust, scale, grease and oil before painting.
23.5.2
Painting
Unless otherwise specified, paint all exposed metal surfaces with one coat of lead and chromate-free
primer, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. Primer to mild steel door frame
shall be approved cathodic electrodeposition primer.
Unless otherwise specified, paint all metal surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete, masonry
work, etc, except for concrete reinforcement, with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer.
Paint stainless steel, brass and aluminium Works only if specified.
23.6
PAINTING OF PIPES
Allow for the painting of all sanitary, water and gas installation pipes, rainwater downpipes, balcony waste
discharge stacks and all services pipes including water supply pipes (except for stainless steel pipes and
pipes in the water tank compartment). Unless specified otherwise, the colour shall match with the general
background colour tone of the building to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Paint pipes and trunking as specified hereunder and including other types of pipes and trunking not so
specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Type Of Pipe / Trunking
First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Fourth coat
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-8
23.7
23.8
23.8.1
23.8.2
23.9
SCAFFOLDING
Provide and erect scaffolding over all faces of the building blocks for the application of paint. Scaffolding
shall not be removed until the painted surfaces are inspected by the SO Rep and until the test results of
the paint samples taken out for testing are known.
23.10
CLEARING UP ON COMPLETION
All areas stained by paint including but not limited to floors, staircases, aprons and public areas and drains
shall be thoroughly washed and removed upon completion of the Works before handing over to the
Employer. All debris and superfluous materials shall be cleared away.
Section 24/.....
BLDG13/S23.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-1
SECTION 24
UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION RETICULATION CABLE,
TELECOMMUNICATION AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE
24.1
24.1.1
24.1.1.1
Materials
All UPVC pipes shall be Class B in accordance with SS 141:1976.
The material from which the pipe is produced shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) to which
shall be added suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes. These additives shall not constitute a
toxic hazard and shall not impair its chemical and physical properties.
The UPVC pipes shall be grey in colour and shall have a socket at one end.
The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean,
smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be clearly cut
and square with the axis of the pipe.
24.1.1.2
Dimensions
The dimensions of the UPVC pipes and plug shall be as shown in the Drawings for underground piping
system.
24.1.2
Pipe Installation
(a)
General
The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. In case a straight run is not possible the
radius of curvature shall be determined on the Site by the SO Rep.
(b)
(c)
Gradient
1:12
(d)
Flared-Mouth Pipes
Flared-mouth pipes shall be used for entry into draw pit or for pipes which terminate directly in the
ground. All the ends of flared-mouth pipes shall be sealed with end plugs to prevent entry of earth
or cement.
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-2
24.1.2
Construction Method
The first layer of concrete with A6 welded steel mesh shall be placed to the required thickness on
the prepared trench bottom. The bottom layer of pipes shall be laid using spacers at 1.5m intervals
to maintain the spacing between pipes. Ensure that a minimum gap sufficient for the specified
concrete thickness remains between the outside of pipes and the side of trench or trench
shuttering where used.
The next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer
of pipes are laid. The final layer of concrete shall be reinforced with A6 welded steel mesh. The
concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is placed, shall be properly
compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe.
The final layer of the concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled. PVC cover plates shall be anchored
on the final layer of concrete.
Ready mixed concrete shall be used. However, if the concrete required is less than 2 m3, hand mix
concrete is allowed.
Mechanical vibrator shall be used to ensure that the gaps between pipes are filled with concrete.
(f)
(g)
(h)
Protection of Cables
During the boring of pipe entries into existing structures, or during the demolition and rebuilding of
the joint hole, the Contractor shall take such measures as directed by the SO Rep to protect the
cables. Such measures may include the following :
(i)
(i)
Any movement of existing cable shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep.
(ii)
Cables shall be protected against mechanical damage at pipe entries and inside joint hole
by packing them with sandbags to act as a cushion when any movement occurs.
Pipe Testing
On completion of pipe laying (including compaction and backfilling) between any two joint holes or
more, a cylindrical brush and a mandrel as shown in the Drawings shall be passed through each
pipe in both directions to test the pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have entered.
The cylindrical brush and mandrel shall be supplied by the Contractor. The mandrel shall follow the
brush to minimise possible scouring or breaking of the pipes. The testing shall be carried out
under the direction of the SO Rep before the section of pipes are accepted.
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-3
24.1.3
24.1.3.1
Materials
All cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0 m. Each cover plate shall be nominal 172.4mm
in width and 2.0mm in thickness. The length and breadth may have a tolerance of 5 mm.
The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistance polyvinyl chloride without plasticizer
(UPVC). Use of regenerated PVC, or Polyethylene or PP is strictly forbidden. Each cable cover plate
shall be linked to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain.
The colour of the plate shall be black in accordance with BS 381c colour code and shall remain permanent
and non-fading.
The materials and the colour of the cable cover plates shall be resistant to chemical influences likely to be
encountered when buried in the ground.
The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revision
of the following standards or their equivalent :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
24.1.3.2
Description
Impact Test
Tensile Strength
Vicat Softening Temperature
Accelerated Ageing
Standard
Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
Clause 7.4 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
ASTM D1525
ASTM D3045
Requirements
The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties :
(a)
Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength shall not have more than 3 cracks
respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). The drop hammer shall not penetrate the
specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer tests. If these
requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens from the same lot.
Should the specimens tested in the second series of tests also fail to meet the requirements, the
whole test is deemed to have failed.
(b)
The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand
a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.
(c)
The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72C (Rate A
at 50C 5C per hour).
(d)
The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be
tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be
less than 25% of the original value.
The cable cover plates shall be type tested by PSB or an SAC accredited laboratory in accordance with
the above requirements.
24.1.3.3
24.1.4
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-4
24.1.5
24.1.6
(a)
For trenches which are located within the road, backfill from the completed pipe level to the
subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry dust.
(b)
For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the Contract
with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.
24.2
24.2.1
24.2.1.1
Materials
All UPVC pipes shall comply with all requirements as specified in SS.272; 1983
The material to produce the pipes shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC). When joining pipes,
suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes shall be used. These additives shall not constitute a
toxic hazard to the environment and shall not change in its chemical and physical properties.
The UPVC pipes shall not be darker than the grey colour and shall have a socket at one end. Each length
of pipe shall be clearly, indelibly and continuously marked at intervals of not more than 1.0m using a
distinctive colour with the description of Manufacturers identification/110mm UPVC
pipe/Date/Month/Year/SS272.
The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean,
smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be clearly cut
and square with the axis of the pipe.
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-5
24.2.2
24.2.2.1
Item
Pipe
Coupling
24.2.2.2
Length
Max
Wall
Thickness
Min
Wall
Thickness
Max
External
Diameter
Min
External
Diameter
Internal
Diameter
at the
Edges
Internal
Diameter
at the
Center
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
6000+50
-0
3.6
3.2
110.4
110
180 2
3.6
3.2
110.5+0.2
-0
110+0
- 0.2
General
(a)
(b)
The crowns of all pipelines are to be laid at least 600mm below the invert level of Civil Engineering
drains.
(c)
(d)
The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. Where a straight run is not possible, the
radius of curvature shall be determined by the SO Rep.
(e)
All rectification Works instructed by the SO Rep to meet all requirements shall be carried out at the
Contractors cost and expense.
(f)
The following items shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification of tests conducted on the
Manholes and Pipelines :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Completion Certificate
Summary of Manhole and Pipeline Length
Pipe Testing Report/Manhole Survey Record
The Contractor shall assist the SO Rep in all verification work to ensure all tests are properly
conducted. The Contractor shall perform more tests if the SO Rep deemed necessary all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.
(g)
24.2.2.3
Upon completion of the pipe laying works, the Contractor shall submit As-Built drawings of the
project site to the SO Rep, in addition to the items listed in subclause 24.2.2.2(f) above.
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Gradient
1: 6
Bldg Spec
Page 24-6
24.2.2
24.2.2.4
24.2.2.5
24.2.2.6
Construction Method
(a)
Where UPVC of less than 16-Ways are to be laid, they shall be encased in Grade 20 concrete to a
minimum thickness of 50mm as shown to the details in the COPIF.
(b)
Where UPVC are to be laid in multiple formation, polypropylene spacers shall be used at a
maximum spacing of 1.5m apart to allow clearance between adjacent pipes.
(c)
The starting end of the pipe shall be blanked off with a board or boards to prevent foreign objects
from entering the pipes. When joining multiple pipes, all pipe ends and the interior of the collar shall
be thoroughly cleaned with a dry rag followed by a liberal coating of solvent cement. The collar
shall then be pushed into the first pipe by hand. A suitable wooden batten is then placed across the
remote end of the collar and tapped with a hammer until it is engaged midway. The next length of
pipe shall then be engaged to the collar and similarly tapped until fully engaged.
(d)
The first layer of concrete shall be placed to the required thickness on the prepared trench bottom.
The bottom layer of the pipes shall then be laid (using the spacer to maintain the spacing between
pipes where applicable) such that a minimum gap, sufficient for the specified concrete thickness,
remains between the outside pipes and the side of the trench or trench shuttering where used. The
next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer of
pipes are laid. This process shall be continued until the final layer of concrete is laid to the
specified thickness. The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is
placed, shall be properly compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe.
Where ready mix concrete is used, the placing of concrete up to three layers of pipe in a single
batch is allowed, provided 12mm size diameter vibrators are used to consolidate the concrete filling
the spaces between the pipes.
For pipeline encased with 100mm thick concrete, each batch shall be well compacted and worked
around the pipe and vibrated using a vibrator. The space between the pipes shall be properly
tamped with a 12mm diameter rod to ensure that the concrete is properly filled. The final layer of
concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled.
(e)
When pipes are laid under conditions where backfilling is required to be carried out immediately,
approved type of rapid hardening cement additive compound shall be used with the concrete.
(f)
All spaces alongside the pipe shall be filled with stone free earth and hand punned to a compacted
thickness of not less than 100mm above the top of the pipe barrel.
(g)
Where the pipe is recessed into the wall of the manhole, the outside surface of the pipe shall be
roughened with glass paper or sandpaper and a coat of solvent cement applied for its length in the
manhole wall.
(h)
Pipes shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1.2m below the final ground level or as otherwise
directed.
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-7
24.2.2
24.2.2.6
24.2.3
(i)
Pipes shall be in straight run. When bending is unavoidable, the bend shall be gradual and smooth.
No S bend is allowed.
(j)
A 90 degree upturn when changing from a horizontal to a vertical plane shall be done with
approved type factory made bend pipe. The pipe shall be clipped and flushed against the wall and
shall rise to a height of 1.0m above ground level unless otherwise directed.
(k)
A nylon/polyethylene rope shall be provided in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after pipe testing
and this shall be drawn in together with the proposed cable. The rope shall be of 4-core or multistrand type with overall diameter of 6.0mm in coil of 200m. In all lead-in pipes, the rope shall
extend to the first manhole to allow pulling of cables in the manhole.
Standard Manholes
(a)
The details of the standard manholes are shown in the COPIF. The presence of unforeseen
obstructions in the ground, or adverse ground conditions, may necessitate the construction of a
type other than that specified, or a modification of one or more of the dimensions stipulated in the
COPIF. The SO Rep shall advise the Contractor of any modifications required. The Contractor
shall not carry out any modification without the approval of the SO Rep.
(b)
(ii)
The bottom shall be kept dry by providing a sump hole as shown in the COPIF to
accommodate a water pump, and a layer of 150mm thick hardcore material shall be
provided where necessary.
(c)
Pipes shall be cast in situ as construction of manhole proceeds. Pipe ends shall be trimmed and
entries made clear of raw edges which may damage cables, if flared mouth pipe is not used.
(d)
Pipes shall enter the manholes in the manner as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the SO
Rep. The pipes shall enter the manholes at such depths as to ensure a minimum clearance of
350mm from the roof and base and 150mm from the walls at the sides unless otherwise specified.
350mm
150mm
150mm
350mm
(e)
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Rawl plugs, channel brackets and anchor irons and earth rods shall be fixed in the manhole as
shown in the COPIF or in such other positions as determined by the SO Rep.
Bldg Spec
Page 24-8
24.2.3
Manholes shall be constructed at a depth to allow a 230mm thick grade 30 concrete shaft wall with
the following height (measured from the roof to the top of the cover) as shown :
Manhole Code
JX 2
MX 1 and MX 2
MX 3 and MX 4
Height (mm)
250 shown in the details in the COPIF
400 shown in the details in the COPIF
1200mm with single layer of steel fabric reinforcement shown
in the details in the COPIF
Where X = C denotes that heavy-duty manhole frame and cover shall be used.
Where X = F denotes that medium duty manhole frame and cover shall be used.
Concrete for filling the recess of the frame and cover shall be of grade 30 concrete and shall be
flushed with the top of the cover. For heavy duty without frame and cover, the concrete shall be
filled up to the ribs without covering the ribs.
24.2.4
(g)
Manhole walls shall be fair faced and not rendered. All projections shall be removed and cavities
filled with cement mortar. The walls shall not be coated with cement or cement sand wash.
(h)
The floor shall be given a 20mm rendering of cement mortar with a fall towards the sumphole from
all directions.
(i)
(j)
Manholes or other structures shall be located outside the Drainage Reserve and at a minimum
clear distance of 1m from the wall of an existing culvert, or 2.5m from the boundaries of the
Drainage Reserve.
(k)
Manholes should be located within the turfed area where feasible. The top level of the manholes
should match the final road level or the surrounding ground level as decided by the SO Rep.
(l)
The position of the manholes and pipelines should not conflict with the drains, sewer lines, sewer
manholes, electrical pipelines and draw pits.
(m)
Completed manholes shall be pumped clear of water and made ready for the SO Rep to inspect.
Manhole frame and cover shall be obtained from suppliers who have obtained certifications from
the PSB or other accredited product certification bodies that these items comply with SS 30 Grade
A1 or Grade B for heavy duty or medium duty respectively. The manhole cover shall not bear the
name of any licensees.
(b)
Medium duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within turf or footpath areas.
(c)
Heavy-duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within carriageway or car
park.
(d)
Voids in the frame and cover of heavy-duty type are to be filled with grade 30 concrete, well
tamped, levelled off, and cured before use.
(e)
The manhole frame and cover shall be placed on top of manhole shaft, with a minimum width of
150mm and a minimum depth of 150mm and grade 30 concrete haunching all round the frame.
The frame and cover shall be fixed in such a manner as to be level with the surrounding area.
(f)
Manhole covers near to building edges or road edges shall be aligned with these edges.
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-9
24.2.5
24.2.5.1
24.2.5.2
On completion of the pipe laying (including compaction of the backfill) between any two manholes
or sites thereof, a cylindrical brush and standard Mandrel (see details in the COPIF) or a Quad
No.5 cable of minimum 2m length shall be passed through each bore in both directions to test the
pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have entered. The Contractor shall provide the
test mandrel and brush. The mandrel shall follow the brush to minimize possible scouring or
breaking of the pipe. The testing shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep before the
section of pipes is accepted.
(b)
When the building of manhole(s) is/are deferred until after the completion of a section of pipe
included in the Works, the last 2m of each bore shall be tested. The SO Rep shall first make a
visual check with the aid of a torchlight or similar means of illumination. Any foreign matter shall be
removed from the pipe.
(c)
The Contractor shall test and install draw-wires or nylon ropes in all newly laid pipes including one
way pipe. (nylon/polyethylene rope of 4-core or multi-strand type with overall diameter of 6.0mm in
coil of 200m).
(d)
Manhole Testing
(a)
Cube Test
When instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall furnish the required numbers of 100mm
cubes of concrete for manhole construction to be prepared and tested for its compressive strength
in accordance with SS 78:1972. A minimum of one such test shall be conducted per ten manholes.
The minimum works cube strength of concrete shall be as shown hereunder :
(b)
Grade 20
Grade 30
Core Test
After the concrete has hardened, the SO Rep may at his discretion, instruct the Contractor to drill
sample(s) of concrete from manhole walls or floors or roofs and send such sample(s) for core test
in accordance with BS 1881 all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
24.2.5.3
Water Proofing
The Contractor shall take all necessary actions to ensure that after the completion of pipe laying and
manhole construction, there shall be no leakage such as seeping, dripping or flowing of water through
manhole walls, roof, floor and pipe entries.
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-10
24.2.5
24.2.5.4
Testing of Trench
The Contractor shall arrange all the necessary equipment and manpower to carry out tests on the
constructed trenches on any of the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
The Contractor shall rectify Works that are not carried out in accordance with the Specifications. All test
results shall be certified by the SO Rep.
24.2.5.5
For trenches that are located within the road, backfill shall be from the completed pipe level to the
subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry dust. The
backfilling shall be properly compacted.
(b)
For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the Contract
with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.
Section 25/.....
BLDG13/S24.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-1
SECTION 25
CHILDRENS PLAYGROUND,
FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT
25.1
GENERAL
Construct badminton court, sepak takraw court, volley ball court, basket ball court, fitness station, and
children's playground, complete with play equipment, play sculpture, sand filling; or concrete base with line
markers, table and concrete benches in numbers and to positions as shown in the Drawings. Details and
finishes shall be as shown and as specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
25.2
SETTING OUT
Set out outline of playground, courts, fitness station, or position of play equipment and obtain approval
from the SO Rep before proceeding further. Allow for shifting and making adjustment when directed by
the SO Rep.
25.3
LEVELS
Levels of playground and equipment shall be based on finished ground level adjourning and not
necessarily on finished platform level shown on the Drawings. Check on site in all cases to ensure that
rainwater collected on these playground can be discharged into nearby drains. Adjust levels where
necessary.
25.4
GROUND BASE
After removal of the top layer of the soil, the ground shall be well consolidated mechanically before laying
hardcore. Consolidate again, filling more hardcore to make up to level. Should ground be soft, obtain the
decision of the SO Rep on the necessity for piling work.
25.5
CONCRETE STRUCTURE
25.5.1
25.5.2
Bases of playgrounds shall be hardcore base of an average net thickness of 100mm, consolidated
hardcore, blended and topped with 50mm thick crusher run (6-40mm) and compacted to a net thickness
of 100mm and to a fall 1:50 or as shown in the Drawings.
Provide expansion joints to positions and details as shown.
25.5.3
BLDG13/S25.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-2
25.5.3
25.6
CONCRETE PIPES
Concrete pipes shall be of the dimensions as shown in the Drawings & conforming to BS 556.
25.7
PRECAST SLABS
Precast slabs around edges of playground shall be 300mm x 300mm x 100mm thick of Grade 30 concrete
as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and cast in
steel moulds.
Lay slabs on 1:3 cement mortar bed with 25mm gaps between slabs. Fill these gaps with 5 to 10mm
graded granite chippings.
25.8
SUB-SOIL PIPES
All sub-soil pipes shall be installed at areas as indicated in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be of perforated UPVC sub-soil pipes conforming to BS 4962 : 1989 or SS 272
UPVC pipes with perforations as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be wrapped with approved non-woven geotextile fabric and encased with washed
sand as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be laid in 1:100 gradient (minimum) and with uPVC pipe joint fittings. The maximum
length of sub-soil pipe shall be 25m. For perimeter open drains with depth of 400mm and above, the
diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 150mm. Where the depth of the perimeter open drain < 400mm,
the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 100mm. Under such case, consult with the SO Rep before
proceeding.
All sub-soil pipes shall be connected to sumps and drains at the outlet.
Upon completion of laying of all subsoil pipes, the Contractor shall prepare and submit 3 copies of as-built
drawings to the SO Rep.
Geotextile fabric shall be non-woven type and approved by SO Rep. The tensile strength of geotextile
shall be minimum 7.0kN/m and flow rate shall be 80 -150 litres/sq.m/sec. Submit test report and sample
for the approval of SO Rep before installation on the Site.
BLDG13/S25.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-3
25.9
25.9.1
Play Equipment
Fabricate all playground equipment as shown and complying with SS 457:2007. Install these equipment in
the positions and in accordance with the details as shown in the approved shop drawings.
The Contractor shall produce program for submission of shop drawings, and seek SO Rep approval on
installation time frame. The Contractor shall provide shop drawings, manufacturers component installation
drawings, mounting details with PE endorsement and third party certification by International Play
Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) or other equivalent as approved by SO Rep to Consultant
Qualified Person (QP) for approval. The third party certificate by IPEMA shall indicate the model of the
approved play equipment.
The Contractor shall follow strictly to the manufacturers instructions and procedures for the installation of
each play structure designed. The play equipment shall be supervised and inspected by the Contractor
and the Consultants QP. The Contractor produce inspection checklist, certificate of supervision and other
related records on play equipment upon request during the site audit.
Upon handing over the playground including play equipment, the Contractor shall engage the Certified
Playground Safety Inspector (CPSI) to inspect and certify the installed play equipment complied with
relevant standards. The Contractor shall submit a Performance Compliance Certificate in the format as
shown in Appendix A46, together with the approved drawings, to the SO Rep. The CPSI shall indicate the
name and the registration no. on the drawings with the Performance Compliance Certificate.
25.9.2
25.10
25.10.1
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all
necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but
such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising
under the Contract.
25.10.2
Concrete Base
The concrete base shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturers requirements with the
necessary drainage and falls before laying the cast-in-situ rubber flooring.
BLDG13/S25.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-4
25.10
25.10.3
(CONTD)
Polyurethane Binder
The binding agent shall be a solvent free single component Methylene Diphenyl Isocyanate
(hereinafter referred to as MDI for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it)
based, moisture curing binder. It shall be Toulene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to as
TDI for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) free. The binder shall be
Flexilon 1102; Stobielast S133/S134; Tennek TPB 4811 (2c); Incorez 902/023; Poly 8112C; or other approved, polyurethane binder.
(b)
65 5
> 4.2
> 650
1.58 0.03
EPDM pigment synthetic rubber granules (size 1 4mm) shall be coloured EPDM and must be UV
stable. Strand, shave, chipped or shredded rubber is not acceptable in the top layer.
A minimum of 10mm thick top layer EPDM rubber surface shall be a seamless surface. The
colours and design shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its installation. The
EPDM shall be BRG; MRI; or other approved.
(c)
Base Layer
The base layer shall be a precise combination of black granular rubber SBR (size 4 to 10 mm)
mixed with binder. The thickness of the SBR base rubber shall be minimum 65mm thick.
(d)
Thickness
The total thickness of the cast-in-situ EPDM rubber flooring shall not be less than 75 mm thick.
25.10.4
Method Of Installation
The system shall be laid-in-situ on top of the concrete base and trawled to provide an even, seamless.
porous, slip resistance and resilient rubber flooring.
(a)
Surface Preparation
All surfaces are to be laid to fall and shall be clean and dry before commencement of the Works.
The new concrete base shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of seven days prior to the
commencement of the rubber flooring.
(b)
BLDG13/S25.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-5
25.10
25.10.4
(CONTD)
(Cont'd)
(d)
EPDM
A minimum thickness of 10mm EPDM layer is laid on a SBR rubber base. A minimum ratio of
100:18 by weight between the EPDM rubber and binder shall be mixed. The screeding shall be
cast-in-situ screeding and hand trowel to maintain a seamless application.
(e)
(f)
Edges
The surface edges shall be flush with adjacent areas or tapered to provide a safe and barrier-free
transition.
25.10.5
Performance Requirements
Where cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber flooring for children's playground is included in the Works, test
certificates for the performance requirements specified hereunder shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval. The performance requirements and test methods for impact absorbing playground surfacing
shall comply with SS 495:2001.
(a)
(b)
Slip Resistance
The minimum slip resistance measured in any direction of test, under either wet or dry conditions
shall not be less 40.
(c)
Resistance To Indentation
The residual indentation (r), after 24 hour recovery, shall not be more than 5.0mm.
after removal of the load and after allowing for 24 hour recovery, none of the specimens tested
shall exhibit any cracking, splitting or perforation around the point at which the load was applied.
(d)
Ease Of Ignition
The greatest radius of effects of ignition shall not exceed 35mm and shall thereby be classified as
having a LOW radius of effects of ignition.
(e)
Before handing over the playground including playground equipment, contractor is required to conduct
impact attenuation test at site to comply with SS 495:2001 and shall submit Performance Compliance
Certificate, together with test report attached in the format as shown in Appendix A46, to the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S25.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-6
25.10
25.10.6
(CONTD)
Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the
Deed of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring For Childrens Playground as produced in
Appendix A6. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the
Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide.
In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such
Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in
Appendix A6(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately
upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep
considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the
Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time
specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor
in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of
Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of
the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
25.11
25.12
EQUIPOTENTIAL NETTINGS
Equipotential nettings shall be provided for playground, hardcourt, fitness station with reinforced concrete
base in accordance to SS 555 : Part 3 Clause 8.3.3. The Contractor shall ensure electrical continuity of
the weldmesh/BRC used to form the equipotential surface and that all metallic poles and elements within
the surface are properly bonded to the weldmesh/BRC. The Contractor shall capture all the necesssary
photographs to prove that equipotential nettings are provided and equipment and metallic fixtures are
bonded. These photographs, with dates shown, shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval and
record. In addition, the Consultant's LEW or PE shall submit a certification form (HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET)
as produced in Appendix A47 to HDB to confirm equipotential nettings have been provided for the
playground/hardcourt / fitness station in accordance to SS 555 upon completion of the work.
Section 26/.....
BLDG13/S25.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-1
SECTION 26
TREE PLANTING AND TURFING
26.1
26.1.1
General
The work generally includes :
26.1.2
26.1.3
26.1.4
(a)
(b)
(c)
Protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of all plant materials and mulched beds.
All materials shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use on the Site. Materials shall be
obtained from approved sources/or suppliers.
(b)
(c)
All plant materials supplied shall be free of pest disease, discolouration and damage. Plants
shall be well branched with vigorous shoots. The root system of each plant shall contain a
good proportion of fibrous roots.
Inspection
(a)
(b)
Inspection and approval of plants on delivery shall be for quality, size and variety only and
shall not in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements during
the planting or at the time of inspection for final acceptance.
Submission
(a)
Samples
Submit samples of each of the following type of materials to be approved except where
specified otherwise :
Topsoil
Materials for planting mixtures
Materials for staking, guying and wrapping
Fertilizers
(b)
(c)
(d)
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-2
26.1.5
Horticultural Supervisor
The Contractor shall employ a competent, experienced (min 2 years) and qualified horticultural
supervisor (minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture or equivalent) to be stationed full time at
the Site and for the full duration of the Works required under this Section including all clauses and
subclauses under it, who shall receive and act upon instructions given by the SO Rep, and such
instructions given to the horticultural supervisor shall be deemed to have been given to the
Contractor.
26.1.6
Notice Of Works
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep at least 24 hours in advance of his intention to commence
any of the following operations : setting out; excavation; backfilling; plant delivery and planting.
26.1.7
Topsoil
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be
friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20%
approved organic matter.
26.1.8
Sub-Soil
The clay content of the sub-soil which is the strata found just below the top soil layer shall not be
greater than 45%.
26.1.9
Unwashed Sand
The unwashed sand shall be free of any debris, stones or other foreign material.
26.1.10
Soil Conditioner
Soil conditioner shall be peat, cocopeat, organic compost, or other approved fibrous organic matters
suitable for mixing with soil to make a friable growing medium for plants.
26.1.11
Lightweight Aggregate
Lightweight aggregate shall be clean clinker of low-density inert material of vermiculite or volcanic
scoria, expanded shale/clay or other porous material weighing not more than 500 kg per m3.
26.1.12
Water-Holding Medium
Water-holding medium is an absorbent copolymer water crystal that increase the water-holding
capacity of any soil mixture to at least 15 times its own weight.
26.1.13
Setting Out
(a)
The Contractor shall set out the Works in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the
SO Rep.
(b)
Any discrepancies between the Drawings and actual conditions on the Site shall be notified to
the SO Rep before commencement of the Works. If the Contractor fails to notify the SO Rep
on any such discrepancies, all costs and expenses of any adjustment, amendment, resetting
and realignment of the setting out shall be borne by the Contractor.
(c)
The location of trees, palms and shrubs shall be laid out and pegged by the Contractor on the
Site to be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works. The pegs
shall be painted to indicate sizes of holes/pits as follows:
Holes / Pit Sizes
0.5m x 0.5m x 0.5m
1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m
1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Colour Indication
Yellow
Not Painted
Red
Bldg Spec
Page 26-3
26.1.13
26.1.14
The shape, pattern and layout of flower beds shall be demarcated and drawn by the
Contractor on the Site. The Site shall be inspected by the SO Rep before further
commencement of the Works.
26.1.15
(a)
(b)
Minimum 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep for the planting of semi-mature (instant and 30-litre bag
and above) trees and fruit trees
(c)
Minimum 500mm deep for flower beds or trenches to areas as shown in the Drawings
(d)
Minimum 500mm x 500mm x 500mm deep for planting of shrubs and foliage plants
Waterlogged Hole
If there is underground water or the hole is waterlogged, necessary action or measure shall be
taken to rectify the waterlogged condition
(b)
Soil Mixture
All planting holes shall be backfilled with 3:1 topsoil, soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of
granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with
1kg per m3 of granular fertiliser NPK (15:15:6:4) well mixed to a level 250mm higher than the
adjacent ground level at time of filling.
(c)
(d)
(e)
26.1.16
Purchase Of Trees
The Contractor shall purchase the trees/palms/shrubs etc. from his own source.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-4
26.1.17
26.1.18
Plant Protection
(a)
All plant materials shall be carefully protected and if necessary wrapped in the nursery during
the lifting, awaiting transportation, unloading and during storage on the Site.
(b)
Any evidence of unsatisfactory protection to roots, stems, branches and leaves will result in
the plants being rejected. Unprotected plants shall not be transported during hot weather and
all plants shall be kept moist during transportation and storage. No plant shall be left on the
Site unplanted for more than two (2) days.
Plant Quality
(a)
All trees, palms, shrubs and other plants delivered to the Site shall be of the specified size,
free of pests and diseases and undamaged. Plants shall be well branched with bushy foliage.
(b)
All the general conditions of plants delivered to the Site shall be to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep and approved by him before planting out onto the Site in accordance with the Drawings or
as directed by the SO Rep.
(c)
The SO Rep shall reserve the right to reject undersized, unhealthy, unspecified, damaged,
injured, diseased, infested or any other plants not in accordance with the Contract and to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep during the entire period including the Maintenance Period and
Defects Liability Period of the Contract.
(d)
The Contractor shall immediately remove and replace all rejected plants at his own cost and
expense.
(e)
The plant size shall be measured on the day of planting at the Site in accordance with the
Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep in writing.
(f)
Plants not complying to the specified sizes shall be rejected and rectified by the Contractor.
All associated costs involved including plant material cost shall be charged and deducted from
any monies due to the Contractor, if he fails to rectify.
(g)
All trees, palms and shrubs shall possess the natural characteristics and growth habit typical
of its variety and species to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(h)
All trees, palms and shrubs where required under the Contract shall comply with the
descriptions and requirements specified hereunder:
"Instant Trees"
Instant trees are semi-matured trees especially prepared in advance for transplanting. Instant
trees shall have the specified minimum clear and upright straight tree trunk of the specified
height and girth with at least 3 branches and a well developed secondary branch system.
"Big Saplings"
Big saplings are medium-sized nursery grown trees having a single straight stem and
unbroken leader with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with an
evenly spread and balanced lateral branches and shall be of the specified girth measured at
0.5m from the ground
"Saplings"
Saplings are small sized nursery grown trees having single straight stem and unbroken leader
with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with evenly and balanced
lateral.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-5
26.1.18
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-6
26.1.18
Cont'd
"Groundcover"
Groundcover plants are low growing or prostrate shrubs or herbaceous plants whose habit are
to totally cover the soil. All groundcover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal
growth in all directions. Plants shall have fully developed roots and leaves. All plants shall be
grown in containers.
"Climbers"
Climbers are plants whose growth habit are to climb upwards by means of twining stems,
tendrils or clinging roots. Such plants shall have at least two leader shoots up to the specified
height or length and a vigorous root system. All plants are to be grown in containers.
26.1.19
26.1.20
Planting Techniques
(a)
Where trees/palms are planted in turf or shrub areas, plant trees and palms before the turfing
or shrub planting operations. Where shrubs are planted in turfed areas, plant the shrubs
before the turfing work.
(b)
The Contractor shall handle the plant in such a manner so that the ball of soil surrounding the
roots is not broken. The plant should be firmly held by the pot, plaster bags, containers, etc.
(c)
The Contractor shall ensure that trees, palms and shrubs are properly removed from their
pots, containers, plaster bags, etc and securely planted in the ground. The Contractor shall
straighten the plants whenever directed by the SO Rep.
(d)
All plants shall be planted with their collars levelled with the ground and covered with soil as
directed by the SO Rep.
(e)
All plants shall be planted to accommodate the spreading root system of the plant to the same
soil depth as in the nursery and shall be well watered before removing them from the
containers The plants shall be positioned upright and the soil firmed around the roots.
(f)
For large areas, the outer rows are to be set out first to ensure that the correct shape of the
bed is established. The remaining plants shall then be evenly distributed to cover the planting
area. The SO Rep shall be notified in advance if there are too many or too few plants to fill the
area required, and an assessment of the laying out adjustments will be directed accordingly.
(g)
The laying out of plants shall be completed and approved before planting into the soil bed can
commence.
(h)
Small shrubs, groundcovers and herbaceous plants shall be planted in pockets formed by a
trowel or hand spade. The pocket shall be deep enough and wide enough to accommodate
the root ball of the plant. The plants shall be placed upright in the planting pockets and make
firm into the ground by treading or hand pressure. All plants shall be watered thoroughly
immediately after planting.
Tree Support
(a)
To Tree Sapling
Tree saplings shall be supported immediately as directed after planting. The supporting stakes
shall be in 75mm diameter Bintangore pole or other approved material, minimum 3.0m long
and driven vertically 1.2m deep into the ground without injuring the rootballs and projecting
250mm above the crown of the sapling. Fasten tree saplings to the supporting stakes by
rubber or PVC hose and tie wires. Tying wire shall be No. 20 SWG galvanised wire, threaded
through 10mm diameter rubber or plastic hose and be wound around the tree trunk in a single
loop. The tree trunk shall be secured at a point just above its branch and also at a point just
500mm above ground level.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-7
26.1.20
26.1.21
Tree Guards
Provide tree guards to trees planted as specified by the SO Rep. The pattern of the tree guard shall
be decided by the SO Rep.
26.1.22
Tree Shade
Provide shading to mangosteen, rambutan or other sensitive fruit trees as directed by the SO Rep.
Nylon netting or other approved with 60% to 70% shading effect shall be used to cover the top of the
tree guard and upper 500mm of its four sides.
26.1.23
Branch Pruning
Prune branches or pollard the tree as directed by the SO Rep. Paint all cuts with fungicidal
sealant.
(b)
Rootballs
All trees/palms, shrubs to be transplanted shall have an earth rootball of a minimum diameter
ranging from 3.5 to 7.5 times the diameter of the tree trunk measured at 1.0m above ground
level or to the size to be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a trench
about 0.8m deep around the tree at an appropriate distance. All protruding roots shall be cut
and painted with a fungicidal sealant.
Excavated trees shall be transplanted within the same working day unless otherwise directed
by the SO Rep.
(c)
Tree Pits
To avoid delay, the new pit for the tree transplant shall be ready before the tree is brought to
the new location. The pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the rootball to
allow for incorporation of topsoil beneath the root. The minimum tree pit dimension shall be
1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep.
All planting holes for instant tree shall be backfilled with good quality approved topsoil to a
level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at the time of filling.
(d)
(e)
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Before unloading a tree into position, the depth and diameter of the rootball shall be measured
and adjustment made to the pit. The tree shall be set in the hole, orientated, depth adjusted
and planted with minimum delay. The tree shall be planted to its former depth. Backfilling shall
then be firmly consolidated to eliminate air pockets under and around the roots. Tripod shall
be provided to keep it firmly in position if required.
Bldg Spec
Page 26-8
26.1.24
Tree Pruning
Trees with dead, rotten or crossed branches shall be pruned to maintain a clear stem up to the
specified height using the methods described below. The pruning operation shall be carried out by an
experienced worker with appropriate tools and equipment under the supervision of the Horticultural
Supervisor :
26.1.25
(a)
Pruning shall be done with a cut just above and sloping away from an outward facing healthy
bud;
(b)
Removal of branches shall be done by cutting flush with the adjoining stem and in such a way
that no part of the stem is damaged or torn;
(c)
(d)
Any cut or wound over 25mm diameter shall be painted with an approved sealant such as
"Arbrex" or other approved after trimming; and
(e)
All pruning shall be cleared and removed from the Site after pruning.
26.1.25.1
Watering
(a)
Trees
20 litres of water per tree shall be watered as and when directed by the SO Rep.
(b)
Landscaped Site
10 litre of water per m2 of the landscaped site shall be watered as and when directed by the
SO Rep.
(c)
Method
Watering shall be carried out by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying head/gun
to wet the soil thoroughly.
26.1.25.2
Soil-Loosening
(a)
(b)
Shrub/Foliage/Landscaped Site
For shrub/foliage/landscaped site, the weeding area shall be spiked to a depth of 100mm
using a garden fork.
26.1.25.3
Weeding
(a)
Ornamental Trees
For ornamental trees, weed to 1.0m diameter around the sapling tree base using hand trowel
or weeding hoe.
Weed out an annular band of 50mm around mature or semi-mature tree base using hand
trowel or weeding hoe or approved weedicide.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-9
26.1.25
26.1.25.3
Weeding (Cont'd)
(b)
Fruit Trees
For fruit tree saplings, spread 100mm of mulch consisting of dry shredded leaves, grass
sword, wood chips, cocopeat or compost over the 1.0m diameter weeding circle. Spray
weedicide on the edge of the mulched area (50mm band) using a knapsack sprayer equipped
with a "drift-shield". The mulched area shall be weeded monthly.
For semi-mature and mature fruit trees, a weeding annular band of 200mm around the tree
base shall be maintained by weeding operation.
(c)
(d)
Landscaped Site
The Landscaped site shall be weeded using a hand trowel or weeding hoe.
(e)
Hedge
An annular band of 0.5m diameter around the base of the hedge shall be weeded using a
hand trowel or weeding hoe.
26.1.25.4
Fertilising
(a)
Ornamental Trees
Sapling
Fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted at a rate of 375g per ornamental tree
sapling within the weeding circle 120mm away from the stem.
Semi-Mature/Mature Trees
For semi-mature/mature ornamental trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be inserted at a
rate of 0.5kg per 250mm girth into holes 300mm deep and at 500mm apart along the dripline.
(b)
Fruit Tree
Saplings Less Than 1 Year Old
For fruit tree saplings less than 1 year old, fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be placed under
the mulch at a rate of 300g per tree, 120mm away from the stem.
Saplings/Semi-Mature Trees
For fruit tree saplings/semi mature fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be
broadcasted at a rate of 0.5kg per tree within the drip zone away from the stem.
Matured Trees (Flowering/Fruiting)
For mature (flowering/fruiting) fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted
(on level ground) or shall be pocketed (on slope) at 1.0 kg per tree as directed by the SO Rep
within the drip zone away from the stem.
(c)
Shrub/Foliage
For shrub/foliage, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2, with the
weeding circle 100mm away from the stem.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-10
26.1.25
26.1.25.4
Fertilising (Cont'd)
(d)
Landscaped Site/Hedge
For landscaped site/hedge, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2
as directed by the SO Rep.
(e)
Climber/Creeper
For climber/creeper, approved foliar fertilizer shall be sprayed as directed by the SO Rep.
26.1.25.5
Trimming
Trees shall be trimmed as directed by the SO Rep including performing and/or providing the following
:
26.1.25.6
(a)
(b)
Trim and remove all side branches from the main trunk measured 3.0m from the ground for
trees along footpaths, carparks and roadside.
(c)
Trim and remove all dead, broken, diseased and unwanted branches/shoots.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Paint all cut surfaces exceeding 25.4mm with 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant.
Pest Control
(a)
(b)
40% EC
1.25% EC
80% EC
50% EC
50% UP
80% UP
24% EC
50%
80% WP
39% EC
30% WP
Size of Bag
150 x 150mm
150 x 300mm
400 x 400mm
400 x 500mm
500 x 800mm
Material of Bag
Brown Paper
Brown Paper
Brown Paper
Brown Paper or Raffia
Brown Paper or Raffia
Remove and clear from the Site all rotten fruits on trees or on ground.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-11
26.1.25
26.1.25.6
Shrubs/Foliage Etc
For shrubs/foliage etc, immediately spray with approved pesticides after the infestation is
spotted. Continue such spraying until the infestation is controlled.
26.1.25.7
Maintenance
Planted trees shrubs and ground covers, etc shall be maintained by adjusting tree tie, making good
damaged tree guards, adjusting tripod support including providing and/or performing other
reasonable work. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for
maintaining all planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc provided under the Contract for a further
period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or
sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as
"Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this section including all clauses and subclauses under it)
by providing and/or performing the following :
Operation
26.1.25.8
26.1.25.9
Frequency
Soil Loosening
Monthly
Weeding
Monthly
Watering
Pest Control
Fertilising
Pruning
Adjusting tree ties
Daily
Monthly
Monthly
Monthly
Monthly
To be replaced/repaired as directed by
the SO Rep.
)
) and/or to be carried
) out as directed by
) the SO Rep.
)
Warning Sign
(a)
The Contractor shall display sufficient warning signboards at strategic locations on the Site
during the progress of tree pruning/spraying of pesticide works, as directed by the SO Rep.
(b)
The Contractor shall also seal off the Site with red and white plastic tapes as an additional
safety precaution during the execution of the Works.
(c)
The signboard shall measure 1000mm long x 600mm wide using aluminium plate with
reflective sheeting and reflective wordings "DANGER - TREE PRUNING IN PROGRESS"
OR "DANGER PESTICIDE SPRAYING IN PROGRESS". A sample of the signboard shall
be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before using them on the Site.
:
:
7am to 3pm
7am to 12 noon
No routine tree pruning/trimming shall be carried out outside the above hours except otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep.
26.1.25.10
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-12
26.2
TURFING
26.2.1
26.2.1.1
26.2.1.2
26.2.1.3
Site Gradient
The Site shall be graded to fall towards drains at a minimum ground gradient of 1 in 70 or as
instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractors cost and expense.
26.2.2
26.2.2.1
26.2.2.2
Percolation Test
Procedures for Percolation Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:
26.2.2.3
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
After 24 hours, observe whether or not all the water has drained off. The drainage
performance of the soil is acceptable if no water remain in the hole.
Jar Test
The procedures for Jar Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Pour in the soil sample until the water level rises to the 250 ml mark;
(e)
(f)
Place the measuring cylinder on a level bench and gently tap until the surface of the sand is
level;
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-13
26.2.2
26.2.2.3
(h)
After 3 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the silt visible above the sand-silt
interface;
(i)
After 24 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the clay visible above the siltclay interface;
(j)
26.2.3
Soil Mixture
26.2.3.1
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be
friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20%
approved organic matter.
26.2.3.2
The soil mixture shall be three (3) parts of topsoil with one (1) part of soil conditioner and 1kg per m3
of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg
per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4).
26.2.4
26.2.5
Turfing Materials
Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the
roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall
be Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus)
The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.
26.2.6
Planting Turf
Sods shall be laid within 24 hours upon delivery, in brick-like patterns. Sods shall be firmly sunken
into the ground with their edges in contact but without stretching or overlapping or gap. Water turf
immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.
26.2.7
Rolling
When the level of the completed turfing Works is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those
on steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with a garden roller of weight not more than 150 kg or
with other approved means. The turfing shall give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling
shall be carried out when the turf is established after the second grass cutting.
26.2.8
Temporary Fencing
Provide and fix temporary barricade to all turfed areas comprising 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m long Balau
timber posts spaced at 2.4m centres with one end driven 450mm into the ground. Corner and end
posts shall be strutted by 2 no. of 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m Balau timber post. Run 10mm diameter
nylon ropes diagonally and horizontally across the top and bottom of the barricade.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-14
26.2.9
Maintenance
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance
services, as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works during the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, and for a further period of six
months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of
the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance
Period" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) by providing and/or
performing the following :
26.2.10
26.3
(a)
Watering with a volume of 10 litres per m2 daily for the first two weeks after planting and when
necessary or as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense;
(b)
Weeding where and when necessary or as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost
and expense;
(c)
(d)
Fertilising before handing over, and on the 3rd and 6th month of the Maintenance Period;
(e)
Provide all safety precaution to eliminate danger to the workmen, the general public and the
property of others.
(b)
All mechanised driven or walk behind grass-cutting machines used shall be installed with
suitable protective guards of steel or other approved materials to eliminate splinters and flungoff objects from causing damage. Under no circumstances shall the protective guards be
removed from machines in operation.
(c)
Hand held open blade rotary machine shall not be allowed to be used without approved
guards.
(d)
The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these safety
requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall instruct the
grass-cutter to stop work.
(e)
Before grass-cutting commences, the public shall be kept at least 10 metres radically away
from the grass-cutter and a signboard shall be erected on the Site with the wordings
"DANGER KEEP OFF. GRASS CUTTING WORK IS IN PROGRESS".
(f)
The grass-cutting blade shall be securely fixed to the machine. When the machine is in
continuous use, regular checks shall be made. The blade shall be kept in good condition. A
worn-out blade shall be replaced immediately.
(g)
The bolts and nuts which are fastened to the cutter blade shall be checked before the
machines are operated to prevent the blade from flying off.
SUMP
Sump for sub-soil drainage shall be constructed to the size and in the position as shown in the
Drawings.
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-15
26.4
The Contractor shall use water tankers or water-tight tanks mounted on trucks to collect the nonpotable water from any of the above MEWR Sewage Treatment Works. The tank is preferred to have
a minimum capacity of 9000 litres. The Contractor must also ensure that unused non-potable water is
returned to the Sewage Treatment Works for proper disposal and not discharged into open drains in
water catchment areas.
The Contractor shall submit detailed particulars of their water tankers or tank mounted trucks to the
SO Rep who will then obtain an authorization letter from MEWR for the registered tanker to collect
non-potable water.
The Contractor shall submit detailed justifications to the SO Rep for not using non-potable water for
watering turf, trees and shrubs, after direction has been given by the SO Rep to do so.
Section 27/.....
BLDG13/S26.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-1
SECTION 27
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
27.1
GENERAL
Construct multi-storey carpark to details as shown in the Drawings. In addition to complying with the
requirements in the Specifications, the Contractor shall also be required to comply with the requirement
specified in this section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
27.2
27.3
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it
has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the
approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or
obligations arising under the Contract.
(B)
General
Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door
frames and ironmongery to staircase of multi-storey carpark. The half-hour fire-rated timber
surface finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete
system complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB
labels and shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or 1B.
Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings
shall serve as a guide.
(C)
(D)
Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the
following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332
: 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall
serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
BLDG13/S27.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-2
27.3
Ironmongery (Cont'd)
Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304 .
Schedule Of Ironmongery
(E)
(a)
4 no.
(b)
1 no.
Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver
colour.
(c)
1 no
Stainless steel pull handles. The diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the
length shall be approximately 225mm.
(d)
1 no.
Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be
1.2mm minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the
push plate
(e)
1 no.
Certificates
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep certificates as documentary proof that the complete
system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery
installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
(F)
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
(G)
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9
"Timber Doors".
27.4
27.4.1
Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
27.4.2
General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to lift machine room are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor
shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the lift machine
room complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying
with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval
and certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or 1B.
27.4.3
BLDG13/S27.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-3
27.4
27.4.4
Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall
be at least half-hour fire-rated and approved by FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall
serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
Provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule:
27.4.5
(i)
4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii)
1 no. "Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or BLIY N-27-FIR US 32D or other approved half cylinder
mortice lockset with stainless steel lever handles on rose or on back plate on both sides
(shall comply with CP 2:2000, the door shall be opened from the outside only by the use of
key and shall not require a key to open it from within the machine room).
(iii)
(iv)
1 no. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).
(v)
1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).
(vi)
1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line
door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver colour.
(vii)
27.4.6
Certificates
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
27.4.7
Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
27.4.8
Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".
27.5
BLDG13/S27.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
=
=
=
=
42 mm
115 mm
3 mm
6 mm
Bldg Spec
Page 27-4
27.5
27.6
27.7
27.8
SIGNBOARDS
All signboards and letterings shall be as shown in the Drawings. These shall be installed at positions as
decided by the SO Rep or as stated in the Drawings.
27.9
TRAFFIC SIGNS
Traffic signs shall be of retro-reflective material and of brightness as approved by the Land Transport
Authority. Letterings, plates and details shall be as shown in the Drawings. Galvanised steel pipes
specified in the Drawings shall comply with SS17. Samples of the traffic signs shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
27.10
PAINTING
(A)
BLDG13/S27.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-5
27.10
PAINTING (CONT'D)
(B)
Internal Painting
Paint all internal plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with one priming coat and two
subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The priming coat may be with thinning of up
to 20% of clean water by volume. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted.
(C)
Painting Of Sample
Prior to the commencement of the painting work, submit the colour chart of approved paint to the
SO Rep for selection of colour scheme. The Contractor shall then paint one or more panels of the
multi-storey carpark parapets for the approval of the SO Rep.
27.11
27.12
27.13
Propping to the slabs and beams at the lower floor deck shall not be removed until the slabs and
beams of the upper floor deck have been cast for 3 days.
(b)
The Contractor shall check and ensure that propping to the slabs and beams is adequate at all
times.
BLDG13/S27.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-6
27.14
27.14.1
Scope of Work
The Contractor shall provide and lay liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (Water-Based) Waterproof
Membrane, as listed in HDBs Materials List or other approved Flexible Water-Based Waterproof
Membrane to all the sides (internal surfaces) of the planter boxes.
All the surfaces shall be examined for defects, and the waterproofing treatment shall be applied on sound
concrete.
27.14.2
Preparation Work
Concrete surfaces shall be clean from all scale, laitance, loose material, mould oil, curing agents, cracks
and honeycombs. The structure shall be ponded prior to the waterproofing treatment to allow identification
and rectification of cracks and honeycombs by grouting.
27.14.3
Application
The liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (Water-Based) Waterproof Membrane shall be applied in
three coats to obtain a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5mm. The subsequent coats shall only be applied
after the first coat has dried.
27.14.4
27.14.5
Protection
Immediately after the approval by the SO Rep of water test, the Contractor shall apply a skim coat to all
the sides (internal surfaces) of the planter boxes to prevent damages to the waterproofing membrane.
Section 28/.....
BLDG13/S27.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-1
SECTION 28
ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION/UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND
28.1
ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION
28.1.1
General
Electrical Substation shall be deemed to include Electrical Substation, Ring Main Substation, Transformer
Room, Generator Room, Tank Storage Room and all other utility rooms for electricity transmission,
whether located separately or within a building block.
Where metal roofing is used, it shall be as specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing And Insulation Sheet"
including all subclauses under it.
28.1.2
Construction Time
Commence work immediately when site is handed over and shall complete the electrical substation
including fencing as shown, not later than the Expiry of the Time for Completion as specified in the
Contract. Where no such date is stipulated, the substation including fencing shall be completed not later
than six calendar months before the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest phase of the contract
or the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest dwelling block if the Works is to be completed as a
single phase.
28.1.3
28.1.4
Cable Ducts
Provide and lay 155mm UPVC pipes in numbers, positions and lengths as shown and encased all round
with mass concrete to serve as cable ducts.
All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C type complying with the requirement of SS 141 or other
approved by PowerGrid. Both ends of the UPVC pipes shall be sealed with removable water-tight plugs.
The cable ducts shall be extended at least 600mm beyond the apron and adjacent drain.
Prior to the laying of ducts, check the ground conditions and should the ground be soft, inform the SO Rep
who shall decide whether piling is required or not.
28.1.5
28.1.6
BLDG13/S28.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-2
28.1.7
28.1.8
28.1.9
28.1.10
28.1.11
28.1.12
28.1.13
28.1.14
BLDG13/S28.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-3
28.1.15
Electrical Installation
(A)
General
Provide and install electrical installation and fittings shown including earthing systems for the
electrical installation. Installation shall be carried out by a licensed electrician to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep and complying with the requirements of PowerGrid. All wiring shall
run in galvanised steel exposed conduits (not smaller than 20mm diameter) with spacer bar
saddles and bases to BS EN ISO 1461.
(B)
(C)
Retesting
Any omissions or Defect or faults detected during the day of testing shall be rectified and the
Contractor shall arrange for re-testing within three working days from the date of the last test.
28.1.16
Ironmongery
All ironmongery shall be as shown in the Drawings.
28.1.17
28.1.18
28.1.19
28.1.20
28.1.21
BLDG13/S28.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-4
28.1.22
(B)
28.2
28.2.1
General
Construct Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound to details as shown in the Drawings unless specified
otherwise. Timber benches, shelves, notice board, lockers, etc., shall be provided and fixed to locations
all as shown in the Drawings.
28.2.2
Floor Slab
The floor slab shall be cast in Grade 40 structural concrete. Compliance criteria and specifications shall
follow Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The slab shall be finished with a minimum 3 passes of a power trowel strictly without sprinkling of cement
dust, cement grout or water. Provide a sufficient team of workmen to finish the work before final set. The
slab shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved
methods. The surface shall be hardened with approved liquid hardeners strictly in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instruction. The liquid hardeners shall have zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its
active ingredients.
The scupper drain shall be finished with rendering of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The
rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets. The rendered surface shall then be finished with two
coats of liquid hardeners (with zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its active ingredients).
28.2.3
BLDG13/S28.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-5
28.2.4
Motorised Roller Shutter For Door Height Four (4) Metres And Above
Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts,
bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions to
utilities centre/dustbin compound of door opening height 4 metres and above unless otherwise
specified :
(a)
Material
The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm
thick natural anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or
0.5mm thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a
continuous curtain.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and
wrap it around the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain
to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel
chain or other approved for manual operation.
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the
top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to
prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
(b)
Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and
galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone
modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the
SO Rep.
(c)
(d)
Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings
showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep
for approval prior to the ordering of the system.
(ii)
Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres
Provide and install zincalume steel or galvanised steel or natural anodised aluminium roller shutter
complete with channel guides, angle bolts, bottom rails and other necessary components in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door
opening height below four (4) metres unless otherwise specified.
(a)
Material
The roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural
anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or 0.5mm thick
minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and
wrap it around the drum assembly. The drum assembly shall consist of suitably graded oiltempered torsion springs secured to drumwheels moulded from engineering plastics.
Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain to house the entire drum assembly
and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel chain or other approved for manual
operation.
BLDG13/S28.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-6
28.2.4
Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres
(Contd)
(a)
Material (Contd)
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the
top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge treatment to
prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
Locking device with master key shall be provided at waist level.
(b)
Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and
galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone
modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the
SO Rep.
(c)
Operation System
The shutter shall be hand chain operated. The raising and closing of the shutter shall be
250mm minimum per metre chain-pull.
(d)
Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings
showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep
for approval prior to the ordering of the system.
28.2.5
28.2.6
28.2.7
Key Boards
Provide and install one 1200mm x 1200mm keyboard consisting of Kapor frame, plywood backing,
plywood door panel all as shown in the Drawings for every block of Utilities Centre. Provide angle hooks
for keys fixed 75mm centres both ways and 2 no. brass hangers to each board. Paint woodwork
according to Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it).
Section 29/.....
BLDG13/S28.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 29-1
SECTION 29
EATING HOUSE
29.1
FLOOR FINISHES
Except for the "Store" and "room" the whole floor of Eating houses shall be finished in ceramic tiles as
specified in sub-clause 19.4.5 "Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles".
Tiles shall continue up doorways to abut external floor rendering. The colour and pattern of the tiles shall
be approved by the SO Rep. The quality and laying of the tiles shall be as specified in Clause 19.4
"Ceramic Floor Tiles (Common Areas and Non-Residential Units) " and Clause 19.7 Laying Of Ceramic
Floor Tiles including all subclauses under them.
29.2
29.3
29.4
PAINTING
Painting shall be as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and
subclauses under it.
29.5
29.5.1
Timber Doors
All timber doors where shown in the Drawings shall be constructed as specified in Section 15 "Carpentry
And Joinery" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Sizes are nominal.
Plywood panels shall be of grade 2 moisture resistant quality.
29.5.2
PVC Doors
Extruded PVC doors to common water closets and bathroom shall be as specified in Clause 15.15 "Full
Panel Extruded PVC Swing Doors".
Except for bath/w.c. in room and main entrance door to toilets, each common w.c. door shall be fixed with
a pair of aluminium alloy eyes for hanging on to mild steel hooks and rides built into masonry. Provide
and fix plastic male and female toilet signs with thickness and sizes all as shown in the Drawings.
BLDG13/S29.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 29-2
29.6
PREPARATION TABLES
Construct preparation tables in Grade 25 and 100mm thick in-situ concrete slabs reinforced with one layer
of No. A6 welded steel fabric supported on 90mm thick solid concrete block wall finished with 200mm x
200mm x 8mm (nominal size) thick ceramic tiles with mosaic cove tiles for returned edges all as shown in
the Drawings.
29.7
COOKING SLABS
Where shown, cooking slabs shall be constructed and finished as specified in Clause 29.6 "Preparation
Tables".
29.8
FAN HOOKS
Cast fan hooks into positions as shown, bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceiling of eating
houses.
29.9
29.10
29.11
29.12
29.13
29.14
PLYWOOD SHELVES
Where shown, the 19mm thick plywood shelves to store shall be supported by 31mm x 31mm x 1.2mm
thick mild steel hollow sections.
BLDG13/S29.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 29-3
29.15
29.16
SUSPENDED CEILING
Provide and fix 1200mm x 600mm x 16mm thick non-combustible mineral fibre board to stalls with
aluminium T section and be supported by 14 SWG galvanised steel hanger wire all as shown in the
Drawings. Each panel shall be reinforced with 2 no. of spline glued to the back of the board.
Section 30/.....
BLDG13/S29.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 30-1
SECTION 30
MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)
30.1
Section 31/.....
BLDG13/S30.DOCX(1)
Sal(1512112)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-1
SECTION 31
FABRICATION AND PROVISION OF REFUSE BINS, LITTER BINS,
BULK CONTAINERS AND TROLLEYS
31.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of work in this Contract comprises:
(i)
(ii)
Fabrication and delivery of post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bins (including installation);
(iii)
Fabrication and delivery of six-bin trolleys, 0.7 cubic metre rectangular bulk refuse containers
model "E" and bulk containers frame model "EF"; and
The required no. of bins and frames shall be as specified in the table below:
Facility
0.7 cubic metre Bulk Container
Utility Centre
Refuse Room
Bulky Refuse Room where there are
ground floor units
Every 3 blocks
Every deck for MSCP
Every 80 parking lots for Surface Car Park
31.2
Items
Quantity Required
Per Facility
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
GOODS
(a)
In the specifications, the expression "the Goods" shall unless the context otherwise requires,
means the six-bin trolley and the 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E", bulk container
frame model "EF", the 250-litre refuse bins and the post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bins.
(b)
Every six-bin trolley, 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E" and bulk container frame
model "EF" accepted by the Superintending Officer's Representative shall be assigned a serial
number. The Contractor will be notified on the beginning serial number of the respective type of
goods within a reasonable period and the subsequent serial number shall then be assigned by the
Contractor on the same format and set at one unit increment. Each serial number shall be
engraved at the spot directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative and of a size
approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(c)
All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, if any
components are not available in metric units its equivalent in imperial units may be used subject to
the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative and such a substitution will not
constitute a variation to the Contract.
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-2
31.3
31.3.1
Dimensional Details
Each post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bin shall be provided complete with separate hood, ash-tray,
aluminium inner liner, bin body and mounting brackets.
(a)
Material
Linear medium density or high density polyethylene. No rework material shall be used.
The density of the material shall be within the range of 0.935 to 0.965 g/cm3. The melt index
of the material shall be within the range of 1.0 to 8.0 g/10 min. The bin shall be opaque and
have the feature of being impact - resistant and ultra-violet stabilised such that
it can withstand continuous use under long hours of strong direct sunlight without any
adverse change to its physical and mechanical properties and performance.
(ii)
Capacity
25 - 40 litres (without hood)
(iii) Height
450 - 550 mm (without hood)
(iv) Width
360 - 450 mm (bin body)
(v)
Depth
240 - 350 mm (bin body)
(vi) Thickness
2.8 mm (minimum) and meeting all other Specifications
(vii) Ash-Tray
120 mm diameter x 60 mm height x 0.8 mm thick reflective finished stainless steel of AISI
Grade 304 with 3 Nos of 5 mm diameter equally spaced holes at base and 175 mm x 95mm
stubbing plate (Optional). The ash-tray shall be securely fixed to the top of the hood and shall
not affect the aesthetics of the bin adversely.
The hood should be firmly fitted to the bin body but also allows for easy emptying of the contents
from the bin as and when necessary. The hood should only have one side opening with a minimum
breadth of 110mm and minimum length of 200mm, and shall be fastened to the bin body by a
400mm long stainless steel chain or other method of fastening which is to be approved by
the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(b)
Aluminium liner
(i)
(ii)
The liner should fit the inner part of the bin with room for easy fitting
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-3
31.3
31.3.1
Bracket
(i)
Material
(ii)
Strength :
The bracket should be able to support the bin body with a full load of up to 15
kg.
(iii) Paint
31.3.2
31.3.3
The bracket shall come with a coat of approved red lead primer to surfaces
of bracket, nuts and bolts etc and two coats of good quality aluminium paint.
Design
(a)
The internal form and surface of the bin shall be such that it will not trap the contents.
(b)
(c)
The internal and external surfaces shall be smooth and non porous, free from cracks, splits, dents,
distortion, blisters, voids, air bubbles and other surface blemishes or defects.
(d)
It shall be substantially uniform in colour. The Contractor shall make available 2 choices of colour,
the hues of which shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(e)
The litter bin shall be sufficiently stiff such that its shape and form is maintained when subject to
continuous use over a long period of time.
(f)
Six (6) numbers of 10 mm diameter holes are to be provided at the base of the post mounted litter
bin to drain off rainwater.
Installation
The Contractor shall install the post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bin in the manner specified in the
Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49) at locations designated/ instructed by the SO Rep.
The polyethylene litter bin shall be installed in the following manner: (a)
Wall Mounting
26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised brackets bent to shape and size as shown in the Drawings
(as shown in Appendix A49), are clamped to the bin with bolts and nuts. Wall plug or ramset bolt
shall be used for mounting the bin to wall.
(b)
Post Mounting
26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised brackets bent to shape and size as shown in the Drawings
(as shown in Appendix A49), are clamped to the bin with bolts and nuts. Hose clips shall be used
for mounting the bin to post.
(c)
The Contractor shall ensure that the mounting of the brackets for post mounted bin shall not
obstruct the lamp posts terminal box cover to facilitate maintenance when required.
(d)
The Contractor shall ensure the mounting would keep the bin upright and minimise any strain on
the bin body.
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for the cost to remove and cart away the existing
brackets and bins during the replacement with new bins. For new installation of bins, there shall be no
cost adjustment to the contract price.
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-4
31.4
LOGO
The Litterman logo shall be hot foiled stamped on the outer face of the litter bin body.
31.5
31.5.1
Materials
The refuse bins shall be manufactured from formulated and compounded linear low-density polyethylene
for use with normal household refuse except hot ashes. No rework material shall be used.
The density of the material shall be within the range of 0.926 to 0.940 g/cm3.
The melt index of the material shall be within the range of not less than 1.0 to 8.0 g/10 min.
The carbon black content shall not be less than 0.5% and shall provide optimum protection against ultraviolet light degradation. The finely divided carbon black shall have mean particle sizes of less than 25nm
and shall be well dispersed. The carbon black shall be melt-compounded. No dry blending of carbon black
is permitted.
31.5.2
Unit
Bin Sizes
Overall Height
(mm)
740
Overall Width
(mm)
700
Overall Length
(mm)
700
Tolerance
(mm)
10
(Litres)
250
(kg)
9.0
(mm)
4.0
(mm)
6.0
Minimum Capacity
Minimum Weight (Excluding Handles)
31.5.3
Design
(a)
Body
The refuse bin shall be designed such that its internal form and surface will not trap refuse when it
is being emptied as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49). The internal and external
surfaces of the refuse bin shall be smooth and reasonably free from surface blemishes and
contamination, air bubbles, blisters and voids, and shall be substantially uniform in colour. The
refuse bin shall have no sharp edges and shall be moderately stiff such that its shape and form is
maintained when subject to continuous use over a long period of time.
(b)
Base
The base of the refuse bin shall be designed to withstand regular dragging during refuse collection
time. It shall also be designed to withstand impact from falling refuse. When tested in accordance
with the method described in Clause 31.5.4, there shall be no visible weakening and no permanent
distortion or splitting to the base or main body of the refuse bin.
Eight holes of 10mm diameter shall be provided at the base to allow sullage water to drain out.
The holes shall be located such that they will not affect the physical properties or performance of
the bin in any way.
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-5
31.5
31.5.3
Design
(c)
(CONTD)
(Contd)
31.5.4
Tests
The following two tests shall be carried out on samples randomly selected from a batch delivered to the
Site. The Contractor shall have the test rig(s) and test loads available for the tests. He shall perform the
tests in the presence of the as and when directed by the SO Rep.
If a sample fails any of the tests, all the refuse bins in that batch delivered to the Site shall be rejected.
The rejected bins shall be removed from the Site immediately. The Contractor shall ensure that no
rejected bin is delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall also ensure that the batch number of the rejected
bins is not used again. Te required tests shall be as specified below:
(a)
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-6
31.5
31.5.4
Tests
(b)
(CONTD)
(Contd)
Test for Impact Strength of the Base
The base of the bin shall be placed on a flat concrete surface. A test load of 65 kg shall be raised
to a height of 2 m above the centre of the bin and allowed to fall freely on the base of the bin.
Repeat the test two more times. The test load shall consist of free flowing solid material contained
in a test bag of diameter 25cm with a hemispherical bottom as shown in the Drawings (as shown in
Appendix A49).
Pass Criteria
There shall be no visible weakening and no permanent distortion or splitting to the base or main
body of the refuse bin.
31.6
EMBOSSING ON BINS
The date of production (month and year) and batch number (in running order) shall be embossed on one
face of the refuse bin as shown in Appendix A49 Drawing No. CMU-RB-01. Each letter or number shall be
25 mm by 20 mm.
31.7
SIX-BIN TROLLEY
31.7.1
31.7.2
Welding
All weldings must be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. No spot welding
shall be used for completion of the Works. The welding edges shall be smoothly and securely finished. If
in the opinion of the SO Rep that certain portion of the weld should be reinforced, the Contractor shall
execute and complete the work as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses.
31.7.3
Wheel
(a)
The six-bin trolley shall be supported by two (2) numbers of 280mm diameter solid-tyre wheels at
the sides and one (1) number of 180mm diameter swivel castor wheel at the front as indicated in
the Drawing (as shown in Appendix A49). Each wheel shall have a minimum load carrying capacity
of 200kg.
(b)
The types and models of wheel to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending
Officer's Representative.
(c)
All screws, bolts, nuts and washers used to secure the wheels in position must be galvanised steel.
Should any of these be found rusty within the warranty period, the Contractor should replace it at
his own cost.
(d)
The types and models of wheel shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's
Representative. The tenderer shall attach all relevant technical details and catalogues of the types
of wheel to be used in his tender.
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-7
31.8
31.8.1
31.8.2
Welding
All weldings must be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the Superintending Officer's
Representative. No spot welding shall be used for completion of the Works. The welding edges shall be
smoothly & securely finished. If in the opinion of the Superintending Officer's Representative that certain
portion of the weld should be reinforced, the Contractor shall execute and complete the work as instructed
by the Superintending Officer's Representative at his own costs and expenses.
31.8.3
Wheel
(a)
The 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E" shall be fitted with four (4) Numbers of 180mm
diameter swivel castor wheels, two of which shall have foot lever brakes. Every castor wheel shall
be welded to a thick packing plate as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49) or be
fitted to the 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container using galvanised steel nuts, bolts and washers
approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative. The minimum load capacity of each
wheel shall not be less than 170 kg.
(b)
The bulk container frame model "EF" shall be fitted with five (5) Numbers of 100mm diameter
swivel castor wheels, three with a minimum load capacity of 180 kg and two of 70 kg. Every castor
wheel shall be bolted securely to the frame.
(c)
The types and models of wheel to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending
Officer's Representative.
(d)
All screws, bolts, nuts and washers used to secure the wheels in position must be of galvanised
steel. Should any of these be found rusty within the warranty period, the Contractor should replace
it at his own cost.
(e)
The types and models of wheel shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's
Representative. The offeror shall attach all relevant technical details and catalogues of the types of
wheel to be used in his offer.
31.9
PAINTING OF GOODS
31.9.1
General
(a)
All painting shall be done in accordance with the relevant Singapore Standard, British Standard
and Codes of Practice and shall be suitable for tropical climate. No painting shall be carried out
during damp or inclement weather.
(b)
The minimum drying or curing time in between coats and the method of application of primer and
paint shall be in accordance to the paint manufacturer's recommendation for the particular paint
being applied. In the case of two-part paint, the mixing ratio shall likewise be according to the
manufacturer's recommendation.
(c)
Each coat of paint shall be of a different colour from the preceding coat. The Contractor shall
submit a sample of the paint system for the Superintending Officer Representative's approval
within 10 days from the date stated in the Letter of Acceptance of Tender. The colour of the
finishing coat shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(d)
In the event that paint used is found or suspected to be adulterated or unsatisfactory, the
Contractor shall bear the costs of tests carried out to validate such findings.
(e)
The Contractor shall submit the paint manufacturer's technical specifications, product data sheet
and application instructions together with the tender otherwise the tender may be rejected.
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-8
31.9
PAINTING OF GOODS
31.9.2
Six-bin Trolley
(a)
(CONTD)
Surface Preparation
Before carrying out the painting, the six-bin trolley shall be pre-treated by degreasing and followed
by blast-cleaning to a quality agreed by the Superintending Officer's Representative. Application of
coating shall be carried out immediately after the said trolley has been thoroughly cleaned.
(b)
Paint System
Painting of the six-bin trolley shall consist of one coat of self-cured inorganic zinc-rich primer of at
least 50 microns and top coated with two coats of bituminous paint of film thickness 30 microns,
measured when the paint is completely dry.
31.9.3
Surface Preparation
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease
remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust and
other contamination and foreign matters.
All welded areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and
weld splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be ground.
All loose rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed by power tool cleaning.
The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned,
free from all dirt, rust scales and loose millscales before applying the following paint system.
(b)
Paint System
The bulk container frame model `EF' shall be painted with 1 full coat surface tolerant high build
epoxy primer of 120 microns dry film thickness within four hours of cleaning and in any case before
any visible rusting or contamination of the surface occurs, provided that all other conditions for
painting to proceed are met. One full coat polyamide-cured high build epoxy mastic of 100 microns
dry film thickness shall then be painted over the priming coat.
31.9.4
Surface Preparation
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease
remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust, zinc
salts, and other contaminants and foreign matters.
All welded areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and
weld splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be ground.
All damaged and defective steel surfaces shall be cleaned with power tool.
The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned
before applying the following paint system.
(b)
Paint System
The bulk refuse container Model "E" shall be painted with one touch up coat surface tolerant high
build epoxy primer of 100 microns dry film thickness to all damaged and defective steel areas and
one full coat phosphoric acid based wash coat on steel surfaces within four (4) hours of cleaning
and in any case before any visible rusting or contamination of the surface occurs, provided that all
other conditions for painting to proceed are met. One full coat polyamide-cured epoxy pigmented
with micaceous iron oxide of 100 microns dry film thickness and one full coat polyamide-cured high
build epoxy mastic coat of 100 microns dry film thickness shall then be painted over the priming
coat.
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-9
31.9
PAINTING OF GOODS
31.9.5
(CONTD)
(b)
(c)
(d)
31.10
SUBMISSION OF SAMPLES
The Contractor shall deliver the following samples for the quotation evaluation:(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Section 32/.....
BLDG13/S31.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-1
SECTION 32
RESERVED
SECTION 33
RESERVED
SECTION 34
RESERVED
SECTION 35
RESERVED
Section 36/.....
BLDG13/S3235.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-1
SECTION 36
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY,
WATER, GAS AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS
36.1
36.2
36.2.1
TIMBER MOCK-UPS
Within three months after the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect timber mock-up
for toilet, kitchen, air-con ledge and service yard on site for inspection and approval of the SO rep.
These timber mock ups shall have the provision of all sanitary pipes and fixtures position, marking of
water supply pipes layout, power points and switches locations, electrical water heater socket locations
and provision of UPVC entry pipe for water supply using gas water heater. Actual UPVC sanitary pipes,
wash basin and pedestal pan; and mock-up of ceiling duct, doors, vanity top (if any) and clothes drying
racks shall be installed with respect to the architectural and structural. Markings of beams, columns, wall
tiles, floor tiles, window layout shall also be shown.
One timber mock up is required for each flat type. All costs and expenses incurred for the erection of the
timber mock up and subsequent removal of these mock up shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
by the Contractor.
The timber mock-ups must be built accurately to facilitate resolution of the following common issues:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
36.3
36.4
BLDG13/S36.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-2
36.5
36.6
36.7
DIAMETER OF PIPES
Unless otherwise stated, the sizes of copper, stainless steel, ductile iron and UPVC pipes shall mean their
nominal sizes.
36.8
36.9
BLDG13/S36.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-3
36.10
36.11
36.12
RESERVED
36.13
PATCHING UP
Patch up hacked portions and drilled holes of structure with non-shrink cementitious grout of a similar or
higher grade than the surrounding concrete, after installation of the services by the contractor or other
contractors and with workmanship at least equal to that of the surrounding parts. Where pipes penetrate
floor or roof slab, brush away loose particles on concrete and pipe. Brush on one coat neat, thick cement
grout immediately before patching. Any leakages through such patching shall be made good by the
Contractor.
All patching up work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
36.14
36.14.1
Water Test
As soon as PUB water supply is available, carry out water test to the following items, in accordance with
the procedure described below and complete the water test, including making good all Defect, within 10
days from the date PUB water supply is available :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
BLDG13/S36.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-4
36.14
36.14.2
(CONTD)
36.14.3
36.14.4
BLDG13/S36.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-5
36.15
WATER FITTINGS
36.15.1
General Requirements
All water fittings shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service
installations shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SS:CP 48.
36.15.2
Marking Of Information
All water fittings shall be legibly marked with the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
36.15.3
Non-Metallic Material
All non-metallic material in contact with water shall comply with SS 375:2001 and valves with non-metallic
seat washers shall also comply with BS 3457:1973.
36.15.4
Metallic Material
All metallic material in contact with water shall comply with the test on "Extraction of Metals - App H" of
AS/NZS 4020:1999.
36.15.5
36.15.6
36.16
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
All structural concrete shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and
subclauses under it.
36.17
RESERVED
BLDG13/S36.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-6
36.18
36.19
SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES) AT
BUILDING ROOFTOP
The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M & E
service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of the
service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat arrangement
to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical and statutory
requirements.
The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval before
installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly manner, and the
access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop is not obstructed by
service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top shall be supervised and
coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction, the contractor is to provide
chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the Drawings. The platform shall be
installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such a way as not to pose danger to the
maintenance workmen.
36.20
Section 37/.....
BLDG13/S36.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-1
SECTION 37
SANITARY INSTALLATION
37.1
Sanitary Installation
(Including Waste/Rain Water
Down-Pipe System)
Types Of Pipe/Fitting
( SS : Singapore Standard )
Remarks
SS 213
SS 141
Class D
SS 272
*
Anti-Mosquitoes
Devices, Socket
Sleeves and Pipe
Skirtings to be used.
SS 213/SS 141
Adaptor to be used.
*
*
*
(White)
*
SS 213/SS141 Adaptor
to be used.
*
*
*
37.2
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-2
37.2
37.3
Branch Drain-Lines
Diameter of Branch Drain-Lines
(b)
UPVC
Ductile Iron
Maximum Gradient
Upstream at
Back Drop Tumbling Bay
110mm
110mm
1 in 20 to 1 in 60
160mm
150mm
1 in 70
1 in 30 to 1 in 90
Allowable Gradient
in other cases
Main Drain-Lines
Diameter of Main Drain-Lines
37.4
Allowable Gradient
in other cases
UPVC
Ductile Iron
Maximum Gradient
Upstream of
Back Drop/Tumbling Bay
160mm
150mm
1 in 70
1 in 30 to 1 in 90
250mm
250mm
1 in 90
1 in 49 to 1 in 150
37.5
JUNCTIONS IN DRAINS
All junctions between drains shall be of curved junctions or obtuse angled junctions made at sides of
pipes.
37.6
DRAIN SIZES
All drain branches from building to inspection chamber shall be 160mm diameter pipes or as shown in
Drawings. Main drain-lines shall be 160mm diameter UPVC pipes to SS 272:1983 unless specified
otherwise.
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-3
37.7
37.8
37.9
37.10
37.10.1
General Requirements
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all Sanitary Works required under the Contract
comprising either one or both of the following systems :
(a)
(b)
37.10.2
37.10.3
Supported On Piling
Where piles are required to support the Inspection Chambers and drain-lines as shown in the Drawings,
the Contractor shall ascertain the pile penetration lengths required and allow in the Contract Sum for all
costs and expenses incurred on the piling work. The contractor shall plan and incorporate the duration
required for the piling work into the Programme for the Works or revised Programme, if any, for the
submission to the SO Rep for approval, as required under the contract.
In ascertaining the pile penetration lengths, the Contractor may, if he wishes, refer to the Soil Investigation
Report available from the Employer. However, the Contractor shall note that the Soil Investigation Report
does not form part of the Contract or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction
thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall also take note that all the information in the Soil
Investigation Report is only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be encountered at the Site. The
Employer shall not be accountable for the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the information in the
Soil Investigation Report. The Contractor shall at his own cost, ascertain the actual soil conditions and
shall conduct his own site investigations and allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
whatsoever arising from and/or out of an inaccuracy, inadequacy or incompleteness of the information in
the Soil Investigation Report.
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-4
37.10.3
37.10.4
Requirements For Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles To Inspection Chambers And Drain Lines
Where precast reinforced concrete piles to inspection chambers and drainlines are included in the Works,
the piles provided shall be in accordance with Clause 2.2 "Precast Reinforced Concrete Piling Works".
37.10.5
Inspection Chamber
Construct inspection chambers to details and positions as shown in the Drawings. All inspection
chambers/manhole covers and frames shall comply with the general requirement of SS 30. Heavy duty
cast iron frames and covers (Grade A) shall be used in driveways and carparks and other areas as shown
in the Drawings.
Form open branch/main channels in inspection chambers with half-round vitrified clay purposed made or
cut channels with benching haunched up to the walls of inspection chambers in granolithic concrete 1:1:1
mix and trowel to smooth finish to fall towards the channel. The first inspection chamber of the drainage
system shall have a minimum depth of 1070mm from surface level to invert level unless otherwise
specified. Construct all walls and slabs of inspection chambers with grade 30 reinforced concrete as
shown in the Drawings and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
Plaster the internal walls with approximately 13mm thick 1:2 cement mortar and trowel to a smooth finish.
Connect the invert of the branch drain-line entering the inspection chamber above the horizontal diameter
of the main channels.
Grade C Light Duty covers shall be complete with stainless steel handles as shown in the Drawings and
approved by the SO Rep.
37.11
Requirements
910 kg per m3, 10%
9.5 kg per m2, 15%
10 MN per m2
6 MN per m2
0.15%
3 to 5%
0.161 W/mk
7 to 10 pH value
The Contractor shall submit a test report showing compliance with the requirements of the physical
properties specified to the SO Rep for evaluation.
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-5
37.12
37.12.1
Material
37.12.1.1
General
All unplasticized PVC pipes, fittings and accessories for soil, waste and vent application above ground
shall comply with the requirements of SS 213 and its latest amendments. However, UPVC soil and
waste stack in the void deck/play area shall be UPVC pipes to the requirements of SS 141 and as
shown in the Drawings.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth, and reasonably free
from grooving and other Defect that would impair their performance in service.
Provide pipe in standard lengths of 6m + 50mm - 0mm. The pipe shall be provided with ends within 2
degrees of being normal to the main axis of the pipe, free from chips, rough edges and with sharp
edges removed.
37.12.1.2
Wall Thickness
Mean Diameter De
Minimum
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
36.2
42.8
55.7
68.7
82.3
110.0
140.0
160.0
Note :
37.12.1.3
Maximum
36.5
43.1
56.0
69.1
82.7
110.4
140.4
160.5
Incl Ovality D
Minimum
36.1
42.7
55.5
68.5
82.1
109.6
139.5
159.5
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
2.1
2.3
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.2
3.7
4.0
36.6
43.2
56.2
69.3
83.0
110.8
140.4
161.1
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
19
21
23
25
29
34
42
45
2.4
2.6
2.7
3.1
3.5
3.6
4.2
4.5
Bldg Spec
Page 37-6
37.12.1
Material (Cont'd)
37.12.1.4
Dimension And Colour Of The Waste And Soil Stack To SS 141 Class D
Wall Thickness
Nominal
Size
Average Value
Individual Value
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
80
100
155
88.7
114.1
168.0
89.1
114.5
168.5
5.3
6.8
9.9
4.6
6.0
8.8
5.3
6.9
10.2
All pipes shall be indelibly marked and imprinted longitudinally at interval of not greater than 3m. The
markings shall show the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
37.12.1.6
37.12.2
Installation
37.12.2.1
General
All soil, waste and vent pipes used shall be unplasticized PVC pipes complying with SS 213 or SS 141
and all tests as required by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. All jointing and fixing
requirements shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Provide main discharge stack of 150mm diameter and secondary discharge stack of 100mm diameter
as shown in the Drawings. Install double 45 degree bends to SS 272 at the base of the discharge
stacks in accordance with the Drawings.
Install cross ventilating pipes to the required size between the main and the secondary discharge stack
at the specified locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings or
required by PUB, anti-syphonage pipes connecting the appliances to the discharge stack are not
necessary.
37.12.2.2
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-7
37.12.2
Installation (Cont'd)
37.12.2.3
Floor Traps
Unless as required otherwise, fit all floor traps with 150mm square body, circular hinged UPVC gratings
with frames having a 30mm deep collar protruding below to fit into the opening of the floor traps. The
gratings shall comply with SS 213 and complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by NEA.
The gratings for floor traps shall be fixed at 5mm below the graded floor level and as shown in the
Drawings.
37.12.2.4
Method Of Fixing
The method of fixing UPVC pipes shall be as follows :
(a)
All pipes shall be cut square with the edge chamfered 15 degrees using approved pipe cutting
tools prior to its installation. The pipe cutting tool shall be able to produce square cut and 15
degree chamfer in one continuous operation. The pipe cutting tools shall be portable and able to
cut pipes of all sizes.
(b)
Clean the pipe ends and sockets in pipes or fittings with cleaning fluid or methylated spirit and
allow them to dry.
(c)
Mark the pipes and fittings with a marker at a distance to the depth of the socket in the fittings or
to the depth of the socket formed in pipes.
(d)
Coat all pipe ends and the internal faces of sockets fully with solvent cement and insert the pipe
into the socket immediately. The socket edge of the fittings must touch the marking at the pipes.
Remove surplus solvent cement from the socket using a dry cloth.
(e)
After jointing, hold the joint firmly for a period of 30 seconds and do not disturb it for at least 5
minutes.
(f)
All joints shall be jointed with sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In situations
where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling or an adaptor shall be used.
(g)
(h)
The type of solvent used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
For the jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials, the bonding agent used shall be those recommended
by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the SO Rep.
Carry out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.
37.12.2.5
Shear Strength;
(b)
Film Properties;
(c)
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-8
37.12.2
Installation (Cont'd)
37.12.2.6
W.C. Joint
Place rubber seal over the spigot of the w.c. outlet with the open and facing towards the pan.
Lubricate the outer surface of the seal and insert pan spigot complete with seal into connector socket.
Snap plastic cover over rim of connector socket.
Use pan collar connectors in cases where P-traps are utilised. Apply silicone sealant to groove and
recess at pan collar and cover to prevent stagnation of water at groove and recess.
37.12.2.7
Fixing Of Bosses
Use bosses for jointing waste and vent pipe into the soil stack. Use bosses for jointing of waste pipe
from basin or kitchen sink to the hopper of floor waste or floor trap. Cut the appropriate sized hole in
the position required using special hole cutters such as mechanised drill which is attached to a circular
hole-saw by a mandrill.
Apply solvent weld cement and clean mating surfaces of the boss and pipe.
Insert the inner portion of the boss from inside the pipe with the outer portion located. Apply and tighten
the toggle clamp and leave it in position for fifteen minutes.
When fixing into the stack, ensure that the 92 degree marks on both parts are upper-most.
Ensure that the angles marked on the inner and outer portions of the boss coincide and that the boss is
assembled in the correct sequence to give an angle of fall to the stack pipe.
37.12.2.8
Access Doors
Access doors may be fitted to pipe or straight portion of branches. Mark positions of holes with
template and cut the holes with a fine tooth keyhole saw.
Clean the edges of the hole before inserting the access door. The inner portion of the access door shall
be set in the hole to locate the unit before it is tightened into position.
37.12.2.9
Weathering
Where pipes penetrate through either flat or sloping roofs, the normal type of approved weathering
material shall be used. Where necessary, fix an approved weathering apron in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and as shown in the Drawings.
37.12.2.10
37.12.2.11
37.12.2.12
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-9
37.12.2
Installation (Cont'd)
37.12.2.13
37.12.3
UPVC Pipes And Fittings For UPVC Sanitary System - Connection and Inspection System
The Contractor shall incorporate the easy check double locking system or other connection system to
the UPVC sanitary system to ensure that the UPVC pipes and fittings are fully overlapped to minimise
leakage at the joints. The Contractor shall arrange for the inspection of all the joints between the UPVC
pipes and the fittings after the installation of the completed system to prove that all the joints between
the UPVC pipes and the fittings are fully overlapped. The pipe joint system shall include:
(a)
The connection of the pipes and fittings in such a way that the soil and waste will flow smoothly
from the outlet to the fittings, through the horizontal branches and vertical stacks to the main line.
The system shall not allow any possibility of back flow, and stagnation of fluid at the joints due to
insufficient overlapping of UPVC pipes and fittings.
(b)
The overlapped portion at the joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings shall be exposed
and can be inspected visually after the installation of the system. The Contractor shall ensure
that full overlap between UPVC pipes and fittings is achieved. In the event that the UPVC pipes
and fittings are not overlapped sufficiently, the Contractor shall dismantle the affected portion of
the system and re-installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(c)
Big access openings shall be provided (at least 75 mm diameter) to the fittings (including tees,
cross tees and elbows) to facilitate the easy clearance of the chokage. The access opening
shall be capped with UPVC screw cap with proper rubber seal and PP insert to ensure water and
air tightness at all time.
The Contractor shall submit a full set of shop drawings, samples and mini-mock up, including sectional
view to demonstrate the above requirements to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of
the UPVC sanitary system on the Site.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their UPVC fitting manufacturer is licensed to use the patented
design. The contractor may propose alternative connection system in lieu of the patented design.
37.13
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-10
37.14
37.15
37.16
RESERVED
37.17
RESERVED
37.18
RESERVED
37.19
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-11
37.20
37.20.1
Low Capacity
WC Suite
Accommodation
Type
5 Room
Integral
Culture
Marble
Basin & Top
Vitreous
China Wash
Basin
Colour as
chosen by
the
Architect #
White or
other colour
basin &
pedestal as
chosen by
the Architect
#
Location
White or other
colour as
chosen by the
Architect#
Common
Bathroom/W
C
Attached
Bathroom/W
C
Common
Bathroom/W
C
Attached
Bathroom/W
C
Rectangular
Shaped
Vitreous
China Wash
Basin (+)
White or
other colour
basin as
chosen by
the Architect
#
37.20.2
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-12
37.20.2
(B)
37.20.3
(A)
Scope Of Work
Provide and install integral cultured marble basin with monolithic top to bathrooms as specified in
the subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and in accordance
with the dimensions as shown in the Drawings.
(B)
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-13
37.20.3
(C)
Physical Properties
The integral cultured marble basin and top shall comply with the following requirements :
Characteristics
1.
Workmanship and
Finish
2.
Impact Resistance
3.
Barcol Hardness
40 unit
4.
5.
Water Absorption
6.
(D)
)
)
)
)
)
)
) Shall be such that it will withstand all reagents.
)
)
)
)
)
)
8.
Washability
9.
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-14
37.20.4
Scope
Provide and install close-coupled low capacity WC suite to all the common and attached bathrooms
of all flat types as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash
Basin" and other locations as shown.
The complete system of the close-coupled low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern,
internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the
necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the
approval of HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances",
Singapore Standards SS 378 - Specification for Vitreous China WC pans for use with low capacity
WC flushing cisterns up to 4.5 L max, and SS 379 - Specification for Low Capacity Flushing Cistern
up to 4.5 L max.
Close-coupled low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume of 3.5 litres to
4.0 litres per single action flush with S-trap or P-trap outlet as shown in the Drawings. The rigid
plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16:1985 "WC Seats
(Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The coloured plastic seat and cover shall match the profile of
the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts
and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be
assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site.
The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no
visible WC trap profile.
A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be
affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.
(B)
Installation
Fix the close coupled low capacity WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers,
hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system.
Fix the WC onto the floor using 4 no. of the original screws provided together with the WC and seal
the gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not
be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not in
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in
accordance with the correct method.
37.20.5
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-15
37.20.5
37.20.6
Sealant
Silicone sealant shall be used to seal up all gaps between sanitary wares (including cultured marble
basin/top ) and tiled surface. The approved sealant shall be of one-component system, non-sag, class 25
in accordance with ASTM C920-01, and able to be applied without a primer. In addition it shall also meet
the following technical requirements:
S/N
Characteristics/
Properties
Test Method
ISO 846:1997 (Method B)
Chemical Resistance
Test:
a)
Household bleach
a)
b)
Urea
b)
Requirements
No growth
)
)
)Surface shall be
)unaffected after 16
)hours of spot
)covered test
)
)
)
4hrs
The Contractor shall submit the brand/range of silicone sealant and proposed method of application to
the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the Works. The Contractor shall also submit
samples of the sealant to the SO Rep for selection of colour to match the sanitary Works
37.20.7
Technical Requirements
Unless otherwise stated, all WC suite shall be dual flush low capacity type. The complete system of
the close-coupled dual-flush low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern, internal parts
and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the necessary
accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the approval of
HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances", Singapore
Standards SS 378 - Specification for Vitreous China WC cisterns, and SS 379 - Specification for
Low Capacity Flushing Pans for use with low capacity WC flushing pans up to 4.5L max. It shall be
certified to be rated in the PUBs Water Efficiency Labeling Scheme (WELS).
The dual-flush low capacity WC shall enable a full flushing actuation and a reduced flushing
actuation.
The full flush of the dual-flush low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume
of not exceeding 4.5 litres per single action flush. The full flushing performance shall comply fully
with the SS 378 and SS 379. The flushing fitting within the cistern shall be set to 4.2 litres. The
endurance test for the WC shall be of 100,000 flushing cycles.
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-16
37.20.7
Technical Requirements
(CONTD)
(Contd)
The reduced flushing actuation shall comply with the following performance requirements:
Performance
Test
Criteria
Volume of water
Discharged per
reduced flush
SS 378 Appendix I
Endurance of flushing
fitting
SS 378 Appendix J
Discharge of colored
water
Loading on operating
mechanism
SS 378 Appendix G
Paper discharge
The buttons for the actuation of the full and reduced flushing shall be clearly marked to be easily
distinguishable by users.
The rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16:1985 "WC
Seats (Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The colored plastic seat and cover shall match the profile
of the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal
parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall
be assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site.
The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no
visible WC trap profile.
A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be
affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.
(B)
Installation
Fix the close coupled WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers, hinging devices
and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system.
Fix the WC onto the floor using the original screws provided together with the WC and seal the gap
between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not be
fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not in
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in
accordance with the correct method.
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-17
37.20.8
Characteristic / Properties
Classification PL/Ni 8b Cr r
(8 micron min Full-bright Nickel and 0.3 micron min
Regular Chromium)
Spray Trajectories
Clause 13.1
Clause 14.1
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-18
37.21
37.22
37.23
37.24
SS 272:83 Requirements
Outside Diameter
Mean-minimum 200.0, maximum 200.6;
Ovality-minimum 196.3, maximum 204.3;
Wall Thickness
minimum 4.9, maximum 6.0.
b) Opacity
c) Hydrostatic Pressure
The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-19
37.25
37.26
37.27
PAINTING
Except for sanitary pipes and water supply pipes, all other ferrous metal surfaces of work installed by the
Contractor (eg. mild steel brackets and others) shall be painted with 1 coat of approved primer and 2
coats of gloss enamel paint. All paint used shall be of those quality controlled by PSB and approved by
the SO Rep.
Allow for numbering to be painted to all sanitary pipes and water supply pipes at void deck.
37.28
MODULAR BRICKS
Where clay bricks are shown in the Drawings, the bricks shall be of modular bricks. The common and
facing clay bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x 90mm and 290mm x 90mm x 90mm.
37.29
37.30
37.31
Section 38/.....
BLDG13/S37.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-1
SECTION 38
WATER INSTALLATION
38.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENT
All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB unless
otherwise specified. The SO Rep reserves the right to carry out test on materials on the Site as and when
required. The test shall be conducted at an SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
38.2
38.2.1
38.2.2
Maximum Horizontal
Support Spacing
Maximum Vertical
Support Spacing
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
1000
1000
1200
1200
1200
1200
1800
1800
15
20 to 28
35 to 42
54 and above
Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly. If
necessary, the compression joint shall be adequately supported with brackets on both sides to avoid
any dislocation.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-2
38.3
38.4
38.5
38.6
38.7
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-3
38.7
Storey No.
Served by
Common Riser
Size of Riser
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
No. of Storey
1st
1st
1st to 2nd
1st to 3rd
1st to 3rd
1st to 3rd
1st to 3rd
1st to 3rd
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
No. of Storey
2nd
3rd
4th
4th
4th
4th
4th
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
Size of Riser
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
No. of Storey
5th
5th
5th to 6th
5th to 7th
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
No. of Storey
6th
7th
8th
28mm
28mm
28mm
(b)
Storey No.
Served by
Common Riser
Size of Riser
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
No. of Storey
2nd
2nd
2nd to 3rd
2nd to 4th
2nd to 4th
2nd to 4th
2nd to 4th
2nd to 4th
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
No. of Storey
3rd
4rd
5th
5th
5th
5th
5th
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
28mm
Size of Riser
54mm
54mm
54mm
54mm
No. of Storey
6th
6th
6th to 7th
6th to 8th
22mm
22mm
22mm
22mm
No. of Storey
7th
8th
9th
28mm
28mm
28mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied through up to the junction of the last fitting within the
flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all
as shown in the Drawings.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-4
38.8
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-5
38.8
38.8.1
The base design shown in the tender drawings for the potable water distribution pipeworks,
including pipe and pump sizes, are based on PP-R pipes within residential units.
The flowrate to the residential units shall not be affected.
The capacities of the rooftop booster pumps shall not be changed.
Any claim arising from the need to upsize associated pipeworks shall not be entertained.
The entire plumbing system shall be integrated, installed and commissioned as a complete operational
package conforming to the requirements indicated in the tender drawings and specifications.
All water pipes including all pipe fittings (tees, bends, etc,) are to be tested for leakages after installation
are carried out. The test requirements for leak-tightness under hydrostatic pressure test shall be 24 bars
at ambient temperature. The pressure shall be applied gradually and maintained for a minimum period of
15 minutes at ambient temperature.
38.8.2
General Requirements
All polypropylene pipes shall comply with BS 4991 DIN 8077, BS 6920 Part 2 & 3 DIN 8078. The
polypropylene pipe shall be tested and approved by accredited laboratory and relevant authority.
Cold water pipes shall be of SDR 11 (PN10) with one permanent line marked across the whole
length of pipe and interval marking COLD WATER PIPE.
Hot water pipes, if any, shall be of SDR 6 (PN20) or SDR 7.4 (PN16) with one permanent red line
marked across the whole length of pipe and interval marking HOT & COLD WATER PIPE.
(b)
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-6
38.8.2
Polypropylene (PP-R) Pipes and Fittings for Cold Water Systems (Contd)
(c)
Manufacturer Requirements
Manufacturer should be certified ISO 9001 and have its own quality laboratory to conduct in-house
tests for monitoring of product quality.
These shall include:
Dimensional checks
Thermal properties
Tensile tests
Impact tests
Homogeneity
(d)
Installation Requirements
Machines used for PPR fabrication on site must be controlled by a Precision Timer. Contractor is to
engage PPR materials suppliers for training of their installers and only certified installers by the
manufacturer shall carry out the PPR installation on site.
The nominal size of the water pipes shall be of nominal outside diameter of 22mm with nominal
wall thickness of 1.2mm. However, nominal outside diameter of 28mm with nominal wall thickness
of 1.2mm shall be used for the topmost 2 storeys. The water pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
nominal outside diameter with 1.0mm nominal wall thickness at the tap fittings.
All fittings required for joints (tees, elbows, etc) on the pipes shall be of PP-R with BS 4991 DIN
8077, BS 6920 Part 2 & 3 DIN 8078. The polypropylene fittings shall be tested and approved by
accredited laboratory and relevant authority.
38.8.3
38.8.4
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-7
38.9
38.9.1
38.9.2
38.9.2.1
38.9.2.2
Solenoid Valve
The approved 40mm solenoid valve shall be electrically operated, two-way, normally closed and capable
of operating at zero differential pressure. The supply voltage shall be 230 V 10% at 50 Hz. The coil shall
be epoxy or plastic encapsulated, of at least class F insulation, and capable of 100% continuous duty.
The enclosure protection shall be at least IP65 (according to BS 5490) and suitable for conduit
connection. The enclosure shall incorporate earthing terminal and terminal block for easy maintenance.
The pipe threads shall comply with BS 21. The operating pressure range shall be 0 to 4 bars.
The valve body shall be of brass, bronze or other approved metal. Parts in contact with water shall be of
stainless steel, brass, bronze or other approved material. All brass components shall be dezincificationresistant complying with BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings
shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR"
The Contractor's proposed solenoid valve shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse
chute flushing systems. Submit technical information of the solenoid valve and other information, as
provided in APPENDIX A14, to the SO Rep for approval.
Where the pressure of water leading to the solenoid valves exceeds 4 bars, such as in some staggered
blocks, provide and install appropriate pressure reducing valves subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-8
38.9
(CONTD)
38.9.2
38.9.2.3
Control Board
The design of control board shall follow the Drawings approved by the SO Rep. The control board shall
contain the following :
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
The enclose protection of the box shall be at least IP 54 (according to BS 5490). The box shall be made
of 1.5mm thick mild steel sheet, electro-galvanised and coated with one layer of epoxy oven-baked paint.
The control board shall be wall mounted inside the refuse chamber next to the consumer unit. The chosen
location shall be approved by the SO Rep.
38.9.2.4
Electrical Wiring
The power supply to the system shall be from the consumer unit inside the refuse chamber.
Cables and electrical wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 and they shall be carried in their own
conduits. The cables connecting the solenoid valve to the control switch shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal
cross-sectional area.
The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit, (Class 4), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase
landing. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1m
centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter
and 100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level. The conduits to the solenoid valves shall run
along the piping and be properly supported.
All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. Earth the
conduits with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation shall be completed before the
cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in
PSB Code of Practice CP 5. Earth all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth
continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
38.9.3
38.9.4
Testing Of Installation
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing of the
performance and installation of the refuse chute flushing system. All Defect notified during inspection
shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent any collection of water inside the Refuse Handling Plant during
any testing which involves the flushing of refuse chute.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-9
38.9
38.9.5
(CONTD)
Complete the tests, including making good of all Defect within 14 days from the date of Substantial
Completion for each building block.
38.10
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-8
38.10
Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof
Size of Down Feed Pipe
No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size
No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size
1-Storey
2-Storey
3-Storey
4-Storey
5-Storey
6-Storey
7-Storey
8-Storey
9-Storey
42mm
1st
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
3rd
22mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
3rd to 4th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 5th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 7th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 8th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 5th
22mm
42mm
6th to 9th
22mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat units as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-9
38.10
Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof
10-Storey
11-Storey
12-Storey
13-Storey
14-Storey
15-Storey
16-Storey
17-Storey
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
7th to 10th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
7th to 13th
22mm
42mm
7th to 10th
22mm
42mm
7th to 10th
22mm
42mm
7th to 10th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
11th to 14th
22mm
42mm
11th to 15th
22mm
42mm
11th to 16th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-10
38.10
Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof
18-Storey
19-Storey
20-Storey
21-Storey
22-Storey
23-Storey
24-Storey
25-Storey
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
7th to 10th
22mm
42mm
7th to 10th
22mm
42mm
7th to 10th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
13th to 18th
22mm
42mm
13th to 19th
22mm
42mm
11th to 15th
22mm
42mm
11th to 15th
22mm
42mm
11th to 16th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
42mm
13th to 18th
22mm
42mm
13th to 18th
22mm
42mm
16th to 20th
22mm
42mm
16th to 21st
22mm
42mm
17th to 22nd
22mm
42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm
42mm
19th to 24th
22mm
42mm
19th to 25th
22mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-11
38.10
Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof
26-Storey
27-Storey
28-Storey
29-Storey
30-Storey
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
12th to 16th
22mm
42mm
12th to 16th
22mm
42mm
12th to 16th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
42mm
13th to 18th
22mm
42mm
17th to 21st
22mm
42mm
17th to 21st
22mm
42mm
17th to 22nd
22mm
42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm
42mm
19th to 24th
22mm
42mm
22nd to 26th
22mm
42mm
22nd to 27th
22mm
42mm
23rd to 28th
22mm
42mm
24th to 29th
22mm
42mm
25th to 30th
22mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-12
38.10
Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof
31-Storey
32-Storey
33-Storey
34-Storey
35-Storey
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
13th to 18th
22mm
42mm
13th to 18th
22mm
42mm
13th to 19th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
42mm
19th to 24th
22mm
42mm
19th to 25th
22mm
42mm
20th to 26th
22mm
42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm
42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm
42mm
25th to 31st
22mm
42mm
26th to 32th
22mm
42mm
27th to 33th
22mm
42mm
24th to 29th
22mm
42mm
24th to 29th
22mm
42mm
30th to 34th
22mm
42mm
30th to 35th
22mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-13
38.10
Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof
36-Storey
37-Storey
38-Storey
39-Storey
40-Storey
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 11th
22mm
42mm
7th to 12th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
42mm
12th to 17th
22mm
42mm
12th to 18th
22mm
42mm
13th to 19th
22mm
42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm
42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm
42mm
18th to 24th
22mm
42mm
19th to 25th
22mm
42mm
20th to 26th
22mm
42mm
24th to 29th
22mm
42mm
24th to 30th
22mm
42mm
25th to 31st
22mm
42mm
26th to 32th
22mm
42mm
27th to 33th
22mm
42mm
30th to 36th
22mm
42mm
31st to 37th
22mm
42mm
32th to 38th
22mm
42mm
33th to 39th
22mm
42mm
34th to 40th
22mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-14
38.11
RESERVED
38.12
38.13
38.14
38.14.1
Rising Mains
Install 100mm ductile iron pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally from bulk meters or low level
suction tanks at ground level to high level water tank whichever is applicable. The rising mains shall be
connected to a 100mm ball float valve with a 100mm gate valve at inlet. Floats shall be of copper and
approved type.
38.14.2
38.14.3
Interconnecting Pipe
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement linings installed between tanks as
shown in the Drawings with 100mm gate valve. The invert level of the connecting pipe shall be 400mm
above the internal base of the water tank unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. Pipe joints, fittings and
special tees shall be of the flanged type ductile iron. Flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
38.14.4
Overflow Pipes
100mm diameter ductile iron overflow pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining or one size bigger than the
diameter of the inlet rising main pipe as shown in the Drawings to each tank compartment shall be
connected to washout pipe.
Provide an additional 28mm diameter stainless steel overflow warning pipe for each roof storage tank and
discharging off roof edge at its nearest point preferably at the kitchen side. The pipe shall project 300mm
from eaves of roof as shown in the Drawings.
Cover open end of pipes with mosquito screen.
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-15
38.14.5
38.14.6
Stop Valves, Sluice/Gate Valves, Copper And Copper Alloy Gate Valves
Provide and install all necessary stop valves to SS 75:Pt 2, gate valves to BS 5163, Copper and Copper
Alloy Gate Valves to BS 5154 and other fittings required to comply with the requirements and regulations
of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB, regardless of whether such items have been specifically
mentioned or not.
The wedge of the gate valves (BS 5163) used shall be of rubber bonded gate. Coat the internal surface of
valve body with approved material. The spindles of the gate valves shall be of stainless steel or high
tensile bronze or other approved type.
38.14.7
Raised Pipes
Install raised pipes to raise and support all horizontal pipes above concrete roof as stated in
subclause 38.14.2 "Distribution Outlet Mains" to a level of not less than 330mm to clear precast secondary
roofing slabs.
38.15
38.16
38.17
38.18
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-16
38.19
38.20
38.21
RESERVED
38.22
RESERVED
38.23
(b)
(c)
(d)
All metallic material in contact with water to- AS/NZS 4020 Extraction of Metals - Appendix H";
(e)
The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation
Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For part that is of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be
Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr; and
(f)
Mechanical; leak-tightness; hydraulic; torsion resistance and backflow prevention characteristics toBS EN 817 ;
(b)
(c)
(d)
All metallic material in contact with water to- AS/NZS 4020 Extraction of Metals - Appendix H";
(e)
The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation
Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For part that is of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be
Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr; and
(f)
The Hot / Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and / or with
character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side.
Section 39/.....
BLDG13/S38.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPD)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-1
SECTION 39
GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
39.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The gas pipe installation Works shall refer to the gas pipes after the CityGas Ltd Service Valve (SV) and
which includes buried service pipes, horizontal service pipes, risers and internal gas pipes.
The gas pipe installation work shall be suitable for City Gas Ltd manufactured gas as specified in CP51
Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation and shall be carried out by a Consultants
Licensed Gas Service Worker (hereinafter referred to as the "LGSW" for the purposes of this Section
including all clauses and sub-clauses under it) and shall comply with City Gas Ltd requirements.
39.2
39.3
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
City Gas Ltd Procedures and Requirements for gas supply; and
(v)
Any other relevant rules, regulations and requirements by the relevant authority
from time to time.
39.4
SAMPLE UNITS
The Contractor shall put up sample unit for each typical installation for inspection and approval by both the
City Gas Ltd Engineer and the Consultant. The Consultant shall submit two sets of drawings of the
sample unit to City Gas Ltd before inspection.
The Contractor shall only proceed with the whole installation only after the sample unit has been inspected
and approved by the City Gas Ltd Engineer.
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-2
39.5
(ii)
The same endorsed as-built drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant for endorsement.
Thereafter the Contractor shall be informed by City Gas Ltd in writing on the approval of the application for
the final pressure test of the gas pipe installation through Form PH-GR2 as produced in Appendix A17.
A certificate of Final Pressure Test (Form PH-G2A as produced in Appendix A18) shall be prepared by the
Contractor and endorsed by City Gas Ltd once the final pressure test is passed.
A copy of this certificate shall be submitted to City Gas Ltd by the Contractor.
In the event that the installation has failed the final pressure test, the Contractor must resubmit a fresh
application for final pressure test.
After the gas pipe installation has been tested and passed, the Consultants LGSW shall affix all plugs,
caps and end-points of the installation with warning labels which read 'Gas Pipe Tested. Do Not Tamper'.
39.6
39.7
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-3
39.7
39.8
CHARGE-IN OF GAS
The Contractor and/or Consultant must be present during the charge-in of gas. The Contractor shall
arrange for a proof test and set up all necessary equipment, fittings and vent points for purging and
ensure that all necessary safety precautions are taken. After the installation has been confirmed to be
sound with the proof test, the installation is then purged and charged-in with manufactured gas.
After the charge-in of the gas supply, the Consultants LGSW must affix the labels 'Live Gas. Do Not
Tamper' to all plugs, caps and other end points of the gas pipe installation.
39.9
39.10
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-4
39.10
39.11
CATEGORIES OF PIPE
The pipes to be installed is categorised and located in the areas as detailed below :
(a)
(b)
Horizontal Service Pipe - Horizontal pipe runs normally at the ground floor ceiling level and
connecting to all vertical risers. The pipe shall be galvanised steel pipe
to SS 17 or BS 1387.
(c)
Riser
- Rising pipe from ground/first floor to the top shall be provided with a
branch for a meter connection at each floor (a riser supplies gas to
either one or two flats per floor depending on the piping layout). The
pipe shall be galvanised steel to SS 17 or BS 1387.
(d)
Internal Pipe
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-5
39.12
PIPE CHANNEL
Where service pipes have to cross the floor footway before entering the building, such pipes shall be
accommodated in channels in the footway. The channel shall be cleared of all debris and shall be dry
before the gas pipe is laid. The void space between the pipe and the channel shall be filled with cement
mortar. Under no circumstances shall the service pipe be located underneath a ground beam.
39.13
PIPE SUPPORTS/BRACKETS
The Contractor shall provide galvanised steel pipe brackets on horizontal run and at the ground floor
areas at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) or as directed by the SO Rep. The pipe brackets shall be
installed before and after every change of direction of the pipe. The pipe brackets shall also be provided
at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) for vertical riser pipes.
Every riser pipe shall be supported at its base by a duckfoot or similar flange device capable of supporting
the total weight of the riser in accordance to CP51. Where the riser passes through a floor, the floor shall
be haunched up around the riser or its pipe sleeve. The pipe sleeve shall be at least 50mm above the
floor level.
39.14
39.15
39.16
THREADED JOINTS
Galvanised iron pipes of 80mm and below and corresponding fittings shall have taper threads except for
connector backnuts to BS 21. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS 4375
shall be used on all threaded joints. Prior to jointing, the threads shall be cleaned of all grease and
particles. There shall be a 50% overlap when wrapping threads.
39.17
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-6
39.18
39.19
39.20
39.21
39.22
(a)
Two female end connections having BSP threads, tapered in accordance with BS 21 "Specification
For Pipe Threads For Tubes and Fittings Where Pressure-Tight Joints Are Made on the Threads
(Metric Dimensions)".
(b)
Ball and plug valves shall be of the full bore type complying with BS 1552.
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-7
39.23
39.24
39.25
Cap or plug off all outlets of the system leaving only one opening which shall be fitted with a Tpiece having a gas cock on one end and a manometer (U-gauge)/or a pressure gauge, in the
other;
(b)
Pump air in the system through the gas cock on the T-piece until a pressure of 300mm w.g. is
registered on the U-gauge and shut the cock;
(c)
If there is no pressure drop after 10 minutes, the installation may be deemed sound;
(d)
For the Polyethylene service or installation pipe after the service valve, the required test pressure
is 70 kPa using a 0-200 kPa pressure gauge, and a test duration of 30 minutes;
(e)
If there is no pressure drop after 30 minutes, repeat Point (b) to (c) to complete the testing;
(f)
If there is a fall in pressure at the end of the test, the leak shall be traced with soap solution,
rectified and re-tested.
For chokage test, drop a 15mm diameter ball bearing through each riser from the highest point of the riser
and ensure that the ball bearing is able to fall vertically all the way through without any obstructions from
inside the riser.
After the gas pipe installation had been tested and approved by City Gas Ltd, no further work shall be
allowed unless written approval is obtained from City Gas Ltd. The Contractor shall arrange with City Gas
Ltd for the charging in of gas before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer.
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-8
39.26
PURGING OF PIPES
(a)
Purging of gas must be organised by the Designated Representative and conducted in the
presence of the City Gas Ltd Project Coordinator.
(b)
A proof test shall be carried out immediately preceding to charging in of all pipes.
(c)
Steps must be taken to ensure that there is no naked flame or any other source of ignition in the
vicinity of the purging areas and the areas are well barricaded with relevant warning signs.
(d)
Vent point consisting of standpipes more than 2m long with flame traps and control valves shall be
erected at suitable locations and connected to the appropriate points of the pipework via rubber
hoses or other suitable hoses.
(e)
Every vent point shall be supervised by the Licensed Gas Service Worker and vent points are to be
located such that vent gas cannot drift into buildings.
(f)
A gas detector shall be used to check the mixture content at the end of the standpipe.
(g)
During the purging process, the valve cover shall be left opened.
(h)
Purging is only completed when 100% discharge of gas at the standpipe is achieved.
(i)
On successful completion of the purging process, the standpipe shall be disconnected from the
pipe and the pipe properly plugged off and all valve covers replaced.
(j)
Section 40/.....
BLDG13/S39.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-1
SECTION 40
EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES,
RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES
40.1
EATING ESTABLISHMENT
Eating establishment shall include restaurants, eating houses, fast food and family restaurants.
40.1.1
40.1.1.1
Sanitary Installation
All drain lines connecting floor traps to waste sumps and grease interceptor shall be cement mortar lined
ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598:1995 and approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
Diameter and Type of Drain Line
100mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe
From
Floor Trap
Waste Sump
Waste Sump
Grease Interceptor
To
Waste Sump
Waste Sump
Grease Interceptor
Inspection Chamber
All soil, waste and vent pipes serving food stalls and kitchen shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron
pipes or as shown in the Drawings. The grease interceptor shall be constructed in accordance with
MEWR drawings and requirements. The floor traps shall be of stoneware or vitrified clay type.
40.1.1.2
Water Installation
All internal service/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02
and fittings complying with BS 864:Part 2 or BS EN 1254 all in accordance with Section 38 "Water
Installation" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All concealed pipes shall be copper pipes
complying with BS EN 1057.
40.1.1.3
Sinks
Provide and install sinks to location as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel sink shall be of
approved type complying with SS:40:1971.
Provide and install to each bowl approved 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib tap to BS 5412 and
brass constant flow regulator rated not more than 8 litres per minute all or latest requirements by Water
Supply (Network) Department, PUB.
40.1.1.4
(a)
Single bowl stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 432mm x 350mm x 150mm deep.
(b)
Single bowl single drainer (left or right) stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1500mm x
500mm x 170mm deep.
(c)
Double bowl double drainer stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1800mm x 500mm x 170mm
deep.
BLDG13/S40.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-2
40.1.2
40.1.2.1
Sanitary Installation
The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all
clauses and subclauses under it.
(a)
Pedestal WC Pans
Use approved white vitreous china close-coupled washdown pedestal w.c. pan with vitreous china
flushing cistern conforming to the standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The plastic
seat and cover with buffers hinging devices shall comply with SS 16:1985, except that plastic
material shall not be used for hinging devices. The minimum thickness shall be 4.7mm for the seat
and 6mm for the cover respectively.
(b)
Squatting WC Pans
All squatting WC pans shall comply with SS378 and SS379 and other relevant standards set by
NEA or PUB. In addition, provide a self closing delayed action tap (the flow rate and timing shall
not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively) in the innermost wall of one of the
squatting water closet compartment.
(c)
Urinal Bowls
Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with stainless steel pipes, necessary fittings and
accessories.
High level flushing cisterns shall be vitreous china and shall comply with the standards and
regulations stipulated by the PUB.
Provide urinal trap to serve a maximum four bowl urinals and fix at least one flushing cistern for
four bowl urinals in series.
40.1.2.2
Water Installation
All water installation shall be as specified in Section 38 "Water Installation" including all clauses and
subclauses under it. All internal services/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying
with BS EN 10312:02 and fitting complying with BS 864:Part 2:1983. or BS EN 1254.
40.1.3
Public Toilets
40.1.3.1
Sanitary Installation
The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all
clauses and subclauses under it, and shall comply with the "Code of Practice on Sanitary Facilities and
Fittings for Public Toilets", standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The Contractor shall submit
samples for approval before commencement of work.
(a)
Pedestal WC Pans
Provide and install approved white vitreous china washdown pedestal wc pan with sensor operated
flush valve. The rigid (heavy duty) plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging devices shall
comply with SS 16:1985. Plastic material shall not be used for the hinging devices.
BLDG13/S40.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-3
40.1.3
40.1.3.1
Squatting WC Pans
The squatting wc pans shall be of vitreous china complying with SS 379 with sensor operated flush
valves. Provide squatting water closet, pans with raised foot rests.
When it is technically not feasible to use flush valves, use white vitreous china flushing cistern with
stainless steel pull chain. The flush pipe shall be made of stainless steel. A self closing delayed
action tap shall be provided in the inner most wall of at least one of the squatting wc pans
compartment.
(c)
Urinal Bowls
Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with sensor operated flush valve, stainless steel
pipes and fittings and accessories.
(d)
Washhand Basins
The single supported approved basin shall be 620mm in length and 445mm in width. The approved
vanity basin shall be 548mm in length and 396mm in width. Taps to all public washhand basins
shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self closing delay action water saving spring tap
complying with BS 5412 and standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and
the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.
(e)
Soap Dispenser
Provide and install stainless steel AISI Grade 304 soap dispenser to every two washhand basin
subject to a minimum of one soap dispenser. The sample shall be approved by the SO Rep before
the installation. The capacity of soap dispenser shall be one litre minimum.
(f)
Litter Bin
Supply one litter bin to each toilet. The bin shall be 230mm diameter (minimum) and 600mm high
approved AISI Grade 304 stainless steel bin.
(g)
(h)
40.1.3.2
Water Installation
(a)
BLDG13/S40.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-4
40.1.3
40.1.3.2
Flush valves for water closets shall incorporate approved check valves that comply with BS 5154
and approved vacuum breakers that comply with American Society of Sanitary Engineering
Standard No. 1001.
Every flush valve shall be controlled by an approved stopvalve to SS 75 unless it is provided with
an integral shut-off device.
All flush valves shall be so adjusted as to give a flush of not less than 2.5 litres and not more than
4.5 litres of water per stall of bowl urinal or not less than 8 litres and not more than 9 litres of water
for water closets.
Vacuum breaker of the flush valve shall be installed at least 1m above the floor level for squatting
wc pan and at least 300mm above the rim of other types of water closet.
The water supply pipes shall be sized to give a minimum dynamic pressure of 1.0 bar (or higher
depending on the make of flush valve and type of sanitary appliance) at the inlet end of the flush
valve.
Flush valves shall not be directly connected to the service pipes at a height exceeding 112m
reduced level (R.L.). The Licensed Plumber shall check and ensure there is sufficient head and
low rate for effective operation of the flush valves.
The minimum internal diameter of the flush pipe for water closet shall be 25mm.
The concealed (battery operated) sensor-operated flush valves shall be recessed into the wall if the
water service pipes are concealed.
40.1.3.3
BLDG13/S40.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-5
40.2
MARKET FACILITIES
Market facilities shall include supermarkets, mini-supermarkets, market produce lock-up shops etc. The
requirements for Staff Toilets and Public Toilets shall be the same as those specified in Clause 40.1
"Eating Establishment" including all subclauses under it.
40.3
40.4
MIRRORS
Provide and fix 600mm x 600mm (minimum) x 6mm thick approved coppered back mirror in front of each
wash hand basin or as shown. Mirrors shall be fixed on timber ground with chrome plated round head
screw with capping.
40.5
40.6
40.7
Section 41/.....
BLDG13/S40.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 41-1
SECTION 41
MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)
41.1
WATER SAVING TAPS FOR PUBLIC WASH HAND BASINS AND SHOWERS
41.1.1
41.1.2
41.2
FLUSH VALVES
Unless otherwise stated, provide and install sensor operated flush valves (battery operated) to all public
toilets (water closets and urinals only) as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the "Guidelines on
Flush Valves" issued by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, "Code of Practice on Sanitary,
Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilet" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit application and
obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to installation of the flush valves.
41.3
SOAP TRAYS
Soap trays shall be recessed white vitreous china 150mm x 150mm "Twyfords 3008" or other approved
type, one to each shower compartment. Position of soap trays shall be determined by SO Rep.
Section 42/.....
BLDG13/S41.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-1
SECTION 42
TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND
TELEMONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
42.1
SCOPE OF WORK
42.1.1
42.1.2
Telemonitoring System
The Works shall include the installation of telemonitoring system as specified in Clause 42.27
"Telemonitoring System For Transfer Pumping System" including all subclauses under it.
42.2
42.3
PUMPROOM - GENERAL
(a)
Water supply mains shall be brought into the building at the positions shown.
(b)
A suction (low level) tank shall receive water from the water supply main through an approved
100mm full bore pilot operated float valve. Suction pipes shall then be of individual feed to each
pump-set. The pumps shall deliver water through a vertical rising main direct to the storage (high
level) tank at the roof of the building.
(c)
(d)
Floatless level control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks shall be
arranged to start and stop the pumps on predetermined water levels in the tanks as specified.
(e)
Pumps (duty and standby) shall be operated by electric motors direct-coupled to them and started
by suitable starters in the control panel.
(f)
The whole assembly within the pump room shall be laid out to permit ready access to all
components: tanks, pipework, valves, pumps, motors, control panel, floatless level control
electrodes and wiring for purposes of maintenance and repair. The control panel and pump sets
shall be installed near to the entrance of pump room for this purpose.
Detailed proposal shall be submitted in the format as produced in Appendix A22 duly filled and
signed by the Contractor.
(b)
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-2
42.3
Three sets of fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Submit to the SO Rep, fully dimensioned final drawings of the above within two weeks after the installation
is commissioned by the SO Rep.
42.4
42.5
BUILDING-IN
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping
system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member
supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found
subsequently.
42.6
PUMPS
All pumps shall be of horizontal spindle, single-stage, end suction centrifugal pumps or vertical multi-stage
centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency of not less than 55%, driven by
electric motors through suitably guarded flexible couplings. The whole unit shall be mounted on a
common steel base and secured with galvanised steel plain washers, spring washers and double lock
nuts. The pumpset foundation shall be properly grouted on complete installation. Galvanised steel bolts
and nuts shall be used for mounting the pumpset.
The casing of the end suction centrifugal pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other approved
metal. The casing of the vertical multi-stage centrifugal pump shall be of stainless steel, bronze or other
approved metal. All internal surfaces of the pump (cast iron type) that come into contact with water shall
be coated (fusion bonded) with an approved layer of non-toxic epoxy complying with SS 375:2001.The
impeller shall be of bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel and able to transmit
the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be
suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear
of the rotating parts.
Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated.
The pump shall be of the approved type and able to deliver the required capacity of water based on the
data given in Appendix A22.
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-3
42.7
42.8
VALVES
An approved 100mm full bore pilot operated float valve shall be fitted directly to the incoming connecting
pipe at the suction tank. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in the incoming water supply pipe
of not less than 14 bar and shall comply with BS 1212. The dimensions and the flange thickness shall
comply with BS 4504. The pilot mechanism of the float operated valve shall be fully covered with acrylic
material to prevent mosquito breeding.
An approved 100mm globe valve shall be installed before the 100mm full bore float operated valve and at
the vertical run of the incoming pipe inside the pump room. Globe valve shall be of the type complying
with BS 1010. The valve seat shall be of rubber bonded. The internal surface of the valve body shall be
coated with approved material.
Gate valves and check valves shall be of the approved type used in high quality water works practice and
shall comply with BS 5163 and BS 5153 respectively.
The wedge of the gate valves used shall be of rubber bonded gate. The internal surface of valve body
shall be coated with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high
tensile brass or aluminium bronze or other approved.
Gate valves shall have the directional arrow and the words "open" and "shut" cast on and shall be installed
near the inlets and outlets of each suction low level tank and storage high level tank.
The suction pipe of each pump shall be fitted with an 80mm gate valve followed by an 80mm rubber
expansion joint. The delivery pipe shall be fitted with an 80mm rubber expansion joint, a 80mm spring
loaded check valve and an 80mm gate valve. The check valve and gate valve shall be separated by a
short pipe of 200mm in length. An 80mm to 100mm enlarger shall be provided between the 80mm pipe
and 100mm rising main. An approved 100mm non-slam type check valve shall be fitted along the rising
main in the pumproom followed by a 100mm gate valve. This check valve shall also be separated from
the gate valve by a short pipe of 300mm in length.
All 80mm and 100mm check valves shall be of approved non-slam silent spring loaded type (with stainless
steel spring).
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-4
42.9
42.10
BENDS
All bends used in the pipework shall be of 90 degree long bend flanged at both ends and shall be cement
mortar lined internally in accordance with BS EN 545.
42.11
RESERVED
42.12
42.13
POWER SUPPLY
Power supply available for electric motors shall be 400 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current.
42.14
MOTORS
High efficiency electric motors of approved type shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type
with minimum Class F insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous
maximum rating.
Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
42.15
MOTOR STARTERS
The starters shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before its installation. The starters shall
provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-buttons or be automatically activated by the
control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks.
The starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty pumpset shall be activated by normal level floatless
control relay unit and the standby pumpset shall be activated by alarm and emergency level floatless
control relay unit. The selection of duty or standby pumpsets shall be determined by a manual selector
switch. Automatic duty change over relay shall also be provided to alternate standby and duty pumpsets
automatically and shall be interconnected to a time setting device to cut off the operation of the pumpset
during night time.
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-5
42.15
(b)
42.16
TIME SWITCH
Connect digital time switch of approved type within the electric circuit, wired to control the pumping hours
within the preset time. The time switch shall be able to operate on a 24 hour basis with a minimum of 150
hours reserve to cater for temporary power failure.
42.17
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-6
42.17
42.18
42.18.1
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 1 (At Storage Tank Room)
Two sets of electrodes for the normal level setting shall be connected so as to activate the starters
independently and to activate the alarm and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a
predetermined overflow level. The operating points of both sets of floatless level control electrodes shall
be of the same setting.
42.18.2
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 2 (At Storage Tank Room)
Provide two sets of alarm and emergency electrodes to activate the alarm and standby pumpsets in case
the water level falls below a predetermined level.
42.18.3
42.19
CONTROL PANEL
Provide and install an approved control panel required to serve the pumproom as shown in the Drawings.
Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall
be near to the entrance of the pumproom.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing for
rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and
maintenance purposes.
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-7
42.19
(b)
1 No. Automatic/off/Manual Selector rotary switch for Auto and Manual operation as described in
Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".
(c)
(d)
2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phase MCB unit for each starter.
(e)
2 Sets Manual "START"/"STOP" button switch for the starter with pilot lamps indicating "run" and
"trip" as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".
(f)
1 No. Pump selector switch as described in Clause 42.17 "Floatless Level Control Relay Units".
(g)
(h)
(i)
1 No. Relay to cut off the warning device and pumpsets during night time.
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
3 No. Relays for testing of alarm bell and indicating panel lights.
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
(u)
1 No. Ammeter with appropriate scale and current transformer (C/T) if required.
(v)
(w)
1 No. Test push button for alarm bell and indicating panel lights.
The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-8
42.20
ELECTRICAL WIRING
Install the cables from the electrical mains isolator in the pumproom.
Internal cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3
Phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of
spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work an
efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All
conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently
earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in 150mm x
75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m
or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of
45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x 20mm
copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down.
The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number
of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB
Code of Practice CP 5.
Run conduits for the floatless level control relay unit wiring inside the building and along the staircase
landing. Provide an inspection joint for every 10 metres run of conduit. Where exposed to rain, the
inspection boxes, elbows and tees shall be sealed. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and
100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level.
All seals shall be tested not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation
testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the
conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between
motors and junction boxes.
All non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity
conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
42.21
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-9
42.22
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the pumpsets are installed according to standard
procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to approval by the
SO Rep. The pumpset nearest to the pump room door shall be legibly marked with permanent lettering
and numbering of "P1" and the other "P2", or as directed by the SO Rep.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the foundation by anti-vibration mounting between the base plate and
the foundation. Provide mechanical insulators to isolate the pumpset from the floor if the vibration is still
substantial. All pumpsets shall be properly aligned and levelled.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the suction and delivery pipes by rubber expansion joints as specified
in Clause 42.9 "High Pressure And Expansion Connection". The outlet of the suction pipe shall be set in
line with the inlet of the pump and the inlet of the delivery pipes in line with the outlet of the pump. The
delivery pipes shall be properly supported and secured by rigid steel supports.
Check the location of the switch board. Should this location be not at an optimum position, inform the SO
Rep immediately.
All bolts, nuts and washers used for mounting the pumpsets shall be of galvanised steel.
42.23
42.24
42.25
42.26
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-10
42.27
42.27.1
Scope Of Work
The installation of the telemonitoring system shall involve the production and installation of the
telemonitoring control panel in the transfer-pump room at the ground level and the laying of electrical
cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring system in the lift room A at the roof-top. Should there be a
second transfer-pump room in the apartment block, provide and install a separate telemonitoring control
panel in the second pump room and lay separate electrical cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring
system in the lift room B at the roof-top.
The Works shall also include the modifications to the control panel(s) of the transfer pumps and the
necessary connections between relevant control panels.
42.27.2
Circuit
The circuitry shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(A)
Inputs
The fault signals to be monitored shall be input from the control panel of the transfer pumps.
The following inputs are based on negative logic, directly controlling the corresponding source light
emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the purposes of this Clause including all subclauses under it).
Terminal
Nil
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Function
System Power on Battery
Control Supply Power Failure
Red Phase Power Failure
Yellow Phase Power Failure
Blue Phase Power Failure
Spare
Emergency and Alarm Start
Pump No. 1 Trip
Pump No. 2 Trip
Roof Tank Overflow
Repair Technician's Key Switch On
Spare
The following inputs have their related source LED controlled by the processor.
Terminal
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Function
Suction Tank Overflow
Suction Tank Low Level
Duty Pump Failure
Time Switch Control
Starter 1
Starter 2
Spare
Spare
Bldg Spec
Page 42-11
42.27.2
Circuit (Cont'd)
(B)
Outputs
The various fault conditions are to be grouped into 7 levels as follows :
Source
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-
Condition
System Power on Battery
Control Supply Power Failure
Red Phase Power Failure
Yellow Phase Power Failure
Blue Phase Power Failure
Spare
Emergency and Alarm Start
Pump No. 1 Trip
Pump No. 2 Trip
Roof Tank Overflow
Repair Technician's Key Switch On
Spare
Suction Tank Overflow
Suction Tank Low Level
Duty Pump Failure
Spare
Total Failure
Level
5
5
5
5
5
0
6
4
4
3
0
0
1
2
4
0
7
The circuit shall generate three signals indicating the fault level from 0 to 7 in the form of a 3-bit
binary code; fault level 7 has the highest priority and fault level 0 is the no-fault condition. Fault
level indication is based on the source (not memory) fault condition being on. If more than one
fault condition is present, the highest fault level shall be indicated. Whenever the fault level
changes, fault level 0 (no fault) shall be indicated for 30 secs before the new fault level is indicated.
These three signals shall drive three relays, R1, R2, and R3 in the lift motor room as well as three
LED in the control panel.
When the repair technician's key switch is on, the corresponding LED, which is directly controlled
by the processor, should be on. This signal shall drive a separate relay R4 in the lift motor room.
The circuit shall function such that when there is no fault all the relays R1, R2, R3 and R4 are
energized. Therefore, a by-pass or override switch shall be provided to keep the four relays
energized when the telemonitoring system is to be isolated for maintenance.
42.27.3
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-12
42.27.3
Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall
be near to the transfer pump control panel.
42.27.4
Battery
The back-up battery shall be of the sealed lead-acid types and shall provide back-up power supply for at
least 12 hours.
42.27.5
Port A is used as the input/output data bus. All 8 lines are connected to the
3 input buffers (74LS244) and the 3 output latches (74LS373).
Port B
Function
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-13
42.27.5
Function
0
1
2
3
In order to prevent corrupted memory data from being taken as correct, a suitable means shall be
employed to constantly verify the data in memory and to turn on the "MEMORY ERROR" LED once
the data is found to be invalid. A suitable means shall also be employed to ensure that the input
data read is valid, thus preventing any spuring data from being used.
On the logic board, two push buttons, "CLEAR" and "LAMP TEST", shall be provided. The "LAMP
TEST" pushbutton shall cause all processor-controlled LED to turn on when pressed. Normal
indication shall resume when the button is released. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is pressed
momentarily, all timers above 5-sec duration are caused to time-out. This is to assist in testing and
trouble-shooting. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is held down for 2 secs, all the "Memory" fault
conditions are cleared, including the "MEMORY ERROR" condition.
(b)
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-14
42.27.6
42.27.7
Electrical Wiring
The power supply to the system shall be from the blue phase of the transfer pump system after the
isolator.
Cables and electrical wiring carrying 230V shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal cross-sectional area and PVC
insulated to SS 358.
There shall be seven cables, with 23 strands of 0.2mm diameter and PVC insulated, connecting the
control panel to the four relays (to be provided by the Contractor) in Lift Room A at the roof-top. Should
there be two transfer-pump rooms, the Contractor shall run two sets of cables and conduits. The second
set of cables and conduits shall run to Lift Room B at the roof-top. The colour for these seven cables shall
be red, orange, pink, black, light blue, purple and green. The locations of the termination of the cables
and conduits shall be subjected to the location of the lift telemonitoring system and shall be approved by
the SO Rep.
All cables and electrical wiring shall be carried in their own conduits.
The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits which run from the control panel to the lift room
shall be 20mm in diameter. The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase landing.
Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for
horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high
shall be provided to encase the conduits at every floor level.
All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. The
conduits shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation
shall be completed before the cables are drawn. Where applicable, the number of cables to be drawn into
the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the PSB Code of Practice CP 5. All non-current carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a
cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
42.27.8
Design Work
All design Works necessary in producing the control panel shall be based on the requirements
aforementioned and is subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All designs, including the PCB artworks,
resulting thereof shall be the sole property of the Employer. Two sets of the relevant drawings shall be
submitted if requested by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
42.27.9
Testing Of Installation
The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep one month before the completion of the installation for the
testing of the performance and installation of the telemonitoring system.
The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A24 and submit two copies to
the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
All Defect notified shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-15
42.28
42.28.1
42.28.2
Items required to be inspected monthly shall include all items required for the fortnightly inspection
specified in the foregoing requirements in addition to the following :
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Motor insulation
Pump mechanical seal
Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable)
Contactors and relays
Storage tank electrode and control module
Bldg Spec
Page 42-16
42.28.3
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the transfer pumping system or to
carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the transfer pumping system due to or arising out of the
Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or
relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
42.29
Section 43/.....
BLDG13/S42.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-1
SECTION 43
BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
43.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Works shall include the provision, installation and testing of booster pumping system, based on the
data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, flow sensors, switch gears, electrical wiring, control
panels and all necessary accessories.
Details of the proposed booster pump installation shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All Works
shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP 48: Code of Practice for Water
Services, the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and other
relevant Statutory requirements
43.2
Detailed proposal complete with information as produced in Appendix A26 duly filled and signed by
the Contractor.
(b)
The Works shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
seek fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall
not be accepted by the SO Rep. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way affect vary or relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility or obligations should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate
with regard to strength, performance, efficiency or other aspect.
43.3
BUILDING-IN
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping
system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member
supports and attend to the work all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall be
responsible for any error or damages found subsequently.
43.4
BLDG13/S43.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-2
43.4
Pressure Head
(m)
Shut-off Head
(m)
20 or below
Above 20
3
5
9
9
The pumpsets shall be marked with permanent letterings "P1" & "P2" respectively.
43.5
42mm
42mm
15mm
Connect suction pipe of each pump from the 100mm interconnecting pipe of roof storage tanks and
connect the discharge pipe of each pump to the 100mm distribution main which serves the topmost 3
storeys only. No mechanical tee shall be used for connections between suction pipe and interconnecting
pipe and between discharge pipe and distribution main.
Provide end thrust supports at both ends and bends of 100mm distribution main according to the
Drawings. All bolts, nuts and washers used for the ductile iron pipes for installation shall be galvanised
steel whilst those for the stainless steel pipes and supports shall be stainless steel of similar grade.
43.6
VALVES
Provide suction pipe of each pump with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Fit the delivery pipe of each
pump with a 40mm full bore spring loaded check valve and 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Provide the bypass pipe with a 15mm stop cock. All valves used shall comply with PUB Water Supply Regulations.
BLDG13/S43.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-3
43.7
LABELLING STICKERS
Stick aluminium foil stickers of length 75mm and width 40mm bearing the words "DO NOT OPEN" onto
the 100mm gate valves at the draw-out pipes from storage tanks to the 100mm distribution main serving
the top-most 3 storeys.
The base colour of the aluminium foil stickers shall be in white and the wordings shall be in red. The
dimensions of the wordings shall be of height 10mm and width 6mm and the line thickness 1mm. Submit a
sample of the stickers to the SO Rep for approval.
43.8
POWER SUPPLY
Power supply to the booster pumps and control system at the roof storage (high level) tank room shall be
connected from the electrical mains isolator in the roof storage tank room.
43.9
MOTOR SOFT-STARTERS
Soft-starters for motors shall be of the type as approved by the SO Rep. The soft-starters shall provide
means for the soft-start and soft-stop of the motors automatically. The operating voltage of the soft-starter
shall be 230V. Both soft-start time and soft-stop time of the soft-starter shall be set at 3 seconds.
Each soft-starter shall be designed to operate intermittently during the 24 hours of operation per day.
The soft-starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty and standby booster pumps shall be actuated
by flow sensors and floatless level switch. Selection of duty or standby booster pumps shall be determined
by a selector switch. Provide automatic duty change over relay to alternate standby and duty booster
pumps and it shall be interconnected to a flow sensor to start and stop the operation of the booster pumps
according to actual water demand.
43.10
FLOW-SENSORS
The flow sensor shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep. A flow sensor shall be installed at the
central discharge pipe of the booster pumps. Monitoring head of the sensor shall be of stainless steel.
The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 67.
The voltage of the flow sensor shall be 24V DC. The flow rate range shall be set to 115mm per seconds
(adjustable range : 10mm per second to 2m per second).
43.11
BLDG13/S43.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-4
43.12
CONTROL PANEL
Provide and install approved control panel required to serve the booster pumpsets. Sufficient wall space
shall be selected within the roof storage tank room for the wall mounted control panel and shall be near to
the booster pumpsets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing for
rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready and easy access to the interior of the cubicles for
operation and maintenance purposes.
Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing
cables.
Mount instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, etc directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such
items firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control panel shall contain the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
43.13
ELECTRICAL WIRING
Install cables from the electrical mains isolator in roof storage tank room or at other locations.
Internal cables and wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 phase 50 cycles 4 wire
system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, GS conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568, free from
internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar
saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. In the event that the conduit comes in contact with any structural
steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the
steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall
be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in
150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m or
2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anticorrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of
45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x
20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted
down.
BLDG13/S43.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-5
43.13
43.14
43.15
43.16
43.17
BLDG13/S43.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-6
43.18
43.19
43.19.1
43.19.2
Monthly Inspection
Maintain and inspect all parts and equipment comprising the complete booster pumping system strictly in
accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A28.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. The Contractor shall always arrange for
a representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these visits.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a maintenance schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
Items in the Check-list shall include :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
BLDG13/S43.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Flow sensors
Soft-starters, relays and control module
Power supply selector switch in "On" position
Control panel indicating lights
Electrodes in storage tanks
Motor running current
Motor insulation
Pump mechanical seal
Pressure gauges
40mm check valve and ball stop valves
Thrust supports at distribution main
Bldg Spec
Page 43-7
43.19.3
the Employer may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the booster pumping system or carry
out the routine servicing and maintenance of the booster pumping system arising out of the Contractor's
failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
43.20
Section 44/.....
BLDG13/S43.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-1
SECTION 44
DRY / WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION
44.1
GENERAL
It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The
omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or
specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards,
the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
For buildings under construction, dry/wet rising mains shall be provided according to the requirements of
the FSSD. The Contractor shall work closely with the SO Rep to ensure that all requirements for the
provision of rising mains are complied with during the construction stage. All rising mains (dry and wet)
shall be installed progressively as the building gains height and made operational for all storeys (except
the uppermost three storeys) as soon as the uppermost completed storey reaches habitable height of
24m. Dry rising mains if used in lieu of wet rising mains in the initial stage shall be converted to wet rising
mains when the uppermost completed storey reaches habitable height of 60m. All breeching inlets,
landing valves, water tanks and pumps where required shall be provided and made readily operational.
The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to enable the officers from FSSD, SO Rep, and/or
officers from HDB (Technical Department) to carry out any inspection and testing during the construction
and completion stages. Charges shall be imposed on the Contractor under the Nuisance and
Irregularities clause for any non-compliance with the FSSDs requirements detected during site inspection
by FSSD, SO Rep and/or HDB (Technical Department). The Contractor is also subject to action taken by
FSSD under the relevant Act/Regulations.
The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered under BCA registration head of ME06
(Fire Prevention & Protection System) for the Works. The Contractor shall test and commission the works
to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, FSSD and/or the appointed RI. Upon the final completion of the works,
the Contractor shall prepare all necessary test reports & certificates to be endorsed by the SO Rep and
submitted to HDB (Technical Department). HDB (Technical Department) reserves the right to audit the
completed works and the Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for the inspection when
requested.
44.2.1
Scope Of Work
(a)
Dry rising main shall be installed in building where any floor is at a height beyond 10m and not
exceeding 60m above the ground level. The dry rising main shall be complete with landing valve at
every storey, breeching inlet and breeching inlet cabinet (where applicable).
The minimum nominal bore of a dry rising main shall be :
(b)
(i)
100mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main does not exceed 45m in height.
The rising main shall be complete with 2 way breeching inlet.
(ii)
150mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main exceed 45m in height. The rising
main shall be complete with 4 way breeching inlet.
For building which is more than 60m, wet rising main shall be provided according to SS CP 29 and
the requirements as shown in the Drawings.
Fire intercom system shall be provided between the pump rooms of the transfer pumps and the fire
pumps.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as shown in Appendix A29.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-2
44.2.2
In cases of discrepancies between the various standards, the local standards shall prevail.
44.2.3
Material
Material, appliances and components shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Singapore
Standards, British Standards or their equivalent.
Particular items shall comply with the following requirements or their equivalent :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
44.2.4
Ball Valves
Boxes for landing valves
Breeching inlets
Landing valves
Pipes
Pipe fittings
Pipe and valve flanges
Pressure gauges
Gate valves
Starting switches (automatic)
Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols
BS 1212 : Part 1, 2 or 3
BS 5041 : Part 4, 5
BS 5041 : Part 3
BS 5041 : Part 1, 2
BS 1387, ASTM A120
BS 1740
BS 10 or BS 4504
BS 1780
BS 5163
BS 587
BS 5499 : Part 1
44.2.5
44.2.6
Installation
(a)
Seek approval from the SO Rep before any hacking work is to be done.
(b)
For rising main pipe and down-comer (fire fighting) through the floor slabs, provide concrete curb
around the rising main pipe. The concrete curb shall be 100mm high and surrounding the pipe.
Casting of the concrete curb shall be done together with re-casting of concrete slab as one single
operation. The concrete curb and slab shall be water tight.
(c)
The Works shall include hacking, coring, drilling etc, as well as re-casting the concrete slab. The
Contractor shall provide and cast water-proof concrete slab of not lesser strength than the original
slab.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-3
44.2.7
44.3.1
General
Pipework for dry/wet rising mains shall be galvanised steel conforming to BS 1387 or ASTM A120
and BS 1740. Tubes/pipes and fittings used shall be suitable for pressures up to 21 bars. Mill
certificates shall be produced on request to countercheck with the heat numbers of tubes/pipes at
the Site.
All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the pipes connected. Elbows shall be
used, where practicable, in preference to bends; square elbows shall not be permitted. Valves used
shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29.
Valves used shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29. All
fittings/valves used shall be rated at least 1.5 times the system working pressure. All valves shall
be kept securely strapped with padlock.
All underground pipework shall be of ductile iron cement lined or other approved material.
Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to ensure venting and draining. The
clearance between pipework and wall and any other fixtures shall be as shown in the construction
detail of service duct for dry/wet rising main.
Joints shall not be embedded in any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be embedded in
the structure of floors. Where pipework passes through walls, sleeves shall be provided. Sleeves
shall be of the same metal as the pipe. The space between pipework and sleeve shall be plugged
with an approved sealant.
All entry and exit holes to or from a building for pipework shall be sealed and plugged. The sealant
shall be mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building through a
large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not lesser than 6mm thick shall be built into the wall
of the hole or duct; the service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded to the plate and
the space between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged.
(b)
Pipe Joints
All piping shall be installed by means of flanged fittings, mechanical pipe couplings or other
approved means.
Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. Flanged joints shall be made with flat ring
gaskets suitable for the pressure and temperature and extending to the inside of the bolt circles.
Mechanical pipe couplings shall be self-centring and engage and lock in place the grooved or
shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Coupling housing clamps
shall consist of two or more metal castings holding in place a composition water sealing gasket so
designed that the internal water pressure increases the watertightness of the seal. The coupling
assembly shall be securely held together by two or more heat treated carbon steel bolts and nuts.
Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the pipe coupling manufacturer's latest specifications.
The entire coupling installation shall be in accordance with the latest manufacturer's
recommendations. Pipe joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed combination of
fittings, gaskets and grooves.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-4
44.3.1
(c)
Pipe Supports
Typical pipework hangers for the dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system shall be
as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipework on main load bearing members of the structure.
The method of support shall be done according to the practice in the industry subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
Rising main support shall be located at every storey. Horizontal pipe runs shall be provided with
hangers spaced at a maximum distance of 4m.
(d)
Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted in accordance with the provisions of Section
23.
All pipework shall be stencilled with directional arrows of minimum 200 x 30mm in size.
A sample showing the pipework painting and welded flange shall be provided to the SO Rep for
approval.
44.3.2
Breeching Inlet
Provide inlets with instantaneous male couplings for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's
63.5mm diameter standard hose to each rising main with a two-way breeching inlet for a 100mm, or 4 way
breeching inlet for a 150mm diameter rising main, at a level of about 760mm above ground level.
Each breeching inlet shall conform with the requirements of BS 5041:Part 3.
Enclose all inlets in a rust-proof steel inlet box with glass front. Position the inlet box with its lower edge
between 400mm and 600mm above ground level. The position of inlets shall be indicated on inlet box
using appropriate signs in accordance with BS 5499: Part 1 and using a letter height of at least 50mm.
Inlets shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains. The inlet box shall be installed with key lock. Where
more than 1 stack are provided for the rising main, the labelling of the rising main shall be subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
Provide all pipework of rising main that falls below inlet box level with an additional 25mm drain valve at
the lowest point of the pipework, together with either fixed piping or an adequate length of flexible tubing
(fitted with a suitable coupling for connection to the valve) to conduct water from the valve to a suitable
drain.
Where such a low level drain is fitted, provide a permanent notice in 25mm (minimum) block letters of a
suitable colour on a contrasting background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve reading 'DRY
RISING MAIN - DRAIN VALVE' or 'WET RISING MAIN -DRAIN VALVE'. Provide another permanent
notice in the inlet box, similar in size to the indicator plates mentioned in BS 5041: Part 5, reading 'LOW
LEVEL DRAIN VALVE IN .........' (state location of the valve). The low level drain valve shall be kept
securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.
44.3.3
Landing Valve
Provide landing valve with an instantaneous female coupling for connection to the Singapore Civil
Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose for each rising main as shown in the Drawings.
The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove items vulnerable to be stolen such as
handwheel, blank caps, chain, etc from the landing valves which have already been installed. The
Contractor shall deliver these items for storage at a place to be decided by the SO Rep. No claim for such
Works shall be allowed as all costs and expenses for such work are deemed to be included in the
Contract Sum. The Superintending Officer's decision on which items are considered vulnerable to be
stolen shall be final binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. The landing valve shall be kept
securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-5
44.3.3
Location
Provide landing valves at a height with its lowest point between 760mm and 1m above the floor
level.
(b)
(c)
Anti-Theft Device
Landing valves are to be equipped with means to prevent easy removal of the ear knobs and the
plastic covers. Such measures shall be in the form of a 3mm thick brass cap duct cover & a 3mm
x 220mm carbon steel chain. The brass cap shall be tightly fit into the ear knob to prevent easy
access to the bolt & nut securing the ear knob. The cover shall be secured to the landing valve by
the carbon steel chain. The SO Representative reserves the right to request a sample for approval
purpose.
44.3.4
44.3.5
44.3.6
Drain Valves
Provide each breeching inlet with a drain valve in the form of a 25mm gate valve complying with the
requirements of BS 5154, rating PN 16.
For ease of attaching a drain hose, the drain valve outlet shall be positioned so that it faces in the same
direction as, and is at a lower level than, the inlet connections to the breeching inlet.
The outlet of the drain valve shall have 25mm male threads complying with the requirements of BS 21,
and shall be fitted with a female blank cap and chain.
44.3.7
Blank Caps
Provide each inlet with a female instantaneous blank cap acceptable to FSSD. Attach every blank cap to
the breeching inlet and landing valve by a suitable lug, s-hook and chain.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-6
44.3.8
Signboard
The breeching inlets shall be identified by an appropriate sign reading `DRY' or 'WET RISING MAIN'.
Where the inlets are not readily visible from the outside, a sign shall be posted in a conspicuous place
directing the Singapore Civil Defence Force to the inlets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
44.4.1
For a residential building 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for
each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.
(b)
For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and
19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190
litres per second.
The supply from the breeching inlets shall discharge openly into the tank and at a level of not less than
150mm above the maximum water level in the tank.
To reduce the risk of hose bursting, provisions shall be made in accordance with BS 5401 : Part 1 so that
when the water is shut off at the nozzle the static pressure in any line of hose connected to a landing valve
does not exceed 8 bar.
To dispose of excess flows and pressures over and above those required (ie. when only one jet is in use)
a pressure control valve shall be incorporated in the body of the landing valve which is then permanently
connected into a relief pipe, where applicable. This relief pipe shall run throughout the length of the wet
rising main installation and shall terminate either back into the suction tank or to drain. The relief pipe
shall be 100mm diameter galvanised steel. All pump control panels shall be of IP 54 enclosures.
44.4.2
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-7
44.4.3
Pressure-sensor switches shall be supplied and fitted on the main supply pipes to initiate automatic
starting of the pumps. Pressure-sensor switches shall be of approved type with provisions for
independent adjustment of high and low pressure settings. The automatic starting of any pump
shall also initiate a visible and audible indication in the main fire alarm panel, if any.
(b)
Floatless level control relay unit complete with electrodes shall be provided for each suction and
storage tank to override the control of all the pressure switches in such a way that at a pre-set low
water level, the pressure switches shall not cause starting of the jockey and wet rising main pumps.
In addition, any pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit at that low water level.
The relay unit shall also actuate a visible and audible alarm indication when the water level reaches
a pre-determined high or low limit.
(c)
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-8
44.4.3
(b)
enclosed in a 2-hour fire-rated duct throughout the run to the pump room.
A fire-rated duct may house electrical wiring for other emergency services if the running of the wiring does
not affect the fire-integrity of the duct.
The sharing of a common electrical rising main for the wet rising main and other emergency services is
acceptable provided that there is proper protection by fuses or circuit breakers for each and every
emergency service.
Any switches on the power feed to the motor shall be locked "ON" and clearly labelled "WET RISING
MAIN PUMP - NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE".
Acoustic treatment shall be provided to reduce the noise generated from the pump to be within the MEWR
guideline. The proposal for noise reduction shall be approved by the SO Rep before the actual
commencement of the pump room pipework installation.
44.4.4
For each and every pump, indicating lamps shall be provided to show that power supply is
available on every phase of each motor. Power failure on any phase of the supply to the wet rising
main pumps shall be automatically indicated on the control panel.
(b)
(c)
"Start" and "Stop" push-button switches shall be provided for each pump.
(d)
Lead/Lag rotary functions shall be provided for the selection of the duty pumps.
(e)
"Running" and "stop" indicating lamps shall be provided to each pump. Green colour lamps shall
be provided to show the pump "Running" status and red colour lamps shall be provided to show the
"Stop" status.
(f)
Start push button shall be provided for each pump to close the main contactor for the pump motor
mechanically independent of any control circuit.
(g)
Indicator lamps giving indication of the failure of each wet rising main pump to start as monitored
by the flow switch at each pump discharge.
(h)
Indicating lamps giving indication of 'Pump on Demand' as controlled by the pump actuation
pressure switches. The starting of the pump shall not cancel the indication.
(i)
Remote visible and audible indication panel besides the main control panel, if any for the following
conditions :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(j)
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Pump on demand
Operation of each wet rising main pump
Power failure on any phase of the supply to each wet rising main pump
Pump fails to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge
Manual and auto mode selection
Indicating lamps shall be provided to show the high and low water level of the wet rising main
storage tanks.
Bldg Spec
Page 44-9
44.4.4
(l)
Fault alarm facilities in addition to the indicator lamps shall be provided for the following conditions :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The fault alarm facilities shall incorporate a fault alarm buzzer audible from 10m away and a buzzer
muting switch. The visual fault alarm indication shall persist unless the fault is rectified. The
occurrence of a further different fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to resume
the sound again. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a fault exists
shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning. In addition, a weatherproof red light bulb
with wire guard shall be installed outside the pump room near the entrance to indicate the above
fault conditions.
(m)
44.4.5
Auxiliary contacts to generator panel to be provided. Volt-free contacts and wiring to relay signals
to Fire Indicator Board where applicable.
44.4.6
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor
Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch
'Run' and 'stop' indicator lamps
'Start' and 'stop' pushbutton
Pump 'Overload' indicator lamp
Connections to pressure switch
Minimum running period timer to prevent frequent automatic starting of the pump. The timer shall
be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one minute and interlock with the pressure switch.
(h)
Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase and pump fail to start.
Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor
(b)
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-10
44.4.6
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase, pump fail to start and high and low water level.
44.5
TEST
44.5.1
44.5.2
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-11
44.5.3
A minimum running pressure of 3.5 bar and a maximum of 5.5 bar shall be maintained at each landing
valve when any number, up to three, are fully opened.
When water is shut off at the nozzle of the hose connected to a landing valve, the static pressure in that
hose line shall not exceed 8 bar.
When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum water supply flow
rate shall be as stated below :
44.5.4
(a)
For a residential building, 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for
each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.
(b)
For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and
19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190
litres per second.
Performance Test
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing
Form. Additional FSSD requirements shall also be included. Provide a minimum of seven days notice to
the SO Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation fulfils
the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the Works concerned as
necessary until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The test shall be witnessed by the Contractor together with the SO Rep. The testing form shall be
endorsed by the QP.
44.5.5
44.6
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-12
44.6
In addition, wet tests shall be carried out annually when the main can be checked for leaks.
44.7
Monthly Tests
Inspect and service all machinery and equipment comprising the complete Plant and ancillary
equipment under this Contract once a month set out in the code of practice, except where
otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
At each such monthly inspection and service of the complete Plant and ancillary equipment, the
minimum items of Works detailed below and in the relevant code of practice shall be performed by
the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements to Plant and equipment not covered by the
following list but recommended by the manufacturers shall deemed to be included.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-13
44.7
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Check all seals, glands and pipe lines for leaks, and rectify as necessary.
(2)
Check all pump bearings and lubricate with oil or grease as necessary.
(3)
Check the alignment and condition of all rubber couplings between pumps and drive
motors, and rectify as necessary.
(4)
Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten as necessary.
(5)
Check and verify the automatic starting of each pump by actuating the drain and test
valve in a manner to reduce the applied water pressure and the starting device and
simulate a fire condition. Record that the pressure is correct. Keep each pump
running for a period of at least five minutes and verify the operation of the relief
valve.
(6)
Check and verify pump running alarm and phase failure alarm.
(7)
Check pump starting equipment including fuses, circuit breakers and starters.
(8)
Conduct a running pressure test of each pump at full alarm condition by opening the
test valve of the pump testing pipe and recirculate water back to the water tanks.
Run each pump for a period of not less than 1 minute.
(9)
Simulate failure on one of the pump and verify the operation of the duty-standby
changeover mechanism.
(10)
Check and verify no excessive noise and vibration of each pump and motor whilst
the unit is running.
(ii)
(iii)
Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and
ancillary electrical apparatus, and
(iv)
Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays, and
(v)
Inspect all water suction and storage tank and drains, clean and flush out the tank as
necessary. Check that stop valve and tank inlets interconnecting pipes and pump suction
pipes are secured fully open. Verify the operation of the automatic tank filling mechanism.
Visually check that tank contains requisite amount of water and verify operation of floatless
level control units.
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
At the monthly inspection of control valves, a gauge showing water pressure in the system
shall be read to make sure that normal pressure are being maintained - check the gauges
with an inspection gauge once a year.
Bldg Spec
Page 44-14
44.7
Quarterly Test
For quarterly testing, servicing and maintenance, repeat all the testing, servicing and maintenance
requirement as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising
Main" including all subclauses under it and subclause 44.7(a) "Monthly Tests" above. In addition,
provide the servicing and maintenance as detailed below :
44.8
(i)
Check any relays for correct adjustment and quick effective operation.
(ii)
Thoroughly check the whole system for loose connections, terminals, frayed wires, etc.
(iii)
(iv)
Enter test results and details of any faulty components, repairs and replacements in the log
book.
(v)
Every pump tank shall be completely flushed out and thoroughly cleaned annually. Other
maintenance as recommended by the tank supplier shall be carried out. The stays, cleats,
bolts and nuts, surface of the plates and other accessories of the tank shall be examined for
rust, corrosion, crack, etc.
(vi)
The water in the whole pipework system shall be completely drained out and filled with fresh
water again.
(vii)
Meggar test the motor winding cables and wiring to check the insulation resistance between
phase to phase and phase to earth.
44.9
CALL-BACK SERVICE
During the Defects Liability Period, provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent
calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the
Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone
number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent callback service can be met.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a)
(b)
(c)
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry out
the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the Contractor's
failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-15
44.10
44.11
44.12
LOG BOOK
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record
format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
44.13
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period :
(a)
All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.
(b)
(c)
All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.
(d)
(e)
All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-16
44.14
FIRE PUMPS/MOTORS FOR USE IN WET RISING MAINS AND TRANSFER PUMPS/MOTORS
The fire pumps/motors for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps/motors shall be tested by
approved accredited laboratory and UL(Underwriter Laboratories Inc.), FM (Factory Mutual Approvals).
The pumps/motors shall be selected to meet design as well as maximum flow requirements. All pumps
and control panels shall be mounted on at least 150mm height plinths. Spring type vibration isolators
shall be provided for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the building structure. The
first three pipe supports from the pump discharge shall be the spring mounted type. Pump control
panels near/below pipework shall be protected from water leakage/splash.
Section 45/.....
BLDG13/S44.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-1
SECTION 45
FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION
45.1
DEFINITIONS
"Electrical Worker" shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical work under the Electricity
Act (Cap. 89A).
45.2
SCOPE OF WORK
45.2.1
General
The fire protection installation Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning and
maintenance of the Fire Fighting and Protection Installation.
Unless otherwise specified, the Works shall include :
(a)
Fire hose reel system (complete with hose reel, suction tanks, pressure tanks and pumpset)
(b)
(c)
Fire hydrants
Pipes shall be made of steel in accordance with BS 1387. However, the pipework for hose reels with
direct water supply from PUB mains shall be copper or stainless steel, notwithstanding other provisions
specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. For hose reels with direct water
supply from the PUB mains, pumpset and its associated Works including suction tanks and pressure
tanks shall not be part of the scope of fire protection installation Works for the purposes of this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The Drawings shall in part be diagrammatic and when read in conjunction with the Specifications shall be
intended to convey the scope of the Works, indicate the general arrangement of Plant, piping, and the like,
and show approximate sizes of Plant and outlets. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings as closely as
practicable in laying out the Works and in so doing shall co-ordinate all systems to secure the best
possible installation in the available space.
Where Works is specified but the exact location of Plant or control is not specifically shown, obtain the
approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system, unless specified
otherwise. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation,
materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the
Contractor from the provision of a complete operating and safe system.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as produced in Appendix A33.
45.2.2
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-2
45.2.3
45.2.4
45.2.5
Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer
and one coat of lead and chromate free primer and then painted with two coats of approved enamel paint.
45.2.6
45.2.7
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-3
45.3
45.3.1
General
(a)
Installation
Fix the hose reels so that the centre is between 0.75 metre and 1.4 metre above floor level.
Mount the hose reels on a swivel bracket suitable for mounting in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel hose
reel cabinet or recesses clearly marked with "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm
high. Hose reel cabinet or recesses shall be painted red.
Any doors provided for hose reel cabinet or recess shall be so hinged that they open approximately
180 degrees and they shall not obstruct the running out of the hose in either direction. The door
shall have a 4mm glass front with spring locked to open from within. The Contractor shall provide
five sets of master keys to the Employer. Where the hose reel is within a service duct, a signplate
with the words "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm height shall be displayed on
the door.
(b)
Rubber Hose
The rubber hose shall be of 25mm internal diameter and shall have a minimum working pressure of
7 bars and shall be of the non-kinking type.
The rubber hose shall be manufactured with an inner tube or lining, a reinforcement braided with
textile material and an abrasion resistant rubber cover. The reinforcement shall consist of a single
rayon braid or double braid of cotton.
The length of rubber hose on the reel shall be 30 metres. There shall be no joints in the length of
the hose.
Samples and certification shall be provided to verify that the hose supplied is manufactured
according to the requirements of BS 3169/EN 694.
(c)
Stop-Valve
Provide and fix 25mm stop-valve for the connection of the hose reel to water supply. An indication
of the open and shut position shall be fixed or permanently marked on the wheel of the valve, and
the body of the valve except for gate valves which shall be marked with a directional arrow
indicating the direction of flow through the valve.
(d)
Shut-Off Nozzle
Provide a shut-off nozzle assembly in accordance with the following requirements :
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
(ii)
In the absence of a hose reel cabinet, means shall be provided for the secure attachment of
the assembly in a locked enclosure in such a manner that it cannot be disengaged until the
enclosure has been opened.
(iii)
The assembly shall be permanently marked to indicate the open and shut position of the
valve.
(iv)
The internal surface of the nozzle shall be finished to provide a smooth surface.
(v)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-4
45.3.2
Hose Reel
45.3.2.1
General
The hose reel shall extend not more than 350mm from the mounting surface and shall have an overall
diameter not greater than 760mm. The side plates of the hose reel shall have a continuous outer rim and
shall be rigid in construction. The side of the reel shall be painted red.
The diameter of the inner core on which the hose is wound shall be not less than 200mm. When the full
length of the hose is coiled on the hose reel without the use of abnormal tension, the rim of the side plates
of the hose reel shall project at least 10mm beyond the external diameter of the coiled hose at any point.
The fittings to which the hose are attached on the hose reel shall be arranged in such a manner that the
hose is not restricted or flattened by the application of additional layers.
The water connection through the rubber hose shall permit the full flow of water to the hose without
external leakage during any rotation of the hose reel. The hose reel waterways connecting the water
supply to the hose, including the inlet pipe after the stop valve, shall be constructed of non-ferrous
material and/or stainless steel and/or galvanised steel. Where hose reels are within service ducts, they
shall be mounted such that their operations are not hindered. The mounting position shall be approved by
the SO Rep.
The clips used to attach the hose to the nozzle and the drum shall be galvanised ear clips.
45.3.2.2
Markings
Mark every hose reel with the following information :
(i)
(ii)
Instructions for operation and use which shall include the following :
(1)
Turn on stop valve
(2)
Run out hose
(3)
Turn on water at nozzle
(4)
The hose shall be fully charged before winding it onto the reel
(5)
The year of manufacture
(6)
The test pressure in Bar
All notices and instructions shall be weather and corrosion resistant and shall be set out in letters easily
readable. In addition, the operating instructions "For Emergency Only : Break glass to open the door from
inside" and "TO TURN ON THE INLET VALVE BEFORE RUNNING OUT THE HOSE" shall be of 12mm
height and printed in white on the hose reel cabinet. Where there is no cabinet, the same notice shall be
provided on a 2mm thick aluminium plate affixed to the wall adjacent to the reel.
45.3.2.3
Tests
The hose reel shall be factory tested against water leakage after assembly at a test pressure of 13.8 bars
(200 psi). The Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence of such factory test to the SO Rep before
delivery of the hose reels to the Site on request by the SO Rep.
45.3.3
Pumpset
(a)
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-5
45.3.3
Pumpset (Cont'd)
(a)
(b)
The duty pumpset shall automatically come into operation when a pressure switch located in
the branch out pipe feeding the two pressure tanks detects a fall of normal static pressure in
the pipe below a predetermined value.
(ii)
If the duty pump fails to start or the demand for water exceeds the nominal output of the
duty pump (ie. when three or more hose reels operate simultaneously), this drop in pressure
shall be sensed by another pressure switch located adjacent to the first pressure switch,
which shall then start the standby pump. The exact cut-in pressure of the standby pump
shall be varied according to the normal system pressure and the performance curve of the
pump.
(iii)
As the requirements for water reduces, the pressure in the system increases. When there
is no demand to the system and the normal static pressure has been established, this
preset pressure shall be sensed by both pressure switches and the duty and standby pump
shall be switched off respectively.
After each start/stop pumping cycle, the duty pump shall be alternated automatically by the
use of an auto changeover relay to avoid one pump remaining stationary for long period.
Provide a manual selector switch to select the duty or standby pump.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-6
45.3.3
Pumpset (Cont'd)
(b)
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-7
45.3.4
Scope
This subclause sets out the requirements, standards of workmanship and materials in general for
the piping system for the hose reel system.
(b)
General
Before delivery to the Site, clean all pipes thoroughly so that they are free from scale and rust.
Reject old and damaged pipes and use only new pipes. On the Site, all pipes shall be checked
again and thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to the installation.
Install all pipework so that clearance of approximately 80mm is left between the outside of the pipe
and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface, whenever possible. Pipe joints or fittings shall
not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam.
(c)
Materials
Provide and install all pipework as indicated in the Drawings.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from
Defect that would impair their performance. Cutting, bending and fixing shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Pipes shall be factory marked with the manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification
of pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted.
Lay pipes outside buildings underground, and the depth of cover measured from the top of the pipe
to the finished surface of the ground level shall not be less than 750mm.
Stainless steel pipes shall comply with BS 4127:Part 2. Stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of
capillary fittings and compression fittings in accordance with BS 864:Part 2. Fittings of 15mm and
longer shall be legibly marked with the maker's name or trade mark. All stainless steel water pipes,
fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. Ductile
iron cement lined pipes shall comply with BS EN 545 and medium galvanised steel pipes shall
comply with SS17.
Joints and connections to galvanised steel pipework of up to and including 65mm diameter shall be
made by means of screwed connections. Join pipes of 80mm diameter and above by means of
flanged connections. Unless otherwise specified, use galvanised steel bolts and nuts for all
supports and flanged connections.
Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. All flanges shall be flushed and aligned, and
shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing
compound. Use ductile iron cement lined pipes where pipes are concealed such as those within
concrete slabs or below ground.
(d)
Valves
All valves shall either be of bronze, brass or cast steel construction and conforming to the relevant
British Standard and be suitable for the working pressure encountered.
Where valves are located above 2m from the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall be
operated by chain mechanism.
Valves used for working pressure above 19 bar shall be of the flanged type. All valves shall be
located in accessible positions.
Isolation valves of 50mm diameter and below installed along pipework inside the pump room shall
be of ball stop valves approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB.
Valves up to and including 65mm diameter where connected to steel pipe shall be of brass/bronze
with female screwed connections.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-8
45.3.4
Valves (Cont'd)
Valves of 80mm diameter and above where fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron or
ductile iron type.
Check valves shall be of the spring loaded non-slamming type. The Contractor shall select these
valves in relation to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve shall operate silently
on reversal of water flow.
Solenoid valve shall be of the normally closed, magnetically operated pilot type. Valve body shall
be of brass or bronze and the solenoid coil shall be replaceable on Site without removing the valve
body from pipe fitting. Install "Y-type" strainer upstream of the solenoid valve to trap any dirt and
debris. The power supply of the solenoid valve shall be 24V AC 50Hz.
(e)
Strainers
Install "Y-type" strainers upstream of all pumpsets. Provide all strainers with isolating valves so
that the strainers can be cleaned without draining away the water of the system. Where a system
cannot be shut-down for strainer cleaning, install by-pass in parallel to the strainer.
(f)
(g)
Pressure Tanks
Two rechargeable pressure tanks of replaceable membrane type and pre-charged according to
operating conditions shall be installed at the discharge of the pumps to keep the hose reel riser
pressurized at any time.
The pressure tank shall be of carbon steel, designed and fabricated to British Standard or Standard
of American Society of Mechanical Engineers for Pressure Vessels. The Contractor shall furnish
the design and detailed calculations for the proposed pressure tanks. The design and construction
of the pressure tanks shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
The pressure tanks shall be of the vertical type and the impermeable diaphragm shall be of heavy
duty vinyl or butyl material.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-9
45.3.4
(h)
(i)
Material of Pipe
Diameter of Pipe
(mm)
Maximum Spacing
Horizontal
(m)
Vertical
(m)
10 to 15
20 to 25
32
40 to 50
65 to 80
1.75
2.5
2.75
3.0
3.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.5
75 to 100
2.75
2.75
10 to 15
20 to 25
32
40 to 50
65 to 80
1.75
2.5
2.75
3.0
3.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.5
Fixing shall wherever possible be built into the building structure. Alternatively, they shall be
secured to the building structure by means of expansion or power driven bolts.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-10
45.3.4
45.3.5
Suction Tanks
(a)
General
Tank supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction for hose reel installation.
Lay a separate line from the PUB bulk meter position to supply water to the suction tanks or the fire
hose reels directly in case boosting of the PUB water pressure is not required. The line shall serve
the fire hose reel system only. To prevent contamination, provide approved double check valves
assembly complete with drain cocks in accordance with the Drawings.
The effective water capacity of two suction tanks with automatic inflow shall not be less than 1100
litres. Effective water capacity shall be labelled on the tanks as directed by the SO Rep.
The tanks shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and flanged stainless steel (AISI Grade 316)
pipe connections. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall be correspondingly aligned.
Nominal pipe thickness for stainless steel pipe shall be 4mm complying with JIS G3459 Schedule
20S.
Provide and install piping to each suction tank of nominal diameter as follows :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
1 no. 54mm diameter stainless steel incoming pipe from PUB bulk meter;
1 no. 50mm diameter galvanised steel outlet pipe to fire hose reel booster pump;
1 no. 32mm diameter galvanised steel by-pass pipe;
1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipe;
1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron over-flow pipe. The over-flow pipe shall be connected
to the washout pipe if suction tanks are situated at the 2nd storey and above.
1 no. 28mm diameter stainless steel over-flow warning pipe if suction tanks are located at
2nd storey and above; and
1 no. 100mm diameter cement mortar lined cast iron or ductile iron interconnecting pipe.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC air vent to each tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow end
and covered by mosquito netting.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC pipe to each tank for the mounting of level control electrodes.
(b)
Level Control
(i)
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-11
45.3.5
(c)
45.3.6
Power Supply
(a)
General
The power supply available for electric motors is 415 volts, three phase, 50 cycles alternating
current.
(b)
Motors
The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F
insulation unless specified otherwise and shall be designed for continuous maximum rating. Motor
type and model shall be approved by the SO Rep before the installation.
Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
The motor efficiency and power factors of the motors shall be more than 90% and 0.85 respectively
at full load and shall comply with the current PUB Regulations.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-12
45.3.6
Motor Starters
The starters for the motors shall be direct on-line type.
The starter shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-button or be
automatically actuated by the pressure switches in the main riser pipe.
Each starter shall have time relay, undervoltage release, no volt release, adjustable and ambient
compensated (-5C to 50C) thermal overload protection with manual reset and pilot lamp. The
starter shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the installation. The operating voltage
of the control coil shall be 230V.
The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above
conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. The
mechanical and electrical endurance of the starter shall be not less than 50,000 operations.
Provide the manufacturer's certificate to this effect when requested by the SO Rep. The starters
shall be wired in such a way that the floatless level control relay unit shall be able to override other
pump controls and actuate the pumps according to different pre-set conditions.
(d)
(e)
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent
self cleaning action.
Auxiliary relays shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal volts and hold in satisfactorily at 65%
nominal volts.
Auxiliary relays with functions common to a number of circuits and which are fitted to a common
panel as referred to previously shall be of the plug-in type.
Auxiliary relays fitted to demountable units shall be of the plug-in type where possible. Fixed relays
are acceptable if they are a design feature of the units.
Auxiliary relays shall have a minimum of 6 contacts rated at 5 Amps minimum for an inductive load.
Contacts shall be capable of carrying and breaking without damage, the inrush and operating
currents of contactor or starter coils they are switching. The contact arrangement shall be easily
alterable.
(f)
Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a
minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Pushbuttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled
to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application. Pushbutton
bezels shall be black.
Employ the following colour codes :
Green
Red
Black
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
"START" or "ON"
"STOP" or "OFF"
Reset
Bldg Spec
Page 45-13
45.3.6
Indicator Lamps
Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation
of service, circuit and locations.
Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type rated at 6 watts. The indication
shall be clearly visible from the sides or front.
Indicating lamps shall have black bezels. The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to
ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals;
soldered terminations shall be rejected.
Employ the following colour codes :
Green
Amber
Red
(h)
"ON" status
"OFF" status
"FAULT", "FAILURE", "ALARM" status
Construction
Provide and install approved switchboard required to serve the booster pumpsets. The wall
mounted switchboard cabinet shall be installed in the pumproom and it shall be near to the
entrance of the pumproom. The location shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
The cabinet shall be of front connected type and unless otherwise specified, manufactured
from minimum 2mm gauge sheet steel using folded section or angle form bracing for rigid
construction. The cabinet shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof.
The construction shall be such that it permits ready access to the interior of the cubicles for
operation and maintenance purposes. The opening of a panel door shall allow access to
that compartment only. Provide continuous mild steel to complete separate adjacent
cubicle.
Provide switchboard cabinet with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all
incoming and outgoing cables. Schematic wiring and field connection diagrams shall be
permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door.
Instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, selector switches, push buttons, isolating
switches, etc shall be mounted directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold such items
firmly in position under all conditions of operation. Indicating lights shall be of the
transformer type.
Isolating switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be
opened with the handle in the `ON' position.
Carry out the whole of the electrical Works in compliance with the SS CP5 and subject to
the approval of the SO Rep.
(ii)
Internal Wiring
The control panel shall all be internally wired, including all wirings between individual units
and between units and terminal strips located near the room entrance.
Number all terminals on the strips and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on
the wiring and field connection diagrams permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure
door.
Wiring shall be multi-strand of not less than 1.5 mm2 copper conductors, PVC insulated,
colour coded and numbered for identification.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-14
45.3.6
(iii)
Labelling
Provide each supervisory control panel with a main label mounted in a prominent position.
Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed
steel screws or in other approved manners.
Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be black lettering engraved on white traffolyte.
The size of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Submit
schedule to the SO Rep for approval prior to manufacture.
Labels shall designate circuit number and equipment function.
Label terminal strips to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and
function - eg. control, indication, protection, etc.
Label clearly all control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located on
common panels to identify circuit number, function and rating.
(iv)
Painting
After degreasing, apply one coat of etch primer, follow by one undercoat and two top coats
of synthetic enamel. All coats shall be stoved baked to paint manufacturer's requirements.
The finished colour of internal and external surfaces shall be red.
Make good all damages occurred during transit or installation to a standard equal to that
manufactured originally.
(v)
Wiring
The wiring shall comply with SS CP 5.
Label clearly isolation switches and circuit breakers on the power feed to the pumps : "Fire
Hose Reel Pump Supply - Do Not Switch Off In Case Of Fire".
Install the cables from the pumproom electrical mains isolator to the pump's starting and
control switchboard.
Trunking cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable
for a 230V single phase 50 cycles system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable
trunking.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-15
45.3.6
Wiring (Cont'd)
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by
means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres
for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of screwed socket and smooth bore butt
to adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a
flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with
any structural steel work, make permanent metallic connection between the conduit and
steel work.
All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and
shall be earthed with matching standing copper link.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel
sheet, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on
one end at each length. Treat the trunking with anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a
minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be by means of round headed
bolts and nuts. Lay 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape in the trunking run. The copper shall
be tinned where it is bolted down.
Complete the entire trunking and conduit installation before the cables are drawn. The
number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall comply with SS CP 5.
Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with
insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V or other approved and obtain an
infinity reading before the conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Terminate wiring in conduit and duct in the floor in approved junction boxes adjacent to the
machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the cables between
motors and junction boxes.
Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductor
shall have cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D1 of CP 5.
45.4
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-16
45.4
45.5
45.5.1
General
The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning
test of the completed installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment
date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at
least 2 months before the Substantial Completion of the building block.
The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A34 and submit two copies to
the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
Provide a complete set of testing equipment. The minimum requirements of which shall be set out below :
(a)
(b)
(c)
Tachometer with accessories for measurement of pumps and motor shaft speeds.
Meter-Recorder for measuring flow rate through orifice plate.
All necessary electrical testing equipment such as insulation resistance tester.
The whole of the instruments and equipment and labour required for conducting these tests and
demonstrations shall be provided by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract
Sum. The test instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.
45.5.2
Test Records
The records shall include :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
45.5.3
Pipework
All water pipework and other fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bar or 2 times the working
pressure whichever shall be the greater, and this test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours. Allowable
pressure drop during the 24 hour testing shall be decided by the SO Rep but generally shall not exceed
3% of test pressure. During tests, all welded joints shall be hammered.
45.5.4
Control Equipment
Set and calibrate all limit switches, pressure switches, time switches, etc. as required to ensure that
operating directions are correct. Test and verify the time and control sequence.
45.5.5
Pumps
Check all pumps for alignment, flow rates, pressure and speed and their balance to comply with the
required flow and head.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-17
45.5
45.5.6
Performance Test
On Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test
results using approved HDB Testing Form. Provide a minimum of seven days notice to the SO Rep to
verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation if adjusted and
regulated correctly fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the
Works concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated to him on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep.
45.5.7
Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors of cables and wires
(b)
Continuity tests.
(c)
Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Insulation resistance test on any electrical apparatus supplied and/or installed before and
after connecting such apparatus to the supply.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-18
45.5
45.5.8
Flushing Out
Before any water is introduced into the hose reel, it shall be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that
no harmful matter is passed into the reel. After flushing out, the tubing shall be run out and the
water turned on to establish that the assembly is fully operational.
(b)
(c)
(d)
45.5.9
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-19
45.6
45.6.1
General
During the Maintenance Period, provide all consumables/materials and make good all Defect and
leakages found in the system/Plant/equipment. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as
produced in Appendix A33 whenever required if such repair or replacement has been necessitated by
reasons of Defect in the system/Plant/equipment.
45.6.2
45.6.3
Supervision
Provide a foreman to take charge of the service, maintenance and repair Works. This foreman shall be
thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire
protection system, and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor, and acceptable to the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall have in his direct employment, workmen who shall be skilled in the service,
maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection system.
45.6.4
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-20
45.6
45.6.4
45.6.5
Call-Back Service
Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be attended
to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or
Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone
number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent callback service can be met.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a)
respond within 30 minutes after being called; or
(b)
attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or
(c)
carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;
The SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the Fire Protection System or to carry
out the routine servicing and maintenance of the Fire Protection System due to or arising out of the
Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or
relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-21
45.6.6
45.6.7
Log Book
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record
format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
45.6.8
Consumable Materials
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period :
45.7
(a)
All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.
(b)
(c)
All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.
(d)
(e)
All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
FIRE HYDRANTS
Private Fire Hydrants where so required by The Fire Authority shall be provided within the perimeter of the
building lot all to the requirements of the Fire Authority.
The fire hydrant shall be positioned to be within 50 m from an entry to the building and not more than 50 m
apart. In the case of a building where rising mains are installed, the 50 m distance shall be measured up
to the breeching inlets of the rising mains. The siting and type of fire hydrants shall comply fully with the
requirements stated in SS CP 29: Code of Practice for Fire Hydrant Systems and Hose Reels.
Fire hydrants shall be of suitably corrosion protected and sufficiently robust material. Their works parts
shall be of gunmetal to BS 1400 or other suitable material. The fire hydrant shall be installed on concrete
plinths with size of 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm thickness. A control valve shall be installed to each
hydrant. The control valve shall be able to open and closed from the surface of the ground.
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-22
45.7
Section 46/.....
BLDG13/S45.DOCX(22)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 46-1
SECTION 46
RESERVED
SECTION 47
RESERVED
SECTION 48
RESERVED
Section 49/.....
BLDG13/S4648.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-1
SECTION 49
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
49.1
REGULATIONS
The electrical works include electrical installation, lighting installation, lightning protection works,
telephone/data cabling, fire alarm system and other miscellaneous electrical works.
The electrical installation works shall comply with all statutory rules, regulations and requirements of the
EMA, SP Services Ltd and PowerGrid, current at the date of submission of the Tender and to the
complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
In particular, the electrical installation works shall comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
49.2
Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations made under The Electricity Act (CAP. 89A) including
any subsequent updates and amendments of the Regulations.
Singapore Standard CP 5;
Any additional regulations issued by EMA, SPSL and PowerGrid.
All other electrical works shall comply with their respective Codes of Practice.
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
It is the intention of the Drawings and/or Specifications to provide a complete and safe operating system.
The omission from the Drawings and Specifications of any details in construction, installation, materials or
specialities necessary for a complete, operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Before submitting the Tender, and also prior to the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall study the
Drawings and inspect the Site to satisfy themselves that the Works could be carried out as specified.
Should it be deemed necessary to make modifications to the Drawings, method of installation or site
adjustments to suit the structural and site constraints and to ensure compliance with the Statutory Rules
and Regulations, the Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of his recommendations within two weeks from
the commencement of the Contract and to obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before proceeding with
the modifications.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for
complying with the requirements of this clause. The Drawings and/or Specifications indicate the minimum
requirements of the Employer only. Should the requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications
conflict with the requirements of the Statutory Rules and/or Regulations, the most stringent of the
requirements shall govern the Works.
49.3
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
All Plant and equipment or materials specified in the Specifications and any other Plant and equipment or
materials provided under the Contract shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in Singapore. The
local climate is tropical with a mean shade temperature of 27.8C. The normal maximum shade
temperature is 31C and the minimum shade temperature is 23.9C.
The mean relative humidity is 80%, the maximum and minimum being 100% and 65.1% respectively.
49.4
BLDG13/S49.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-2
49.5
49.6
FIXING SCREWS
All screws used for fixing meter boards, moulded or steel boxes, switches, socket outlets, consumer
control units etc shall be in brass.
49.7
SWITCH ROOMS
Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, all switch rooms shall be provided with at least a lighting point
controlled by a switch, a 13 Amp switch socket-outlet, a consumer control unit, a fluorescent batten
luminaire complete with tube and emergency battery/inverter pack (2 hours), a glass framed single line
diagram of the electrical installation in at least A3 size (the wordings of the diagram shall be legible), first
aid chart and a 900mm wide rubber mat complying with the latest edition of SS 298. The rubber mat shall
be placed all around the floor standing switch board and indoor service electrical distribution box if any.
All switches, socket-outlets and consumer control units shall be metal clad.
All final sub-circuit wirings to lighting and power points in the switch rooms/meter rooms shall be run in
metal conduit.
Wirings for public lighting circuits shall be grouped and taped together according to their circuits. The
circuits shall be bunched and secured on the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties.
All other cables shall run on metal cable trays. The cables shall be neatly secured on the trays by plastic
fixing ties or PVC coated metal saddles at regular intervals not exceeding 300mm. No over lapping of
cables shall be allowed except for crossing of different circuits which shall be kept to a minimum.
49.8
BLDG13/S49.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-3
49.9
TESTING OF INSTALLATION
49.9.1
General
The following work of the electrical installation shall be inspected and tested on Site after completion :
(a)
Main Switchboard and Mains Cables
(b)
Earthing System
(c)
Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring
(d)
Lightning Protection System
(e)
Telephone System
(f)
CATV System
All electrical tests including continuity, insulation resistance, polarity, earth fault loop impedances, phasing
and earth electrode resistance shall be made in a manner prescribed in Singapore Standard CP 5 or other
relevant standard specifications and Codes of Practice. Where no Standard/Code/Regulation is
applicable, the tests shall be conducted in a manner approved by the SO Rep.
For new wiring installations, the value of insulation resistance shall be as follows :
(a)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure that it is complete and complies with the
requirements of the Specifications, the EMA and SPSL. All tests shall be witnessed, endorsed and verified
by the Consultants LEW. Employer reserve the right to conduct any audit testing if required.
lnspection or approval of tests by the SO Rep of any Plant and equipment, work or installation shall not
relieve the Contractor from his obligation to supply the complete Plant and equipment, and complete the
Works and installation in accordance with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections, skilled
and unskilled labour and services with proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the tests and any
audit testing. If site electricity supply is not available for testing or setting protection relays, the Contractor
shall provide a portable diesel generator set for the purpose. Any costs which may be involved in the tests
shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum by the Contractor.
49.9.2
49.9.2.1
The electrical installation to individual residential unit shall be tested by HDB Technical Management
(M&E) Unit. The Contractor shall apply to the HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit at least 7 working
days in advance together with the respective test reports and supporting documents duly endorsed and
verified by the Consultants LEW. The following shall be submitted at the time of application for testing:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
BLDG13/S49.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
One Certificate Of Fitness For Turn-On For Residential Units in each building block. A schedule of
electrical installation for each residential building block (Form E)
A block layout plan showing the types of residential units on each floor and unit layout plans with
relevant single line diagrams.
A photocopy of Certificate of Compliance (COC) of the electrical installation for each block
A photocopy of licence to use or operate electrical installation for each block
A soft copy (in CD Rom) of the as-built Single Line Drawings (in dwg format) of the electrical
installations of the main switchboard and sub-switch board for each block.
Quality Acceptance Report for the telephone wiring installation
Telecom installer testing report for each block
One copy of as-built MATV schematic installation drawing and other supporting drawings in A3 size
paper.
Bldg Spec
Page 49-4
49.9.3
49.10
49.11
49.12
49.13
BLDG13/S49.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-5
49.14
(b)
the single-line drawing ( SLD ) of the electrical installation inside the unit;
(c)
the concealed conduit routes in the ceiling slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television
services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );
(d)
the concealed conduit routes in the floor slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television
services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );
(e)
legend used.
Each as-built drawing shall be duly checked, certified and endorsed by the Contractor.
The as-built drawings shall be kept inside a specially - designed and durable envelope and fix adjacent to
the unit's consumer unit. For detail arrangement, the Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep.
The second batch of as-built drawings is for the complete electrical works and shall be submitted in the
following:
i.
Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "pdf" format. Every "pdf" drawing must show the
"As-Built" stamp.
ii. One set of as-built tracings. Every tracing must be stamped "As-Built".
iii. Three sets of as-built prints. Every print must be stamped "As-Built".
These as-built drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep. on a block-to-block basis not later than two
weeks upon the handing over of each building block. The Contractor shall submit a listing of the as-built
drawings submitted and a letter certifying that the submitted drawings is a true record of the works asbuilt. Without this certification letter, these as-built drawings will not be accepted.
The thickness of these as-built tracings shall be such that its weight is approximately 110 gram per m2.
The ink in the as-built tracings shall be permanent and not of the powered-type. The details in the tracings
shall be legible and shall not have double or faded images. These as-built tracings will be rejected if found
to be of poor quality.
49.15
SAMPLE WORK
The Contractor shall put up sample work for the approval of the SO Rep and SPSL before proceeding with
the entire installation.
The actual positions of all electrical fittings and accessories shall be determined at site by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep when installing lighting and accessories.
The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep at least two days in advance between putting up the following
sample work so that specific instructions may be given :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Failure to inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep may result in the rejection of the installation work
and no claim for compensation shall be entertained by the Employer.
BLDG13/S49.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-6
49.16
TEMPORARY STORES
The Contractor shall provide suitable temporary store/s at the Site for the safe-keeping of fittings and
materials and for their protection against damage or loss by weather or other causes. The location and
type of store/s shall be approved by the SO Rep who will have the discretion to exclude in his payment
certificates, payment for any fitting or material which is not stored to his satisfaction.
49.17
SUBMISSION OF DETAILS
The Contractor's Tender where applicable shall be accompanied by details of the proposed system
including details on the technical and performance aspects of the Plant and equipment (antenna, preamplifier, mixer, amplifier, splitter, etc). Single line diagrams of the distribution system with the signal
strengths in dbV, for all the distribution points and the proposed underground cable route (if
underground system is involved) shall be submitted together with the Tender or when requested by the
SO Rep.
The approval, with or without amendments, by the SO Rep of the Contractor's System shall not in any way
affect vary or relieve the Contractor's liabilities or obligations to ensure compliance of the System with the
specified technical performance standards.
49.18
49.19
PLANT, EQUIPMENT/PARTS
(a)
The Contractor shall confirm the brands and models of the Plant and equipment and accessories to
be used for the Contract within one week from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. At the same
time, the Contractor is also required to place order for the Plant and equipment early.
(b)
At the time of tendering, the Contractor shall only offer in his main offer items which have already
been approved by the HDB. If the Contractor offers items in his main offer which have not been
approved, the tender may be treated as non-compliance with the Specifications and the Employer
reserves the right to reject the tender.
(c)
If the Contractor proposed to use a product other than those specified in the Specifications and/or
indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed product to the SO
Rep for approval not later than one week after the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The provision
of subclause 1.2.5 shall be applied accordingly.
BLDG13/S49.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-7
49.20
TYPE TEST
Type test reports issued by the following third-party certified laboratories are acceptable :
Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;
Laboratories with SAC-MRA partners accreditation;
Laboratories participating in IECEE CB scheme.
[SAC also signs bilateral Mutual Recognition Arrangement (MRA) with other national accreditation bodies.
It is also a signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) Arrangement and
regional cooperation bodies such as Asia Pacific Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (APLAC). IECEE
stands for IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment. The IECEE
operates the CB (Certification Body) Scheme which is a multilateral certification system based on
standards prepared by the International Electrotechnical Commission.]
49.21
SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES) AT
BUILDING ROOFTOP
The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M
& E service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of
the service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat
arrangement to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical
and statutory requirements.
The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval
before installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly manner,
and the access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop is not
obstructed by service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top shall be
supervised and coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction, the
contractor is to provide chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the
Drawings. The platform shall be installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such
a way as not to pose danger to the maintenance workmen.
49.22
INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM
The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when it
is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR).
The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMRs floor. It shall then run on the
underside/soffit of the LMRs floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking.
Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location.
Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the
LMRs floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain. Provide
a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb all round the base of the trunking to prevent water from
seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit the site
conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather.
The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it.
Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall.
Section 50/.....
BLDG13/S49.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-1
SECTION 50
SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS
50.1
SWITCHBOARDS
50.1.1
General
The switchboards shall be suitable for use on a 400/230V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz supply system and shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 61439.
The switchboards shall incorporate all the items as set out in the Drawings. All costs relating to testing,
testing fees and miscellaneous charges necessary for the completion and commissioning of the
switchboards ready for continuous operation at its designated Site positions shall be included in the
Contract Sum.
50.1.2
Drawings
Detailed construction drawings and circuit and wiring diagrams of all switchboards shall be submitted to
the SO Rep for approval before construction. These drawings and diagrams shall indicate clearly the
following (where applicable) :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Position of switches
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
Relay settings
(xiii)
The main physical dimensions showing all necessary clearances required for removing covers,
opening doors and withdrawing compartments.
(xiv)
Position of all Plant and equipment on panel faces indicating whether flush or projecting
(xv)
Identification of all Plant and equipment with the appropriate label engraving describing
function and coding
The quantities, sizes and ratings of Plant and equipment incorporated within the switchboards shall be as
indicated in the Drawings.
50.1.3
Construction
The switchboards shall be of enclosed assembly design, suitable for indoor use in the form of free
standing or wall mounting, self-contained, flush fronted cubicles sectionalised as necessary to facilitate
easy transportation and erection. The assembly shall be Type Tested in accordance with IEC 61439. The
main incoming unit, functional units of metered and unmetered supply, the metered and unmetered busbar
sections shall be separately housed in their own cubicles.
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-2
50.1.3
Construction (Cont'd)
Wall mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front access only and the maximum height shall be 2.0m.
Floor mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front and back access.
The cubicle sections shall be constructed of electro-galvanised sheet steel frames of minimum thickness
of 2.0mm and the panels shall be constructed from electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of
1.6mm. It shall be able to withstand a fault level of 36 KA for 1 second unless specified otherwise in the
single-line-diagrams. The enclosures for the switchboards shall provide a degree of protection IP 4X.
Each cubicle unit shall be incorporated with a removable cover with hidden hinges. The front cover shall
have apertures for the protrusion of operating handles of circuit breakers. The covers shall be constructed
of folded electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm.
The various units comprising a complete switchboard shall be grouped in a multi-tier arrangement
including cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions to accommodate terminal boards, cable boxes
and gland plates.
All external panels of the switchboard shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving a total paint
thickness of not less than 50 microns. All coats of paint shall be oven baked and dried.
50.1.4
Busbars
Four pole air insulated busbars of uniform cross-sectional area throughout their length with a continuous
rating or dimensions not less than that indicated in the Drawings shall be arranged neatly.
The busbars and busbar connections between the busbars and various items of the switchgear shall be
manufactured from copper.
All busbars shall be tinned, and continuous lengths without connections shall be insulated with heat
shrinking sleeves.
Busbars shall be mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators strong enough to endure, without
damage, forces set up by any thermal expansion within the bars under normal operating conditions and
forces created by prospective fault currents.
Busbars shall be housed in separate compartments and these compartments shall not contain any wiring
or apparatus other than that required for coupling to the busbars.
Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by the removal of a cover secured by
bolts. Behind the covers, an insulating sheet with warning labels bearing the word "DANGER" in bold
letters and the lightning symbol shall be provided so that final access can be gained only through
removing this sheet secured by round head screws.
In addition, for the chambers housing the main busbars, the insulating sheet shall be of transparent
material with the word "Danger" in bold letters and the lightning symbol. The material for the transparent
sheet shall be of minimum 3mm thick clear polycarbonate with the following properties :
(a)
(b)
(c)
The busbars shall, where necessary, have built-in facilities near the load side of the incomer to enable
PowerGrid to fit their metering transformers and sealing of this compartment.
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-3
50.1.5
50.1.6
Earth Bar
A solid, tinned copper earth bar shall be provided at the base of the switchboard. The minimum crosssectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 25mm x 3mm. It shall run the length of the switchboard and
shall be easily accessible by removing the bottom front panels of the switchboard.
All earth continuity conductors of the mains cables shall be terminated by means of appropriate cable lugs
at the earth bar. The earth terminal of any cubicle of the switchboard shall also be connected to the earth
bar by an adequately-sized earth continuity conductor.
The earth bar shall be connected by a PVC insulated 70mm copper earth cable to the main earth bar in
the switch room.
50.1.7
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-4
50.1.7
50.1.8
Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be of the straight through type with suitable ratio, output and class of accuracy
for their function and shall comply with IEC 60044. Measuring current transformers shall have accuracy of
Class 1 and protective transformers shall have an accuracy of 5P10.
Groups of current transformers used on three phase systems shall have their secondary connections
starred and earthed. When measuring line current values using a common meter with a selector switch,
they shall be connected so that the current transformers shall be shorted out when not being used for
indication. This shall be carried out in the selector switch by "make before break" contacts.
50.1.9
Earth Fault
Digital Protection Relay
The digital protection relays offered shall be in compliance with the following :
Parameters
Operating temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Shock and Bump
Seismic
Insulation
Relevant
Standard
IEC 60068
IEC 60068
IEC 60255
IEC 60255
IEC 60255
IEC 60255
Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255
IEC 60255
Electrostatic Discharge
Radio Frequency
Disturbance
Fast Transient
Enclosure Protection
EMC Compliance
IEC 60255
IEC 60255
Dielectric withstand
IEC 60255
SS IEC 529
EN50081-1,2
EN50082-1,2
89/336/EEC
IEC60255
Impulse voltage
IEC60255
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Requirements
-10C to +55C
56 days at 40C and 95% RH
class I
class I
class I
2kVrms for 1 min between all terminals and earth
2kVrms for 1 min between independent circuits
1kVrms for 1 min across NO contacts
class III,
5kV 1.2/50s between all terminals and earth
without damage or flashover.
2.5kV common mode <3% deviation
1.0kV series mode <3% deviation
8kV direct without mal-operation or damage
20MHz to 1 GHz at 10V/m and <5% deviation
class IV ,4kV 5/50ns <3% deviation
IP52 minimum
Bldg Spec
Page 50-5
50.1.9
All digital relays provided shall have at least 2 binary outputs for external telemonitoring connections.
The contractor may in lieu of digital protection relay provide electromechanical protection relays complying
with the below requirements :
Electromechanical Earth Fault Relay
Earth fault protection shall be afforded by instantaneous attracted armature earth fault relay with a flag
indicator that can be reset by hand.
The earth fault relay shall operate at primary fault current not exceeding 140 Amps. Adjustment of
operating time lag shall be provided by a solid-state delay timer with a setting range of 0.1 to 1 second.
The time lag setting shall not exceed 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated.
The relay shall be flush-mounted and located in a cubicle adjacent to the incoming circuit breaker.
Electromechanical Overcurrent Relay
Overcurrent relays shall be Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) relay or Definite Time Lag (DTL)
relay as indicated in the Drawings.
IDMTL relay shall be heavily damped induction disc units with time/current characteristics in accordance
with IEC 60255-6. Its accuracy shall be calibrated at 50 Hz to fall into accuracy class 1 as given in IEC
60255-6. The relay shall be suitable for flush or project mounting and shall be tropicalised and protected
against dust, shock and vibration. It shall remain operative up to an ambient temperature of 50oC without
deterioration of its performance characteristics.
DTL relay shall have adjustable current setting of 2 Amp to 7 Amp and adjustable delay time setting of 0
second to 1 second. Setting accuracy for current shall be less than 5% at full scale and setting accuracy
for time shall be less than 10% at full scale. The relay shall be incorporated with a test button, rest button
and indicating lamp.
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-6
50.1.10
50.1.11
Tests
(i)
Type Tests
(a)
Switchboards shall be subjected to type tests to verify compliance with the requirements laid
down in the Specifications. The type tests shall include the following :
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(b)
(ii)
The type tests shall be conducted by independent testing authority which shall be a member
of the Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA) or by laboratories with either
SAC-SINGLAS accreditation or SAC-MRA partners accreditation. The type test certificate
shall be accompanied by a complete type test report which shall include amongst other
information, arrangement and details of switchboard construction, calibration oscillograms of
short circuit test, temperature rise measurements.
Phase to phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth
The above tests shall be conducted at the place of manufacture and witnessed by the SO Rep. A test
certificate by the switchboard manufacturer shall be issued on completion of the tests.
The site tests of main switchboards and setting of the protective relays shall be also witnessed by the SO
Rep.
Approval of the tests and test certificates received by the SO Rep shall not in any way affect, vary or
relieve the Contractor's obligations to supply the complete Plant and equipment assembly in accordance
with the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.
50.2
Reserved
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-7
50.3
TAP-OFF BOXES
50.3.1
General
The tap-off boxes shall be purpose made according to the details given in the Drawings and shall comply
with the following subclauses. The tap-off box shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS
accredited laboratories. A sample of the tap-off box shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
50.3.2
50.3.3
Metal Box
The metal box shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body of
the box shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the mounting plate for electrical Plant and equipment shall be of
1.5mm thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint of thickness not less than 45 microns
and shall be oven baked and dried.
The metal box shall comply with the latest edition of SS 5.
50.3.4
Phase Marking
All line-branch connectors shall be identified with their respective phase colours after completion of
installation.
50.4
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, of appropriate size, and they shall house the number of
ways and miniature circuit breakers or HRC fuses as indicated in the Drawings.
Distribution boards shall have hinged access doors with suitable dustproof seals. Each board shall have
insulated protective shields to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
Neutral and earth busbars shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor connected
to them.
Each distribution board shall have an approved circuit list fixed on the inside of the door. Labels shall also
be supplied for each distribution board screwed to the front giving board reference.
The construction of distribution boards shall comply with the requirements for the construction of
switchboards.
Miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60439.
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-8
50.5
50.6
50.7
50.8
50.9
CONTACTORS
Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase four-wire 400/230V 50 Hz supplies and fitted with 220
- 250V ac coils, unless otherwise specified. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424:Part 1.
Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The utilization category
shall be AC-3.
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-9
50.10
BLOCK CONNECTORS
All block connectors used for branching of circuits or neutral links shall be tinned brass blocks contained
within phenolic moulded cases. They shall be rated for the load current of the circuits.
The cable entries and terminals of the connector shall be of the correct size for the termination of the
conductors. Not more than one cable shall be terminated into each terminal of the connector. All exposed
parts of the connection shall be covered and sealed.
Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductor between the metal surfaces with sufficient contact
pressure but without causing damage to the conductors.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cables are properly terminated and all terminations are tightened at
each conductor. He shall make good all damages resulting from loose or faulty connections.
Section 51/.....
BLDG13/S50.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-1
SECTION 51
MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES
51.1
CABLES
51.1.1
General
Fire rated cables shall be listed under TUV SUD PSB PLS Class Class 1 or other approved equivalent
recognized by FSSD.
The cable conductors shall be annealed copper. Identification trade marks, voltage rating and crosssectional area of the conductor shall be embossed or printed on the surface of the sheathing of the cable.
Every coil or drum of cable shall have a tag as label attached giving the following information :
(a)
(b)
(c)
Length
(d)
(e)
All cables shall be new and unused and shall be delivered to the Site with the manufacturer's seals, labels
or other proof of origin intact.
All cables shall be of the size and type specified in the Drawings or Specifications.
51.1.2
PVC-Insulated Cables
All PVC-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise in the
Drawings :
51.1.3
(a)
Single core PVC-insulated non-sheathed cables shall comply with SS 358 with all the latest
amendments. The cable shall be rated at 450/750 Volts.
(b)
Single and multi-core PVC-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 502 with all the
latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
(c)
Underground cable shall be PVC/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with BS 6346. The
cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
BLDG13/S51.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-2
51.1
CABLES
51.1.4
XLPE-Insulated Cables
(CONTD)
All XLPE-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise or
indicated in the Drawings:
(a)
Single and multi-core XLPE-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 60502 with all
the latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
(b)
Underground cable shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with IEC 60502. The
cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
51.2
CABLE INSTALLATION
51.2.1
51.2.2
BLDG13/S51.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-3
51.2
CABLE INSTALLATION
(CONTD)
51.2.3
51.2.3.1
51.2.3.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Description
Impact Test
Tensile Strength
Vicat Softening Temperature
Accelerated Ageing
Standard
Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
Clause 7.4 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
ASTM D1525
ASTM D3045
Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength should not have more than 3
cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). And the drop hammer should not
penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer
tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens.
Should the specimens tested on the second series of test also fail to meet the requirements, the
whole test is to be considered as failed.
(b)
The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand
a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.
(c)
The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72C (Rate A
at 50C 5C per hour).
(d)
The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be
tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be
less than 25% of the original value.
BLDG13/S51.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-4
51.2
CABLE INSTALLATION
(CONTD)
51.2.3
51.2.3.2
(Cont'd)
(Cont'd)
All cables shall run at least 300mm clear of all other services, regardless of whether these other services
are laid parallel with or transversely to the cable trench.
Cables shall, in general, pass below all intersecting piped services which cross the cable route, unless this
would mean the cables descending to a depth of more than 2.0m. In such cases the cables shall be run
according to the directions of the SO Rep.
Where cables cross roads or carparks, or enter buildings, or elsewhere as indicated in the Drawings, they
shall be drawn into underground UPVC pipes of minimum 100mm diameter. Where such pipes are not
provided by others, they shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor all at the Contractor's cost and
expense. All UPVC pipes shall be Class "B" type in accordance to SS 141.
The installation of underground cables shall be carried out in the "loop-in" principle. All cable joints shall
be carried out at the terminal boxes and fuse cut-outs. No underground joints shall be permitted without
the prior approval of the SO Rep.
The cables shall be terminated in brass compression glands with clamping device for the armour. The
glands shall be of approved design and of the correct size.
At all cable terminations, the armouring of the cables shall be solidly bonded to earth by means of properly
designed clamps and a copper conductor of cross-sectional area not less than the requirements of CP5.
For excavation work involving existing roads, carparks, paved areas or other services such as gas and
water, the Contractor shall seek prior approval from the relevant authorities before commencing any work.
51.2.3.3
Cable Glands
All armoured PVC insulated cables shall be properly terminated with brass compression glands of suitable
size for clamping the steel wire armour. The glands shall comply with the requirements of EN 50262.
All cable glands shall be provided complete with shrouds, brass locknuts and earth tags.
The earth tags shall be solidly connected together and to the earth terminal by a PVC insulated copper
conductor of cross-section not less than the requirements of CP5.
51.2.3.4
Section 52/.....
BLDG13/S51.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-1
SECTION 52
CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS
52.1
METAL TRUNKING
52.1.1
Thickness of Body
(mm)
Thickness of Cover
(mm)
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.4
The standard depths of the trunking used shall be 50mm and 75mm. The standard length shall not be
less than 2m.
At the ground floor of the buildings, the size of the metal trunking installed from the consumer switch room
to all service ducts shall be at least 375 mm by 75 mm throughout. Inside the service ducts, the size of the
metal trunkings for the lift risers and flat risers shall be at least 150 mm by 75 mm throughout from the
ground floor level to the roof level. Lift risers shall be installed in the Lift and Mechanical (L&M) service
duct, located near the lift lobby, where such ducts are provided. Otherwise, a separate metal trunking shall
be provided inside the Electrical & Telecoms Services (E&T) duct next to the flat riser.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, the figure in percentage of the sum of the overall cross-sectional
areas of cables (including insulation and sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in
which they are installed shall not exceed 35%.
Cables shall be installed in trefoil, neatly tied together in each set and secured to the bridges at the base
of the metal trunkings. The sets shall be clearly labelled for easy identification of its usage and shall be
arranged so that the spare space is reserved on one side. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables in the metal trunking.
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-2
52.1.2
52.2
CABLE TRAY
52.2.1
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-3
52.2.1
100
150
210
300
360
450
600
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.0
The standard length of cable tray shall not be less than 2.4m.
52.2.2
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-4
52.3
PVC TRUNKING
52.3.1
General
All PVC trunking shall be of a non-flame propagating type complying with the dimensions and
performance requirements of SS 275. The PVC trunking shall be made in white base and white clip-on
cover from high impact PVC and shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2.0m or more.
All PVC trunking shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
52.3.1.1
52.3.1.2
52.3.1.3
52.3.2
52.3.2.1
General
The PVC trunking shall run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very
high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high.
For the two-compartment trunkings, the Contractor shall liaise closely with the PTL and other parties
involved such that all wiring works could proceed smoothly and the cover is installed after all the wiring
works by all other parties (where applicable) are installed. The Contractor shall not in any circumstances
be absolved from his responsibility for replacing any trunking or cover found damaged or defective.
The PVC trunking shall be installed continuously through beam openings so as to ensure segregation of
the low voltage and extra low voltage. Where this is not possible, individual PVC sleeves shall be
provided for the protection of the different voltage categories of cables. The trunking cover passing
through the beam shall be a short piece so as to facilitate removal of the cover for easy maintenance and
replacement or addition of cables.
52.3.2.2
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-5
52.3.2
52.3.2.3
52.3.2.4
52.4
METAL CONDUIT
All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge screwed steel conduits complying with BS 4568:Part 1 and shall
have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion.
All flexible steel conduit and adapters shall comply with BS 731 including all its latest amendments.
All conduit fittings shall comply with BS 4568:Part 2 and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of
the item. Bushes and plugs shall be of brass. All other fittings and components shall be galvanised and
having Class 4 protection against corrosion.
The metal boxes for the enclosure of the electrical accessories shall comply with BS 4662 with heavy
protection both inside and outside.
All conduit shall be free of rust patches or other Defect on delivery and protected from mechanical
damage and weather when stored on the Site.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
Spacer bar saddles shall be hot dip galvanised steel with a minimum thickness of 0.8mm.
Retaining screws for saddle tops shall be of brass or steel zinc plated. Electro-brass plated screw shall not
be used.
The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit.
Where the conduit has to be bent, it shall be bent using an approved bending machine such that the
conduit section shall not be altered. No more than 2 numbers of 90 degree angle bends shall be installed
in any run of conduit without a conduit box.
All metal conduits and its fittings shall pass type test.
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-6
52.5
52.6
52.6.1
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-7
52.6.1
52.6.2
Surface-Mounted
Surface-mounted conduit shall be run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
Conduits shall be fixed by means of spacer bar saddles.
Conduits boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently of the conduit.
Inspection type elbows, bends or tees shall be installed so that they can remain accessible for purposes
such as the withdrawal of existing cables or the installing of new or additional cables.
Where metal conduit has been cut or otherwise damaged, including exposed threads and connections, it
shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich epoxy to generously overlap the existing sound metal
coating.
Open ends of metal conduit shall be free from burrs and so bushed such that the cables are not damaged.
52.6.3
Concealed
Conduit buried in concrete shall have a minimum of 25mm depth of cover. Conduit buried in plaster shall
have a 5mm minimum depth of cover. Dimensions other than the above shall be subject to prior approval
by the SO Rep. For conduits to be concealed in walls, reference shall also be made from CP 5 on
locations in a wall where conduits are permitted. Where concealed electrical wiring is installed in an
electrical installation at a depth of less than 50 mm from the surface, metal conduit complying with clause
52.4 shall be used.
For conduit concealed in suspended type ceilings, the weight of the conduit shall, under no circumstances
be carried by the suspended ceiling. Suitable fixings and hangers shall be installed direct to the structure
by the Contractor only after they have been approved by the SO Rep.
Concealed conduit work in concrete or composition slabs, walls, cast in-situ and in plaster shall be offered
to the SO Rep for inspection prior to concealment. The Contractor shall give the SO Rep two days notice
that a reasonable section of concealed conduit work will be ready for inspection.
Where conduits are laid in concrete or composition slabs, cast in in-situ slabs, walls, beams, etc, the
Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in attendance whilst the pouring operation is being
carried out, in order to avoid any damage which may be caused to the conduits.
Where it is necessary to hack chases for conduit runs, the Contractor shall mark out the proposed runs at
site and shall seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing any work.
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-8
52.6.3
Concealed (Cont'd)
Immediately on completion of erection of each conduit run, all exposed terminations shall be plugged
effectively against the ingress of water and dirt.
All concealed conduit work shall be installed on the "loop-in" system. Inspection elbows or bends and tees
shall not be allowed. Where it is impracticable to set conduit, normal factory made bends may be used
but only with the approval of the SO Rep.
Draw-in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in or out of any cable; these
shall be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted from one conduit to another without
undue cramping. No joints shall be allowed in draw-in boxes under any circumstances.
Ceiling point boxes or draw-in boxes on a concealed installation shall finish flush with the underside of the
ceilings.
All conduit boxes not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be installed with a suitable cover fixed with
brass or stainless steel roundhead screws.
Where any surface mounting control gear or other Plant and equipment is to be installed in conjunction
with concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted adaptable box. The back
of the Plant and equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and the Plant and equipment
mounted so as to conceal the adaptable box.
52.6.4
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-9
52.7
INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM
The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when it
is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR).
The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMRs floor. It shall then run on the
underside/soffit of the LMRs floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking.
Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location.
Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the
LMRs floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain. Provide
a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb all round the base of the trunking to prevent water from
seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit the site
conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather.
The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it.
Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall.
Section 53/.....
BLDG13/S52.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 53-1
SECTION 53
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES
53.1
SWITCHES
Switches shall be of 6-amp rating designed specifically for use on ac inductive circuits and complying
with SS 227.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, switches shall be single-pole, one-way, rocker operated
and of white square plate pattern. Where two or more switches are to be fixed adjacent to each other,
multi-gang switches on a single cover plate shall be used.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall be decorative model listed in the HDB
Materials List and the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
Switches installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by
SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test
Mark.
53.2
SWITCH SOCKET-OUTLETS
Each power point shall be a switched socket-outlet of similar construction by the same manufacturer and
product range to match the switches.
The switched socket-outlet shall comprise a combined switch and 3-pin shuttered type outlet. The 13 amp
and 15 amp switched socket-outlet shall comply with the requirements of SS 145 and SS 472 respectively.
In addition to SS 145, 13 amp switched socket-outlets shall pass the positive break test according to
Clauses 13.11.2, 13.11.3 and 13.11.4 of BS 1363-2 or approved equivalent.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch socket outlet shall be decorative model and the
fixing screws shall be concealed.
All 13 amp and 15 amp switched socket outlets shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the
Safety Mark.
Switched socket outlets installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality
assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS
accredited laboratories Test Mark.
53.3
BLDG13/S53.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 53-2
53.4
53.5
MOULDED BOX
Moulded boxes used for casting in concrete for flush mounting of switches, switched socket outlets and
other accessories shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60670 and the dimensions as specified in BS
4662. The maximum temperature during the building process is assumed to be less than 90C.
Surface and flush mounting moulded boxes not used for casting in concrete shall comply with BS 4662.
Such boxes shall be suitable for the mounting surface.
The colour appearances and the profile of the moulded boxes shall match the switches, switched socket
outlets and other accessories.
53.6
BATTEN LAMPHOLDERS
Batten lampholders can be white moulded insulated bayonet-type complete with a skirt, two terminals and
a loop-in earth terminal. It shall be rated at 2 ampere and shall have a temperature rating of at least T1
complying with SS 125. They can also be Edison screw lampholders complying with IEC 60238 : 2008-08
(Edition 8.1).
53.7
BLDG13/S53.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 53-3
53.8
APPROVAL OF ITEMS
Switches, switched socket-outlets, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall be of
the same manufacturer and product range.
Surface mounting moulded boxes, flush mounting moulded boxes, polarised plugs, socket connectors,
batten lamp holders, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall pass type tests
conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
53.9
Section 54/.....
BLDG13/S53.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-1
SECTION 54
LUMINAIRES
54.1
GENERAL
The quantity and types of fitting shall be ascertained from the Drawings. All control gears shall be
provided together with the fittings by the lighting supplier or using approved control gears specified by the
supplier where such control gears are not provided together with the fitting.
54.2
INSTALLATION
All lighting fittings shall be securely hung or mounted as follows :
(a)
Surface and wall mounted fittings shall be secured with metal threaded studs complete with two
lock nuts and washers using approved metal studs cartridge hammer. The threaded metal stud
shall penetrate into the ceiling surface to a depth of at least 32mm. Alternatively, the light fittings
may be installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the lighting fitting
manufacturer and using the mounting accessories supplied by the manufacturer.
(b)
For pendant fittings, the downrods shall be securely fixed to the ceiling with conduit terminating
boxes.
(c)
Recessed fitting shall be supported independently. The false ceiling grid system shall not be used
to support light fittings. There shall be no noticeable ceiling deflection when the fittings are
installed in place. Steel wires tied to metal studs that are penetrated into the concrete surface at a
depth of at least 32mm shall be used to support the fittings.
The above represents the minimum requirements and the Contractor shall take further precautions if the
fittings to be mounted are exceptionally heavy such as high bay fittings. The Contractor shall ensure that
all fittings are securely mounted.
All light fittings shall be wired from a light point unless otherwise specified. A 3-core cable of 1.5 mm2 in
flexible PVC conduit shall be used for the interconnection from the lighting point to the fitting. This
connecting cable shall be suitably rated for operation at the surrounding steady state temperature in the
light fitting.
The Contractor shall ensure all metal parts of components of the fittings be effectively earthed.
54.3
LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
All luminaires shall be pre-wired and complete with lamps, control gears, lampholders, capacitors and
diffusers. The exact type and rating of the luminaires shall be as specified in the Drawings. All luminaires
shall be power factor corrected up to 0.85 lagging or higher.
All indoor fluorescent luminaires shall complete with high frequency electronic ballast and comply with SS
263 Part 3: Particular requirements for general purposes luminaires.
Where lighting luminaires are specified with two or more lamps, each of the lamps shall be provided with
its own control gears unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
All ballasts shall pass type tests. All ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be registered with SPRING
Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-2
54.4
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
54.4.1
T5 Fluorescent Lamps
(a)
All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps
Performance specifications.
(b)
The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G5 base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 16000 hours at a mortality
rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 10000 hours.
(d)
Length
(mm)
Diameter
(mm)
Output
(Lumen)
14
28
Approx. 550
Approx. 1150
16
16
1200 (@ 25 C)
2600 (@ 25 C)
Colour
Rendering
Index
80 or better
80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any
time in its life.
54.4.2
(e)
The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings.
(f)
The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against
corrosion.
(g)
The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
(h)
The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
T8 Fluorescent Lamps
(a)
All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps
Performance specifications.
(b)
The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a mortality
rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.
(d)
Length
(mm)
Diameter
(mm)
Output
(Lumen)
18
36
Approx. 600
Approx. 1200
26
26
1300 or better
3200 or better
Colour
Rendering
Index
80 or better
80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any
time in its life.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-3
54.4
54.4.2
54.5
(e)
The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings.
(f)
The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against
corrosion.
(g)
The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be either T130 or T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
(h)
The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 901 : Single-capped fluorescent lamps Performance Specifications.
(b)
The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall have a 2 pin base
complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency interference suppression capacitor.
The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a
mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.
(d)
Overall Length
(mm)
167
237
140
154
173
Base
G23
G23
G24d-1
G24d-2
G24d-3
Output
(Lumen)
600
900
900
1200
1800
Colour Rendering
Index
80 or better
80 or better
80 or better
80 or better
80 or better
The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after 2000
burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100 burning hours.
(e)
54.6
The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be 3000K unless
indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-4
54.7
54.7.1
The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard
commercially available T5 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the
limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.
(b)
The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not
allowed.
(c)
The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal
voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c. 6%
(d)
The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to
limit harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to
60khz and an output lamp stabilization section.
(e)
The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Safety requirement
Performance requirement
Harmonics requirement
Radio freq. interference
(f)
(g)
The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore
and bear the SAFETY Mark.
(h)
The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure,
component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast
within 5 seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are
not acceptable.
(i)
Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It
shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
(j)
Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light
output shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3.
(k)
Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 15%. Control gear must comply with and be
substantially better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements.
(l)
(m)
(n)
The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line
voltage transient protection.
(o)
The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps
during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.
(p)
The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds.
(q)
The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of
70C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-5
54.7
54.7.1
The ballast must comply to CELMAs Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index.
(s)
The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp (wattage)
A single electronic ballast with 1
number of 14 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2
numbers of 14 W lamps
A single electronic ballast with 1
number of 28 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2
numbers of 28 W lamps
54.7.2
Electronic Ballast
Loss (max)
3.5 W
7W
2x14 + 7 = 35 W
6W
28 + 6= 34W
12 W
2x28 + 12 = 68 W
The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard
commercially available T8 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the
limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.
(b)
The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not
allowed.
(c)
The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal
voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c. 6%
(d)
The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to
limit harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to
60khz and an output lamp stabilization section.
(e)
The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Safety requirement
Performance requirement
Harmonics requirement
Radio freq. interference
(f)
(g)
The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore
and bear the SAFETY Mark.
(h)
The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure,
component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast
within 5 seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are
not acceptable.
(i)
Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It
shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
(j)
Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light
output shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-6
54.7
54.7.2
Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 10%. Control gear must comply with and be
substantially better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements.
(l)
(m)
(n)
The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line
voltage transient protection.
(o)
The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps
during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.
(p)
The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds.
(q)
The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of
70C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.
(r)
The ballast must comply to CELMAs Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index.
(s)
The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp (wattage)
A single electronic ballast with 1
number of 18 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2
numbers of 18 W lamps
A single electronic ballast with 1
number of 36 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2
numbers of 36 W lamps
54.8
54.8.1
General
Electronic
Ballast Loss
(max)
3W
6W
2x16 + 6 = 38 W
4W
32 + 4 = 36W
8W
2x32 + 8 = 72W
16 + 3 = 19 W
All emergency lighting, emergency exit lighting and emergency lighting conversion kits shall comply with
SS CP19 and approved by FSSB.
The Contractor shall ensure that the installation complies with the requirements of SS CP19 and the Code
of Practice for Fire Precautions in Building.
54.8.2
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-7
54.8
54.8.3
54.9
low intensity AOL -- where both the main and standby AOL shall be LED low intensity type operate
on a DC power supply.
(b)
medium/high intensity AOL -- where the main AOL (medium/high intensity) operates on a AC
power supply of 230 volts with standby AOL of LED low intensity type operates on a DC power
supply.
The DC power supply shall be provided by sealed type maintenance free lead acid batteries, maintained in
an adequately charged condition by a AC/DC rectifier/charger.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-8
54.9
Time Of Operation
The AOL system shall be switched on by means of photocell connected to the Light Sensitive
Switch. It shall be switched on during hours of low visibility (eg. haze, rain and night). In the event
the photocell is faulty the system shall automatically by pass the photocell.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fault Relay
The fault relay mechanism shall send signals to activate the indicating lamps on the remote
monitoring panel in the event the following occurs:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The reset button shall be fixed at the control circuit panel. The reset button shall be unable to reset
the fault relay mechanism until the AC/DC rectifier/charger is rectified or replaced.
(e)
for a low intensity AOL, the system shall switch over to DC supply to operate the main AOL.
for medium/high intensity AOL, the system shall automatically switch over to the DC supply
and operate the standby LED AOL.
The system shall automatically switch back to the mains power supply once the mains power
supply is restored. The standby batteries should be designed to be able to last for at least 6 hours.
Remote Monitoring Panel
The remote monitoring panel shall be located in the switchroom. The remote monitoring panel shall
contain the following:
(i)
1 No. of push button for lamp test (Main and Standby AOL);
(ii)
3 No. of indicating lamps for main AOL, standby AOL & fault occurence;
(iii)
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-9
54.9
54.10
All ceramic metal halide lamps shall comply with the safety requirement defined in IEC 62035.
(b)
The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
The ceramic metal halide lamps shall be clear and UV-reduced. The burning position for these
lamps shall be universal.
(d)
For luminaries without diffuser, the ceramic metal halide lamps shall have maximum protection
against shattering due to an integrated protective glass tube.
(e)
The average lamp life of the ceramic metal halide lamps shall be of 12,000 hours at a mortality rate
of 50% or better.
(f)
The ballast for 35W and 70W ceramic metal halide lamps shall be low loss type with a maximum 9
watts and 14 Watts loss at rated voltage and wattage respectively.
(g)
The lamp voltages shall be 90V for both the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamps respectively.
(h)
The maximum and minimum ignition voltage shall be 5kVs and 3.6kVs respectively.
(i)
The lamp current for the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamp shall be 0.5A & 0.98A
respectively.
(j)
The ceramic metal halide lamp shall have the following characteristics:Lamp Wattage
(W)
35
70
Output
(Lumen)
3000 or better
5800 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after
2000 burning hours shall not fall below 20% of the value indicated above.
(k)
The correlated colour temperature of the ceramic metal halide lamp shall be between 3000K and
4500K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
(l)
(m)
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-10
54.10
54.11
(CONTD)
(n)
The ceramic metal halide shall be operated with control gear with thermal protection.
(o)
The right igniter for the particular lamp type must be used to ensure reliable and safe ignition.
All T5 circular fluorescent lamps shall comply with (IEC 60901: Single -capped fluorescent lamps
Performance specifications.)
(b)
The circular fluorescent lamp shall come with 2GX13 cap base and the following information shall
be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 16000 hours at a
mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 10000 hours.
(d)
Width (mm)
(Outer/Inner)
Approx. 225/193
Approx. 300/268
Diameter
(mm)
16
16
Output
(Lumen)
Colour Rendering
Index
1800 @25 C
3200( @25C
80 or better
80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any
time in its life.
54.12
(e)
The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings.
(f)
The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against
corrosion.
(g)
The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
(h)
The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard
commercially available T5 circular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit
specified by the lamp manufacturer.
(b)
The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not
allowed.
(c)
The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal
voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c. 6%
(d)
The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to
limit harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to
60khz and an output lamp stabilization section.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-11
54.12
The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements :
(i)
Safety requirement
:
IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002
(ii)
Performance requirement
:
IEC 60929, EN 60929.
(iii)
Harmonics requirement
:
IEC 61000-3-2
(iv)
Radio freq. interference
:
CISPRI 15, EN 55015
(f)
(g)
The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore
and bear the SAFETY Mark. It shall also bear the PSB Test Mark or be under similar product
quality assurance scheme by other SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories
(h)
The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure,
component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast
within 5 seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are
not acceptable.
(i)
Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It
shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
(j)
Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light
output shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3.
(k)
Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 15%. Control gear must comply with and be
substantially better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements.
(l)
(m)
(n)
The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line
voltage transient protection.
(o)
The electronic control gear shall incorporate an over-voltage detection circuit to operate lamps
during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.
(p)
The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds.
(q)
The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of
70C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.25% per 1000 hours of operation.
(r)
The ballast must comply to CELMAs Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index.
(s)
The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp
(wattage)
A single electronic ballast with 1
number of 22 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 1
number of 40 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2
numbers of lamps (22W and 40W)
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
4W
40 + 4.0 = 44.0 W
8W
71 W
Bldg Spec
Page 54-12
54.13
54.13.1
General
The High Powered Compact Fluorescent (HPCF) lamp shall comply with the requirements of this
Specifications and Drawings.
54.13.2
The self ballasted HPCF lamp shall be able to operate on the supply voltage of 220V-240V 50Hz and
shall have the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
The operational life span of the HPCF lamp shall be of minimum 10,000 hours.
(c)
The lamp shall have low mercury content of less than 5mg and bears the Singapore Green Label.
(d)
The rating of the lamp can be either 60 or 65 watt. The maximum total system wattage shall not
exceed be 60 or 65 watt. The minimum luminous flux after 100 burning hours shall comply with the
following requirements :-
Wattage
(w)
Luminous
Lux
(Lumen)
Diameter
(MM)
Maximum
Length
(MM)
Base
Efficacy
Lumen/Watt
60 or 65
Better
than 4000
Less than
75
Less than
220
E 27
(Metal)
Better than
64
Note :
(e)
Colour
Rendering
Index
(CRI)
Better
than 80
Power
Factor
Better
than
0.9
The self ballast HPCF lamp shall be designed and type tested to comply with the minimum but not
limited to the following standards and requirement
(i)
(ii)
Performance requirement :
Selected clause of IEC 60969 : 2001
Clause 3 Dimension
Clause 5 Starting and run up
Clause 6 Lamp wattage
Clause 7 Luminous flux
Clause 8 Colour
(iii)
Other measurement :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-13
54.13
54.13.2
(Contd)
(Contd)
The type testing shall be conducted by PSB or recognised international testing body. Third party test
reports can be used for the following required tests :
(i)
(ii)
54.13.3
The HPCF lamp shall be able to operate on the supply voltage of 220V 240V 50 Hz and shall have
the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
The operational life span of the HPCF lamp shall be of minimum 10,000 hours.
(c)
The lamp shall have low mercury content of less than 5mg bearing the Singapore Green Label.
(d)
The rating of the lamp can be either 55 or 60 watt. The maximum total system wattage shall not
exceed 60 watt. The minimum luminous flux after 100 burning hours shall comply with the following
requirements :-
Wattage
(w)
Luminous
Lux
(Lumen)
Diameter
(MM)
Maximum
Length
(MM)
Base
Efficacy
Lumen/Watt
55 or 60
4000
Less than
75
Less than
220
E 27
(Metal)
Better than
64
Note :
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Colour
Rendering
Index
(CRI)
Better
than 80
Power
Factor
Better
than 0.9
Maximum length is between lamp top and E27 lamp base (reference plane to IEC
requirement)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-14
54.13
54.13.4
The Electronic Control Gear for HPCF lamp shall be able to operate on the supply voltage of 220V
240V 50 Hz and shall have the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
The operational life span of the ECG for HPCF lamp shall be of minimum 10,000 hours.
(c)
The ECG losses for the HPCF lamp shall not be more than 3 watt
(d)
The Electronic Control Gear HPCF with the lamp shall be designed and type tested to comply with the
minimum but not limited to the following standard and requirement.
(a)
(b)
Performance (including current harmonics) IEC 60929 : 2003. This test also includes ballast lumen
factor (BLF). Typically, BLF of ECG should not less than 0.95
(c)
If lamp is used with a supplied separable ECG, the applicable clauses for testing of lamp with ECG as
follows :
-
System efficacy
Measured luminous flux (lm) of lamp/system wattage (W) by
computation
Colour rendering index (Ra)
Reference to clause 1.5.7 c) of IEC 60901
Lamp colour and correlated colour temperature (K) Reference to clause 1.5.7 b) of IEC
60901
Luminous flux Reference to clause 1.5.7 a) of IEC 60901
Lumen maintenance test as necessary
EN 61000-6-1 and the basic standard surge test IEC61000-4-5 (line-earth :+/- 2KV; Lineline :+/- 1 KV)
The type testing shall be conducted by PSB or recognised international testing body. Third party
test reports can be used for the following required tests :
(i)
(ii)
54.14
54.14.1
General Requirement
The Light Emitting Diode (LED) luminaire comprising of LED module, electronic control gear and
accessories, where shown in drawings, shall be supplied, installed and commissioned for reliable
operation to light up corridor and common areas. The LED luminaire shall be able to fully withstand the
current and voltage surges from lighting strikes and the frequent switching operation of the power
supplies. The LED luminaire shall be properly selected to ensure that the functional characteristics, failure
rate, operating life span and other requirements as mentioned in this specification clause are fully met.
Each LED luminaire shall also be provided with its own electronic control gear. The electrical control gear
shall be a separate unit with its own housing in the luminaire. The electronic control gear shall be
connected to the LED component via a plug and socket connector complies with IEC 998-1 & IEC 998-21.
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-15
54.14
54.14.2
(CONTD)
The LEDs used shall be of illuminated grade LEDs manufactured by either Cree, Osram, Nichia, Philips or
other approved equivalent without infringing the Intellectual Property Patent of LED manufacturers. The
Contractor and LED luminaire manufactures shall indemnify HDB from any legal responsibilities from any
infringement of the patent right.
The LED module shall consist of a low profile high flux LED strip and with it Trademark or Mark of Origin,
Nominal Wattage, Correlated Colour Temperature and Colour Rendering Index distinctly and durable
marked.
The LED module and luminaire shall comply with test standards and performance requirements as
follows:
(a)
The LED module shall have nominal white light output that corresponds to the correlated colour
temperature (CCT) in the range of between 3000K and 6500K. The colour rendering index, the
target CCT and the tolerance shall base on latest ANSI_NEMA_ANSLG C78.377A, as listed below:
Nominal CCT (K)
3000K
4000K
5000K
6500K
The CCT for the Luminaire should comply with tolerance quadrangle as stated in the ANSI
Chromaticity Standard C78.377A.
(b)
The rated LED life L70 should be at least 50,000 hours at luminaires operating temperature of
350C.
(c)
The radiation angle of the LED shall be at least +/- 45 degree (half angle/half maximum).
(d)
(e)
(i)
IEC 62471 Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems and IEC 62471-2
Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems Part 2: Guidance on manufacturing
requirements relating to non laser optical radiation safety.
(ii)
The LED modules shall comply with IEC 62031 LED modules for general lighting Safety
specifications.
Test results shall be provided to indicate adequate thermal performance for long-term operation of
LEDs at minimum luminaires operating temperature of 350C in accordance to test condition with
Part 1of SS 263 (or IEC 60598-1). The LED junction temperature shall be maintained at or below
manufacturers recommendation.
The LED luminaire shall be of following type:
Type of
luminaire
Colour
Rendering
Index
Max System
Power (W)
Luminous Lux
(lumen)
12W
Min. 700
(for CCT @4000K/
5000K/6500K)
Min. 65
a) 2 Feet
b) 4 Feet
24W
Min. 1400
(for CCT @4000K/
5000K/6500K)
Min. 65
Application
LED Module
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
For common
corridor areas,
Staircase,
void deck and
lift lobbies
Bldg Spec
Page 54-16
54.14
.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LUMINAIRE
54.14.2
(CONTD)
(Contd)
The LED luminaire shall be pre-wired and complete with illumination-grade LEDs, heat sinks, electronic
control gear and housing. The correlated colour temperature of the LED shall be 4000K unless otherwise
indicated in drawings. The LED luminaire shall be resistant to shock and vibration. Light fixture shall
consist of anti-glare frosted front cover for uniformity light distribution
The LED luminaire housing shall have the following features:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The surface mounted LED luminaire shall comply with SS263 Part 3 (and IEC 60598-2-1) Particular
requirements for fixed general purpose luminaires, used together with SS 263 Part 1 (and IEC 60598-1).
The LED module shall be provided with minimum IP rating of 54.
The failure rate of the completely assembled LED luminaires (inclusive of the LEDs, heat sinks, diffuser,
electronic control gear and housing) shall not be more than 5% per 10,000 hours of operation. A failure is
deemed to have occurred if the luminaires malfunctions or does not meet any requirements in the
specifications.
The luminaire is customized in design for use in HDB projects and shall be non-proprietary.
The material and body of the luminaire shall comply with test standards and performance as follows:
(a)
electro-galvanised coating of min. 1 micro on steel metal of thickness gauge 22 or 0.8mm +/0.05mm.
(b)
(c)
Material Powder Coating
1
ISO 6272-2
2
ISO 2409
3
ISO 1519
4
ASTM D3363
5
ISO 9227
6
ISO 6270
7
ISO 11341
8
ISO 2808
54.14.3
Impact Resistance
Cross-cut adhesion
Bend Test
Pencil Hardness Test
Salt Spray Test duration 500 hrs
Humidity test, 1000 hrs
Simulated light exposure test duration 1000 hrs
Dry firm thickness of powder coating
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
IEC 62384: DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules Performance
requirements.
IEC 61347 Part 2-13; Particular requirements for DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for
LED modules.
IEC 61547 EMC Immunity Requirements.
IEC 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 3: Limits Section 2: Limits for
Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Less Than 16A per Phase)
IEC 61000-3-3 Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public lowvoltage supply systems, for equipment with rated current less than or equal 16A per phase
and not subject to conditional connection.
CISPR 15 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of
electrical lighting and similar equipment.
Bldg Spec
Page 54-17
54.14
54.14.3
(CONTD)
The electronic control gears shall be suitable for use of AC supplies 220 - 240V at 50Hz. It shall be
designed for SELV voltage and constant current for LED operation. The electronic control gear shall be
provided with protection against short circuits, overload, over voltage, thermal overload and transient
overvoltage. It shall be of CE, ROHS compliance.
The electronic control gears shall satisfy the following requirements:
Life Span
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Power Factor
Output current
:
:
:
:
:
THD
Rated input voltage
:
:
Efficiency
The electronic control gears shall power the LED such that the LED is flicker-free.
54.14.4
54.14.5
Operate in SELV DC .
Current Consumption shall be below 50 mA.
Operation within temperature ranges of 170C to 500C.
Operate in humidity greater than 90% .
Have a detection zone of 3600.
Have a detection range of 8m from ceiling mount height of 2.5m to 3m.
Have built-in features to reduce false alarms due to rapid. temperatures changes, vibration,
noises, RFI, static or lightning, insects, etc.
Be easily disabled.
Provide normally closed cover tamper.
The reset shall be automatic and adjustable from 5 to 99 seconds.
Be rated IP21.
Section 55/.....
BLDG13/S54.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 55-1
SECTION 55
EARTHING SYSTEM
55.1
55.2
EARTH ELECTRODE
55.2.1
General
The Contractor shall install a minimum of 2 earth electrodes for the earthing system. Each earth electrode
shall comprise two sections of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, steel earth rods suitably coupled to
form a continuous 3.6m length.
Earth rods shall be driven into the ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. During the driving
process, the Contractor shall fit an appropriate driving accessory in order to ensure that there is no
damage to the top of the electrode. The two electrodes shall be connected to the main earth bar and
interconnected by 25mm by 3mm copper tape, forming a loop. Copper tape shall be connected to the
electrode with purpose made clamp complying with SS 322.
Parallel connected earth electrodes shall be spaced at a horizontal distance not less than the buried
length.
The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed 1 ohm. If the resistance exceeds this
value, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, drive in extra electrodes complete with
interconnecting conductors, clamps, inspection pits, to reduce and achieve the value of earthing
resistance.
55.2.2
Earth Rod
Each sectional rod shall have a copper-weld, steel earth rod with a nominal size of 16mm x 1800mm. The
copper shall be molecularly bonded into the steel core and shall have a thickness of not less than 0.25mm
at any point. The proportion of copper maintained on those parts of a sectional rod intended for
permanent connecting linkage with other sectional rods shall be such that no bare steel shall be visible
with a 4x magnifying aid.
The rod shall pass a type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories in accordance with the
requirements of the American UL 467 Standard.
55.2.3
Coupling
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze counterbored to completely enclose threads, protecting them
from damage and corrosion and exhibiting mechanical strength and electrical continuity between sections.
BLDG13/S55.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 55-2
55.2.4
55.3
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
For each electrical circuit, circuit protective conductors shall be provided. It shall be installed along the
route of its respective circuit conductors. Throughout the electrical installation, protective bonding
conductors are also required in accordance with CP 5. The cross sectional area of all such protective
conductors shall be calculated in accordance with CP 5.
All protective conductors shall be copper. Joints in protective conductors are not permitted other than at
terminal points.
Connectors between earth bars, Plant and equipment frames etc and stranded copper cables shall be
made with the appropriate lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut.
The earth terminal of all switched socket outlets shall be connected to the protective conductor of the final
sub-circuits.
For ring circuit, then the circuit protective conductors shall also be run in a ring.
An earthing point shall be provided at each lighting point and connected to the circuit protective conductor.
55.4
BLDG13/S55.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 55-3
55.4
55.5
Section 56/.....
BLDG13/S55.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 56-1
SECTION 56
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
56.1
GENERAL
The lightning protection system shall comply with the latest requirements of SS 555:and its amendments,
the Specifications and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA).
The Contractor shall ensure that the lightning protection system installed is in accordance with SS 555.
56.2
CONDUCTORS
The air termination network and down conductors shall be high conductivity aluminium tape of crosssectional area 25mm x 3mm.
Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at intervals
recommended by SS 555. The aluminium base strip shall be fastened to the masonry surface by a single
set screw and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two screws. The thickness of the
base strip and clip shall be 3mm and 1.5mm respectively.
Screws and nails for securing clips and base strips shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel. Coated
or plated steel screws or nails are not acceptable.
56.3
AIR TERMINALS
Air terminals shall be installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings or where specifically approved by
the SO Rep.
Each air terminal shall consist of a taper pointed aluminium rod, 16mm in diameter and 300mm in length.
The rod shall be tapered to a sharp point and concentric on a centre line of the air terminal point. The
distance of the taper shall be a minimum of 4 times the diameter of the rod.
Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous connection
to the connecting conductor. The base shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped construction. Points
shall be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing bolts and screws for
the air terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel.
56.4
56.5
JOINTS
Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall not be permitted without the permission of the
SO Rep. Joints shall be both electrically and mechanically sound.
Joints between aluminium strips shall be made by overlapping clean tinned joint faces and securing with a
purpose-made bolted clamp. The length of the overlap shall not be less than 25mm. Alternatively, joints
shall be made using welding process such as "Furseweld" exothermic powder ignition method or other
approved. The welding process shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
BLDG13/S56.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 56-2
56.5
JOINTS (CONTD)
For cross-over or T-joints, the aluminium strip conductors shall be secured using a purpose-made square
tape clamp similar to Furse Cat No. CT005 or other approved.
Joints between dissimilar metals shall be effected by bi-metallic joints as recommended in BS PD 6484
(commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation).
56.6
BONDING
The Contractor shall bond all exposed metal work on the roof of the building to the lightning protection
network. The metal work includes lamp poles, railings, metal roofing, gutters, flashings, etc. Bonding
leads shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the lightning protection conductors. Where dissimilar
metals are in contact, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent electrolytic corrosion. Bonding shall
be effected by means of purpose made bonding clamp complying to SS322 where applicable. In places
accessible to the public (e.g MSCP roofdeck), the bonding conductors shall be embedded or concealed to
prevent it from being removed. The bonding conductors shall be ram-setted for cases or situation where
embedding or concealing of the bonding conductors is not possible.
For external facade which are metal clad, the Contractor shall bond the metallic structure to the lightning
protection system.
56.7
DOWN CONDUCTORS
Down conductors shall be distributed round the outside walls of the building in the positions indicated in
the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. A down conductor shall follow the most direct
path possible between the air termination and the earth termination.
Each down conductor shall be connected by an earthing lead of copper tape of cross-sectional
dimensions 25mm x 3mm to an earth electrode. The copper earthing lead of the down conductor shall be
embedded within a chase subject to approval of Consultant Structural Engineer and the SO Rep. Where it
is not possible for the copper tape to be embedded/concealed, the Contractor is required to seek the
concurrence of SO Rep for alternative method of installation of the copper tape. In particular, all
conductors below ground shall be copper tape.
56.8
EARTH ELECTRODE
Earth rods and earth inspection pits shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in
Section 55 "Earthing System".
56.9
COUPLING
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze alloy. The coupling shall be of sufficient length to completely
enclose the threads of two rods coupled together to protect them from damage and corrosion. Couplings
shall be suitable for use on the earth electrodes, as recommended by the earth electrode manufacturer or
otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S56.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 56-3
56.10
RESISTANCE TO EARTH
The overall resistance to earth of the lightning protection system, before bonding to any metal services in
or on the structure shall be less than 10 ohms.
In addition, each earth termination which is not interconnected at or below ground level shall have a
resistance to earth not exceeding 20 ohms.
If it is not possible to achieve the 10 ohm overall resistance to earth or the 20 ohm resistance to earth
requirement for each individual electrode, then the Contractor shall provide up to two additional earth
electrodes per down conductor, all at the Contractor's cost and expense, to reduce the value of earth
resistance. The additional earth electrode(s) shall then be connected to the first electrode with
25mm x 3mm copper strip buried at 450mm below ground level, and shall be complete with the necessary
earthing clamp and earth inspection pit.
Where more than one earth electrode per down conductor are needed to be installed, then, where
applicable, they shall be equally spaced at a horizontal distance of not less than the buried length, in a line
parallel to the base of the structure.
56.11
COPPER CONDUCTOR
The clauses in this Section are also applicable if copper conductors are used. The conductor shall be
copper tape of dimensions 25mm x 3mm or stranded copper conductors of cross sectional area as
indicated in the Drawings. All materials used including joints and fasteners shall be copper based and
complying with SS 555.
56.12
APPROVAL OF ITEMS
The approval for earth rod and earth inspection pit shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses
specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".
Section 57/.....
BLDG13/S56.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 57-1
SECTION 57
PUBLIC LIGHTING
57.1
GENERAL
This section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation of public lighting for the
corridors, staircases, ground floor play areas and other public areas in the building blocks. Unless shown
otherwise in the Drawings, surface wiring in PVC conduit/PVC trunking shall be used.
57.2
WIRING
All wiring for public lighting shall be in 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated cables unless otherwise indicated in the
Drawings.
The conductor shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded.
All wiring shall be carried out on the 'loop-in' principle with the fixed lighting points terminated in
accordance to CP 5.
(a)
Surface Wiring
For surface wiring of public lighting, the cables shall be installed in PVC trunking in all exposed
public areas except that it shall be enclosed in a PVC conduit when passing vertically through
floors and when installed behind false ceilings. A square knock-out box or purpose made
transformation piece shall be provided at such PVC conduit and PVC trunking interface.
(b)
Concealed Wiring
Concealed wiring for public lighting shall be installed as shown in the Drawings and in accordance
with the Specifications.
(c)
57.3
TIME SWITCH
All public lighting circuit shall be controlled through a contactor energised by time switch. The time switch
shall be powered using AC supply and have programmable input and output conditions per line and have
minimum three inputs and three outputs. The output shall have a relay switching capacity of 5A at 240V
AC with independent common. The time switchs central processing unit shall be provided with built-in
real-time clock and calendar functions. The real time clock shall have an accuracy of +/- 12 minutes
maximum per year.
The data of real time clock, calendar and counter present value shall be held for a minimum of 48 hours
for prolonged power interruptions. The time switch must also be able to store its program and system
setting data to prevent loss during power failure. A LCD display with backlight that will be automatically
cut-off through adjustable settings shall be provided. Password protection function should also be included
to prevent unauthorized modification of time switch programs and settings.
BLDG13/S57.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 57-2
57.3
TIME SWITCH
(CONTD)
The time switch shall support communication via RS232C communication port to devices like computer
and personal digital assistant (PDA). It shall allow downloading of program and setting through the
RS232C port or infrared port. Windows based (windows CE for PDA) software programming tools and
drivers for the set-up of the communication between the time switch and the host devices shall be
provided.
The time switch shall have self-diagnostic functions and shall be able to display the message on its LCD
and communicate all error message back to host devices via RS232C communication port.
57.4
LUMINAIRES
Public lighting luminaires shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.
Section 58/.....
BLDG13/S57.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-1
SECTION 58
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES
58.1
58.2
58.2.1
General
Provide and fix electrical meter board to each individual unit of flat and other premises as indicated. Such
meter boards are located inside the service ducts. The construction of the meter board shall comply with
SPSL/Grid requirements and shall be approved by them for use.
The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boards shall be in accordance with the
Drawings.
The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on DINrail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.
58.2.2
Construction
Electrical meter boards shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The
body of the meter board shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the front panel shall be of 1.5mm thickness. It
shall be finished with epoxy powder paint giving a total thickness of not less than 45 micron. All coats of
paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt spray and scratch test
as specified in latest SS5. The removable front meter panel shall be mounted on hinges either on the left
or right as required according to the site conditions. Mounting holes for the fixing of electricity Kwh meter
shall be provided as indicated.
The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and compartmentalise
with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be individually lockable.
Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in case of overload or other abnormal
conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the Drawings. The electrical
meter boards shall comply with IEC 60439-1.
BLDG13/S58.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-2
58.2.2
Construction (Cont'd)
The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35C when carrying the rated current. The live
parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible in accordance with the standard
test finger specified in BS 3042.
The earth terminals shall be of sufficient size and ways for termination of all protective conductors.
Marking and suitable colour code for live, neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.
58.2.3
Type Testing
All electrical meter boards shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.. A
sample of the electrical meter board shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before they
are delivered to the Site for installation.
58.3
58.3.1
General
Provide and fix electrical meter box to each individual unit of flat and other premise as indicated.
The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boxes shall be in accordance with the
Drawings. The internal layout may be rearranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box.
The electrical meter boxes shall comply with IEC 60439-1.
The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on DINrail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.
58.3.2
Construction
The electrical meter box may be of metallic or non-metallic material or a composite of both.
Boxes of steel material shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than
1.2mm. They shall then be finished with epoxy powder paint, giving a total paint thickness of not less than
45 micron. All coats of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt
spray and scratch tests as specified in latest SS 5. Non-metallic boxes shall be of glass reinforced
polyester or other materials of adequate mechanical strength and resistant to ultra violet or chemical
deterioration.
The front edges of the box shall have rounded profile with the 4 corners rounded. A clear transparent
polycarbonate inspection window of minimum dimension 120mm x 160mm shall be provided to allow
reading of the Kwh meter. The transparent polycarbonate shall be stabilized against ultra-violet rays. A
solid teak board of at least 20mm thick shall be provided for the mounting of PUB Kwh meter. Other
alternative mounting methods shall be subject to SPSL/Grid approval. The box shall be provided with
hinged door and locking facilities. The locking device shall be opened by a special tool or by a master
key. The Contractor shall hand over to the Branch Office four numbers of such tool or master key for
each contract. All sharp edges either inside or outside the box shall be filed smooth such that it will not
cause injury to users or to workers.
The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and compartmentalised
with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be individually lockable.
Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in the case of overload or other abnormal
conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the Drawings.
The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35C when carrying the rated current. The live
parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible to the standard test finger as
specified in BS 3042.
BLDG13/S58.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-3
58.3.3
Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be of the insulated, DIN-rail mounted, feed-through type of terminal blocks with
screw clamp connections in which conductors can be connected without any special preparation. They
shall comply with the relevant requirements of SS 241, IEC 685-1 and 2, DIN 57611 and DIN 57609.
All current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of copper or other materials at least equivalent
with regard to its conductivity and resistance to corrosion. All other metallic parts shall be electroplated or
otherwise specially treated to prevent corrosion.
The terminal blocks for each of the incoming live and neutral mains shall contain integral cross-connection
facility to form a minimum of 3 way connections : 2 ways suitable for 25mm copper cables and one way
for 10mm copper cable. The terminal blocks for the earth terminal shall contain similar integral crossconnections to cater for outgoing circuit protective conductors. Marking and suitable colour code for live,
neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.
58.3.4
Type Testing
All electrical meter boxes shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. A
sample of the electrical meter box shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before they are
delivered to the Site for installation.
58.4
Electrical
CATV (Central Antenna Television System)
Telephone
Bell
Data
All flush boxes for the mounting of switches, switch-socket outlets, TV outlets, data and telephone outlets
shall be of the galvanised steel type. The galvanised steel flush boxes in the household shelters shall be
anchored to the reinforced concrete with galvanised steel 'fishtail' as shown in the Drawings, or other
approved method to tie back within the reinforced concrete. In addition, all conduits leading to the outside
of the household shelters shall be sealed at both ends for a minimum of 100mm with sealant approved for
shelter use to ensure air tightness.
58.5
BLDG13/S58.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-4
58.6
BONDING
The bonding of the water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be done in accordance with all the
relevant clauses and subclauses specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".
58.7
Section 59/.....
BLDG13/S58.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 59-1
SECTION 59
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP),
GARAGES AND PLANT ROOMS
59.1
GENERAL
The plant rooms shall include consumer switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump rooms, dustbin centres,
refuse centres, water tank rooms, generator rooms, telephone MDF rooms, telephone equipment rooms,
etc. The Contractor shall liaise with the appropriate contractors/PTL/occupiers of the plant rooms to
determine the desired positions of the isolator and consumer control unit in each plant room.
59.2
MAINS CABLES
The mains cables shall be installed in metal trunking or metal conduit from the switch room to the plant
rooms in accordance with the Drawings.
59.3
59.4
Section 60/.....
BLDG13/S59.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-1
SECTION 60
OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING
60.1
SCOPE
This Section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation, diversion and removal of
outdoor amenities lighting.
60.2
60.2.1
General
The general dimensions, arrangements and details of the columns shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Unless approved or indicated otherwise, all columns supplied shall be of the straight planted type.
The design of the lighting columns provided in the Drawings shows the minimum requirements only. The
Contractor and his QP shall be responsible for determining and ensuring that the lighting column is
structurally adequate to cater to the overall weight, brackets and the luminaire, bending moment as well as
the environment and soil conditions. Where these factors necessitate improvements or modifications to
the design of the lighting columns, the Contractor and his QP shall provide the necessary modifications or
improvements. It is deemed that the Contractor has included the cost and expense for the improvements
and modifications in the Contract Sum. The Contractor and his QP shall certify that the lighting columns
and bracket arms are designed, constructed and installed in compliance with BS 5649.
The thickness of the steel shall be as specified in the Drawings. The tolerance on the thickness of the
material shall be 10% of the thickness.
The steel tubes shall be formed either by continuous welding or one of the seamless processes. The
tubes so formed shall be free from all injurious Defect.
The circular column shall be made of steel tubes of suitable lengths swaged together when hot, or by any
other acceptable processes.
The exposed edge of each joint shall be welded and shall be chambered off at an angle of 45 degrees.
The cross-section of the column shall be nearly as circular as possible and except at joints and door
openings, the tolerance on the external diameter of the column shall be +3.0%.
The nominal height of the column as shown in the Drawings shall be the distance between the centre line
of the point of entry of the lantern and the intended ground level. The columns shall be planted in the
ground to the specified depth.
The complete column shall not deviate from straightness by more than 2mm per metre length.
A weatherproof door shall be provided with a locking device, over the door opening at the base of the
column as shown.
A baseboard made of sheet steel shall be provided and fitted in each column for the mounting of the
control gear and cut-out as shown in the Drawings.
A corrosion resistant earthing terminal as a bolt of not less than 8mm in diameter and 20mm long shall be
provided inside the column as shown in the Drawings. Two suitably sized washers and two nuts shall also
be provided.
Each planted column shall have a baseplate securely fixed to its base to prevent the column sinking into
the ground and to help prevent the column overturning. The details of the baseplate, planting depths and
buried concrete block shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-2
60.2.1
General (Cont'd)
Surface mounted columns secured on top of concrete or other structures shall comply with BS 5649
unless shown otherwise in the Drawings.
A cable entry slot of dimensions 150mm x 50mm shall be provided in the column, the lower end of the slot
being about 500mm below the intended ground level.
Other non-standard columns can be used. Such columns shall comply with the requirements of BS 5649
and approved by the SO Rep.
60.2.2
60.2.3
60.3
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-3
60.4
60.4.1
60.4.2
Bitumen Coating
One coat of bitumen paint shall be applied externally to the planted section on top of the galvanised
coating/epoxy powder coating/synthetic enamel paint. It shall be applied over the length of the buried
ground section and for a distance of 200mm above the ground level. For lighting columns not exceeding
4m heights where aesthetic appearance is of concern, then, the latter distance above the ground can be
reduced to about 100mm.
The contractor shall refer to the Standard Drawings for the various lengths of the planted sections
corresponding to the lighting column's heights so as to determine the level of the bitumen coatings.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all contamination before application of bitumen coatings.
The bitumen painting shall comply with BS3416:1975 or approved equivalent. The first coat shall be dried
before applying the second coat, which shall be applied at right angle to the first. The application for the
coating shall be the rate of approximately 6 square metres per litre. The overall dry film thickness of the
bitumen coats shall be at least 300 microns.
The sections of the lighting columns with bitumen shall be wrapped with durable plastic covering so as to
prevent the bitumen from smudging the clean sections of other columns during transportation and storage.
The plastic coverings need not be removed during the installation of the columns.
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-4
60.4.3
60.4.4
The Contractor shall provide complete details of the proposed column, base plate assembly and details of
assembly procedure etc including all dimensional and weight measurements of the column. The expected
life span of the column shall also be included in the particulars.
The Contractor shall also submit a test certificate from the manufacturer to prove conformity to the
Specification.
60.5
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-5
60.6
ERECTION
The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth and grouted as shown in the Drawings.
Excavation of trial holes to locate the buried UPVC pipes of the road crossing, cable entries to the switch
rooms including backfilling and making good shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Erection of the columns shall include excavation of pit to the required depth, concrete footing, backfilling,
concrete skirting around the base of the columns where required, reinstatement of ground surfaces, the
transportation and disposal of surplus earth from the site and the painting of identification numbers on the
external surface of the column.
For the erection of columns or laying of underground cables which affect the building apron, the
Contractor shall ensure that provisions are made before the apron is concreted. For existing apron and
other concrete surfaces, the Contractor shall include the cost and expense of reinstatement of these
surfaces in the Contract Sum. Any hacking and reinstatement shall be carried out in neat, rectangular
panels to minimise the mismatch of surface texture.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of
existing buried services, and shall bear all the cost and expense arising thereof.
The door opening of the column shall be positioned parallel to the bracket arm on the side away from the
direction of traffic.
60.7
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-6
60.8
60.9
(a)
a 25 Amp 440V cut-out with provision for looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and earth
conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of up to 25 mm2
and a 5 Amp 'HRC' fuse as shown in the Drawings.
(b)
internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5 mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 1.5 mm2 PVC (green) earth
connecting the cut-out to the luminaires.
(c)
brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass locknuts and
earth tags and support bracket as shown in the Drawings.
CONCRETE FOOTING
Concrete footing shall follow the dimensions as indicated in the Drawings for lighting column. All mass
concrete used shall compose of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in the ratio of 1:3:6.
The cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacture and shall comply in
every respect with SS 26.
Fine aggregates shall be well washed by fresh water or pit sand, free from clay, organic matters and other
impurities. It shall comply with SS 31.
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite, angular in shape, free from quarry refuse and other impurities
and comply with SS 31. It shall not exceed 40mm in size.
The ratio of water to cement in all mixes shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.6.
Concrete shall be mixed in batch-type mixers until the concrete is uniform in colour. The mixing time shall
not be less than that specified by the manufacturer. When ready mixed concrete is used, it shall conform
to SS 119 and approval shall be sought from the SO Rep.
60.10
60.11
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-7
60.12
60.13
TURFING
The Contractor shall reinstate the turfing affected by the excavation to match existing adjacent turfing
when directed by SO Rep.
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, or other extraneous matter, be friable
and porous in texture.
The clay content of the approved sub-soil which is the soil strata found just below the top soil, shall not be
greater than 45%.
The unwashed sand to be used shall be free from any debris, stones or other foreign materials.
Soil mixture shall be three parts of topsoil with one part of soil conditioner and 1 kg per m of granular
fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1 kg per m of granular
fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4).
The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to the
turf) at the time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface,
followed by the planting of fresh turf.
Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm and with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the
roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall be
Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus).
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-8
60.13
TURFING (Contd)
The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.
Close turfing shall apply to all of the turfing area to be reinstated. Turfs shall be firmly sunk into the
ground attached together without any gaps. Water turf immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.
When the level of the completed turfing work is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on
steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with garden roller or other approved means. The turfing shall
give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling shall be carried out when the turf is established after
the second grass cutting.
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for maintaining all reinstated
turfing Works as specified hereunder, provided under the Contract. All reinstated turfing Works shall be
maintained during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract and shall be maintained for a further period of six months commencing from the Date
of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the
Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this
clause). The maintenance service provided by the Contractor shall be the watering, weeding and mowing
whenever required. The Contractor shall replace dying, old or missing turves from the original source
during the Maintenance Period.
60.14
MAKING GOOD
The Contractor shall make good, patch up and paint all building damages and any openings or recess in
the building walls and other part of the structures affected by the Works to the complete satisfaction of the
SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
Section 61/.....
BLDG13/S60.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 61-1
SECTION 61
TELEVISION (TV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION
61.1
GENERAL
The Section covers the installation of the TV wiring system for cable-ready Television System connection.
The TV wiring installation shall be installed by licensed telecommunication wiring contractor to comply
with the requirements of the Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building (COPIF)
issued by Info-Communication Development Authority of Singapore (IDA), Singapore Code of Practice
(CP5) for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings and with all the statutory rules and regulations of the
Media Development Authority (MDA), Government Authorities, Statutory Authorities, current at the date of
submission of the Tender.
The Contractor shall liaise with the Cable TV system Licensee and follow up with the installation and
submission requirements for connecting to its system. The Contractor upon completion of the TV wiring
installation shall arrange for necessary inspection, testing and certification from Cable TV System
Licensee to issue certificate of cable readiness and arrange for connection to the cable TV system. There
is a cost chargeable by Cable TV system licensee for certification of cable readiness per block and all cost
for submissions, testing and obtaining certification for cable readiness from the Cable System Licensee
shall be deemed to be included in the contract sum.
61.2
61.3
THE SYSTEM
(a)
The TV wiring installation shall be cable-ready for connection to Cable Ready TV system to provide
television reception on Band I, III, IV and Band V, as well as Frequency Modulated Sound on Band
II.
(b)
The performance of Cable Ready TV system shall comply in accordance to the requirements
stipulated in the COPIF.
(c)
All components installed shall be adequately protected from theft. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the safety of the equipment before any official handover.
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
The requirement and specifications of each component part to be installed (e.g.; amplifiers, tap/tees,
splitters, connectors, splice, cables and etc) in the Cable TV system shall comply with the requirements
stipulated in the COPIF and Service Provider requirements.
61.4
THE INSTALLATION
(a)
The subscriber's outlet shall normally be mounted next to the 13-Amp socket outlets in the flat unit.
(b)
Subscriber's outlets shall be provided as shown in the Drawings. A plastic holder with the TV
system single line diagram shall be provided inside the metal enclosure housing the tee unit at the
lowest floor of each Telecom Riser duct.
(c)
Under normal circumstances, joints are not allowed for cables laid above the ground. Where joints
are inevitable, the approval of the SO Rep shall be obtained. Such joints may only be made by
using the correct type of RF couplers, cable splice or connectors and heat shrunk or cold shrunk
sleeves. The RLR of the couplers or connectors shall be better than 20 dB for both the VHF and
UHF frequencies.
(d)
The positions of the outlets, distribution conduits and trunking shown on the Drawing are only
approximate. The Contractor shall provide and install these at the exact positions as determined
at the Site by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
(e)
A label shall be provided on the front cover of every TV subscriber outlet, strictly adhering to the
format and lettering as follows:
Cable TV Ready System
Do not alter or tamper
For SCV assistance, please call Tel: 68732828
BLDG13/S61.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 61-2
61.4
The TV outlets in the household/storey shelters shall come with both TV and FM ports. All other TV
outlets shall come with TV ports only.
(g)
Metal base boxes shall be provided for TV isolators installed in household / Storey shelters. The
boxes shall be sufficiently strong to resist mechanical damages and the service conditions
specified. The boxes shall be constructed in such a way that they cannot be readily deformed. The
Contractor shall submit samples to the SO Rep for approval:
- All sheet metal threaded to receive a screw shall have sufficient thickness to allow not less than
two full threads.
- All metal boxes shall be appropriately protected against rust and corrosion. Such protection
shall apply to both the inside and outside of the boxes.
- Provision shall be made for holes in the base of the boxes for securing it to a mounting surface.
61.5
(h)
The tee units and metal boxes shall be bonded to earth complying with wiring regulation (CP5).
(i)
To prevent unnecessary disruption of power supply to the TV equipment, a label with the words
"DO NOT SWITCH OFF POWER SUPPLY FOR TV SYSTEM" shall be indicated at the main
electrical distribution board as well as at the consumer unit that provides power supply to the TV
equipment.
(j)
Metal conduits and casings shall be earthed in accordance to wiring regulation (CP5).
(k)
All the conduits and PVC trunkings shall be painted with the approved paint. The colour of the
paint shall be similar to the surroundings.
(l)
All cables in the junction or tee boxes shall be labelled according to the markings given on the
circuit diagram at the amplifier box. The floor and the last 2 digits of the unit number shall be used
for marking the cables to the apartments.
(m)
The TV/FM front plate of the isolators and the single cable TV F type connector socket shall be
made of white polycarbonate, urea or other material approved by the SO Rep and match the
colour of the electrical/telecoms outlets and having the same brand/finishes. The polycarbonate,
urea or other approved material shall be UV stabilised and shall not discolour within the Defects
Liability Period even if the outlet is exposed to sunlight.
BLDG13/S61.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 61-3
61.6
MULTIMEDIA BOX
The splitter unit(s) and the associated cables shall be housed in the multimedia box. The requirements of
the Multimedia box are as follows:
(a)
General description
The enclosure for the multimedia box shall comply with the relevant clauses of IEC/EN 60439-3 or
IEC 60670.
(i) Door
-
The door shall be flush with the base of the enclosure. Changing of the door direction to the left
and right shall be possible.
The door and its hinges shall be reliably constructed to prevent any breakage or impairment to
the use of the enclosure. The manufacturer shall provide warranty against any defects of the
hinges.
The door latch shall be recessed grip, integrated with the door, constructed with fixed handle or
hinged pattern handle flapping back into place automatically or hinged pattern handle slide side
ways and pull out to open.
(b)
Cable entry shall be knock-out type provided at the top, bottom and also at the sides for
enclosure. These knock-outs shall be removable with or without the use of an appropriate tool.
Standards
(i) Test standard
(c)
(d)
Material
(i) Enclosure
BLDG13/S61.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Plastic material shall be of resistance to abnormal heat and fire according to IEC/EN 60439-3 or
IEC60670.
Bldg Spec
Page 61-4
61.6
Metal material shall be of sheet steel, powder-coated and stove-enamelled; resistance to rust
according to IEC/EN 60439-3 or IEC 60670.
Colour shall be RAL9010 (pure white) or Southern White DuPont EP9000-9032633 or other
equivalent approved colour.
(e)
Sheet steel, electro-galvanized 1.5mm thickness with epoxy powder coating. Brackets for
splitters shall be screwed down or spot welded
PVC content
All plastic materials used for this enclosure shall be 100% free of PVC.
(f)
Halogen content
The polystyrene used shall have a very low halogen content of < 1%. All products shall conform to
the ROHS and WEEE directives.
(g)
Dimensions
The dimension of the enclosure shall be min 280mm (W) x min 375 mm (H) x min 90 mm (D). The
dimensions are indicative and samples shall be submitted for approval.
(h)
Earthing Terminal
An Earthing Terminal shall be provided in the enclosure.
61.7
61.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
61.8.1
The maintenance period shall commence from the certified completion of the block or the Employer will
assign the rights to the Cable TV Licensee/Operator who takes over the system and the Contractor shall
respond to any maintenance service calls from the latter as if from the Employer.
The maintenance service shall include all the items specified hereunder during the Maintenance Period.
(a)
BLDG13/S61.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service on a 24-hour basis everyday without
charge. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for the cost and expense of all such callback services in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall respond to the SO Rep, EMSU (ie.
ESMACO Pte Ltd and/or EM Services Pte Ltd), HDB Branch Office or other HDB appointed
agent(s) or Cable TV Licensee/Operator within 1hour of any call or messaging, failing which the SO
Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities to impose charges
against the Contractor.
Bldg Spec
Page 61-5
61.8
The Contractor shall be responsible for informing the above informant/s within one hour after a
case has been referred to him, to report on:
(i) extent and nature of repair;
(ii) when work can commence;
(iii) when repair is expected to be completed.
(c)
The Contractor shall attend to and rectify all the faults promptly. For failure of the whole system,
the Contractor shall rectify the failures within 3 hours. If the fault is due to poor injection of CableTV signals, the Contractor shall inform the Cable TV Licensee/Operator to rectify the fault.
61.8.2
The Contractor shall liaise with Cable TV Licensee/Operator for carrying out any modification work to the
TV system and emergency repairs.
61.8.3
If the contractor fails to attend an urgent call within the same day or fails to attend other faults within 24
hours or fails to rectify the faults successfully after three (3) attempts, the Employer or Cable or TV
Licensee/Operator reserves the right to engage another contractor to carry out the works. The costs of the
repairs and replacement plus the administration charges shall be borne by the Contractor and will be
deducted from any payment due to the Contractor.
61.8.4
The Contractor shall provide standby equipment to keep the system functioning when the faulty equipment
are taken back to the workshop for repairs.
61.8.5
The Contractor shall inform the Cable TV Licensee/Operator one month before the expiry of the
maintenance period for a final defects list for rectification. After the end of the maintenance period and
confirmation of no defects, the Contractor shall obtain a discharge letter from the Cable TV
Licensee/Operator to be sent to the Employer for the closing of account.
Section 62/.....
BLDG13/S61.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 62-1
SECTION 62
TELEPHONE CABLING
62.1
Scope of Work
The telephone cabling works shall be undertaken by a licensed telecommunication wiring contractor. The
Works shall comply with latest Code of Practice for Info-communications Facilities in Buildings (COPIF)
and meet the requirements of Public Basic Telecommunications Service Operators (PBTS) such as
SingTel and StarHub and in accordance with the tender Drawings. The PBTS shall install their block
telephone cabling from their main distribution frames in the Main Distribution Frame room (MDF room) or
Telephone Equipment room (TER) to their risers Distribution Points (DP) at the upper floors. The DPs are
normally located inside the Telecommunication riser.
The telephone cabling Works under the contract shall include the telephone cabling from the PBTS DP to
the internal of the residential units, and testing and commissioning of the telephone cabling works.
62.2
General
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour, tools and materials required for the telephone cabling
works. All materials for the telephone cabling works shall be as approved by IDA. It shall match the
electrical wiring accessories and of the same construction.
62.3
62.4
62.5
62.6
62.7
Sample Units
Sample units of the telephone cabling Works from the DP to the 5-pair BT and sockets inside the dwelling
unit, shall be set up for inspection and approval by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S62.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 62-2
62.8
62.9
Section 63/.....
BLDG13/S62.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-1
SECTION 63
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
63.1
SCOPE OF WORK
63.1.1
General
The work include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical fire alarm system
installation as shown in the Drawings.
The fire alarm system shall comply with SS CP 10, BS EN54 : Part 2 & 4 and the requirements of the local
authorities.
All fire alarm panels shall be approved by FSSD.
All fire alarm accessories shall be type tested.
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition,
such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary completion, supervision, testing and commissioning
of the fire alarm installation under the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the requisite certificates and
reports including the testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep, URA and BCA.
63.1.2
Layout and construction of main alarm panel and sub-alarm panel including the battery
compartment.
(b)
Technical specifications and samples (if required) of all Plant and equipment employed in the
installation.
(c)
Other information of the system as specified in the Specifications or required by the SO Rep.
Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding
the approval given by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remain liable for providing the panel and other
Plant and equipment fitting on the Site that meet the operating requirements under the said Code of
Practice and the relevant Authorities.
63.2
SYSTEM OF OPERATIONS
63.2.1
General
The fire alarm system shall be a closed circuit continuously monitored installation, comprising essentially
of a main alarm panel, triggering devices and alarm bells, fed from a continuously charged DC power
supply source.
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-2
63.2.2
Alarm Operation
The operation of one or more trigger devices shall result in an immediate fire alarm given by :
(i)
an audible/visual alarm from all the alarm bells/strobe lights situated in the entire building;
(ii)
Where a number of alarm signals are received in quick succession, or simultaneously, the Plant and
equipment shall be designed so that a general audible alarm continues or resounds as each visible
indication commences.
The alarm state shall be maintained by the main alarm panel without a continued signal from the trigger
device so that even destruction of a connection after the trigger device operates shall not discontinue the
sounding of the alarm.
63.2.3
63.2.4
Fault Warning
The fire alarm system shall be capable of detecting fault automatically whenever it develops in any of the
circuits and a fault warning shall be given by both an audible warning from a buzzer and a visible
indication in the main alarm panel. This buzzer in the main alarm panel shall be distinctive and of a
different character from fire alarm bells.
The buzzer warning shall be cancelled by a single silencing switch solely designed for this purpose and
unless the fault is rectified, the visual indication shall persist. The removal of a fault shall automatically
reset the audible fault warning circuit. The occurrence of another further fault while the buzzer is silenced
shall cause the buzzer to sound again. Similarly, the restoration of the silencing switch to its normal
position whilst a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning of the system.
Any fault warning shall not prevent a fire alarm being given at the same time. At any time, an alarm of fire
shall take priority over any other indication such as fault warning.
A distinct visible and audible fault signal shall be given on the main alarm panel in the event of any of the
following situations :
(i)
failure or disconnection of the normal power supply to the main alarm panels;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
triggering circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the
wiring between trigger devices and the main alarm panel including the removal of any trigger
devices;
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-3
63.2.4
bell circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring
between alarm bells and the main alarm panel including the removal of any bells;
(vi)
open circuit in any of the looping circuits that control the networking of general alarm, silencing and
reset function;
(vii)
rupture or disconnection of any fuse or the operation of any protective devices that would prevent a
fire alarm being given.
Should any of the above situations from (i) to (vii) (inclusive) occur in the respective sub-alarm panels a
distinct visible signal shall also be given on the main alarm panel.
63.3
63.3.1
General
The main alarm panel (MAP) shall be of the solid state electronic type. Other equivalent types may be
proposed, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep. It shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB
Product Listing Scheme Class 1.The MAP shall contain the following Plant and equipment :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
The main alarm panel shall be accommodated in a well-finished self-sustained sheet cabinet constructed
from at least 1.5mm thick hot dipped galvanised sheet steel. The cabinet housing shall be coloured bright
red and shall be fitted with a hinged, glazed door which shall be locked. All alarm zone indicators and
associated switches shall be visible behind the locked door. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly
and permanently marked on the front of the cabinet.
Two spare zones or 10% of the total zone, whichever is the higher, shall be provided for the alarm panels.
Facilities shall be provided in the main alarm panel so that easy connection to extension unit can be made
when future expansion of the main alarm panel becomes necessary.
A manual call point and an alarm bell/strobe light shall be provided adjacent to the main alarm panel.
All main alarm panel shall incorporate the automatic facilities to receive, interpret and operate the signals
from their fire fighting systems installed in the building blocks.
Letterings using reversed silk screen designating the alarm zone, the functions of the various indicators,
apparatus and switches shall be provided for every main alarm panel. All manual controls shall be clearly
labelled to indicate their functions. An information chart listing the system operating instruction shall be
fixed inside each board. Other type of labelling may also be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Approved silk screen white perspex sheet with reduced scale coloured drawings of approved sizes
showing the boundaries and locations of the alarm zone shall be provided by the Contractor and located
next to each main alarm panel, sub-alarm and repeater board.
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-4
63.3.1
General (Contd)
Locations of fire protection Plant and equipment such as main alarm panel, sub-alarm panel, portable fire
extinguishers, fire hose reels, dry riser, etc shall also be indicated on the white perspex coloured drawings
in the form of clear and distinctive symbols. Escape routes including corridor, staircase, etc shall be
clearly indicated.
The main alarm panels and sub-alarm panels of the automatic alarm system shall be provided with an
alarm verification feature complying with CP10 and approved by the relevant Authority.
63.3.2
63.3.3
63.3.4
Isolation Switch
A switch shall be provided for the deliberate isolation of each individual alarm group from the main alarm
panel common circuitry. Operation of the isolation switch shall prevent the alarm group from initiating
either alarm or fault signals and shall not impair the normal functioning of any other alarm groups. Unless
normal conditions have been restored, operation of the isolation switches shall not cause the associated
alarm groups to be isolated if the switches are operated after on alarm activation of the respective zones.
63.3.5
Indicators
Lamp indicators shall be the light emitting diode (LED) type.
The arrangement of indicator circuits and the design of the apparatus shall be such that the operation of
one indicator does not prevent the proper and separate operation of other indicators.
The operation of any alarm bell or the transmission of fire alarm signal to approved monitoring station
shall not be prevented by any faulty indicator and shall not depend on the operation of any indicator.
63.3.6
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-5
63.3.7
Sub-Alarm Panel
The construction and requirements of the sub-alarm panel shall be similar to the main alarm panel. Subalarm panel shall contain indicators together with associated switches and indicating facilities for zones.
The sub-alarm panel shall have additional facilities for transmitting a sector signal to the main alarm panel.
Where sub-alarm panel is provided in a sector of a premise, the sector in which an alarm originates shall
be shown on the main alarm panel, and the zone of origin of the alarm shall be shown on the sub-alarm
panel. Where both sector and zone indication are provided on one main alarm panel, clear differentiation
shall be made between the two functions.
63.3.8
Power Supply
The fire alarm system shall be operated on a DC power supply of 24 volts provided by sealed type
maintenance-free lead-acid batteries which are maintained in an adequately charged condition by a
230 volts AC/24 volts DC rectifier/charger.
A double-pole 230 volts rated switch with neon indicator shall be provided for the direct termination of the
incoming mains supply. This supply shall be exclusive to the fire alarm system and connected to a
separate circuit from the main switchboard and the controlling circuit breaker shall be clearly labelled
"FIRE ALARM : DO NOT SWITCH OFF".
The batteries shall be suitable for standing on open circuit or floating across a constant voltage supply and
discharging at infrequent intervals.
The capacity of the battery used to energise the alarm system shall be such that in the event of mains
failure, the battery is capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition for at least 24 hours.
Thereafter it shall be capable of supplying an additional load resulting from an alarm originating in two
separate alarm zones or groups for a period of half an hour and, if utilised to supply emergency
evacuation alarms, it shall in addition, be capable of supplying the full emergency evacuation alarm load
for a period of at least 10 minutes.
Calculations for ascertaining the capacity of the batteries and the design of the battery charging the Plant
and equipment to meet the above requirements shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
The battery terminal pillars and intercell connectors, bolts, nuts and washers used for fastening of intercell
and terminal connectors shall be made of highly conductive and corrosion-free materials.
The cell container of the battery shall be enclosed and made of rugged and self-extinguishing type plastic.
The battery shall be arranged in the compartment in such a way as to allow easy maintenance so that the
inspection of batteries shall not require removal of the cells and connections from the battery assembly.
A label containing the following information shall be securely fixed within the battery enclosure :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
63.3.9
Type of cell
Number of cells
Ampere hour capacity
Nominal voltage
Final voltage
Float voltage of battery charger
Output current and limit of battery charger
Date supplied and recommended date of replacement
Battery Charger
The battery charger shall be of constant voltage current limiting type with automatic boost charge by
voltage level sensing and capable of functioning under the following environmental conditions :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Temperature
Relative humidity
Abnormal foreign potential
:
:
:
10C to 40C
20% to 95%
Power line surge
Bldg Spec
Page 63-6
63.3.9
after the battery has been discharged from the fully charged state by supplying the load as
specified in the aforementioned requirements, and
(ii)
after recharging for a period of not more than 24 hours, the battery shall have recovered to the
extent that it shall be capable of sustaining a further discharge of supplying the same load as
specified in the aforementioned requirements.
The output voltage provided by the battery charger shall be maintained within 0.1% of the preset value
whilst operating within any combination of the conditions described below and whilst delivering a current
within the range of values required for float charging :
(i)
(ii)
Voltage
Frequency
:
:
The battery charger shall keep the battery under constant voltage charge. It shall incorporate automatic
control features with output designed to charge and maintain the cells of the battery within the limits
specified by the battery manufacturer, taking into account any quiescent load imposed by the associated
system.
The voltage output of the charger shall be adjustable to 20% of the nominal voltage. The battery
maximum allowable charging current shall be designed to suit the selected battery size at fixed current
limitation. The trimmers shall be arranged so that adjustment can be done without removing any circuit
boards or obstacles.
All electronic parts including rectifiers, power transistors and resistor shall be designed to function at the
case temperature below 75C unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
Printed circuit boards, fuses, relays and other electrical parts employed in the battery charger shall be
mounted and connected in such a way that facilitate inspection of them without any need to dismantle
them from their operating positions.
An approved self-resetting low voltage cut-off device with adjustable low voltage setting shall be installed
in the circuit between the battery and the system if the system is not self-resetting.
This under-voltage protection device shall disconnect the battery from supplying the system if the pre-set
low voltage limit as recommended by the battery manufacturer is reached.
63.4
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-7
63.5
63.6
63.7
INSTALLATION OF WIRING
Wiring of the fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate provisions of SS CP5
except as modified by the relevant clauses in SS CP10.
The wiring of the fire alarm system including the incoming supply mains shall be exclusive to the fire alarm
installation and shall be segregated from the wiring of any other circuit. Fire alarm wiring shall be spaced
at least 50mm away from any other service. The mains feed to the power supply Plant and equipment of
the fire alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of all other services and also from all other
circuits of the fire alarm system.
Each alarm zone or group shall be separately wired and indicated on the main or sub-alarm panel. Manual
call points shall be connected in an "open" circuit and an "end-of-line" resistor shall be provided to enable
line monitoring.
All wiring shall be run in steel metal conduits or metal trunking exclusive to the fire alarm system. The
Contractor shall ensure that the furthest point of the system shall have sufficient supply to facilitate the
proper functioning of the system.
No joint between terminal points shall be permitted, except in long runs, in which case the joints shall only
be made in a suitable enclosed terminal box employing screwed terminations. The box shall be labelled
"Fire Alarm Link Box".
The wiring diagram shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation commences.
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-8
63.8
SENSING CIRCUIT
A pair of voltage-free normally closed fire-resistant signal cables for sensing the activation of the fire alarm
system shall be provided from the main alarm panel to the lift machine room.
63.9
63.10
AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS
On completion of the installation and before the final inspection and testing, the Contractor shall supply to
the SO Rep three sets of suitably scaled "As-Installed" drawings of the complete fire alarm installation.
The drawings shall comprise the following :
63.11
(a)
(b)
position of main alarm panel, sub-alarm panels, battery charger, transmitter, manual call points,
detectors and bells;
(c)
(d)
(e)
technical specifications of all Plant and equipment used in the system including the manufacturer's
recommended testing requirements for detectors in-situ.
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the test report, duly completed and signed, to the SO Rep not
later than 7 days after the test.
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-9
63.12
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance of
the Fire Alarm System and an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a period of one year
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the
Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for
the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
The maintenance during the one year Maintenance Period shall include all items listed in the Schedule
For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System specified hereunder.
63.12.1
63.12.1.1
The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service between 9.00 am and 9.00 pm every
day without charge.
On Substantial Completion of the Works as certified by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall install
and maintain one one-way exchange line or apply for the radio paging service from a PTL to
receive calls from the Branch Offices. The telephone numbers allotted to the radio paging
service shall be kept strictly confidential for use by the Employer. All fees and expenses incurred
for the application, installation and maintenance of the one-way exchange line or the radio
paging service shall be borne by the Contractor.
(B)
Emergency call-back service shall be provided by the Contractor at any time and all such urgent
calls shall be attended to within the same day if the Contractor is notified before 9.00 pm. All
other calls shall be attended to within 24 hours on notification by telephone or through the radio
paging service as specified in the aforementioned requirement, otherwise the SO Rep reserves
the right to engage any other person to rectify the fault and all expenses incurred plus the
Employer's charges shall be recovered from the Contractor.
(C)
(b)
Monthly Test
For monthly tests, the following inspection and testing procedures shall be carried out
each month :
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
Simulate fire conditions on all alarm zones and reset the system to normal.
Confirm with the monitoring station when the test has been completed.
(ii)
Check battery voltage and charging current in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
(iii)
Check batteries and their terminals as specified by the manufacturer to ensure that
they are in good serviceable condition. Where applicable, examine to ensure that
the specific gravity and the level of the electrolyte in each cell is correct.
(iv)
Check condition of battery cabinet for corrosion and to ensure that batteries are
stored in a secure condition.
Bldg Spec
Page 63-10
63.12.1
63.12.1.1
(b)
(c)
Check to ensure that all indicating lights are operating correctly and replace if
faulty.
(vi)
(vii)
Disconnect the battery supply and ensure that the visual and audible fault signals
are activated at the main alarm panel.
(viii)
Simulate main power supply failure and ensure that the system will operate
correctly with the standby battery power supply (as specified in the Specifications).
(ix)
Simulate fire alarm conditions and check the output signals available to initiate the
remote auxiliary functions that is required to be in operation in the event of fire as
in accordance with the appropriate codes.
(x)
Simulate fault conditions on all alarm zones to ensure that the main alarm panel is
operating correctly.
(xi)
Check that the main alarm panel is in a clean and operative condition.
(xii)
(xiii)
Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out
satisfactorily. Record in the log book any circuit fault that require repair.
(xiv)
Check that all switches are returned to their operating position after the test.
(xv)
The person carrying out the test shall record in the log, any fault(s) identified and
that the above test has been carried out.
Annual Test
For annual tests, carry out all the inspection and testing procedures specified in the
monthly test in the aforementioned requirement and, in addition, the following shall also
be provided :
(i)
(c)
Annual Test
(ii)
(iii)
Section 64/.....
BLDG13/S63.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-1
SECTION 64
VENTILATION SYSTEM
64.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Works to be executed shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
mechanical ventilation system to food stalls, eating houses and complexes as shown in the Drawings.
The Drawings shall serve as references only. Where any part of the design contravenes with Codes and
Building Authority requirements, the onus is on the Contractor to make amendments to the design but
additional approval from the Consultant shall be sought before any deviations from the approved design
can be carried out, failing which the whole installation may not be accepted. The Contractor shall be
deemed to allow all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the foregoing
requirements.
The mechanical ventilation system shall be complete with fan, ductworks, silencers, dampers, flexible duct
connections, sound attenuation box, vibration isolators, drain traps and other accessories. The Works
shall be carried out in accordance with the following requirements and Drawings and in compliance with
the current regulations of the Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources, the Statutory Authorities
of Singapore, and the Singapore Standard CP 13:1980 on mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning in
buildings. Bifurcated fan shall be used for eating houses and food stall. All standards used in the
Specifications shall be of the latest version.
64.1.1
Related Documents
This Section shall be read in conjunction with Section 65 including all clauses and subclauses under it.
64.1.2
64.2
64.3
(a)
Provision of openings in wall, floor and roof slabs for the installation of duct as shown in Drawings.
(b)
Where the duct runs through the floor or roof slabs, a raised kerb shall be constructed around the
duct and the duct at the opening should be constructed in such a way as to prevent seepage of
water.
(c)
Patching up and making good all openings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(d)
(e)
Fan motor control panel complete with internal wiring, control Plant and equipment, indication and
motor starters.
(f)
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-2
64.4
DUCTWORK
64.4.1
General
The material, construction and installation of the ductwork shall be in accordance with this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it.
64.4.2
Materials
All ductwork shall be constructed of best quality galvanised steel sheets with thickness not less than
1.37mm unless otherwise specified.
64.4.3
Construction
All ductwork shall be constructed conforming to the dimensions and methods specified.
Horizontal dimensions of the rectangular ductwork are shown first and all dimensions shown are CLEAR
internal sizes.
Ducts which are internally insulated, shall be constructed such that the nominal dimensions which are
shown in the Drawings are clear internal sizes inside the insulation.
Ductwork shall be free of any waves or buckles. Full size standard galvanised steel sheets shall be used
and any patched, made up, or second-hand sheets shall be rejected.
Unless otherwise specified, all changes in duct size shall be made in a gradual manner with a total angle
of divergence not exceeding 15 degrees whenever possible. Bends shall be made with an inside radius
not less than the duct width in the plane of the bend. Where this is not possible due to limitation of space,
square bends may be used. All bends whether round or square shall be provided with approved turning
vanes.
All duct shall be installed without forming dips or traps which may collect residues.
A residual trap shall be provided at the base of each vertical riser with provisions for cleanout.
Ducts shall be installed with a fall in the direction of flow of not less than 1 in 200. A drain shall be
provided at the lowest point of each run of duct and as indicated in the Drawings.
Each duct system shall constitute an individual system serving only exhaust hoods on one floor.
All duct joints for the eating houses and food stall unless otherwise specified shall be of continuous
external welded constructions and all horizontal welded joints shall be at the upper edge and not the lower
edge except where any two sections of ducts are joined together.
Ducts having width of more than 450mm shall be cross broken or stiffened by approved means.
64.4.3.1
64.4.3.2
Flanges
Flanges shall be of rolled structural angles welded at the corners and shall be rivetted to the duct. Spot
welding is not acceptable. The downstream end of the duct shall be bent around the face of the flange.
The upstream end of the duct shall be inserted 50mm into the downstream duct. Flanges shall be jigdrilled or drilled to suit the minimum clearance for bolt. A 5mm rubber gasket shall be installed between
flange joints to prevent air leak.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-3
64.4.3
Construction (Cont'd)
64.4.3.3
Construction Method
The construction method shall be in accordance with the following :
Maximum Size of Duct
Metal Sheet
Gauge
Type of Bracing
Up to 300mm
26 (0.46mm)
None
301mm to 460mm
24 (0.56mm)
None
461mm to 760mm
24 (0.56mm)
761mm to 1070mm
22 (0.71mm)
1071mm to 1400mm
22 (0.71mm)
1401mm to 1530mm
20 (0.91mm)
1531mm to 2150mm
20 (0.91mm)
Ditto
Ditto
Above 2151mm
28 (1.22mm)
Ditto
Ditto
64.5
64.5.1
Splitter Dampers
Splitter dampers shall be installed at branch connections to main ducts. The dampers shall be of
sufficient size to completely close off their respective branch ducts and shall be constructed of galvanised
metal sheet of 1.5mm thick streamlined around a steel shaft of not less than 12mm diameter. The shaft
shall run in brass or nylon bearings fixed to each side of the duct. Each damper shall be fitted with a
quadrant and shall have a locking device to hold the damper in position.
The dampers shaft shall be clearly marked to show the relationship between damper blade and quadrant.
Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die cast aluminium with the words "OPEN" and "CLOSE"
cast on the quadrant.
The whole of the damper assembly shall be rigidly installed to prevent vibration and rattling.
64.5.2
Multi-Blade Dampers
Multi-blade dampers shall be of the opposed blade counter-rotating type. The dampers shall be rigidly
constructed of galvanised metal sheet of not less than 1.5mm thick. The blades shall be mounted in a
separate channel frame and shall be fitted with 12mm steel spindle at each end, carried by sealed
bearing. Bearing shall be accessible for cleaning and lubrication purposes. Each blade shall be linked by
a rigid linkage for operation and control and shall ensure complete closing of all blades in union.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-4
64.6
TURNING VANES
All 90 degree elbow ducts shall be fitted with approved turning vanes. The turning vanes and runners
shall be fabricated of the same sheet metal thickness as those used for the ducts. All turning vanes shall
be spot-welded to the ducts. Rivetting or other methods which require making of holes through the sheet
metal ducts shall not be allowed.
64.7
64.8
64.9
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-5
64.10
ACCESS PANELS
The opening shall be large enough to permit cleaning. There shall be one access panel at each change in
direction of the duct or as indicated in the Drawings.
The opening shall be at the sides of the duct. In horizontal sections the lower edge of the opening shall
be not less than 400mm from the bottom of the duct.
Access panels shall be constructed of the same material and thickness as the duct and shall not permit
the passage of grease under any conditions. Access panels shall be hinged with latches for locking.
The opening shall be at least 450mm x 450mm. When the duct is of smaller dimensions than the
opening, the panel shall be the biggest possible.
The contact planes between duct and frame of panel shall be suitably sealed with compressible and noncombustible gasket of minimum 3mm thick to give an air-tight joint.
64.11
64.12
DRAIN TAPS
Drain taps shall be provided as indicated in the Drawings and the ducts shall be pitched towards these
drain taps.
The position of drain taps shall be such that it causes minimum inconvenience to people when a duct
cleaning job is in progress.
The drain taps shall be air-tight when the exhaust system is in normal operation.
64.13
64.14
SILENCER
The Contractor shall provide where indicated in the Drawings cylindrical silencer to attenuate the noise
emanated from the fan.
The casing shall be cylindrical galvanised steel constructed with non-inflammable glass fibre infill with a
non-corroding facing material welded securely in place behind perforated galvanised steel. End rings
incorporating tapped inserts shall be provided for mounting.
The sound absorbent material shall be protected against wet conditions with an impervious covering faced
with perforated stainless steel. This covering shall ensure that the silencer can be steam cleaned.
The silencer shall operate to temperature of at least 80C. The internal diameter of the silencer shall
match that of the fan. Where indicated in the Drawings a centrally mounted absorbent pod in the airway
shall be incorporated for added attenuation. The Contractor shall submit the attenuation data which is
obtained by the test specified in BS 848 Part 2:1980.
Galvanised steel mounting feet and matching flanges corresponding to those supplied for the fan shall be
provided where necessary.
Silencer shall be of the same make as the axial flow fans.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-6
64.15
SPRING HANGERS
Spring hangers shall contain a steel spring and 7mm deflection neoprene element in series. The
neoprene element shall be moulded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box.
Spring diameters and hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree cone before contacting the hole and short
circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection.
64.16
64.16.1
Construction
The panels shall be fabricated of minimum 2mm steel pressed and rolled to shape having all joints neatly
welded and finished flush. Doors shall be screw lock hinges type with concealed hinges and secured by
approved lock. Doors shall be fitted all around with compression gaskets. The cabinets shall have
adequate ventilation louvre which is vermin proof.
64.16.2
Control Apparatus
The fan control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls and indicating devices for
manual start of all Plant and equipment :
64.16.3
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Indicating lights for the 3 phase incoming supply shall be RED, YELLOW, BLUE colour
respectively;
(ii)
Indicating lights for all motors when they are running shall be GREEN colour, stop shall be
RED and trip shall be AMBER/YELLOW.
(f)
All internal interconnecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the control
panel.
(g)
Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches instruments,
indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel system.
64.16.4
Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC fuses of Cartridge type.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-7
64.16.5
Motor Starters
The Contractor shall install the type of starter which is specified in the Drawings. Unless otherwise
approved by the SO Rep, all motors which have rating of 2.2kW or more shall be installed with reduced
voltage starters. However, the Contractor shall verify the suitable starter type based on the mechanical
and electrical characteristics of the load and motor with the consent of the SO Rep should there be any
deviation from the Specifications.
64.16.5.1
Direct-On-Line Starters
Direct-on-line starter shall be equipped with adjustable and ambient compensated (-5C to 50C) triple
pole thermal overload protections with manual reset, local start/stop push buttons, contactors, etc.
64.16.5.2
Star-Delta Starter
Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with star and delta contactors mechanically and
electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one adjustable and ambient compensated (5C to 50C) triple pole thermal overload relay and one adjustable and calibrated solid state timer with
at least 0 to 30 seconds period to control the star-delta operation. The resistor banks shall be wire
welded porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating. Resistance values shall be chosen to suit the
mechanical and electrical characteristic of the driven loads. It shall allow 3 consecutive starts followed
by 15 minutes rest.
64.16.6
Contactors
Contactors used in the starters shall be of the heavy duty type with silver or silver alloy contacts. The
contacts shall be non-sticky when de-energised and be free from undue noisy operation.
Contactors shall comply with BS 5424 and IEC 158-1, of duty AC3 double break and chatter free type.
Contactors shall be manufactured and tested to on-load factor 60% with mechanical life of over ten
million operations at 3600 operations per hour.
Contactors shall satisfactorily close at a minimum of 80% nominal voltage and thereafter remain closed
satisfactorily with a minimum of 65% nominal voltage.
64.16.7
Protective Relays
All relays shall be of approved manufacture and type tested at factory and generally conform to
BS 145/66 "Electrical Protective Relays".
64.16.8
64.16.9
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent selfcleaning action. It shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal voltage and hold satisfactorily at 65%
nominal voltage. They shall be of the plug-in type. Fixed relays are acceptable if they are a design
feature approved by the SO Rep. They shall have a minimum rating of 5 Amps inductive load for its
contacts. There shall be at least one spare contact for each auxiliary relay.
64.16.10
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-8
64.16.11
Transformer
Transformer necessary for stepping down the voltage to 24V for controls and indicating lights, shall be
provided by the Contractor. It shall be protected by a suitable current breaker. The Plant and
equipment shall be of sufficient capacity and shall be suitable for continuous operation.
64.16.12
Earthing Of Switchboard
The switchboard metal casing shall be effectively bonded to the earth bar. Contact surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned before fitting the earth connection. Cable terminations shall be made with tinned
copper or approved rustless cable lugs.
64.16.13
Push Buttons
Push buttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a
minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Push buttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled to
an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application.
Colour codes shall be :
"Start" or "On"
"Stop" or "Off"
"Reset"
:
:
:
Green
Red
Black
64.16.14
Indicator Lamps
Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation of
service, circuit and locations.
Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type with lamps rated at 6 watts. The
indication shall be clearly visible from either the sides or front.
Indicating lamps shall preferably have black bezels.
The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to
lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals; soldered terminations are unacceptable.
64.16.15
Internal Wiring
The control panel shall be completely internally wired, including all wirings between individual units and
between units and terminal strips located in a convenient and easily accessible positions.
All terminals on the strips shall be numbered and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on
the wiring and field connections diagrams permanently secured on the inside of the enclosure door.
Wiring shall be multi-strand of adequate section but in no case less than 1.0 sq. mm copper conductors,
PVC insulated, colour coded and numbered for identification. Identification shall be by means of
moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables. The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating
materials with white glossy finish and black lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil
or dampness. The numbering scheme shall be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used
for colour coding of cables.
Each wire shall be separately terminated with suitable tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of
approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type terminals
are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, only one wire shall be connected to each
terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an approved marking and
numbering system.
All control circuit wirings shall be run separately from power circuit wiring and adequately protected by
MCB units or fuses.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-9
64.16.16
Labelling
Each control panels shall be fitted with a main label mounted in a prominent position.
Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed steel screws
or in other approved manners.
Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be white lettering engraved on black traffolyte. The size of
lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Schedules shall be submitted
to the SO Rep prior to manufacture.
Labels shall designate circuit number and Plant and equipment function.
Terminal strips shall be labelled to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and
function, eg. control, indication, protection, etc.
Control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located inside and on the door of panels
shall be clearly labelled to identify circuit number, function and rating.
64.17
PAINTING (GENERAL)
Unless otherwise specified or indicated in the Drawings, all exposed metal surfaces of ductwork, Plant
and equipment, grilles, etc shall be cleaned, prime coated and painted regardless of their locations.
All painting shall be carried out in a neat, thorough and workmanlike manner by experienced tradesmen.
64.17.1
Preparation Of Surface
All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose rust, scale and dirt and shall be
free from grease and oil stains, etc. An approved solvent shall be used to remove grease, oil stains, etc
if found necessary. The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that original galvanised or rust-proof
coat shall not be damaged during surface cleaning. All steel structure after fabrication, shall be
thoroughly wire brushed at the welds and other exposed surfaces shall be immediately treated with a
coat of primer.
64.17.2
Application Of Paint
The first coat of paint shall be applied immediately after cleaning and the interval between subsequent
coats shall not be less than the paint manufacturer's recommendation.
Before despatch from the manufacturer's factory, the whole of the metal work of the fan control panels
shall receive painting and finishing with materials of approved make, composition and colour. All coats
shall be stove baked to paint manufacturer's requirements.
The application for various types of steel surfaces shall be as specified in the table below :
No. of Coats of
Etching
Primer
Lead And
Chromate Free
Primer
Gloss
Enamel
Paint
Fan Support
64.17.3
Colour Scheme
All Plant and equipment, ductwork, accessories and components shall be painted to colour approved by
the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-10
64.18
64.18.1
General
The Contractor shall perform all tests and balancing necessary to ensure that the system installed
conform to the Specifications and that such tests are adequate to demonstrate that Plant and equipment
will comply with the requirements of the Specifications.
All necessary testing and measuring Plant and equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor.
All testing and balancing shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
64.18.2
64.18.3
64.18.4
Performance Test
A performance test shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the SO Rep, to show that the
system installed fulfills all requirements of the Specifications.
64.19
MAINTENANCE PERIOD
64.19.1
Attendance To Complaints
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to any complaint calls promptly at no cost
and expense to the Employer.
After the attendance of complaint calls and completion of repair Works, two copies of the fault reports or
service chit duly signed by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the SO Rep for information and record.
64.19.2
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-11
64.19.3
Stock Of Spares
The Contractor shall keep adequate stock of spare parts for the installation and system to ensure that the
system down-time in the event of breakdown will be minimized.
64.19.4
Contractor's Obligation
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the installation or the Employer's property
during servicings or attendance to complaints through the act of negligence of his workmen except where
it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs. All damages shall be made good at Contractor's own expense.
64.19.5
Final Inspection
One month prior to the expiry of Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep for
a joint inspection on the Plant and equipment and system to note all the outstanding Defect. These Defect
shall be rectified within one month after the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
64.20
64.20.1
General
The works covered by this Clause and sub-clauses are for the supply of all Plant, Construction Equipment,
materials, appliances, labour and necessary incidentals for the service and maintenance of the
mechanical ventilation system during the Maintenance Period.
64.20.2
64.20.3
Scope Of Work
All machinery, Plant and equipment comprising the complete systems and ancillary equipment provided
under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall be serviced and
maintained strictly in accordance with the Servicing and Maintenance Schedule as specified hereunder.
The Contractor shall advise the SO Rep on any Defect in any part of the complete Plant and Ancillary
Equipment observed during the routine inspection and service, and shall repair such Defect if required to
do so by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall also provide emergency repair services during normal working hours and also during
overtime hours.
A log book shall be kept at each separate building block included in the Works, in which details of all
alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, service tests and routine attention given shall be carefully
recorded. The exact location within each building block where the log book is to be kept shall be subject
to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-12
64.20.4
64.20.4.1
Quarterly Tests
For quarterly tests, inspection and service, the Contractor shall inspect and service the complete Plant
and ancillary equipment provided under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and
subclauses under it once every three months after the certified Substantial Completion of the Works
except where otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
At each such quarterly inspection and service of the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment, the
minimum items of work detailed below shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance
requirements on Plant and equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the
manufacturers or directed by the SO Rep shall also be included :
(i)
(ii)
Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and
ancillary electrical apparatus, and
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(iii)
Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary.
Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary.
Renew electric fuses as necessary.
Clean and adjust overload elements and oil dashpot controls.
Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays and :
(a)
(b)
(c)
Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary.
Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary.
Renew electric fuses as necessary.
(iv)
Check and adjust all limit switches, time switches, sequence controllers.
(v)
(vi)
Inspect keyways, keys and belts on all pulley drives and check alignment.
(vii)
Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out satisfactorily.
Note in the log book any circuits that are subject to repair, alteration or extension.
(viii)
Check that all switches are returned to their normal operating position.
(ix)
Inspect and clean fan housing and fan motor. The fan shall be examined to ensure that there is
no build-up of dirt or other matter that would cause overheating of the motor or obstruct the
impeller track.
(x)
Inspect ductwork system. Investigate and rectify any leakage and abnormal vibrations. Tighten
any loose hangers, supports and brackets.
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
Check for presence of any excessive abnormal noise and vibration. Investigate and report on
causes and initiate remedial measures.
(xiv)
Inspect and check correct setting and function of volume control dampers, fire dampers, splitter
dampers, etc.
(xv)
Clean all grease filters and replace if necessary. The cost of the new grease filters shall be
borne by the owner.
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-13
64.20.4
64.20.4.1
Clean all oil traps after removing all the trapped oil.
(xvii) Clean all ducts, exhaust hoods, silencers and exhaust air fans.
(xviii) Submit service and maintenance report to the Employer. The report shall be written in a format
approved by the Owner and shall include but not limited to the following information.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
64.20.4.2
Performance data of all Plant and equipment such as fans, etc. The scope and extent of
performance data shall be approved by the owner but generally shall include physical
measurements such as air pressures, flow rate, speed, running current and voltage etc.
All gauge and meter readings.
Any Defect observed, their causes and remedial action taken.
Any adjustments, regulations and repairs carried out.
All work carried out in accordance with the Schedule.
64.20.5
(i)
(ii)
Tests shall be carried out to ensure that the insulation resistance to earth and between
conductors of cables and wires is satisfactory and that the resistance of associate earthcontinuity circuits is not excessive.
(iii)
Meggar test the motor winding to check the insulation resistance between phase to phase and
phase to earth.
Consumable Materials
The Contractor shall provide the following consumable materials as and when required :
(i)
All oils and grease required for lubrication of motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts.
(ii)
(iii)
All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gear, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.
(iv)
(v)
All cotton washer, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
The costs of these consumable materials shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
Section 65/.....
BLDG13/S64.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-1
SECTION 65
FANS FOR GENERAL VENTILATION
65.1
GENERAL
Values of the resistance to air flow of items of Plant and equipment, ductwork and/or the total distribution
system indicated in the contract documents are approximate. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to verify these values based on the Plant and equipment offered and provide fans capable of
delivering the required air volume when operating against the actual total system resistance. Any required
modification to the system (fan, motor, switch gear, cables etc) necessary to meet the required duties and
space conditions shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense, except where modification is brought about
by written instruction by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit fan static pressure calculation for
approval.
All fans shall be type tested to the latest British or International Standard. Fan manufacturer shall furnish
published curves showing performance that will be achieved when tested to ISO 5801:Part 1, BS 848:Part
1 and equivalent to AMCA standard 210, and sound power level data that will be achieved when tested to
BS 848:Part 2 and equivalent to AMCA standard 300-858 Part1.
Fans shall be selected at maximum efficiency from the available range of fans. Motor shall be at least
20% higher than the fan brake power absorbed at design conditions.
The high temperature fans must have successfully completed an extensive program of high temperature
tests in accordance with BS7346 Part2 and independently witnessed by authorities such as LPCB(UK),
CITCM(France) or TU(Germany).
Fans installed in the Civil Defence stations shall also comply with the CD requirements specified in the
"Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification. Equipments which are required to be
operated during CD operation shall remain fully functional after being subjected to the shock loads
specified in the "Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification.
Motors used for basement carpark exhaust fans, smoke stop lobbies, smoke control and any other high
temperature application from FSSD requirement shall be of Class 'H' insulation with minimum 250C.
temperature rating for at least 2 hours.
Motors used for ventilation fans of battery charging room town and LPG gas and areas with corrosive gas
shall be explosion proof and corrosion resistance.
65.1.1
Construction
All fans should be constructed to a fully developed design and shall be capable of withstanding the
pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. The fan shall be
provided with protective casing/guard to belts, pulleys, chains, gears couplings, projecting set screws,
keys and other rotary parts for safety of personnel. Additionally, all belt driven fans shall be capable of
running continuously at ten per cent in excess of the selected duty speed.
Each fan shall be provided with factory fabricated hot-dip galvanised support baseframe or mounting feet
to facilitate site installation. Name plates shall be of metal sheet and securely attached on each fan and
show manufacturer's name, serial and model number, date of manufacture and country of manufacture.
Unless otherwise stated, motor requirements are stipulated in clause 65.8 "Motors" including all
subclauses under it.
65.1.2
Installation
Fans shall be installed using bolts, nuts and washers with all "as cast" bearing surfaces for bolt heads and
washers counterfaced. Holding-down bolts for fans and motors shall be provided with means to prevent
the bolts turning when the nuts are tightened. Anti-vibration mountings shall be in accordance with Clause
64.5 "Dampers And Accessories" including all subclauses under it. Fans heavier than 20 kg shall be
provided with eyebolts or other purpose made lifting facilities.
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-2
65.1.3
65.1.4
Impellers
The shaft and impeller assembly of all centrifugal, axial flow and mixed flow fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. All propeller fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced where the impeller
diameter is 750mm or greater. Where indicated, limits of vibration severity shall be in accordance with BS
4675 Part 1.
65.1.5
Bearings
Fan bearings shall be of a type suitable for the installed attitude of the fan. They shall be grease/oil ball
and/or roller type or alternatively oil lubricated sleeve type. All bearing housings shall be precision located
in position and arranged so that bearings may be replaced without the need for realignment. Bearing
housings shall be protected against the ingress of dust and, where fitted with greasing points, they shall
be designed to prevent damage from over-greasing. For grease lubricated systems the bearings shall be
provided with grease in amount and quality recommended by the bearing manufacturer. For oil lubricated
systems, the housings shall be provided with an adequate reservoir of oil and shall include an accessible
drain plug. All bearings lubricators shall be located to facilitate maintenance.
65.1.6
Flexible Connectors
Flexible connectors used for duct connections to fan unit shall have temperature rating same as that of the
associated fan unit and ductwork system. Approved oil and high temperature resistance and flame
retardant flexible connectors shall be employed for kitchen exhaust fan.
65.1.7
Quality Assurance
Furnish fans that are the product of a manufacturer who has proven experience of manufacturing fans of
similar types and duties for a period of at least ten years. The manufacturer must be a company
committed to Quality Assurance and are registered to BS EN ISO 9001.94.
Reference Codes and Standard :
- ISO 5801 Method for Testing air performance.
- BS 848 Part 1 Method for Testing air performance.
- AMCA standard 210 Method for testing air performance.
- BS 848 Part2 Method of noise testing.
- AMCA standard 300 Method of noise testing.
- Fans must comply with EMC regulations.
Fans and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the effect of all stress and loads
under starting, operating and, where applicable, reversing conditions, for the installations as shown on the
Specification and/or Drawings. These capabilities shall be verified by submission of design calculations
and basis of design for all components and the complete fan assembly to the SO Rep for clearance. Whirl
tests shall be performed for all axial fans with design air delivery of l0 cubic metre per second or above for
a minimum of 15 minutes duration at 125% of maximum rated fan speed. Manufacturer shall certify and
submit the test record to the SO Rep.
Type tests shall be carried out in the manufacturer's factory for each fan type and size. Tests shall verify
fan performance such as RPM, volume flow rate, total air pressure, noise level, motor current and shall be
conducted at the design conditions stated on the Schedules except that air temperature entering fan shall
be corrected to 20C or the specified operating temperature. Manufacturer shall certified and submit the
test record.
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-3
65.1.8
Submittals
Submit certified technical data and performance ratings including but not limited to the following :
(a)
(b)
Certified performance curves for each fan Shall be plotted over the entire range from shut-off to
free delivery as static pressure, in Pa. total efficiency in percentages, and operating kW against air
flow in m3/h. Curves shall rise continuously with decreasing air flow between free delivery and 15
percent above maximum specified pressure in accordance with fan schedules.
(c)
Plotted curves or tables of the Octave band sound power level at static pressure corresponding to
specified capacity with decibels (dB re 10-12 watt) as ordinate versus octave-band center
frequency from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz as abscissa.
(d)
Certificates confirming that the fans are rated and tested in accordance with relevant standards
from BSI, AMCA or approved internationally recognised institution.
(e)
Certificates confirming that all smoke extraction fans, carpark exhaust air fans, smoke free lobby
exhaust fans, and fume extraction fans meet the high temperature requirement. Such as
certificates from LPCB(prEN12101-3 Part 3:1997 - Testing specification for powered smoke and
heat exhaust ventilation) must be submitted.
(f)
Factory type test reports for all fans. Reports shall be less than 5 years.
(g)
Submit manufacturer's quality assurance/quality control program for the entire manufacturing
process, site installation, and testing/commissioning
(h)
(i)
Submit 1-50 scale shop drawing of fan installation within fan room complete with ductwork,
vibration isolators, electrical work etc indicating clearance for maintenance purpose.
(j)
(k)
(l)
65.2
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
65.2.1
Fan Type
Centrifugal fans for high-velocity high-pressure systems shall be backward bladed type.
65.2.2
Efficiency
Unless otherwise indicated, centrifugal fans consuming more than 7.5kW at the fan shaft shall be of the
backward bladed type having a fan total efficiency not less than 75%.
65.2.3
Fan Casings
Fan casings shall be constructed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan installation. Fans other
than those in air handling units shall be provided with flanged outlet connections and spigoted inlet
connections unless otherwise indicated, except that for negative pressures greater than 500 Pa, inlet
connections shall be flanged. A plugged drain point shall be fitted at the lowest point in the fan casings.
Permanent indication shall be provided to show the correct direction of rotation of the fan impeller. Fan
casings shall be provided with removable access panels which shall incorporate purpose made air seals.
The sizes of access panels shall be such as to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of the impeller.
65.2.4
Material
Impellers shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy of riveted, welded or other approved construction, with
spiders or hubs of robust design.
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-4
65.3
65.3.1
Fan Casings
Axial flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mould steel or aluminium alloy, stiffened and braced
where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for
bolting to a base or to supports. Inlet and outlet ducts shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal. For
in-duct mounting fans the length of the fan casing shall be greater than the combined length of the
impeller(s) and motor(s) and electrical connections to the motors shall be through an external terminal box
secured to the casing.
The fan casing and mounting assemblies shall be manufactured from mild steel to BS 1449 Part 1 Grade
HR14 with integral rolled flanges. They should have minimum thickness of 2.5mm for fan diameters up to
560mm, 3mm to 5mm thickness for fan diameter 630mm and above.
65.3.2
Impellers
Impellers shall be of steel or aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and the
hub shall be formed in one piece. The hub shall be keyed to the shaft. Blades shall be aerofoil section or
laminar and capable of pitch adjustment. The pitch angle selected shall be less than 24 degrees.
Each cast aluminium impeller is X-rayed using Real Time Radiography inspection prior to assembly. The
impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and key way. Axial location shall be provided by a
collar or shoulder on the drive shaft together with a retaining washer and screw fitted into a tapped hole in
the end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in position.
65.3.3
Drive
Where axial flow fans are driven by motors external to the casings of the fans the requirements for drives
and guards shall be met. Unless otherwise indicated, a guard is not required for any part of a drive which
is inside the fan casing. An access panel with purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing;
the access panel shall be sized to facilitate maintenance.
Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor complying
with BS 4999 Part 20 for dust and weatherproof conditions.
65.3.4
Bifurcated Type
The fan shall give the specified air flow at the design static pressure and tested to BS 848 Part 1.
The Contractor shall submit performance curves for the fans. The performance curves shall show the
duty point and include data about static pressure, efficiency, power consumption and noise versus air
volume at different pitch angle. The noise data shall be based on tests carried out in accordance with BS
848:Part 2.
The fan shall be of the bifurcated axial flow design, capable of withstanding air temperature of at least
320C continuously. The aerofoil shaped impellers shall be directly coupled to a purpose design motor,
the latter being enclosed in a protection tunnel to isolate it from the oil and particle laden air. The tunnel
shall be kept ventilated by ambient air drawn in by an auxiliary fan mounted on a shaft extension at the tail
end of the motor. The external terminal box and fan casing shall be made of hot dipped galvanised steel.
The motor shall be directly coupled to the hub and placed at the discharge side of the fan. The blades
shall be securely mounted onto the hub and the pitch angle shall be adjustable at the Site.
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-5
65.3.4
65.4
PROPELLER FANS
65.4.1
Impeller
Propeller fans shall be ring mounted or diaphragm mounted as indicated. Impellers shall be of steel or
aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and hub shall be formed in one piece.
The impeller shall be designed to give maximum volume with minimum noise level and minimum power
consumption and made of Aluminised Clad Steel. The fan shall be completed with anti-vibration mounting
plate and motor side guard.
The motor should be airstream rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures up to 50C and
insulation material to Class F specification.
Wire guards made of heavy gauge steel wire or rod with all joints and crossings welded and hot-dip
galvanised after manufacture shall be fitted to impeller side or motor side or both where appropriate.
Where a fan is directly mounted to an external wall. a louvre shutter shall be furnished.
65.5
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-6
65.6
65.6.1
65.6.2
Anti-Backdraught Shutters
The unit shall be equipped with anti-backdraught shutters all around the discharge area. Shutters shall be
aluminium opened by air movement and closed by gravity. Synthetic rubber buffers shall be provided to
ensure quiet operation.
65.6.3
Impeller
65.6.3.1
Impeller Type
The impeller shall be based on propeller type design. The fan blades shall be made of pressed sheet
steel not more than four numbers. The blades and the hub shall be one continuous steel structure without
any screw, rivet and other mechanical bonding. The whole impeller shall be finished with stoved epoxy
powder paint. The impeller shall be mounted on to the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All screws
shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.
65.6.3.2
Centrifugal Type
The impeller shall be based on backward curved centrifugal design. The impeller shall be mounted onto
the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All screws shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.
65.6.3.3
Mountings
Fan support arms shall be made of mild steel finished with stoved epoxy powder paint and resiliently
mounted to the base.
65.6.3.4
Mounting Position
The unit shall be designed to operate efficiently when mounted horizontally or on a pitch roof up to an
angle of 30 degrees from a horizontal plane.
65.6.4
Motor
65.6.4.1
65.6.4.2
Flameproof Motor
Flameproof motor shall be certified to zone 2 hazard where flammable gas is likely to be present only in
abnormal conditions. All petrol storage shall be installed with flameproof motor complying with BS 4683.
The motor shall be Class F Insulation with tapped hole for cable entry.
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-7
65.7
WALL/WINDOW FANS
65.7.1
Construction
The impellers, shutters, fans ducts and outer grilles shall be moulded plastic. The outer grilles shall be
projected more than 35mm from external surface. It shall have a solenoid operated backdraught shutter
controlled by the ON/OFF switch.
65.7.2
Motor
65.7.2.1
65.7.2.2
65.8
MOTORS
65.8.1
General
All motors larger than 0.75kW (1 hp) output shall be three phases and designed for operation on
415 volts/3 phases/50 Hz AC supply.
All motors shall comply with the current regulations of the Electricity Department PUB and CP 5. The
motor power factor shall be more than 0.85.
The following types of motor shall be used for different range of power input :
Power Input
Type of Motor
Up to 30 kW
Above 30 kW
Motors shall be continuously rated to BS 5000 Pt 99 and IEC 34-1 and windings of motors shall have
Class F insulation conforming to BS 2757 and IEC Publication No. 85 and shall be specially suitable for
the high humidity experienced in Singapore. Hydroscopic materials shall not be used either as insulating
material or as winding supports. Varnishes shall be inorganic and suitable for tropical service.
Electric motors shall be adequately rated to drive the fans under all normal conditions without overloading.
Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed of water-tight design
and fitted with cable glands.
65.8.2
Motor Enclosure
Except for motors employed in driving fans, all motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with IP 54
protection according to IEC 34-5.
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-8
65.8.3
Motor Bearings
Motors up to 5kW shall have ball bearings. Motors of 5kW and above shall have roller bearings at the
driving end and deep groove ball bearings at the non-driving end.
Thrust bearings shall be incorporated where end thrusts are encountered. Bearings shall be of medium
duty rating provided with a readily accessible grease nipple and a visible grease relief valve to show when
grease charge has been changed and allow greasing without overheating while motor is operating and to
prevent over-greasing.
65.8.4
Motor Starters
Motor starter shall be provided on each phase with combined thermal overload devices with adjustable
time lags. Under-voltage protection shall not be incorporated in the motor starter.
All motor starters shall comply with the current regulations of Electricity Department, PUB.
Motor starters shall comprise the followings :
(a)
(b)
Thermal type adjustable overload relays with adjustable time lags, one in each phase line.
Starters shall be of the electro-magnetically operated type complying with BS 587 and BS 4941 and be
rated for frequent intermittent duty.
Star-Delta or auto transformer starter shall be provided for motor with a rating of 2.2kW or more.
Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with contactor, star and delta contactors mechanically and
electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one triple pole overload relay and one
adjustable and calibrated solid state timer with at least 0-30 seconds period to control the star-delta
operation. The resistor banks shall be wire wound porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating. Resistance
values shall be chosen to give high starting torque and low transient current.
Section 66/.....
BLDG13/S65.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-1
SECTION 66
REFUSE HANDLING PLANT INSTALLATION
66.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning of Refuse Handling
Plant (screw type), complete with chute connection, control panels and other necessary mechanical and
electrical parts and accessories (hereinafter referred to as "Refuse Handling Plant") for the purposes of
this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The Contractor shall engage a Specialist from the HDB Approved Refuse Handling Equipment Suppliers
to carry out the Works.
66.2
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
66.2.1
General
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the Specifications and shall be in compliance with the
requirements of MEWR and other relevant authorities in Singapore. The design concept shall incorporate
the following points :
66.2.2
(a)
one man operation, particularly by the driver of the refuse collection truck,
(b)
the Refuse Handling Plant shall be able to store minimum refuse as specified and discharge refuse
directly into refuse collection truck. The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed to operate during
the refuse collection time only,
((c)
the Refuse Handling Plant shall be incorporated with a screw to automatically discharge refuse
directly into the refuse collection truck,
(d)
the connection between the bottom of the centralised refuse chute and the Refuse Handling Plant
shall be vertical and larger than the dimension of the refuse chute opening,
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
reliability of system.
Capacity
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the Refuse Handling Plant shall have an effective
storage capacity to comply with the requirements of NEA subject to a minimum of 4.2 m3.
For Refuse Handling Plant with an effective storage capacity above 5.0 m3, the supplier and the design of
the Refuse Handling Plant shall be approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-2
66.2.3
Discharge Operation
The minimum discharge rate of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be 1 m3 per minute. The discharge
operation shall be synchronised with the sweeping cycle of the compaction blade of the refuse collection
truck such that there is no overspillage of refuse onto the floor of the refuse chamber during the discharge
process. There shall be no remnants of refuse on the discharge chute upon completion of the discharge
process.
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the complete discharge process shall be as
follows:
Effective Storage Capacity
(m3)
4.2
6.0
9.0
This is to shorten the time the refuse is exposed to the atmosphere and minimise the problem of foul
odour.
66.2.4
Drainage
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed with an effective and efficient drainage system such that
sullage water and washwater can be discharged to the gully directly. As the refuse chute is flushed once
a week, the Contractor shall consider this in his design of the drainage system. The flushing rate is
between 45 to 60 litres per minute.
66.2.5
Level Indication
A sight glass shall be installed to each Refuse Handling Plant for monitoring whether the refuse in the
Refuse Handling Plant is full.
66.2.6
Odour Control
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be so designed to contain or minimise the emanation of foul odour into
the immediate environment. This is especially important as there are apartments directly above the refuse
chamber.
66.2.7
66.2.8
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-3
66.2.9
Safety Feature
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed and built with an emergency stop facility, anti-jamming
feature and safety feature against possible damages due to accidental collision with the refuse collection
truck. It shall also be built to withstand repeated direct impact from falling refuse from the specified height
of the building without damage to it. A safety shutter shall also be fixed permanently at the top of each
unit of the Refuse Handling Plant so that the Refuse Handling Plant can be isolated from the refuse chute
for maintenance and repair purposes.
66.2.10
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the blades of the screw shaft shall be as follows:
No. of storeys of building served
Below 30
Above 30
For building above 30 storeys, the refuge handling plant screw shaft shall has a tensile strength of not less
than 6800 kg/cm2.
Other body works of Refuse Handling Plant shall be made of BS 4360 Grade 43 or its equivalent and the
thickness shall not be less than 6mm unless otherwise specified or approved by SO Rep.
All bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners shall be made of stainless steel.
All materials used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be new and of the best quality of
their respective kinds available. They shall be of correct dimensions, sizes and gauges approved by the
SO Rep and free from any Defect or damage upon completion of fabrication, assembly and delivery of the
unit.
All internal welds shall be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. All welds
shall be smoothly and securely finished. For all welds performed, if in the opinion of the SO Rep that
certain portion of the weld shall be reinforced or redone, the Contractor shall complete the Works as
instructed at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
No approval or any acceptance by the SO Rep shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the
Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the Works.
All materials used or to be used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant and the workmanship
shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the SO Rep may direct, whether at the place of
manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at such other place or places as the SO Rep may require. The
cost of any test (including destructive tests) shall be borne by the Contractor and such cost and expense
shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.
66.2.11
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-4
66.2.12
66.2.13
Nominal Size
(mm)
15
20 to 28
35 to 42
54 and above
66.3
Maximum Horizontal
Support Spacing
(mm)
600
600
1200
1200
Maximum Vertical
Support Spacing
(mm)
1200
1200
1800
1800
GEARED MOTOR
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be powered by a heavy duty 3-phase AC geared motor of minimum class
F insulation which shall be at least splashproof. The motor shall be capable of performing intermittent
duty without overheating, degradation or degeneration in torque, speed or overall performance. The
geared motor shall be at least 4kW and the service factor shall not be less than one.
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-5
66.4
ELECTRICAL WIRING
The Contractor shall run the electrical wiring from a 3-phase 20A electrical isolator provided in the
centralised refuse chute chamber. All wiring run shall be continuous and new with no splices permitted.
They shall be of the correct sizes and grouped neatly. All wiring installed shall be such that the removal of
an electrical device can be made without the removal or relocation of the wiring bundles and harnesses
adjacent to the device being removed.
All wiring shall be labelled with wiring identification shown on the electrical control and wiring drawings
which shall be endorsed by an appropriate grade of EMA Licensed Electrical Worker for the whole system.
Wire labels shall be the non-metallic sleeve type or hot-stamped into the insulation.
All circuit breakers, disconnectors and switching-type terminal blocks shall be labelled according to the
electrical Drawings. All power wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS50. All wiring shall be carried in metal
conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit is to be heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (class B) complying with
BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means
of spacer bars saddled at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush. Where the
conduit is or may be in contact with any structural steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic
connection shall be made between the conduit and steel work. All conduits and trunking shall be
electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire
and copper tape in conduits/trunking. Copper earthwire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking and associated fitting shall comply with SS 249. All trunking and fittings shall be
manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and treated with epoxy powder paint
giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. Joining of trunking shall be effected by means of
sound bolts and nuts or screws. Copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be
tinned where it is bolted down.
The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number
of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB
Code of Practice CP5. All cables shall be tested with insulation testing equipment at 500V and a reading
of more than 50 mega-ohm must be obtained before the conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in floor, it shall be terminated in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the Refuse Handling Plant or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the
cables between motors and junction boxes. All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical Plant shall be
effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that
specified in Table D.2 of CP5.
66.5
CONTROL PANELS
The Refuse Handling Plant main control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls
and indicating device for automatic and manual operations.
(a)
Circuit breakers.
(b)
(c)
For automatic operation, push buttons for start, stop and emergency stop of the Refuse
Handling Plant shall only be provided; for manual operation, push buttons for individual
functions shall be provided so that independent operation can be carried out.
(d)
All necessary timers, control relays, interlocks for starters and contactors.
(e)
Approved LED indicating lights with the following colours shall be used:
(f)
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
The colour of the indicating lights for 3-phase incoming supply shall be RED, YELLOW
and BLUE respectively.
(ii)
Indicating lights for motor shall be GREEN when running, RED for trip.
All internal inter-connecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the control
panel including all necessary protection.
Bldg Spec
Page 66-6
66.5
(h)
(i)
Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches,
instruments, indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel.
(j)
(k)
All the electrical components used shall be of the HDB approved type.
The control panels shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm
thickness. It shall be adequately braced to form a rigid housing and be damp and dust proof to IP 54.
The control panels shall be located on the right side of the Refuse Handling Plant viewing from the front
and shall be mounted at an appropriate height of at least 1 m above the finished floor level. The
locations of control panels shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. A single common key
shall be used for the Auto/Off/Manual key selector switch, main control panel and fire protection system
main control panel.
A waterproof start and stop remote panel c/w indicating lights shall be installed inside and near the
entrance of the refuse chamber room to activate the refuse chute flushing system manually.
A separate fire protection system main control panel shall be provided with the following for automatic
and manual operations:
1
Programmable Logic Controller (CPU unit with 20 I/O points and expansion I/O units with 8
I/O points (DC))
Nos. 4 Amp MCBs unit for control circuit and solenoid valve
No. of printed circuit board with 1 zone heat and 2 zones smoke detector monitoring circuit
with a DC 24V power supply.
No. of waterproof start & stop button remote panel c/w indicator light.
No. of waterproof with stop buttons remote panel for cancelling fire alarm and emergency
lighting.
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
No. Red/Yellow/Blue indicator LED light to show the power supply is on.
Nos. Green indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No) detector zone
initiating circuit are in 'NORMAL' condition respectively.
Nos. Yellow indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No) detector zone
initiating circuit are in 'FAULT' condition respectively.
Nos. Red indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No.) detector zone
initiating circuit are in 'ALARM' condition respectively.
No. flashing LED light to be activated when any smoke or heat initiating circuit is in 'FAULT'
condition.
No. Green indicator LED light to show the rooftop solenoid valve is activated.
No. Green indicator LED light to show the RHP sprinkler solenoid valve is activated.
No. Green push button to 'START' the flushing of the refuse chute.
Bldg Spec
Page 66-7
66.5
No. Red push button to 'STOP' the flushing of the refuse chute.
Nos. Yellow push button to cancel flushing and alarm bell respectively.
No. of push button to disable the smoke detector alarm initiating circuit when carry out
thermal fogging.
No. Green indicator LED light to indicate the smoke detector initiating circuit in 'disabled'
mode.
No. Yellow push button for resetting the counter of the PLC inside the panel.
No. Red indicator LED light to show that the water supply been shut off.
Engraved Traffolyte labels the control panel, all push buttons, indicating lights, etc on the surface of
the control panel inner door. The enclose protection of the box shall be at least IP 65. The box shall be
made of 1.5mm thick mild steel, electro-galvanised and coated with one layer of epoxy oven-baked
paint.
The fire protection system main control panel shall be wall mounted inside the refuse chamber. The
position and location shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The alarm bell shall be located
at a location approved by the SO Rep for the maximum audio effect and the unauthorized intervention.
A cancel alarm button shall be fixed on the fire protection system control panel for cancelling the alarm
and emergency light systems. All the electrical components used shall be of the HDB approved type.
The fire protection system main control panel shall be from an approved panel manufacturer. Provisions
shall be made in the control panel to facilitate future expansion and modification of the control circuit by
reserving space for future use, etc.
66.6
PAINTING
(a)
General
All steelwork shall be painted to protect them from corrosion. All painting shall be done in
accordance with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice or their equivalents.The
paint or coating manufacturer's written recommendations with regard to mixing, painting,
application procedures and equipment, drying times, curing times and overcoating times of each
coat shall be strictly adhered to.
(b)
Surface Preparation
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease
remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust and
other contamination and foreign matters.
All weld areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and weld
splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be grounded off. All loose
rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed.
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be grit-blasted to near white metal equivalent to Swedish
Standard SIS 05 5900 1967 Sa 2 or its equivalent. Before applying the paint system, it shall be
ensured that all the steel surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned, free from all
dust, rustscales and millscales.
(c)
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
(i)
one full coat of fast drying polyamide-cured epoxy zinc phosphate primer of 50 microns dry
film thickness;
(ii)
one full coat of polyamide-cured epoxy pigmented with micaceous iron oxide of 100 microns
dry film thickness, and
(iii)
one full coat of polyamide-cured high built epoxy mastic of 100 microns dry film thickness.
Bldg Spec
Page 66-8
66.6
PAINTING (CONT'D)
(d)
Coating Specification
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(e)
66.7
66.8
66.8.1
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing
and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant by the Specialist in accordance with the terms and
conditions of the Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;
except for clause 23 "Payment" for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer
(hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses
under it). For the avoidance of doubt, notwithstanding the requirements of the said Clause 23 "Payment"
of the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for such servicing and maintenance Works during the
Maintenance Period.
66.8.2
Without prejudice to the Contractor's obligations and liabilities under the Contract, the Contractor shall
ensure that his Specialist shall carry out the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant for an
additional period of five years commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance
For Refuse Handling Plant and Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in
Appendix A43 and/or Appendix A43(TC); and A44 respectively.
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-9
66.8
(CONTD)
66.8.3
In this respect, subject to the rights of the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s)
exercising their discretion as hereinafter provided, the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist enter into
a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) as the
SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event the Specialist is to enter into a separate
maintenance agreement with such Town Council(s), the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist submit
such Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant and Conditions
Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A43(TC) and A44 respectively to
such Town Council(s). The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses including stamp fees for the
preparation and execution of the maintenance agreement.
66.8.4
In the event that the Specialist fails to enter into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer or
such other party or such Town Council(s) before the expiry of the Maintenance Period, the Employer or
such other party or such Town Council(s) shall be entitled to arrange for their own maintenance contractor
to carry out the service and maintenance and all additional costs and expenses incurred in carrying out
the same shall be recoverable from the Contractor.
66.8.5
The Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) shall have the absolute discretion of not
requiring the Contractor's Specialist to provide the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant
after the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor agrees that the Employer or such other party or such
Town Council(s) may exercise the said discretion at any time before the expiry of the Defects Liability
Period.
66.9
Section 67/.....
BLDG13/S66.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-1
SECTION 67
RESERVED
SECTION 68
RESERVED
SECTION 69
RESERVED
Section 70/.....
BLDG13/S6769.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 70-1
SECTION 70
LISTS OF APPENDICES
Appendix
A1 and/or A1(TC)
A2
Reserved
A3
Reserved
A4 and/or A4(TC)
A5 and/or A5(TC)
A6 and/or A6(TC)
Deed Of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring for Children's Playground
A7 to A10
Reserved
A11
A12
Reserved
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
BLDG13/S70.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 70-2
SECTION 70
LISTS OF APPENDICES
(CONT'D)
Appendix
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
A41
A42
A44
A45
A46
A47
A48
A49
BLDG13/S70.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1
To :
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil for
Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract
with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................
of the Contract, the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the Warranty Period) that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter
referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements
notwithstanding).
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A1.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A1.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A1.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
day of
APPENDIX A1(TC)
To :
.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil for
Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract
with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ...................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter
referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements
notwithstanding).
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A1T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151213)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1(TC)
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A1T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151213)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1(TC)
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A1T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151213)
(DPG)
day of
APPENDIX A2
APPENDIX A3
APPENDIX A2
RESERVED
APPENDIX A3
RESERVED
BLDG13/A2A3.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A4
To :
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
......................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Complete System of
Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of .......................................................................................................
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Five (5) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof, and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to any premature failure of all components of the roof system.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A4.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A4
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A4.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A4
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A4.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
day of
APPENDIX A4(TC)
To :
.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
..................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Complete System Of
Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Five (5) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof, and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to any premature failure of all components of the roof system.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A4T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A4(TC)
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A4T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A4(TC)
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A4T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
day of
APPENDIX A5
To :
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
.......................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A5.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A5.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict
between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A5.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
day of
APPENDIX A5(TC)
To :
.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of six (6) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A5T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5(TC)
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A5T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5(TC)
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A5T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
day of
APPENDIX A6
To :
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
.......................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM
Rubber Flooring For Childrens Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A6.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A6.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict
between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A6.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
day of
APPENDIX A6(TC)
To :
.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)
........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)
...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM
Rubber Flooring For Childrens Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG13/A6T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6(TC)
Page 2
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b)
they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c)
their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d)
the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)
(b)
if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.
6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG13/A6T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6(TC)
Page 3
7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20
BLDG13/A6T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
day of
BLDG13/A7A10.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 1
The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form produced in Appendix A11 (please do not re-type).
2.
The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-contractors, and
the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".
(b)
The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and
shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
BLDG13/A11.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 2
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
BLDG13/A11.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 3
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
JURISDICTION
1.
2.
The indemnity under this Policy shall not apply in respect of judgements which are not in the first instance
delivered by or obtained from a court of tribunal of competent jurisdiction within the Republic of Singapore.
(b)
BLDG13/A11.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 4
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
EXCEPTIONS
The Insurer shall not be liable in respect of :
(a)
any employee of the Insured who is not a "employee" within the meaning of the Legislation unless such
employee of the Insured is covered under this Policy by virtue of Clauses 11 and 12 of the Conditions;
(b)
any injury by accident or disease attributable to war hostilities (whether war be declared or not) invasion act
of foreign enemies rebellion revolution insurrection or military or usurped power or civil war;
(c)
any liability of whatsoever nature directly or indirectly caused by or contributed to by or arising from :
(i)
ionising radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste
from the combustion of nuclear fuel radio-active toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any
explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component
(ii)
pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds
(d)
any injury to any employee of the Insured resulting from an accident if it is proved that the injury to the
employee is directly attributable to the employee having been at the time thereof under the influence of
alcohol or a drug not prescribed by a medical practitioner unless the Insured is liable under the Legislation;
(e)
any incapacity or death resulting from a deliberate self-injury or the deliberate aggravation of an accidental
injury.
CONDITIONS
1.
This Policy and the SCHEDULE shall be read together as one contract and any word or expression to which
a specific meaning has been attached in any part of this Policy or the SCHEDULE shall bear such specific
meaning wherever it may appear.
2.
In so far as it is not prohibited by the Legislation the Insured shall at all times observe, comply and fulfil the
Terms of this Policy.
3.
The truth of the statements and answers in the application shall be conditions precedent to any liability of the
Insurer to make any payment under this Policy and shall be the basis of this contract.
4.
Every notice or communication to be given or made under this Policy shall be delivered in writing to the
Insurer.
5.
The Insured shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent accidents and disease to the Insured's
employee and shall comply with all statutory obligations and requirements.
BLDG13/A11.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 5
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
6.
(a)
In the event of the occurrence of any accident/occupational disease that may give rise to a claim
under this Policy, the Insured shall give notice of the occurrence in accordance with the time limits
set out by Legislation to the Insurer with full particulars. If the notice period is not stipulated by
legislation for a particular occurrence then notice of the occurrence shall be given to the Insurer
within 10 days of the Insured having knowledge of the same.
(b)
Every letter claim writ summons and process shall be notified or forwarded to the Insurer
immediately on receipt. Notice shall also be given to the Insurer immediately the Insured shall have
knowledge of any impending prosecution inquest or fatal inquiry in connection with any such
accident or disease.
7.
No admission offer promise or payment shall be made by or on behalf of the Insured without the written
consent of the Insurer. The Insurer shall be entitled if it so desires to take over and conduct in the Insured's
name the defence or settlement of any claim or to prosecute in the Insured's name for its own benefit any
claim for indemnity or damages or otherwise and shall have full discretion in the conduct of any proceedings
and in the settlement of any claim and the Insured shall give such information and assistance as the Insurer
may require.
8.
The Insurer may cancel this Policy by giving thirty (30) days' notice by registered letter to the Insured at his
last known address and in such event the Insurer will return to the Insured the premium paid less the actual
premium payable for the period during which the Policy had been in force subject to a minimum premium
payment of #$
by the Insured.
This Policy may be cancelled at any time by the Insured by giving seven (7) days' written notice to the
Insurer and provided no claim has arisen during the period which the Policy had been in force the Insured
shall be entitled to a return of premium subject to a minimum premium payment of #$
by
the Insured and subject to any adjustment of premium required by the terms or conditions of this Policy.
The Insurer shall notify the Principal Housing & Development Board before the cancellation of this Policy.
9.
's insurance
obligations with regard to Work Injury Compensation stated in the Contract between the Principal Housing &
Development
Board
and
.
10.
(i)
In the event of any employee employed by the within Insured or by the Insured's Contractors as
referred to in (ii) hereon or any dependant of such employee, bringing or making a claim under any
Work Injury Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law against the
Principal Housing & Development Board for personal injury or disease sustained whilst at work on
any Contract covered by this Policy which the Insured may be carrying out for the Principal Housing &
Development Board the Insurer will indemnify the said Principal Housing & Development Board
against such claim and any costs charges and expenses in respect thereof. Provided always that the
Insurer shall be entitled to have the sole conduct and control of all proceedings connected with claims
covered by this. Nothing herein shall be construed as affecting the Insured's right to recover
damages in any other way under the said Legislation.
(ii)
The indemnity herein granted is intended to cover the legal liability of the Insured to employees in the
employment of contractors performing work for the Insured while engaged in the business and
occupation in respect of which the Policy is granted but only so far as regards claims under any Work
Injury Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law.
BLDG13/A11.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 6
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
11.
In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in
the Schedule it is hereby agreed that the Insurer will not in the event of any accident or disease arising out of
and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business raise the defence that such employee
is not a person employed by way of manual labour within the meaning of the Legislation.
12.
In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in
the Schedule it is hereby agreed that the Policy is extended to indemnify the Insured in respect of the
Insured's liability at common law for any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their
employment by the Insured in the Business.
13.
All disputes or differences under this Policy shall be referred to Arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration
Act (Chapter 10) or any statutory re-enactment thereof. The making of an Award by an Arbitrator or
Arbitrators as hereinbefore specified shall be a condition precedent to any right of action against the Insurer.
14.
At any time after the happening of any accident or disease giving rise to a claim or series of claims under
this Policy the Insurer may pay to the Insured the full amount of the Insurer's liability and relinquish the
conduct of any claim defence or proceedings and the Insurer shall not be responsible for any damage loss or
liability alleged to have been caused to the Insured in consequence of any alleged act or omission of the
Insurer in connection with such claim defence or proceedings or of the Insurer relinquishing such conduct
nor shall the Insurer be liable for any costs or expenses whatsoever incurred by the Insured or any claimant
or other person after the Insurer shall have relinquished such conduct.
INTERPRETATION
1.
ALL references to "Legislation" in this Policy shall mean the Work Injury Compensation Act (Cap 354),
amendments and re-enactments thereof and any regulations made thereunder.
2.
Words used in the Policy shall have the same meanings as that defined in the Legislation.
WARRANTY
The Insured warrants that in the event of any failure by him to comply with any of the Terms of this Policy, he shall
repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the
Legislation.
PREMIUM WARRANTY CLAUSE
1.
Notwithstanding anything herein contained but subject to clause 2 hereof, it is hereby agreed and declared
that if the period of insurance is 60 days or more, any premium due must be paid and actually received in full
by the Insurer (or the intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within 60 days of the inception
date of the respective coverage under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note or effective date of
each Endorsement, if any, issued under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note.
2.
In the event that any premium due is not paid and actually received in full by the Insurer (or the intermediary
through whom this Policy was effected) within the 60-day period referred to above, then:(a)
(b)
(c)
3.
the respective cover under the Policy, Renewal Certificate, Cover Note or Endorsement is
automatically terminated immediately after the expiry of the said 60-day period;
the automatic termination of the respective cover shall be without prejudice to any liability incurred
within the said 60-day period; and
the Insurer shall be entitled to a pro-rata time on risk premium for the respective coverage subject
to a minimum of $25.00.
If the Period of Insurance is less than 60 days, any premium due must be paid and actually received in full
by the Insurer (or the intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within the Period of Insurance.
BLDG13/A11.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
To be filled in by Insurer
APPENDIX A12
APPENDIX A12
RESERVED
BLDG13/A12.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
480 Lorong 6 TOA PAYOH
HDB HUB
SINGAPORE 310480
DEFINITION
1.1
In this "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer", the following words and expressions
shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires :
(a)
"Employer"
(b)
"Materials"
(c)
"Managing Agent"
(d)
"SO Rep"
(e)
"Destination of Delivery"
or "Site"
(f)
Employers Supplier
1.2
Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
SUPPLY ARRANGEMENT
The Materials shall be supplied by the Employer inclusive of delivery to the Destination of Delivery as
requested by the Contractor and approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's delivery service shall be
provided only for Destination of Delivery within Singapore.
The Contractor shall complete Form A as attached hereafter and submit by fax to the Managing Agent as
indicated at the top of the Form. The Form must be submitted ONE WEEK before the commencement of
the Contract for all the Materials to be obtained from the Employer. No Materials will be delivered prior to
the receipt of the duly completed Form.
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 2
4
4.1
The Contractor shall submit monthly orders for each of the Materials required in separate order forms.
4.2
The monthly order forms may be obtained from Managing Agent via:
Tel
Fax
:
:
6786 1618
6786 5996
4.3
All monthly order forms shall reach the Managing Agent by the 20th of each preceding month of usage.
Late submission of the monthly orders may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport
and priority will be given to monthly orders submitted before the due date and as approved by the SO
Rep. The Contractor shall bear all consequences for late submission of monthly order forms. The
Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption to the works as a result of late submission of
monthly order forms. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working days for the processing of any late
order.
4.4
The monthly ordered quantities shall indicate the quantities of Materials that the Contractor requires based
on the projected progress of work. Notwithstanding the quantities submitted by the Contractor in the
monthly orders including any subsequent adjustment in the daily orders, the SO Rep reserves the right to
deliver the quantities which the SO Rep considers are the quantities reflective of the Contractor's work
progress and/or concrete mixes as specified or as approved by the SO Rep.
In the event that there is a discrepancy between the quantities of Materials indicated in the monthly orders
and the Form A, the latter will prevail.
In such an event, the SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the allocated quantities.
4.5
Additional orders/loads may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport. The Employer
shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption to the works as a result of additional orders. The
Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working days for the processing of any additional order.
4.6
The quantity of Materials delivered shall be determined by the Employer's weighbridges or the Employers
Suppliers weighbridges.
4.7
The Contractor shall consume at least 80% of their monthly orders. Any cancellation of the monthly
orders request greater than 20% of the monthly orders shall be made in writing and endorsed by the SO
Rep before sending to the Managing Agent. For any cancellation of the monthly orders greater than 20%
of the monthly orders without the SO Reps endorsement, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a
charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.
4.8
Additional orders for any particular month may be accepted only after the Contractor has consumed at
least 80% of the monthly ordered/allocated quantity. The Contractor must submit their written additional
order duly signed by the SO Rep before sending to the Managing Agent (Please refer to 4.4).
4.9
The Contractor shall maintain at least 3 days' stock of Materials at their Site whenever possible.
4.10
If at any time the Employers Supplier fails to supply the quantity of the Materials stated in the daily
schedule that is likely to cause disruption to the works, the Contractor shall immediately notify the SO Rep
in writing and copied to the Managing Agent within two working day and follow-up with the Managing
Agent to arrange the delivery.
5.1
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 3
5
(Contd)
5.2
The Contractor shall give at least TWO WORKING DAYS' PRIOR NOTICE for the daily delivery or
cancellation of supply. The notice shall reach the Managing Agent before 4.00pm on weekdays and
12 noon on Saturdays & the eves of public holidays.
5.3
The delivery of Materials shall be made from 8.00am to 6.00pm on Mondays to Saturdays. For any
delivery of Materials to be made after these hours, the Contractor shall be required to make his own
arrangement with the Employers Suppliers who are under no obligation to deliver after these hours.
5.4
All deliveries shall be made in full lorry loads and the Contractor shall not request delivery of partial lorry
loads in any case. In this respect, the Contractor shall note that delivery will cease at the last lorry load
before exceeding the quantity stipulated or approved in the Contract (hereinafter known as Approved
Protected Quantity). As long as the remaining quantity before exceeding the stipulated quantities are not
more than 20 tonnes, the Contractor is deemed to have met the full requirements of the Stipulated
Contract Quantity and there shall not be any cost recovery.
5.5
The Contractor shall sign and stamp the Delivery Orders with the appropriate stamp (see Table 2). If the
Contractor shall fail to observe this requirement, the SO Rep shall take appropriate action and the
Employer shall not be responsible for any resulting delay.
5.5.1
The Delivery Orders can only be stamped once. The Contractor shall inform the Managing Agent
immediately and rectify the error if the Contractor has affixed the wrong Company stamp on the Delivery
Orders. The SO Rep reserves the right to suspend delivery of Material for three (3) days if such default
happens more than three (3) times within a calendar month, or to impose a charge as specified under the
"Nuisance And Irregularities" clause on the Contractor per default including the first three (3) defaults.
The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the delivery of Material for seven (7) days if the
Contractor was found to have failed to inform the Managing Agent that they have affixed the wrong
Company stamp. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delays resulting from such suspensions.
Table 2
Different Types Of Rubber Stamps To Be Used
Information to be produced
on Contractor's Rubber Stamp
Destination of Delivery
Contract Site
1.
2.
3.
Ready-Mixed Company
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.5.2
When a Delivery Order is signed by a Contractor's Representative (whether authorised or otherwise) with
the Contractor's Company stamp, the delivery is deemed to have been made to and accepted by the
Contractor and no dispute shall be raised by the Contractor that the said Materials have not been received
and accepted by the Contractor.
5.6
The Contractor shall immediately inform and request the Managing Agent for instructions should there be
any load of Material wrongly delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall not alter any Delivery Order
without the consent of the Managing Agent. The SO Rep reserves the right to take appropriate action
against the Contractor for any unauthorised alteration of the Delivery Orders.
5.7
The Contractor may submit a report to the Managing Agent for appropriate action if the load of Material is
unloaded at a wrong place within the Site. This notwithstanding, the Contractor shall still acknowledge
receipt of the Material.
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 4
6
The quality of Materials supplied by the Employer shall comply with the Specifications in the Contract.
WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR DELIVERY TO PLACES OTHER THAN THE CONTRACT SITE
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the SO Rep for delivery of Materials to ready-mixed
companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place.
8.1
The Contractor shall provide a sketch map in the space provided in Form A, showing the location of the
Site and the stockpile areas where the respective Materials should be delivered.
8.2
The Contractor shall maintain and ensure that all access roads at the Site leading to the stockpile areas
as shown on their sketch map are accessible to the lorries of the Employers Supplier. The Contractor
shall provide all necessary assistance and facilities to the Employers Supplier.
8.3
The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the supply of Materials if the access road to the
Site is bad or muddy. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the suspension and the Contractor shall
take immediate action to make good the access roads and inform the Managing Agent accordingly before
delivery of Materials can resume. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption of the
work as a result of this aforesaid suspension.
8.4
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay any summon issued by the National Environment
Agency to the Employers Supplier(s) for muddying up public roads due to muddy access within the
Contractor's Site and the Contractor shall keep the Employer fully indemnified against such penalties and
liabilities. The Contractor is advised to employ labourers to wash the lorries of the Employer Supplier(s)
before the lorries leave the Contractor's Site.
If any load of Materials cannot, upon arrival at Site within the specified time, be unloaded due to the
absence of the Contractor's Site representative or bad access or failure to inform the Managing Agent of
any termination of the usage of ready-mix companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or
place, the load of Material will be returned to the Managing Agent. For such cases, the SO Rep reserves
the right to recover from the Contractor, the costs involved in transporting the Material and to impose a
charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.
10
SIPHONING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall not siphon Materials obtained from the Employer for his own use. Action shall be
taken by the SO Rep to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And
Irregularities" clause in the event of any such breach.
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 5
11
If the Contractor loses any Delivery Order and wishes to request for a duplicate copy of the lost Delivery
Order, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a fee of $50.00 (DOLLARS: FIFTY ONLY) per occasion.
12
METHOD OF PAYMENT
The Contractor shall pay the Employer in full for the value of Materials supplied every month at the rates
specified in the Contract. The amount owed by the Contractor shall be recoverable from the Contractor by
the Employer or may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the
Contractor.
13
The Contractor is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his workmen, agents and staff at
the Site and shall give full cooperation to the Employers Suppliers drivers in the delivery and unloading of
Materials. Any grievances should be directed to the SO Rep in writing. The Contractor shall bear all the
cost plus administrative cost for investigations and other consequential expenses, if their complaints is
proven to be unfounded.
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 6
FORM A-1
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
Manager:
Managing Agent (___________________________)
Fax: :67865996
1)
Site
Contract No.
Arch Ref
Checked By
Certified By
PARTICULARS OF CONTRACT
Contract No.
Site
2)
20mm Aggregate
(Tonne)
Concreting Sand
(Tonne)
Cement
(Tonne)
3)
Weekdays
From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.
4)
Saturdays
From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.
Contract Site
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Ready-Mixed Company
APPENDIX A13
Page 7
FORM A-2
5)
SKETCH MAP
[Separate forms MUST be used for different "Destination of Delivery" and/or
multiple locations of each "Destination of Delivery"]
The sketch below shows the location of our work and stockpile area where the material should be delivered.
Site
Contract No.
Contractor's Stamp
Date
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 8
FORM A-3
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL'S REQUIREMENT
SITE : ___________________________________________
CONTRACT NO. : __________________________________
S/N
MTH/YR
CONCRETING SAND
(T)
20MM AGGREGATE
(T)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TOTAL
APPROVED
PROTECTED QUANTITY
Note : Please fill in the month/yr and the quantities of each month's requirements for the whole contract.
BLDG13/A13.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
CEMENT (T)
APPENDIX A14
Page 1
The Contractor shall provide the following information when making submission to the SO Rep for approval.
Contract Title
__________________________________________
Contract No.
__________________________________________
SO Rep
__________________________________________
Block No.
__________________________________________
Location
__________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SOLENOID VALVES
Brand
__________________________________________
Type
__________________________________________
Model
__________________________________________
Country of Origin
__________________________________________
Voltage
Coil Insulation
Class _____________________________________
Enclosure Protection
__________________________________________
Flow Rating
Holding Power
Operating Temperature
Ambient temp
degree celcius
Fluid temp
degree celcius
0 to
BLDG13/A14.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
__
Volts
Hz
bars
APPENDIX A14
Page 2
__________________________________________
Plunger
__________________________________________
Diaphragm
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTROL PANEL
__________________________________________
MCB - Make
__________________________________________
- Type
__________________________________________
- Rating
__________________________________________
ELCB - Make
__________________________________________
- Type
__________________________________________
- Tripping Current
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of Contractor
__________________________________________
Address
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
Signature
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
Tel No.
__________________________________________
Date
__________________________________________
BLDG13/A14.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A14
Page 3
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster
pumping system
Contract Title
Contract No.
Block No.
Ref No.
Location
Contractor
A. SOLENOID VALVE
C. CONTROL PANEL
1. Brand
1. Timer ( 0 - 30 ) mins
2. Type
2. Control MCB
3. Model
4. Voltage
Brand
Brand
Model
1. Pipe
6. Terminal block
2. Fitting
3. 40mm Ball Stop Valve
4. 40mm Stopcock
5. 32mm Check Valve
________________________________
(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp
_________________________
(Signature)/Date
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Solenoid Valve
Tested by :
Pass/Fail
____________________________
(1) TO/HTN/TN (
) Date
(2) TO/HTN/TN (
)
BLDG13/A14.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
_________________________
STO/HTO (
) Date
APPENDIX A15-1
FORM PH-G2
Our Ref
Date
Tel
Fax
:
:
:
:
General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd
Attn:
(City Gas' Project Co-ordinator)
The abovementioned work was carried out by our appointed LGSW. The as-built drawing (inclusive of line
diagram) is attached.
I confirm that the work has been carried out in accordance with the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed),
Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation,
Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts, regulations and
rules.
I will notify all parties of the date for final pressure test.
Name of Designated Representative :
Signature :
Date:
I certify that the gas pipe installation for the above project has been completed and is in accordance with the
Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for
Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply
and all relevant acts, regulations and rules, and is ready for the final pressure test.
Name of Qualified Person (QP):
Signature :
Date:
____________________________________________________________________________
PART II (This section is applicable only for minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installation)
I also request that gas be turn-on to the installation upon successful completion of the final pressure test.
After turn-on of the gas supply, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly not to tamper with the gas installation.
APPENDIX A15-2
NOTES:
a)
b)
The Designated Representative must attend the final inspection and final pressure test.
c)
Final pressure test and turn-on of gas supply will be carried out in one operation for
the following minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installations:
1
Installation of valves.
BLDG13/A15.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A16
FORM PH-G1B
Our Ref
Date
Tel
Fax
:
:
General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd
111 Somerset Road
#05-05
Singapore 238164
Attn :
___________________________________
(Name of City Gas Project Coordinator)
Dear Sir
APPOINTMENT OF DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE (DR) FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION AT
(Name of Project with Block No.)
I hereby appoint the following Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) to be my Designated Representative
(DR) to liaise directly with your Project Coordinator on all matters relating to gas pipe installation. However I am still
fully responsible for all gas pipe installation matters in this project.
Name of DR (LGSW)
Licence No.
Address
Tel No.
Fax No.
Yours faithfully
cc
PMgr, Consultant (Attn: ______________)
Mech Engr, Consultant
Note :
(Attn: ______________)
This Form is to be used by the Qualified Person if he wishes to delegate part of his responsibility to the
DR(LGSW).
BLDG13/A16.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A17
FORM PH-GR2
To :
Our Ref
Your Ref
Date
Tel
Fax No.
:
:
Dear Sir
1
We are pleased to inform that your application for Final Pressure Test dated _______________ for gas
supply has been approved.
3
As the Designated Representative, you are required to be present. You are also required to notify all
parties of the date and time for the Final Pressure Test.
For clarification, please contact our Project Coordinator Mr _______________ at Tel _____________.
Yours faithfully
cc
GDDP, HDB (Attn : ________________)
BLDG13/A17.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A18
FORM PH-G2A
To:
General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd
Attn:
(Name of City Gas Project Co-ordinator)
___
___
cc
1) Architect
2) Owner/Developer
3) Qualified Person
4) Main Contractor
BLDG13/A18.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A19
FORM PH-G3
Our Ref
Date
Tel
Fax
:
:
Date
PE No/LGSW No :
Name
Address :
Tel No :
Note :
1)
In the case of a designated representative who has been nominated by the Qualified Person, he
should only be allowed to submit this application with the consent of the main contractor and the
Qualified Person.
Signature :
Date :
BLDG13/A19.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Date :
APPENDIX A20
FORM PH-GR3
To :
Our Ref
Date
Tel
Fax
:
:
Dear Sir
1
We refer to your application for charge-in/turn-on dated __________________ for gas supply to the above
project / block.
2
We are pleased to inform you that your application has been approved and the work will be carried out on
__________________ at ___________.
You are required to notify all relevant parties to witness the charge-in.
Yours faithfully
cc
HDB Project Director (Attn :
BLDG13/A20.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A21
FORM PH-GR4
To :
Our Ref
Date
Tel
Fax
:
:
Dear Sir
1
This is to inform you that in response to your application for turn-on/charge-in of gas supply to the above
premises, we have on __________________(date) at ______________(time) introduced gas into the above gas pipe
installation. Kindly notify all relevant parties that gas has been turned on / charged in to the above premises.
2
You are hereby informed that no further work on the above gas pipe installation can be undertaken without
our written approval.
Yours faithfully
_____________________________________
Name & Signature of authorised officer
City Gas Pte Ltd
I acknowledge that gas has been turned on / charged in on the date and time as indicated above.
________________________________
Signature & Company Stamp of
Applicant / Designated Representative
________________________________
Name & NRIC / Passport No
cc
HDB Project Director (Attn : ____________________)
BLDG13/A21.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A22
Page 1
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all transfer pumping systems when making submission to the
SO Rep.
Contract Title
Contract No.
SO Rep
No. of Storeys
:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
WATER SUPPLY
PUB direct water supply to :
storey
F = _______________________
H =
metres
ROOF TANKS
(a)
(b)
(c)
Litres;
m3
Tank 1 =
m3
Tank 2 =
m3
or;
(d)
No. x 11.83 m3 =
Precast tanks =
m3
SUCTION TANKS
(a)
m3
x _________
or
(b) Precast tank =
No. x 3.731 m3 =
m3
___________________________________________________________________________________________
PUMP ROOM
Location
Platform Level
BLDG13/A22.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
_____________________________
m
Length x Width
m2
Height
APPENDIX A22
Page 2
PUMP
Discharge Capacity Required
Q1 = 0.05F =
l/sec
Vertical Head
H1 =
m water
Proposed Pumps
Make
___________________________
Type
___________________________
Model ___________________________
Flow
Q2
l/sec
Total Head
H2
m water
Speed
rpm
Impeller Diameter
mm
Power required
KW
Pump efficiency
%
(Please attach characteristics curve for pumps)
The Contractor must proposed the pump to operate at maximum pump efficiency. However, the flow rate shall
preferably not exceed 10 l/s and the pump efficiency shall not in any case be less than 55%.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
MOTOR
Make
________________________________
Type
________________________________
Model
________________________________
Rated Output
________________________________ KW
Voltage/Phase/Frequency
________________________________
No-Load Speed
________________________________ RPM
Insulation Class
________________________________
COUPLING
Make and Type
________________________________
Main Dimension
________________________________
BLDG13/A22.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A22
Page 3
CONTROL PANEL
MCB for main incoming supply
Starter
Make
_________________________________________
Type
_________________________________________
Rating
_________________________________________
KW at
ph
Time Switch
hrs
Selector Switch
_________________________________________
PIPELINES
Diameter of Suction Pipe :
Total Length of Suction Line :
No. and Type of Valves Along Suction Line :
Diameter of Discharge Pipe :
Diameter of Rising Main :
Total Length of Discharging Line :
No. and Type of Valves Along Discharge Line :
Remarks :
Name of Contractor
_________________________________________________
Address
_________________________________________________
Signature
Name :
___________________________
Telephone No.
Date
___________________________
BLDG13/A22.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A23
Page 1
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer
pumping system.
Contract Name :
Contract No :
Block No :
Ref No :
Street Name :
Contractor :
Building Data
No. of Storey :
Direct Supply :
storey
Total Head :
l/s
Motor
Pump
TEFC
End Suction/Multi-stage
Brand
Model
Serial No 1
Serial No. 2
Coupling (brand / size )
Rated Output (kW)
Volt / Phase / Frequency
Insulation Class/Speed (rpm)
NA
415 / 3 / 50 Hz
/
rpm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Fittings Data
NA
80mm (Brand)
100mm (Brand)
NA
NA
BLDG13/A23.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A23
Page 2
- Brand/Model
- Type
- Brand/Model
Starter MCB
- Brand/Model
Overload Relay
- Brand/Model
- Setting Range
Time switch
- Brand/Model
- Serial No
Latching Relay
- Brand/Model
- Brand/Model
- Brand/Model
- Brand/Model
- Brand
- Brand
(Signature)
_________
Date
Motor
Motor 1
/
/
Pump
Motor 2
Pump 1
/
/
Pump 2
mm of water
Time for
) Date
2) TO/HTn/Tn (
NL
EA
BP
E0
E1
__________________________
E2
STO/HTO (
E3
BLDG13/A23.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
NA
) Date
APPENDIX A24
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the
Telemonitoring System for Transfer Pumping System.
Contract Title
Contract No.
Block No.
Ref No.
Street Name
Contractor
CONTROL PANEL
BACKUP BATTERY
Brand
Brand
Model
Microprocessor (CPU)
Voltage
Primary Voltage
Brand
Secondary Voltage
Model
Voltage
Submitted by :
_____________________
Name & Company's Stamp
Signature/Date
__________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICE USE ONLY
TYPE OF FAULTS
FAULT CODE
1.
2.
5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
3.
5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
4.
5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
5.
5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
6.
6 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
7.
4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
8.
4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
9.
3 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
10.
1 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
11.
2 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
12.
4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
0 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
Tested by
:
*TO/HTN/TN(
5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
) Date
/ _________________________
*TO/HTN/TN(
) Date
: ____________________________
*STO/HTO (
) Date
*Delete whichever is not applicable
BLDG13/A24.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A25
Branch Office )
Head (
Date of Inspection :
Block No. :
Location : _________________
Remedial
Action/Date
Checked
(A) FORTNIGHTLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pumpset 1
*
KW
Rated current :
Motor Output :
9.
Pumpset 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
Signature
____________________________________
/_________________
Name of Contractor
____________________________________
Acknowledge By
____________________________________
HTO/TO/HTn (H&M) (
) Date
# :
:
X :
* :
Delete as necessary
Check and found in order
To rectify immediately
Reading by measuring instrument
BLDG13/A25.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A26
Page 1
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all booster pumping systems when making submission to the
SO Rep.
Contract Title
Contract No.
No. of Storeys
BOOSTER PUMPS
l/sec
Pressure Head
m water
Ns
m water
Make
_____________________________
Type
_____________________________
Model _____________________________
Speed
rpm
Impeller Diameter
mm
Power required
kw
BLDG13/A26.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A26
Page 2
MOTOR
Make
_____________________________________
Type
_____________________________________
Model
_____________________________________
Rated Output
Voltage/Phase/Frequency
No-Load Speed
Insulation Class
KW
_____________________________________
RPM
_____________________________________
CONTROL PANEL
Make
________________________________________
Type
________________________________________
Rating ________________________________________
Soft-Starters
_______________________________________________
KW Ratings
Flow Sensor
Selector Switch
kw at
ph
Name of Contractor
_________________________________________________
Address
_________________________________________________
Signature
Name :
_______________________
Tel No.
Date
_______________________
BLDG13/A26.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A27
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster
pumping system.
Contract Name :
Contract No :
Block No. :
Ref No. :
Street Name :
Contractor :
Pump Data
Brand
Model
Serial No. 1
Rated output
Serial No. 2
Rated current
Fittings Data
40mm Ball Stop Valve
kW
Amp
Flow Sensor
Model
Serial No./Range
Soft Starter
NA
Overload Relay
Amp
Timer
Min
Delay Timer
Control Module
NA
Control MCB
Amp
Starter MCB
Amp
Control Relay
NA
Latching Relay
NA
__________
Date
(Signature)
Mode 1
Passed / Failed
Electrode
E0
Pump No. 1
Mode 2
Passed / Failed
Length/mm
E1
Pump No. 2
Mode 3
Passed / Failed
E2
E3
Tested by :
1) TO/HTn/Tn (
2) TO/HTn/Tn (
BLDG13/A27.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
_________________________
STO/HTO (
) Date
APPENDIX A28
To :
Head (
Branch Office )
Date of Inspection :
Block No. :
Location : __________________
Remedial
Action/Date
Checked
1.
Flow Sensor
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pumpset 1
Rated current :
Motor Output :
KW
7.
8.
9.
Pressure gauges
Pumpset 2
Signature : ________________________________________
: Check and found in order
X : To rectify immediately
Acknowledge By : __________________________________
HTO/TO/HTn (H&M) (
) Date
BLDG13/A28.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 1
The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements specified in the
Specifications. The requirements specified in the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any
materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall
prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.
1.
BLDG13/A29.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Fire Pump
Electrical
Fire Pump
Diesel Driven
Transfer Pump
Electrical
Transfer Pump
Diesel Driven
APPENDIX A29
Page 2
1.
Particulars
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz)
Full load current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Insulation Class
Enclosure Protection Class
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Static Deflection (mm)
Type of Model No.
Motor Starters
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Protecting Devices
Total Operating Wt of
Pumpsets (kg)
BLDG13/A29.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Electrical
Diesel Driven
Transfer Pump
Electrical
Transfer Pump
Diesel Driven
APPENDIX A29
Page 3
2.
JOCKEY PUMPSETS
(The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all
equipment, etc offered by the Contractor)
Particulars
Pumps
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model No.
Materials
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Type of Bearings
Nominal Characteristics
Flow rate (l/min.)
Discharge head (bar)
KW
Efficiency
Pump RPM
Type of shaft seal
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz)
Full Load Current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Make/Type/Model
Static Deflection (mm)
Total Operating Wt of Pumpsets (kg)
BLDG13/A29.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Jockey Pump
APPENDIX A29
Page 4
3.
Steel Pipes
to BS 3601
Material of
Valve Body
Material
of Valve
Other
Information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Particulars
Black
Steel Pipe
Galvanized
Steel Pipe
Stainless
Steel Pipe
Manufacturer
Local Supplier
Country of Origin
Grade (Thickness)
BS Specification
Manufacturer of Pipe
Fittings
4.
Make
Type
Model
BLDG13/A29.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 5
5.
CONTROL PANELS
Particulars
Manufacturer
6.
Volt
No. of Cell
Operating Voltage
Volt
AH
Dimension
mm
Battery Chargers
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type/List No.
Output Voltage Range
Volt
Amp
- Maximum
BLDG13/A29.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Amp
Country of
Origin
Local Supplier
APPENDIX A29
Page 6
7.
Particulars
Make
Type
Model
Rated
Voltage
Other
Information
Contactors
Ammeters
Voltmeters
Push Buttons
Key Switches
Selector Switches
MCB
Timers
Relays
Indicating Lamps
(transformer operated)
Terminal Boards
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Current Transformers
HRC Fuses
Isolating Switches
MCCB
Earth Leakage Relay
8.
BLDG13/A29.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
APPENDIX A29
Page 7
9.
10.
11.
___________________
Size (mm)
___________________
___________________
___________________
Material of Spring
___________________
___________________
___________________
Material
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
Accuracy (%)
___________________
____________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor
Date :
BLDG13/A29.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A30
Page 1
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser
system.
Contract Title :
Contract No. :
Block No. :
Ref No :
Location :
Contractor :
Building Data
Suction Tank size : ______ x ______ x ______ M
Total Head :
(m)
Total Head :
(m)
(l/s)
(l/s)
Motor Data
Jockey
Pump 1
Fire
Pump 1
Fire
Pump 2
Transfer
Pump 1
Transfer
Pump 2
Jockey
Pump 1
Fire
Pump 1
Fire
Pump 2
Transfer
Pump 1
Transfer
Pump 2
Brand
Type (FM,UL,LPC or other
acceptable by FSSD)
Model
Serial No.
Rated Output (KW)
Volt/Phase/Frequency
Insulation Class/Speed (RPM)
Rated Current (A)
Pump Data
Brand
Model
Type (FM,UL,LPC or other
acceptable by FSSD)
Serial No.
Impeller Diameter (mm)
Specified capacity (l/s)
BLDG13/A30.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A30
Page 2
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser
system.
Brand
Starter MCB
Overload Protector
Fitting
Coupling
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch
Flow meter
Motorize valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch
BLDG13/A30.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
11-Pin Relay
Brand
Model
Model
Type
Type
Brand
8-Pin Relay
Brand
Model
Model
Type
Type
Brand
Latching Relay
Brand
Model
Model
Type
Type
Brand
Time Switch
Brand
Model
Model
Setting
Type
Size
Brand
Type
APPENDIX A30
Page 3
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser
system.
Fitting
Size
Brand
Type
Limit switch
Landing valve
Breeching Inlet
________________________
(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp
(Signature)/Date
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Jockey
Pump
Fire
Pump 1
Fire
Pump 2
Transfer
Pump 1
Transfer
Pump 2
Jockey
Pump
Fire
Pump 1
Fire
Pump 2
Transfer
Pump 1
Transfer
Pump 2
R
Y
B
Pump
Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Tested by
__________________________________
1) HTO / TO (
)
Date
2) HTO / TO (
)
__________________________________
BLDG13/A30.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A31
To :
Head (
Branch Office )
Date of Inspection :
Block No. :
Location : ________________________________
Items
Checked
Other Comments
X
*
+
:
:
:
:
:
Delete as necessary
Check and found in order
To rectify immediately
Reading by measuring instrument
Test to be done Yearly
Signature : _____________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC :
/_____
BLDG13/A31.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A32
Page 1
To :
Head (
Branch Office )
Date of Inspection :
Block No. :
Remedial
Action/Date
Checked
Monthly/Quaterly
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. (i)
Transfer
Pumpset 1
Transfer Pump
Rated current :
Motor Output :
KW
Fire Pumpset 1
Fire Pumpset 2
Motor Output :
KW
B
Jockey
Pumpset 1
Motor Output :
KW
Transfer
Pumpset 2
A
Pumpset 1
Pumpset 2
Transfer Pump
(bar)
(bar)
Fire pump
(bar)
(bar)
Jockey Pump
(bar)
BLDG13/A32.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A32
Page 2
Items
Remedial
Action/Date
Checked
Jockey
Pump
Fire
Pumpset
1
Fire
Pumpset
2
Transfer
Pumpset
1
Transfer
Pumpset
2
Tank 1
Tank 2
Transfer tank
Fire tank
15. 100mm Check Valve
16. 100mm Gate Valve
17. 150mm Check Valve
18. 150mm Gate Valve
19. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe +
20. Check and inspect all landing valves
condition +
21. Check Breeching inlets condition
22. Update Log Book
23. Additional requirements from FSSD
Other Comments :
X
*
+
:
:
:
:
:
Delete as necessary
Check and found in order
To rectify immediately
Reading by measuring instrument
Test to be done quarterly
Signature : _____________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC :
/______
BLDG13/A32.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A33
Page 1
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as set out below. The technical data provided hereunder is for
information only and shall not override any requirements of the Specifications. The requirements of the Specifications
shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the
minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more
comprehensive information wherever possible.
1.
2.
__________________________________________________
Country of origin
__________________________________________________
Type
__________________________________________________
Model
__________________________________________________
No. of units
__________________________________________________
Casing material
__________________________________________________
Impeller material
__________________________________________________
Shaft material
__________________________________________________
Flow rate
__________________________________________________
Head
__________________________________________________
Speed (r.p.m.)
__________________________________________________
Impeller diameter
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Voltage/Phase/Frequency
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
MOTOR STATER
Make, type and model
__________________________________________________
Rating
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Approx. KW rating ________KW at _______V _______Ph
Voltage/Phase
3.
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Type
__________________________________________________
Model
__________________________________________________
BLDG13/A33.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A33
Page 2
5.
PRESSURE TANK
Country of origin
__________________________________________________
Make
__________________________________________________
Type
__________________________________________________
Model
__________________________________________________
Capacity
__________________________________________________
Operating pressure
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Casing material
__________________________________________________
Diaphragm material
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
RUBBER HOSE
Make
6.
7.
8.
__________________________________________________
Type
__________________________________________________
Material
__________________________________________________
Diameter (internal)
__________________________________________________
Length
__________________________________________________
Working pressure
__________________________________________________
PRESSURE GAUGE
Make, type & model
__________________________________________________
Range (Bar)
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Enclosure Protection
__________________________________________________
PRESSURE SWITCH
Make, type & model
__________________________________________________
Range (Bar)
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Enclosure Protection
__________________________________________________
Voltage/Frequency
__________________________________________________
FLOW SWITCH
Make, type, model
__________________________________________________
Rang (L/s)
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Enclosure protection
__________________________________________________
Voltage/frequency
__________________________________________________
BLDG13/A33.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A33
Page 3
10.
SOLENOID VALVE
Make, type & model
__________________________________________________
Body material
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Stem material
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Uv value (MH/Bar)
__________________________________________________
MISCELLANEOUS
Make
Type
Model
a.
Gate valve
_______________
_______________
_______________
b.
Check valve
_______________
_______________
_______________
c.
Strainer
_______________
_______________
_______________
d.
_______________
_______________
_______________
e.
Globe valve
_______________
_______________
_______________
f.
Selector switch
_______________
_______________
_______________
g.
_______________
_______________
_______________
h.
Time switch
_______________
_______________
_______________
i.
_______________
_______________
_______________
j.
_______________
_______________
_______________
k.
Shut-off nozzle
_______________
_______________
_______________
l.
Flexible coupling
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
n.
_______________
_______________
_______________
o.
Alarm bell
_______________
_______________
_______________
p.
Auxiliary relay
_______________
_______________
_______________
q.
_______________
_______________
_______________
r.
Indicator lamp
_______________
_______________
_______________
s.
Pipe
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor/s
Date : __________________
BLDG13/A33.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A34
Page 1
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel
system.
Contract Name :
Contract No :
Block No. :
Ref No. :
Location :
Contractor :
Building Data
Suction Tank size :
Total Head :
(m)
(l/s)
Motor Data
Pump Data
Brand
Brand
Model
Model
Serial No.
Serial No.
Volt/Phase/Frequency
Starter MCB
BLDG13/A34.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Model
Brand
11-Pin Relay
Model
Type
Type
Brand
Brand
Model
8-Pin Relay
Model
Type
Type
Brand
Brand
Model
Model
Type
Latching Relay
Type
Model
Model
Setting
Type
APPENDIX A34
Page 2
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel
system.
Fitting
Size
Brand
Type
Coupling
Rubber expansion
joint
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch
Flow meter
Solenoid valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch
Limit switch
Pressure tank 1
Pressure tank 2
Rubber hose reel
BLDG13/A34.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
________________________
(Signature)/Date
APPENDIX A34
Page 3
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel
system.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Motor
Hose Reel
Pump 1
Hose Reel
Pump 1
Hose Reel
Pump 1
Hose Reel
Pump 1
R
Y
B
Pump
Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Tested by
_________________________________
1) HTO / TO (
) Date
2) HTO / TO (
)
_________________________________
DEng (
)
Date
BLDG13/A34.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A35
Head (
Branch Office )
Date of Inspection :
Block No. :
Remedial
Action/Date
Checked
Monthly
X
*
Pumpset 1
Rated Current :
Motor Output
KW
Check Valves
10
Gate Valves
11
12
13
14
15
16
Hose Reel
17
18
: Delete as necessary
: Check and found in order
: To rectify immediately
: Reading by measuring instrument
Pumpset 2
Signature : _____________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : _______________
Name of Contractor : _____________________________
Acknowledge By : ________________________________
HHMI/HMI (
) Date
BLDG13/A35.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A36
Current issues of appropriate British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice with particular reference to this
project for electrical works are :
BS 10
BS 37
Electricity meters
BS 81
Instrument Transformers
BS 88
Electric Fuses
BS 89
BS 142
BS 162
BS 170
BS 587
BS 636
Covered Electrodes for the Manual Arc Welding of Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel
BS 729
BS 77
Contactors
BS 848
BS 861
BS 1856
BS 2004
BS 2613
BS 2757
BS 3078
BS 3601
BS 6207
BS 6346
BLDG13/A36.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A37
Dimension of
Longest Side of Duct
Reinforcement
Thru 250
26
26
24
24
26
22
20
18
16
18
18
BLDG13/A37.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A38
Location :
Time :
_______________________
Date :
_______________________
Alarm Zone
Test
Thermal
Isolation
In-situ
Test
Smoke
Isolation
In-situ
Detectors+
Test
Flame
Isolation
In-situ
Test
Manual
Call Point
Isolation
In-situ
Main Supply
Charger+
And Batteries
Operative
Non-Operative
Remarks
Battery
Charger
Emergency Lamp On
Alarm Monitoring
Station
Alarm Transmitter
Alarm Sounder
Alarm+
And Ancillary
Ancillary Controls
Fault Buzzer
Remarks :
________________________________________
Signature _______________________________
* Delete if unapplicable.
+ Tick if satisfactory; put asterisk '*' if unsatisfactory and give explanation under the remarks space.
BLDG13/A38.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A39
Page 1
Location of Shelter
Estate
______________________________________
Block
______________________________________
Address
______________________________________
Shelter Type
______________________________________
______________________________________
Ventilation Fan
Description
Observation
Remarks
Ductwork
Description
1. To check the size of expansion
bolts of ductwork support
2. To check on size and rigidity of
support
3. To check on the interval of
support
4. To check the joint connection of
ductwork
5. To check on proper installation of
flexible connection
6. To damper is installed in correct
position
7. To check damper is installed
rigidly
BLDG13/A39.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Design
Actual
Observation
Remarks
APPENDIX A39
Page 2
Ductwork (Cont'd)
Description
Design
Actual
Observation
Remarks
Remarks :
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Tested by
Date :
________________
Date :
________________
CONTRACTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
Witnessed by
:
HDB PROJECT OFFICER'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
BLDG13/A39.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A40
____________________________________________
Block
____________________________________________
Address
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
S/No
Tested by
Item Tested
Design Torque
Actual Torque
Remarks
Date :
_______________
Date :
_______________
CONTRACTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
Witnessed by
:
HDB PROJECT OFFICER'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
BLDG13/A40.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A41
Location of Shelter
Estate
___________________________________
Block
___________________________________
Address
___________________________________
___________________________________
Plant/Equipment Make/Model
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
Test
Design
Actual
Remarks
Tested By
Approved By
__________________________
Signature
Signature
__________________________
Name of
Contractor
Name of HDB
Project Officer
__________________________
Date
Date
__________________________
BLDG13/A41.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A42
Page 1
SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements of the
Specification. The requirements of the Specification shall be regarded as minimum and should any material or Plant
and equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specification shall prevail.
Catalogues shall be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible. All entries shall be
typewritten.
Item
Description
1.
DUCTWORK
(a)
Round Ducting
Type
Make
Country of Origin
Standard
Material
(b)
Acoustical Insulation
Type
Make
Country of Origin
Material
Density
(c)
Diffusers
Make/Model
Type
Material
Finish
(d)
Grilles
Make/Model
Type
Material
Finish
(e)
BLDG13/A42.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Particulars
APPENDIX A42
Page 2
SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Item
Description
2.
(a)
Fan
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Air Flow (CMH)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees)
Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length)
(mm x mm)
Operating Weight (kg)
Fan Speed (rpm)
Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB)
Blade Material
Casing Material
Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (C)
(b)
Fan Motor
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Input Power (kW)
Speed (rpm)
Enclosure Protection Class
Class of Insulation
Rating
Lock Rotor Current (Amp)
Full Load Current (Amp)
Voltage (volt)
Frequency (Hz)
(c)
Motor Starter
Make/Brand
Type
BLDG13/A42.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Particulars
Axial Flow
APPENDIX A42
Page 3
SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Item
Description
2.
(d)
Vibration Isolator
Make/Brand
Type
Material
Isolation Efficiency (%)
Rated Capacity (kg)
Rated Deflection (mm)
(e)
Sound Attenuators
Make/Brand
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
Pressure Drop (Pa)
L x W x H (mm x mm x mm)
Insertion Loss - dB
Octave band frequency
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
8000 Hz
(f)
Motor Starter
Make
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
L x W x D (mm x mm x mm)
Material
Efficiency (%)
Initial air resistance (Pa)
Final air resistance (Pa)
BLDG13/A42.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Particulars
Axial Flow
APPENDIX A42
Page 4
SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Item
Description
3.
(a)
Fan
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Air Flow (CMH)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees)
Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length)
(mm x mm)
Operating Weight (kg)
Fan Speed (rpm)
Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB)
Blade Material
Casing Material
Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (C)
(b)
Fan Motor
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Input Power (kW)
Speed (rpm)
Enclosure Protection Class
Class of Insulation
Rating
Lock Rotor Current (Amp)
Full Load Current (Amp)
Voltage (volt)
Frequency (Hz)
(c)
Motor Starter
Make/Brand
Type
BLDG13/A42.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Particulars
Axial Flow
APPENDIX A42
Page 5
SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Item
Description
3.
(d)
Vibration Isolator
Particulars
Axial Flow
Make/Brand
Type
Material
Isolation Efficiency (%)
Rated Capacity (kg)
Rated Deflection (mm)
(e)
Sound Attenuators
Make/Brand
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
Pressure Drop (Pa)
L x W x H (mm x mm x mm)
Insertion Loss - dB
Octave band frequency
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
8000 Hz
________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor
Date : _________________
BLDG13/A42.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43
Page 1
STAMP
if stamp duties required
COMPREHENSIVE
MAINTENANCE
BLOCKS _____
AGREEMENT
FOR
REFUSE
HANDLING
AT
PLANT
TO
.
day of
20
between THE
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD (hereinafter called the "Owner") and ______________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") which expression shall where the context so admits includes his legal personal
representatives and permitted assigns.
WHEREAS :
(1)
__________________________________________________________________________________
(Name and Address of Contractor)
(hereinafter called the Contractor") is the contractor of the Owner in respect of the Works described as
_____________
(Contract No.
Neighbourhood
Contract ______________
(2)
The Specialist is engaged by the Contractor in respect of the Refuse Handling Plant Works required under
the Contract with the consent of the Owner given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
The Owner is desirous that certain equipment should be maintained, viz system or equipment or machine or
vehicles etc described in this Agreement for the Refuse Handling Plant (hereinafter referred to as the
"Plant").
(4)
Pursuant to Clause
of
of the
Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to carry out the
maintenance of such Plant, and where applicable to fabricate, modify and do all such things as are
necessary for such maintenance of the Plant.
BLDG13/A43.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43
Page 2
In consideration of the premises and of the Owner giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and
the Specialist, the Specialist agree with the Owner as follows :
1.
SPECIALIST'S OBLIGATION
1.1
The Specialist warrants that he has the necessary skills, knowledge, expertise and competence to maintain
the Plant herein specified.
1.2
In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Specialist as hereinafter mentioned, the
Specialist hereby covenants with the Owner to maintain the Plant in all respects in accordance with the
description and terms of this Agreement for the monthly Contract Rate of Singapore Dollars ONE
HUNDRED only ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five (5) years commencing after
the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period provided under the Contract or such other sum as may become
due under the provisions of this Agreement.
2.
OWNER'S OBLIGATION
The Owner hereby covenants to pay to the Specialist in consideration of the maintenance of the Plant, the
Contract Rate per month or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this Agreement.
3.
TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This Agreement is a Firm Price Contract and the Contract Rate shall remain firm for the duration of this
Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, there shall be no change in the
amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for maintenance of the Plant.
4.
PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE
Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, the Contract Rate contained in this Agreement
shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately mentioned or
described in this Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to completion of the
works described in this Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome difficulties before
execution and completion.
5.
6.
DOCUMENTS
The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement viz :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
BLDG13/A43.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43
Page 3
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Specialist have set their hands the day and year first above written.
Signed by
, for and on behalf
of the Housing & Development Board in the
presence of :
Signed by
for and on behalf of the Specialist in the
presence of :
BLDG13/A43.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
APPENDIX A44
Page 1
1.
(1)
"Agreement"
(b)
"Owner"
(c)
"Specialist"
(d)
"Works"
(e)
"Plant"
(f)
"Contract
Rate"
Definitions
1.
(2)
Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice-versa
where the context requires.
1.
(3)
Headings and
Marginal Notes
SCOPE OF WORK
2.
The Specialist shall provide and supply all labour, materials, tools, transport
and everything necessary or incidental in so far as they are specified or can
be reasonably inferred, for the maintenance of the Plant as listed in
Schedule A, and for any call-back service mentioned in Clause 5 herein.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Scope of Works
APPENDIX A44
Page 2
2.
Cont'd
Maintenance shall include all items and frequencies of works as listed in
Schedule B. The Specialist's obligations shall include any other repair
and/or replacement to the Plant or overhaul to the Plant if deemed
necessary.
The costs of any repair and/or replacement or overhauling including the
costs of spare parts and consumables shall be deemed to be included in
the monthly maintenance fee.
The Specialist shall not use as replacements, any parts which are not
original or parts which have not been approved by the Manufacturer of the
Plant unless he has the prior consent of the Owner.
3.
The Agreement shall remain in full force and effect for a period stated in
the Appendix. Unless either party hereto shall three months prior to the
expiration hereof have notified the other party hereto in writing to the
contrary then this Agreement shall thereafter continue and remain in full
force and effect which can then be terminated by either party hereto giving
three month's written notice to the other party hereto to that effect.
Commencement
and Duration of
Agreement
4.
The Specialist shall provide the Owner a work programme covering routine
maintenance, repairs and/or replacements, and major overhaul if
applicable, in a form acceptable to the Owner for his agreement. The
commencement dates and times for the Works have to be specified and
the Specialist shall adhere strictly to the works programme approved by the
Owner. The Specialist shall seek the prior approval of the Owner on any
amendment to the work programme.
Work Programme
5.
5.
(1)
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(2)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Call-out-Time
APPENDIX A44
Page 3
5.
(2)
Service Time
Should the Specialist fail to attend within the call-out time, the
Owner reserves the right to appoint other party or parties to execute
such works and all costs incurred shall be recovered by the Owner
from the Specialist by deduction(s) from any money due or that shall
become due to the Specialist, or payable direct from the Specialist
as a debt due to the Owner PROVIDED that and without prejudice to
any other remedies for breach contained in this Agreement the
Owner shall in addition to recover under this paragraph whatsoever
that may result as a consequence of the Owner having to resort to
the provisions of this paragraph.
The Specialist shall be equipped with a telephone pager. Should
the Specialist fail to respond within one hour after being paged it
shall be deemed that the Specialist has failed to make himself
available in which case the paragraph above shall apply.
6.
Call-out time for attending to breakdown of the Plant shall not exceed the
time stated in the Appendix. Agreed damages stated in the Appendix shall
be imposed should the call-out time be exceeded or in the event the
Specialist fails to rectify the breakdown within the service time stated in the
Appendix or such further extended time deemed necessary by the Owner.
Agreed damages
for failure to
respond within callout time/to rectify
breakdown within
service time
Normal office hours are taken to be between 8.00 am and 5.30 pm from
Monday to Friday and between 8.00 am and 1.00 pm on Saturday.
The provisions of this paragraph shall apply notwithstanding that the
Specialist shall also be liable under Clause 5(2) herein.
In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the
Owner shall be at liberty to recover such damages for breach of contract as
the Owner can prove arise from the Specialist's failure to carry out his
obligations herein.
7.
The Specialist shall submit to the Owner a monthly report in such form as
may be approved by the Owner containing details of the periodic
inspections and servicings including all repairs and/or replacements
executed by him. The monthly report shall include a log showing the time
when a report of a fault is received and the time when repair and/or
replacement commences. The Specialist shall record the nature of the
fault and the actual time taken for the necessary repairs and/or
replacements. These records shall be signed by the Owner and the
Specialist shall submit these records to the Owner within the first week of
the following month.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(3)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Service Report
APPENDIX A44
Page 4
8.
9.
(1)
Replacement and
Repairs
(2)
*Substitute Plant
Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist shall
deposit free of interest with the Owner the sum stipulated in the Appendix
to be held by the Owner as security for due performance by the Specialist
of each and every liability and obligation owing by the Specialist to the
Owner, whether of a contractual or tortious nature and whether arising
under the Agreement or otherwise, such sum to be retained or otherwise
properly dealt with by the Owner. The said sum or the recoverable balance
thereof shall be returned to the Specialist upon completion of the whole of
the Works.
Security Deposit
Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist may in
lieu of the deposit as required under this Clause provided the Owner with a
Security Bond for an equivalent sum drawn in the form approved by the
Owner and issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner.
The quantum of this Security Deposit/Bond shall be a percentage
(stipulated in the Appendix) of the product of the Contract Rate multiplied
by the period of this Agreement as stated in Clause 3 herein.
10.
The Specialist shall bear all stamp fees and other necessary charges, in
respect of this Agreement and any other document whatsoever to be
executed hereunder.
11.
It is hereby agreed that the Owner shall be at liberty without notice to the
Specialist to assign the full benefits of this Agreement to such person body
or corporation as may in any manner howsoever be entrusted with the
responsibilities of the duties of the Owner in respect of the Works.
Owner's right to
assign
12.
The Specialist shall not assign the Agreement or any part thereof or any
benefit or interest therein without the prior written consent of the Owner.
Assignment or
Sub-lettering
The Specialist shall not make arrangements for the vicarious performance
of any of his duties or functions under the Agreement by any other party,
nor shall any receiver or liquidator of the Specialist be entitled to carry out
such duties or functions.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(4)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 5
12.
Cont'd
The Specialist shall not sub-let the whole of the Works. Except where
otherwise provided in the Agreement, the Specialist shall not sub-let any
part of the Works without the prior written consent of the Owner and such
consent if given shall not relieve the Specialist of any of his liabilities or
obligations under the Agreement and he shall be responsible for the acts
defaults and neglects of his sub-contractors their agents servants and
workmen as fully as if they were his own acts defaults or neglects.
13.
The Specialist is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his
agents, servants and workmen, and of his sub-contractors, their agents,
servants and workmen employed on the Works for the purposes of this
Agreement.
Behaviour of
Workmen
The Specialist shall use or employ in and about the maintenance of the
Plant only such persons as are careful skilled and experienced in their
several skills, trades and callings and the Owner shall be at liberty to object
to and require the Specialist to remove immediately from the Owner's
premises any such person employed by the Specialist in or about the
maintenance of the Plant who in the opinion of the Owner misconduct
himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his
duties or whose continued presence is undesirable or unacceptable and
such opinion shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the
Specialist. Such persons shall not be again used or employed upon the
Owner's premises without the prior written permission of the Owner. Any
person so removed shall wherever necessary, be promptly replaced by a
competent substitute.
The Specialist shall ensure that all workmen employed are able to produce
proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted to premises
occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.
14.
The Specialist shall keep proper records of all workmen engaged on the
Works and produce them for inspection by the Owner. These records shall
include the following information :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(5)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Keeping Records
of Workmen
APPENDIX A44
Page 6
15.
The Specialist shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement
of all workmen. Work Permits from Ministry of Labour must be obtained
from these workmen. The Specialist shall be held solely liable for and shall
indemnify the Owner in respect of all actions against the Owner for
employing foreign workmen without the required permits.
Labour Laws
The Specialist shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's
working hours and holidays in accordance with all Acts of Parliament
Regulations Bye-Laws rules or regulations.
16.
No Night
Sunday or Public
Holiday Work
For the purposes of this Clause, the term "night" shall mean the period from
5.30 pm to 8.00 am.
The Owner reserves the right to require urgent repairs and/or replacement
work to be carried out during the night or on Sundays or on public holidays.
The Specialist is deemed to have provided for such services in the
Contract Rate.
17.
The Specialist shall ensure that no illegal immigrant is employed him and/or
any sub-contractor in the execution of the Works. The Owner shall not be
responsible for such act or acts by the Specialist and/or any of his subcontractors and the Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all
consequences arising thereof.
Employment of
Illegal Immigrants
For the purpose of this Clause "illegal immigrant" means any person who
has entered into the Republic of Singapore in contravention of the
provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory modification or reenactment thereof.
18.
The Specialist shall give all notices and pay all fees required to be given or
paid by any Act of Parliament Regulation or Bye-law in relation to the
execution of the Works and by the rules or regulations of any local or
statutory authorities, public bodies or companies whose property or rights
may be affected in any way by the Works.
The Specialist shall ascertain and conform in all respects with the
provisions of any Act of Parliament Regulation and Bye-law that may apply
to the Works and with any rules or regulations of the said local or statutory
authorities public bodies or companies and shall keep the Owner fully
indemnified against penalties and liabilities of every kind arising from the
breach of such Acts Regulations Bye-laws rules or regulations.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(6)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Compliance with
rules and
Regulations
APPENDIX A44
Page 7
19.
Specialist's
Superintendence
The Specialist shall ensure that he is at all times represented on the Works
by a competent and authorised agent who shall be deemed to be approved
by the Owner provided such agent is not expressly objected to by the
Owner in writing within 14 days from the serving of a notice in writing upon
the Owner by the Specialist of the appointment of such agent. Such agent
shall be on the Works when the Specialist is executing works to supervise
the Works.
The Owner shall have the authority to withdraw his approval of the
authorised agent at any time. If such approval shall be withdrawn the
Specialist shall, after receiving notice in writing of, such withdrawal, remove
the agent from the Works forthwith and shall not thereafter employ him
again on the Works in any capacity and shall promptly replace him with a
competent agent approved by the Owner.
Such authorised agent shall be empowered to receive on behalf of the
Specialist directions and instructions from the Owner.
The Specialist shall ensure that his superintending personnel are able to
produce proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted to
premises occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.
20.
The Specialist shall comply with the Workplace Safety & Health Act and the
Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction Regulations
1985, and all amendments and re-enactments thereof.
Safety
It shall be the duty of the Specialist to comply with such requirements of the
Regulations as affect him or any person employed by him and as relate to
any work act or operation performed or about to be performed by him.
The Specialist shall not permit an employee to do anything which is not in
accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound
practice.
21.
The Specialist shall comply with all the provisions under the Workmen's
Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) and any statutory modification
or re-enactment thereof (hereinafter referred to as "the Act").
Notwithstanding any provision in this Contract to the contrary, the Owner
shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or compensation under
the Act in consequence of any accident or injury to any workman or other
person whether in the employment of the Specialist, his servants or agents
or of his sub-contractors, their servants or agents, and the Specialist shall
indemnify the Owner against all such claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, cost, charges and expenses arising in consequence thereof.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(7)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Workmen's
Compensation
APPENDIX A44
Page 8
21.
Cont'd
The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in the
joint names of the Specialist and the Owner a policy of insurance with an
insurer and on terms approved by the Owner to cover all obligations and to
meet in full the assessment of the Commissioner for Labour in respect of
compensation due upon the death or injury of any workman of the
Specialist, his servant or agents under the Act and in respect of
compensation under Common Law.
The Specialist shall deliver this insurance policy, together with the premium
receipts, to the Owner before proceeding with the Works. Should the
Specialist default in making such delivery upon written request made by the
Owner, the Owner may then effect and maintain such insurance and
deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or become due to the
Specialist or recover the same as a debt due by the Specialist.
If the Specialist fails to maintain and keep in force the insurance required to
be effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in force
such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be necessary
for the purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid from any
monies due becoming due to the Specialist or recover the same as a debt
due by the Specialist.
Notwithstanding the provision of the Act, the Specialist shall give notice in
writing to the Owner within 10 days of the occurrence of any accident which
results in death or temporary incapacity of any workman employed by him
or his sub-contractor(s). If a contractor fails to report the occurrence of the
accident within the stipulated time, the Owner shall impose charges
according to the rates tabulated below :
Charges for late reporting
Date of Notification to the
Owner on the occurrence
of accident
Minimum
Charges
$200.00
$1,000.00
$200.00
$3,000.00
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(8)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 9
PAYMENT
22.
The Agreement is awarded on a firm price basis and the Contract Rate as
accepted by the Owner shall remain firm for the duration of the Agreement.
Save as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, there shall be no
change in the amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for the
maintenance to the Plant.
Firm Price
Contract
23.
Payment
If the Plant are not in working condition for a period longer than the number
of days, stated in the Appendix, in a month or such other time as may be
allowed by the Owner arising from whatsoever cause, the Specialist shall
not be entitled to payment for the maintenance for that month in respect of
such Plant.
Work done by the Specialist under this Agreement shall be payable
MONTHLY upon satisfactory completion of the Works. Provided that the
Specialist comply fully with the requirements stated herein he shall be paid
within 30 days from the date of receipt of the Specialist's bills or invoices by
the Owner.
In addition the Owner shall pay to the Specialist all agreed additional costs
for carrying out such other works as may from time to time be required by
the Owner under Clause 27 herein. The Specialist shall claim and the
Owner shall pay for such costs in accordance with the requirements under
Clause 28 herein.
24.
The Specialist shall duly and punctually pay to the Owner the billed or any
other expenses incurred in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc
necessary for the proper execution of the Works in this Agreement.
Notwithstanding this, the Owner reserves the right to set off such bills and
expenses against monies due or to become due to the Specialist before
payment of the balance, if any, to him. In this respect, all bills and
expenses incurred by the Owner shall have priority over those incurred by
third parties for the benefit of the Specialist.
Payment of
Owner's Bills and
Expenses etc
25.
If at any time during the Agreement the Specialist is found to have claimed
and was paid for more than the value of works done, the Owner reserves
the right to deduct from the Specialist's subsequent payments and the sum
overpaid together with interests at prevailing commercial rates.
Overclaim leading
to Overpayment
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(9)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 10
PAYMENT (CONT'D)
26.
Recovery/
Deduction of
Money
VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS
27.
Variations
28.
(b)
(c)
Any disagreement on rates under the provisions of this clause shall not
entitle the Specialist a right to refuse to execute the variation work. The
Specialist shall proceed with the variation works with due diligence The
Specialist may refer the disagreement to Arbitration under Clause 36
herein.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(10)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Valuation of
Variation
APPENDIX A44
Page 11
VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS (CONT'D)
28.
Cont'd
Upon completion of the variation work to the satisfaction of the Owner, the
Specialist may submit his claim for variation to the Owner. The value of the
variation assessed by the Owner shall be notified to the Specialist in
writing. Provided always the Owner may at any time amend the value of a
variation previously issued in such manner as he may deem necessary,
and any recovery shall be effected under Clause 26 herein. If the
Specialist disagrees with the value assessed by the Owner, he shall submit
to the Owner any objection to the value in writing within 30 days of the date
of notification failing which the value of the variation as assessed by the
Owner shall be final and binding and conclusive against the Specialist.
29.
Specialist's
Modification of
Plant or Works
30.
(b)
(c)
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(11)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Damage to
Property and Injury
to Persons
APPENDIX A44
Page 12
30.
Cont'd
The Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all losses, injuries or
damages in respect of the liabilities and risks described in this clause and
against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges
expenses arising in consequence thereof.
The indemnities given by the Specialist under this Clause shall not be
defeated or reduced by reason of any negligence or omission of the Owner
in failing to supervise or control the Specialist's operations or methods of
working, or to detect or prevent or remedy or mitigate defective Plant, or to
ensure proper performance of any other obligation of the Specialist.
31.
The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in the
joint names of the Specialist and the Owner until the completion of the
Works, a Public Liability policy with an insurer and on terms approved by
the Owner for an amount specified by the Owner against all and every
liability and risk described in this Clause and shall deliver the policy and the
receipt for every premium paid by the Specialist to the Owner. The extent
of the insurer's liability under the policy insurance shall be limited in the
manner and to the amount stated in the Appendix.
Insurances against
Injuries to Persons
and Damage to
Property
The existence of any such insurance shall not alter or affect the liability of
the Specialist to the Owner under the provisions of this Clause, and the
Owner may deduct from any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist
all sums that the Specialist may be liable to pay to the Owner under this
Clause, whether or not the same is covered by insurance.
If the Specialist fails to effect and keep in force the insurance required to be
effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in force
such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be necessary
for that purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid from any
monies due or becoming due to the Specialist or recover the same as a
debt due by the Specialist under Clause 26 herein.
32.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(12)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Remedies in the
event of Breach
APPENDIX A44
Page 13
32.
Cont'd
Should the Specialist fail to comply with the notice within the time specified
therein, the Owner shall be at liberty to employ other party or parties to
execute such part of the said Works as the Specialist may have failed or
neglected to do, or if the Owner shall think fit, it shall be lawful for him,
without prejudice to any other rights he may have under the Agreement, to
take the Works to be performed by the Specialist under the Agreement
wholly or partly out of the Specialist's hands and may himself complete
such Works or any part thereof, or may employ any other party or parties to
complete such Works or any part thereof, and in either of such event the
Owner shall have the free use of such items of maintenance, test and
monitoring equipment and tools as may have been brought on to the
premises of the Owner by the Specialist without being responsible to the
Specialist for fair wear and tear thereof.
The Owner shall also be entitled to retain and apply any portion of the
Contract Rate which may be otherwise due to the Specialist under the
Agreement for the payment of the costs of executing the said Works or part
thereof as the case may be. If the cost of completing the said Works or
any part thereof exceeds the amount payable to the Specialist, the
Specialist shall pay for the excess, failing with such amount shall be
recovered under Clause 26 herein.
The Specialist shall not be entitled to the monthly maintenance rate for the
period within which the default occurs, arising from the Specialist's neglect,
refusal or contravention.
33.
Non-compliance
with scheduled
number of
Maintenance
34.
Termination
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(13)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 14
34.
Cont'd
(a)
(b)
(c)
has suspended the progress of the Works for 14 days after receiving
from the Owner written notice to proceed; or
(d)
has failed to remove materials or goods from the Plant or to pull down
and replace work for 14 days after receiving from the Owner written
notice that the said materials or goods or work have been condemned
and rejected; or
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(14)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 15
34.
Cont'd
then the Owner may after giving 7 days' notice in writing to the Specialist
terminate the employment of the Specialist therefrom without thereby
avoiding the Agreement or releasing the Specialist from any of his liabilities
or obligations under the Agreement or affecting the rights and powers
conferred on the Owner by the Agreement and may himself maintain the
Plant or may employ any other contractors to maintain the Plant and the
Owner or such other contractors may use for such maintenance so much of
the tools temporary works and materials or goods. All additional costs
incurred by the Owner in fulfilling the requirements under the Agreement
arising from the terminations of the employment of the Specialist shall be
recoverable by the Owner under Clause 26 herein.
35.
It shall be the express intention of both parties to this Agreement that all
rights and obligations in respect of the Works are distinct and independent
of all rights and obligations in respect of the supply of spare parts for Plant
currently maintained by the Specialist for the Owner and notwithstanding
the termination of the said Agreement pursuant to the provisions of Clause
34 herein the rights and obligations in respect of the said supply of spare
parts for the Plant are absolute and are not discharged or deemed to be
discharged by the termination of the said Agreement and the Owner shall
remain entitled to be supplied with spare parts for the Plant maintained by
the Specialist prior to the termination of the said Agreement, in accordance
with the Spare Parts Price List in Appendix to Tender Form and applicable
to the purpose of the Works as and when required by the Owner for the
continuing maintenance of the Plant.
ARBITRATION
36.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(15)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Supply of Spare
Parts after
Termination
APPENDIX A44
Page 16
LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION
37.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(16)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
Law Applicable/
Jurisdiction
APPENDIX A44
Page 17
SCHEDULE A - WORKS
LOCATION
To be confirmed
DESCRIPTION
Comprehensive maintenance of refuse
handling Plant. Details of maintenance
work shall be provided by the Specialist.
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(17)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
MODEL/DETAILS
QUANTITY
Final quantity to
be confirmed
based on the
number of
residential blocks
with centralised
refuse chute.
APPENDIX A44
Page 18
FREQUENCY OF WORKS
(a)
Monthly
(b)
Check and ensure that all bolts and nuts for power pack, structure,
discharge gate, etc, are tightened securely
Monthly
(c)
Check and ensure that limit switches, relays, valves, heat detector, etc
are in proper working condition.
Monthly
(d)
Check and ensure that all seals are in good working condition.
Monthly
(e)
Check and ensure that noise and vibration levels are within acceptable
limit.
Monthly
(f)
Monthly
(g)
Yearly
(h)
Yearly
(i)
Monthly
(j)
Lubricate bearings.
Monthly
(k)
Rectify all faults detected and replace all defective or worn parts.
Monthly
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(18)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 19
Ref
Description
Clause No.
(i)
(ii)
Service Time
(iii)
(iv)
Service Reports
Included
(v)
Substitute Plant
8(2)
Included
(vi)
Security Deposit/Bond
Not applicable
(vii)
Payment
23
(viii)
31
Included.
Public Liability Policy of $1 Million per claim and
unlimited for the period of insurance.
(ix)
33
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(19)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
5(2)
Details
APPENDIX A44
Page 20
Clause
Title
Page
Definitions
1(2)
1(3)
SCOPE OF WORKS
2
Scope of Works
Work Programme
5(1)
Call-Out Time
5(2)
Service Time
Service Reports
8(1)
8(2)
Substitute Plant
Security Deposit
10
11
12
Assignment or Subletting
Behaviour of Workmen
14
15
Labour Laws
16
17
18
19
Specialist's Superintendence
20
Safety
21
Workmen's Compensation
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(20)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 21
Clause
Title
Page
PAYMENT
22
23
Payment
24
25
26
Recovery/Deduction of Money
10
27
Variations
10
28
Valuation of Variations
10
29
11
VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS
11
31
12
12
33
13
34
Termination
13
35
15
ARBITRATION
36
Arbitration
15
LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION
37
Law Applicable/Jurisdiction
BLDG13/A44.DOCX(21)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
16
APPENDIX A45
APPENDIX A45
RESERVED
BLDG13/A45.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A46
Town Council
( Name & Address of Town Council )
_____________________________
_____________________________
Reference Standards:
SS 457: 2007 Playground Equipment For Public Use
SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Playground Equipment
______________________________
Certified Playground Safety Inspector
_________________
Certification Number
_________________
Date
BLDG13/A46.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A47
HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET
Head, Technical Management (M&E) Unit
Building Quality Department
Housing & Development Board
HDB Hub, West Wing, 17th Storey
480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh
Singapore 310480
Dear Sir
CONFIRMATION OF EQUIPOTENTIAL NETTINGS FOR PLAYGROUND, HARDCOURT, FITNESS
CORNER, ETC. WITH REINFORCED CONCRETE BASE
Project Title:
Location Description:
Project Reference No.:
This is to confirm that equipotential nettings have been provided for the below
amenities/facilities in accordance with the SS 555.
(A)
Type of amenities/facilities
Remark
a)
_________ _______
______________
b)
_________ _______
______________
c)
_________ _______
______________
_________ _______
______________
Yours faithfully
LEW No or PE No.
Date:
Tel No.:
Tel. No.:
BLDG13/A47.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A48
Town Council
( Name & Address of Town Council )
_____________________________
_____________________________
Reference Standards:
SS 534: 2007 Outdoor Fitness Equipment For Public Use
SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Fitness Equipment
______________________________
Certified Playground Safety Inspector
_________________
Certification Number
_________________
Date
BLDG13/A48.DOCX(1)
Sal(151212)
(DPG)